initial commit of ebook 22956HEADmain

249 files changed, 16078 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/22956-8.txt b/22956-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..75d8f81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,5307 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Rollo in Paris, by Jacob Abbott
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Rollo in Paris
+
+Author: Jacob Abbott
+
+Release Date: October 11, 2007 [EBook #22956]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROLLO IN PARIS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by D. Alexander, Janet Blenkinship and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ROLLO IN PARIS,
+
+BY
+
+JACOB ABBOTT.
+
+
+BOSTON:
+
+W. J. REYNOLDS AND COMPANY,
+No. 24 CORNHILL,
+1854.
+
+Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1854, by
+JACOB ABBOTT,
+
+In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of
+Massachusetts.
+
+STEREOTYPED AT THE
+BOSTON STEREOTYPE FOUNDRY.
+G. C. RAND BOOK AND WOOD CUT PRINTER.
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: Restaurant (Café) on the Boulevards. Page 223.]
+
+[Illustration: ROLLO'S TOUR IN EUROPE.]
+
+
+ROLLO'S TOUR IN EUROPE.
+
+ORDER OF THE VOLUMES.
+
+ROLLO ON THE ATLANTIC.
+ROLLO IN PARIS.
+ROLLO IN SWITZERLAND.
+ROLLO IN LONDON.
+ROLLO ON THE RHINE.
+ROLLO IN SCOTLAND.
+
+
+PRINCIPAL PERSONS OF THE STORY.
+
+ROLLO; twelve years of age.
+
+MR. and MRS. HOLIDAY; Rollo's father and mother, travelling in Europe.
+
+THANNY; Rollo's younger brother.
+
+JANE; Rollo's cousin, adopted by Mr. and Mrs. Holiday.
+
+MR. GEORGE; a young gentleman, Rollo's uncle.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+  CHAPTER                                                           PAGE
+
+  I.--THE ARRANGEMENTS,                                               11
+
+  II.--CROSSING THE CHANNEL,                                          34
+
+  III.--JOURNEY TO PARIS,                                             56
+
+  IV.--THE GARDEN OF THE TUILERIES,                                   80
+
+  V.--THE ELYSIAN FIELDS,                                            100
+
+  VI.--A GREAT MISTAKE,                                              122
+
+  VII.--CARLOS,                                                      143
+
+  VIII.--THE GARDEN OF PLANTS,                                       162
+
+  IX.--AN EXCURSION,                                                 183
+
+  X.--ROLLO'S NARRATIVE,                                             202
+
+  XI.--CONCLUSION,                                                   222
+
+
+
+
+ENGRAVINGS.
+
+  FRONTISPIECE.                                                     PAGE
+
+  THE DINNER AT NEW HAVEN,                                            32
+
+  ENTERING DIEPPE,                                                    49
+
+  THE ARRIVAL,                                                        77
+
+  THE OBELISK,                                                       105
+
+  THE HIPPODROME,                                                    140
+
+  THE RESTAURANT,                                                    179
+
+  SINGING IN THE OPEN AIR,                                           197
+
+  PERFORMANCE ON THE BOULEVARDS,                                     219
+
+
+
+
+ROLLO IN PARIS.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+THE ARRANGEMENTS.
+
+
+Gentlemen and ladies at the hotels, in London, generally dine about six
+or seven o'clock, each party or family by themselves, in their own
+private parlor. One evening, about eight o'clock, just after the waiter
+had removed the cloth from the table where Rollo's father and mother,
+with Rollo himself and his cousin Jennie, had been dining, and left the
+table clear, Mr. Holiday rose, and walked slowly and feebly--for he was
+quite out of health, though much better than he had been--towards a
+secretary which stood at the side of the room.
+
+"Now," said he, "we will get out the map and the railway guide, and see
+about the ways of getting to France."
+
+Rollo and Jennie were at this time at the window, looking at the
+vehicles which were passing by along the Strand. The Strand is a street
+of London, and one of the most lively and crowded of them all. As soon
+as Rollo heard his father say that he was going to get the map and the
+railway guide, he said to Jane,--
+
+"Let's go and see."
+
+So they both went to the table, and there, kneeling up upon two
+cushioned chairs which they brought forward for the purpose, they leaned
+over upon the table where their father was spreading out the map, and
+thus established themselves very comfortably as spectators of the
+proceedings.
+
+"Children," said Mr. Holiday, "do you come here to listen, or to talk?"
+
+"To listen," said Rollo.
+
+"O, very well," said Mr. Holiday; "then I am glad that you have come."
+
+In obedience to this intimation, Rollo and Jane took care not to
+interrupt Mr. Holiday even to ask a question, but looked on and listened
+very patiently and attentively for nearly half an hour, while he pointed
+out to Mrs. Holiday the various routes, and ascertained from the guide
+books the times at which the trains set out, and the steamers sailed,
+for each of them, and also the cost of getting to Paris by the several
+lines. If the readers of this book were themselves actually in London,
+and were going to Paris, as Rollo and Jennie were, they would be
+interested, perhaps, in having all this information laid before them in
+full detail. As it is, however, all that will be necessary, probably, is
+to give such a general statement of the case as will enable them to
+understand the story.
+
+By looking at any map of Europe, it will be seen that England is
+separated from France by the English Channel, a passage which, though it
+looks quite narrow on the map, is really very wide, especially toward
+the west. The narrowest place is between Dover and Calais, where the
+distance across is only about twenty-two miles. This narrow passage is
+called the Straits of Dover. It would have been very convenient for
+travellers that have to pass between London and Paris if this strait had
+happened to lie in the line, or nearly in the line, between these two
+cities; but it does not. It lies considerably to the eastward of it; so
+that, to cross the channel at the narrowest part, requires that the
+traveller should take quite a circuit round. To go by the shortest
+distance, it is necessary to cross the channel at a place where Dieppe
+is the harbor, on the French side, and New Haven on the English. There
+are other places of crossing, some of which are attended with one
+advantage, and others with another. In some, the harbors are not good,
+and the passengers have to go off in small boats, at certain times of
+tide, to get to the steamers. In others, the steamers leave only when
+the tide serves, which may happen to come at a very inconvenient hour.
+In a word, it is always quite a study with tourists, when they are ready
+to leave London for Paris, to determine by which of the various lines it
+will be best for their particular party, under the particular
+circumstances in which they are placed, to go.
+
+After ascertaining all the facts very carefully, and all the advantages
+and disadvantages of each particular line, Mr. Holiday asked his wife
+what she thought they had better do.
+
+"The cheapest line is by the way of New Haven," said Mrs. Holiday.
+
+"That's of no consequence, I think, now," said Mr. Holiday. "The
+difference is not very great."
+
+"For our whole party, it will make four or five pounds," said Mrs.
+Holiday.
+
+"Well," said Mr. Holiday, "I am travelling to recover my health, and
+every thing must give way to that. If I can only get well, I can earn
+money fast enough, when I go home, to replace what we expend. The only
+question is, Which way will be the pleasantest and the most
+comfortable?"
+
+"Then," said Mrs. Holiday, "I think we had better go by the way of Dover
+and Calais, where we have the shortest passage by sea."
+
+"I think so too," said Mr. Holiday; "so that point is settled."
+
+"Father," said Rollo, "I wish you would let Jennie and me go to Paris by
+ourselves alone, some other way."
+
+The reader who has perused the narrative of Rollo's voyage across the
+Atlantic will remember that, through a very peculiar combination of
+circumstances, he was left to make that voyage under his own charge,
+without having any one to take care of him. He was so much pleased with
+the result of that experiment, and was so proud of his success in acting
+as Jennie's protector, that he was quite desirous of trying such an
+experiment again.
+
+"O, no!" said his father.
+
+"Why, father, I got along well enough in coming over," replied Rollo.
+
+"True," said his father; "and if any accident, or any imperious
+necessity, should lead to your setting out for Paris without any escort,
+I have no doubt that you would get through safely. But it is one thing
+for a boy to be put into such a situation by some unforeseen and
+unexpected contingency, and quite another thing for his father
+deliberately to form such a plan for him."
+
+Rollo looked a little disappointed, but he did not reply. In fact, he
+felt that his father was right.
+
+"But I'll tell you," added Mr. Holiday. "If your uncle George is willing
+to go by some different route from ours, you may go with him."
+
+"And Jennie?" inquired Rollo.
+
+"Why! Jennie?" repeated Mr. Holiday, hesitating. "Let me think. Yes,
+Jennie may go with you, if she pleases, if her mother is willing."
+
+Jennie always called Mrs. Holiday her mother, although she was really
+her aunt.
+
+"Are you willing, mother," asked Rollo, very eagerly.
+
+Mrs. Holiday was at a loss what to say. She was very desirous to please
+Rollo, and at the same time she wished very much to have Jennie go with
+her. However, she finally decided the question by saying that Jennie
+might go with whichever party she pleased.
+
+Rollo's uncle George had not been long in England. He had come out from
+America some time after Rollo himself did, so that Rollo had not
+travelled with him a great deal. Mr. George was quite young, though he
+was a great deal older than Rollo--too old to be much of a companion
+for his nephew. Rollo liked him very much, because he was always kind to
+him; but there was no very great sympathy between them, for Mr. George
+was never much interested in such things as would please a boy. Besides,
+he was always very peremptory and decisive, though always just, in his
+treatment of Rollo, whenever he had him under his charge. Rollo was,
+however, very glad when his father consented that he and his uncle
+George might go to Paris together.
+
+Mr. George was out that day, and he did not come home until Rollo had
+gone to bed. Rollo, however, saw him early the next morning, and told
+him what his father had said.
+
+"Well," said Mr. George, after hearing his story, "and what do you
+propose that we should do?"
+
+"I propose that you, and Jennie, and I should go by the way of New Haven
+and Dieppe," replied Rollo.
+
+"Why?" said Mr. George.
+
+"You see it is cheaper that way," said Rollo. "We can go that way for
+twenty-four shillings. It costs two and three pounds by the other ways."
+
+"That's a consideration," said Mr. George.
+
+"For the pound you would save," said Rollo, "you could buy a very
+handsome book in Paris."
+
+Rollo suggested these considerations because he had often heard his
+uncle argue in this way before. He had himself another and a secret
+reason why he wished to go by the New Haven route; but we are all very
+apt, when giving reasons to others, to present such as we think will
+influence them, and not those which really influence us.
+
+Mr. George looked into the guide book at the pages which Rollo pointed
+out, and found that it was really as Rollo had said.
+
+"Well," said he, "I'll go that way with you."
+
+So that was settled, too.
+
+A short time after this conversation, Rollo's father and mother, and
+also Jennie, came in. Mr. Holiday rang the bell for the waiter to bring
+up breakfast. Jennie, when she found that it was really decided that her
+father and mother were to go one way, and her uncle George and Rollo
+another, was quite at a loss to determine which party she herself should
+join. She thought very justly that there would probably be more incident
+and adventure to be met with in going with Rollo; but then, on the other
+hand, she was extremely unwilling to be separated from her mother. She
+stood by her mother's side, leaning toward her in an attitude of
+confiding and affectionate attachment, while the others were talking
+about the details of the plan.
+
+"I rather think there is one thing that you have forgotten," said Mr.
+Holiday, "and which, it strikes me, is a decided objection to your plan;
+and that is, that the steamer for to-morrow, from New Haven, leaves at
+midnight."
+
+"That's the very reason why I wanted to go that way," said Rollo.
+
+"Why, Rollo!" exclaimed his mother.
+
+"Yes, mother," said Rollo. "There would be so much fun in setting out at
+midnight. Think, Jennie!" added Rollo, addressing his cousin, "we should
+sit up till midnight! And then to see all the people going on board by
+the light of lanterns and torches. I wonder if there'll be a moon. Let's
+look in the almanac, and see if there'll be a moon."
+
+"But, George," said Mrs. Holiday, "you will not wish to set off at
+midnight. I think you had better change your plan, after all."
+
+But Mr. George did not seem to think that the midnight departure of the
+boat was any objection to the New Haven plan. He had noticed that that
+was the time set for leaving New Haven the next night, and he thought
+that, on the whole, the arrangement would suit his plans very well. He
+would have a good long evening to write up his journal, which he said
+was getting rather behindhand. The water, too, would be more likely to
+be smooth in the night, so that there would be less danger of
+seasickness. Besides, he thought that both Rollo and himself would
+become very sleepy by sitting up so late, and so would fall directly to
+sleep as soon as they got into their berths on board the steamer, and
+sleep quietly till they began to draw near to the coast of France. The
+distance across the channel, at that point, was such, that the steamer,
+in leaving at midnight, would not reach Dieppe till five or six o'clock
+the next morning.
+
+Accordingly, the arrangements were all made for Rollo's departure the
+next day, with his uncle George, for New Haven. Jennie finally decided
+to go with her father and mother. The idea of sailing at midnight
+determined her; for such an adventure, attractive as it was in Rollo's
+eyes, seemed quite formidable in hers. Rollo had a very pleasant ride to
+New Haven, amusing himself all the way with the beauties of English
+scenery and the continual novelties that every where met his eye. When
+they at last arrived at New Haven, they found that the harbor consisted
+merely of a straight, artificial canal, cut in from the sea, where
+probably some small stream had originally issued. The sides of this
+harbor were lined with piers, and on one of the piers was a great hotel,
+forming a part, as it were, of the railway station. There were a few
+houses and other buildings near, but there was no town to be seen. The
+railway was on one side of the hotel, and the water was on the other.
+When the train stopped, one of the railway servants opened the door for
+Mr. George and Rollo to get out, and Mr. George went directly into the
+hotel to make arrangements for rooms and for dinner, while Rollo, eager
+to see the ships and the water, went through the house to the pier on
+the other side. He found that there was a pretty broad space on the
+pier, between the hotel and the water, with a shed upon it for
+merchandise, and extra tracks for freight trains. The water was quite
+low in the harbor, and the few vessels that were lying at the pier walls
+were mostly grounded in the mud. There was one steamboat lying opposite
+the hotel, but it was down so low that, at first, Rollo could only see
+the top of the smoke-pipe. Rollo went to the brink of the pier and
+looked down. The steamer appeared very small. It was painted black.
+There were very few people on board. Rollo had a great mind to go on
+board himself, as there was a plank leading down from the pier to the
+top of the paddle box. But it looked rather steep, and so Rollo
+concluded to postpone going on board till Mr. George should come out
+with him after dinner.
+
+Rollo looked about upon the pier a few minutes, and then went into the
+hotel. He passed through a spacious hall, and then through a passage
+way, from which he could look into a large room, the sides of which were
+formed of glass, so that the people who were in the room could see out
+all around them. The front of the room looked out upon the pier, the
+back side upon the passage way. A third side was toward the vestibule,
+and the fourth toward the coffee room. There were shelves around this
+room, within, and tables, and desks, and people going to and fro there.
+In fact, it seemed to be the office of the hotel.
+
+Rollo advanced to one of the openings that was toward the passage way,
+and asked which was the way to the coffee room. The girl pointed to the
+door which led to it, and Rollo went in.
+
+He found a large and beautiful room, with several tables set for dinner
+in different parts of it, and sideboards covered with silver, and
+glasses against the walls. On one side there were several large and
+beautiful windows, which looked out upon the pier, and opposite to each
+of these windows was a small dinner table, large enough, however, for
+two persons. Mr. George had taken one of these tables, and when Rollo
+came in he was sitting near it, reading a newspaper.
+
+"Come, Rollo," said he, "I have ordered dinner, and we shall just have
+time to arrange our accounts while they are getting it ready."
+
+So saying, Mr. George took out his pocket book, and also a small pocket
+inkstand, and a pen, and put them all upon the table.
+
+"Your father's plan," he continued, "is this: He is to pay all expenses
+of transportation, at the same rate that he pays for himself; so that,
+whatever you save by travelling in cheap ways, is your own."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, smiling, "I mean to walk sometimes, and save it all."
+
+"He is also to pay the expense of your lodgings."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo.
+
+"Generally, of course, you will have lodgings with him, but sometimes
+you will be away from him; as, for instance, to-night. In such cases, I
+pay for your lodgings, on your father's account."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I understand that."
+
+"He also pays the expense of all casualties."
+
+"So he said," replied Rollo; "but I don't understand what he means by
+that, very well."
+
+"Why, you may meet with accidents that will cost money to repair, or get
+into difficulties which will require money to get out of. For instance,
+you may lose your ticket, and so have to pay twice over; or you may get
+lost yourself, in Paris, and so have to hire a man with a carriage to
+bring you home. For all such things, the money is not to come from your
+purse. Your father will pay."
+
+"Suppose it is altogether my fault," said Rollo. "Then I think I ought
+to pay."
+
+"But your father said that he was sure you would not be to blame for
+such accidents; though I think he is mistaken there. I have no doubt,
+myself, that nearly all the accidents that will happen to you will come
+from boyish heedlessness and blundering on your part."
+
+"We'll see," said Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George, "we'll see."
+
+"Then, as to your board," continued Mr. George, "your father said that
+you might do as you pleased about that. He would pay it, or you might,
+and be allowed five francs a day for it."
+
+"Five francs is about a dollar, is it not?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Yes," replied Mr. George, "very nearly. But you had better not reckon
+by dollars, now, at all, but by francs altogether. That's a franc."
+
+So saying, Mr. George took a silver coin out of his pocket, and showed
+it to Rollo. It was nearly as large as a quarter of a dollar, or an
+English shilling, but not quite. A quarter of a dollar is worth
+twenty-five cents, an English shilling twenty-four, and a franc about
+twenty cents.
+
+"You can have five of those a day to pay your own board with."
+
+"And how much would it cost me at a boarding house, in Paris, to pay my
+board?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Why, we don't board at boarding houses in Paris," said Mr. George. "We
+have rooms at a hotel, and then we get breakfast and dinner wherever we
+please, at coffee rooms and dining rooms all over the city, wherever we
+happen to be, or wherever we take a fancy to go. You can get a very
+excellent breakfast for a franc and a half. A beefsteak, or an omelet,
+and bread and butter and coffee."
+
+"That's enough for breakfast," said Rollo. "And then, dinner?"
+
+"You can get a first-rate dinner for two francs, or even less. That
+makes three francs and a half."
+
+"And tea?"
+
+"They never take tea in Paris," said Mr. George. "The French don't take
+tea."
+
+"Why not?" asked Rollo.
+
+"I don't know," replied Mr. George, "unless it is because the English
+_do_. Whatever is done in London, you generally find that just the
+contrary is done in Paris."
+
+"Don't we have any thing, then, after dinner?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George. "The French generally go and take a seat at a
+little round table on the sidewalk, and have a little glass of brandy
+and a cigar."
+
+Here Rollo threw his head back, and laughed loud and long. He was
+greatly amused at the idea of his making an allowance, in calculating
+how far his five francs would go, for a glass of brandy and a cigar. Mr.
+George himself, sedate as he was, could not but smile.
+
+"The fact is," said he, at length, "there are only two meals to
+calculate for, and they will not cost, upon an average, more than three
+francs and a half, if we are prudent and economical, and go to plain and
+not expensive places. But then there is the immense amount that you will
+be always wishing to spend for cakes, and candy, and oranges, and nuts,
+and bonbons of all sorts and kinds. There is an endless variety of such
+things in Paris. You will find half a dozen cake shops in every street,
+with fifty different kinds of gingerbread and cake in them, all of the
+richest and most delicious description."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I shall want some of those things."
+
+"No doubt," said Mr. George, "you will make yourself sick eating them,
+I'll venture to say, before you have been in Paris twenty-four hours."
+
+"No," said Rollo, shaking his head resolutely; "and I think I had better
+take the five francs and pay my own board."
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George, "and that provides for every thing except
+incidentals. Your father said that I might pay you five francs a day for
+incidentals and pocket money. That is to include all your personal
+expenses of every kind, except what we have already provided for. There
+will be excursions, and tickets to concerts and shows, and carriage
+hire, and toys that you will want to buy, and all such things. The
+amount of it is, that your father pays all your expenses for
+transportation, for lodging, and for casualties. You pay every thing
+else, and are allowed ten francs a day for it. I am to be treasurer,
+and to have the whole charge of your funds, except so far as I find it
+prudent and safe to intrust them to you, and you are to buy nothing at
+all against my consent."
+
+"Nothing at all?" asked Rollo.
+
+"No," said Mr. George, "nothing at all. You are not to expend a single
+centime in any way that I object to."
+
+"What is a centime?" asked Rollo.
+
+"It is of the value of less than one fourth of a cent," replied Mr.
+George.
+
+"But I should think I might buy such little things as that would come
+to, of myself," said Rollo. "Suppose I should wish to buy a small piece
+of gingerbread for a cent."
+
+"Say for a sou,"[A] replied Mr. George. "There are no cents in Paris."
+
+[A] Pronounced _soo_.
+
+"Well," rejoined Rollo, "suppose I should wish to spend a _sou_ for
+gingerbread, and eat it, and you should object to it."
+
+"Very well," replied Mr. George; "and suppose you were to wish to spend
+a sou for poison, and drink it."
+
+"But I should not be likely to buy poison," said Rollo, laughing.
+
+"Nor should I be likely to object to your buying gingerbread," rejoined
+Mr. George. "A boy, however, may, it is clear, do mischief with a little
+money as well as with a great deal; and, therefore, the power in his
+guardian should be absolute and entire. At any rate, so it is in this
+case. If I see fit to forbid your expending a single sou for any thing
+whatever, I can, and you will have no remedy till we see your father
+again; and then you can ask him to put you under some other person's
+care. Until he does this, however, the control is absolute and entire in
+my hands. I would not take charge of a boy on any other terms."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "I agree to it."
+
+"And now," said Mr. George, "I am ready to begin your account."
+
+Mr. George then took a small account book from his pocket book as he
+said this, and, opening it at the beginning, he wrote across the top of
+the two pages which came together the words,
+
+_Rollo Holiday, in Account with his Father._
+
+On the corner of the left-hand page he wrote Dr., which stands for
+debtor; and on that of the right-hand page, Cr., which stands for
+creditor.
+
+"There," said he, "now I shall enter, from time to time, on the creditor
+side, all the money that becomes due to you; and on the debtor side,
+all that I pay to you. Then, by striking a balance, we can always tell
+how much of your money there is in my hands.
+
+"Let me see," continued Mr. George. "Your father and mother concluded
+finally to go by the way of Folkstone. The fare that way is two pound
+eleven. This way, it is one pound four. I am to pay you the difference.
+The difference is one pound seven; and one pound seven, in francs,
+is--let me see how much."
+
+Mr. George made a calculation with a pencil and paper, and found that it
+amounted to thirty-three francs seventy-five centimes.
+
+"I don't understand reckoning by francs and centimes very well," said
+Rollo.
+
+"No," replied Mr. George, "that is your misfortune; and you'll have to
+bear it as well as you can till you get out of it."
+
+So Mr. George entered the francs--thirty-three seventy-five--in Rollo's
+book.
+
+"You have got thirty-three francs to begin with," said he; "that's a
+pretty good stock.
+
+"Now, there is your allowance of ten francs per day. I will enter that
+weekly. There are three days in this week, including to-day and Sunday.
+That makes thirty francs."
+
+So Mr. George entered the thirty francs.
+
+"There," said he, "the whole amount due you up to Monday morning is
+sixty-three francs seventy-five centimes. That is sixty-three francs and
+three fourths. A hundred centimes make a franc.
+
+"And now," continued Mr. George, "I will make you a payment, so as to
+put you in funds, and that must be put down on the other side. How much
+would you like?"
+
+"I don't know," said Rollo; "a few francs, I suppose."
+
+"Have you got a purse?" asked Mr. George. "Let me see it."
+
+So Rollo took out a small leather bag which he had bought in London.
+
+"That's it," said Mr. George. "I'll give you ten francs. When you want
+more, you can have it--that is, provided it is due to you."
+
+Here Mr. George rang a bell, and a waiter came in immediately. Mr.
+George handed the waiter a sovereign, and asked him to get change for it
+in French money. The waiter took the money, and presently came in with
+five five-franc pieces. These he presented very respectfully to Mr.
+George. Mr. George took two of them and gave them to Rollo. The others
+he put into his own pocket. The five-franc pieces were very bright and
+new, and they were of about the size of silver dollars. Rollo was very
+much pleased with his portion, and put them in his purse, quite proud of
+having so much spending money.
+
+"And you say that I must not spend any of it without first asking you,"
+said Rollo.
+
+"O, no," replied Mr. George, "I have not said any such thing. That would
+be a great deal of trouble, both for you and for me."
+
+"But I thought you said that I was not to spend any thing without your
+consent."
+
+[Illustration: THE DINNER AT NEW HAVEN.]
+
+"No," said Mr. George, "I said _against_ my consent. I may forbid your
+spending whenever I think proper; but I shall not do so, so long as I
+find you always ask me in doubtful cases. Spend for yourself freely,
+whenever you are sure it is right. When you are not sure, ask me. If I
+find you abuse the privilege, I shall have to restrict you. Otherwise,
+not."
+
+Rollo was well satisfied with this understanding of the case; and just
+then the waiter came in, bearing a handsome silver tureen containing
+soup, which he put down upon the table, between Mr. George and Rollo. So
+the writing materials and the purses were put away, and the two
+travellers were soon occupied very busily in eating their dinner.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+CROSSING THE CHANNEL.
+
+
+Mr. Holiday had two reasons for making the arrangements described in the
+last chapter, in respect to Rollo's expenses. In the first place, it
+would gratify Rollo himself, who would feel more independent, and more
+like a man, he thought, in being allowed thus, in some measure, to have
+the charge and control of his own expenditures. But his second and
+principal reason was, that he might accustom his son, in early life, to
+bear pecuniary responsibilities, and to exercise judgment and discretion
+in the use of money. Many young men never have any training of this sort
+till they become of age. Before that time, whenever they wish for money,
+they go to their father and ask for it. They take all they can get; and
+when that is gone, they go and ask for more. They have no direct
+personal motive for exercising prudence and economy, and they have no
+experience of the evils that result from thriftlessness and
+prodigality. It is much better for all children that they should have
+pecuniary responsibilities, such as are suited to their years, thrown
+upon them in their youth, when the mistakes they make in acquiring their
+experience are of little moment. The same mistakes made after they
+become of age might be their ruin.
+
+In carrying the system into effect in Rollo's case, there seemed to be
+something very abrupt, at least, if not positively harsh, in Mr.
+George's mode of dealing with him. And yet Rollo did not dislike it. He
+felt that his uncle was treating him more like a man, on this account,
+or rather more like a large boy, and not like a child. In fact, a part
+of the rough handling which Rollo got from his uncle was due to this
+very circumstance--Mr. George having observed that he did not mind being
+knocked about a little.
+
+After dinner, Rollo proposed to his uncle that they should go out and
+take a walk.
+
+"I will go with you a few minutes," said Mr. George, "and then I must
+return to my room, and write up my journal."
+
+"Say half an hour," rejoined Rollo.
+
+"Well," replied Mr. George, "we will say half an hour."
+
+So they sallied forth upon the pier behind the hotel. Mr. George took a
+general survey of the harbor, and of the vessels that were lying in it,
+and also of the peaks and headlands which were seen at the mouth of it,
+toward the sea.
+
+"I should like to be on that hill," said Mr. George, "to look off over
+the channel, and see if I could discern the coast of France from it."
+
+"Let's go there," said Rollo.
+
+"That would take more than half an hour," replied Mr. George.
+
+"Well, at any rate, let's go on board the steamer," said Rollo.
+
+So, taking Mr. George by the hand, he led him along to the brink of the
+pier. Mr. George looked over, and saw the steamer lying at rest in its
+muddy bed below.
+
+"Is it possible?" said Mr. George, in a tone of great astonishment.
+
+"Can it be possible?" repeated Mr. George.
+
+"What?" inquired Rollo. "What is it that surprises you so much?"
+
+"Why, to find such a steamer as this for the travel on one of the great
+thoroughfares between England and France. Let's go down on board."
+
+So Mr. George led the way, and Rollo followed down the plank. The plank
+landed them on the top of the paddle box. From that place, a few steps
+led to the deck. They walked along the deck a short distance toward the
+stern, and there they found a door, and a small winding staircase
+leading down into the cabin. They descended these stairs, one before the
+other, for the space was not wide enough to allow of their going
+together; and when they reached the foot of them they found themselves
+in a small cabin, with one tier of berths around the sides. The cabin
+was not high enough for two. There were berths for about twenty or
+thirty passengers. The cabin was very neatly finished; and there was a
+row of cushioned seats around it, in front of the berths. In one corner,
+by the side of the door where Mr. George and Rollo had come in, was a
+small desk, with writing materials upon it. This Rollo supposed must be
+the "captain's office."
+
+While Mr. George sat surveying the scene, and mentally comparing this
+insignificant boat to the magnificent steamers on the Hudson River, in
+America, with their splendid and capacious cabins on three different
+decks, their promenade saloons, sometimes one hundred and fifty feet
+long, with ranges of elegant state rooms on either hand, and sofas, and
+couches, and _tęte-ŕ-tętes_ without number, in the middle, his
+perplexity increased.
+
+"I do not understand it at all," said he to Rollo. "I thought that there
+would at least be as much travelling between London and Paris, the two
+greatest cities in the world, as between New York and Albany. And yet
+there are half a dozen steamers every day on the North River, carrying
+from five hundred to one thousand passengers; while here, on the most
+direct and cheapest route between London and Paris, is one single
+steamer, that could not possibly carry one hundred passengers, and she
+only goes once in two days."
+
+Just then a young man, who seemed to be the clerk of the boat, came down
+the cabin stairs, and, seeing Mr. George and Rollo there, he asked them
+if they had taken their berths. They said that they had not; but they
+immediately proceeded to choose their berths, or rather their _places_,
+for there were no divisions separating the sleeping-places from each
+other except what was formed by the cushions. There was a long cushion
+for each sleeper, covered with crimson velvet or plush; and a round
+cushion, shaped like a bolster, and covered in the same way, for his
+head. On these cushions the passengers were expected to lie down without
+undressing, placing themselves in a row, head to head, and feet to feet.
+Mr. George chose two of these sleeping-places, one for himself, and the
+other for Rollo, and the clerk marked them with a ticket.
+
+Our two travellers then went up on deck again, and from the deck they
+ascended the plank to the pier. It was now nearly sunset, and it was a
+very pleasant evening. They sauntered slowly along the pier, until they
+came to a place where some steps led down to the water. There were
+several small boats at the foot of the steps, and in one of them was a
+man doing something to the rudder. Rollo saw that on the other side of
+the water was another long staircase leading down from the bank there,
+so as to form a landing-place for small boats at all times of tide. He
+also looked up and down the harbor, but he could see no bridge, and so
+he supposed that this must be a sort of ferry for the people who wished
+to cross from one side to the other.
+
+As soon as the man who was in the boat saw Mr. George and Rollo standing
+upon the pier, he rose up in his boat, and touching his hat at the same
+time, or rather making a sort of jerk with his hand, which was meant to
+represent a touch of the hat, he asked him if he would like to be rowed
+across to the other side.
+
+"Why, I don't know," said Mr. George. "What's the ferriage?"
+
+"That's just as the gentleman pleases," said the man, with another jerk
+at his hat.
+
+"And how much do they generally please?" said Mr. George. "What's the
+common custom?"
+
+"O, gentlemen gives us what they likes," said the man. "We always leaves
+it to them entirely."
+
+Mr. George was silent. After a moment's pause, the boatman said again,--
+
+"Would you like to go, sir? Very nice boat."
+
+"Not on those terms," said Mr. George. "If you will tell me what the
+usual ferriage is, I can then tell you whether we wish to go or not."
+
+"Well, sir," replied the man, "gentlemen usually gives us about twopence
+apiece."
+
+"Twopence apiece. Very well, we will go."
+
+Mr. George did not wait to ask Rollo whether he would like to go before
+he decided the question. He would have considered this a mere waste of
+time, for Rollo was always ready to go, no matter where.
+
+So they got into the boat, and were rowed across the water. They
+ascended the stairs on the other side, and walked a little way in a
+smooth road which led along the bank. Rollo wished to go farther; but
+Mr. George said that his time had expired, and that he must go back.
+"But you may stay," said he to Rollo, "as long as you please, provided
+that you come back before dark."
+
+Rollo was much pleased with this permission, as he wished to go to the
+top of the hill, at the outlet of the harbor, and look at the prospect.
+He promised to return before dark.
+
+"Have you any change," said Mr. George, "to pay your ferriage back?"
+
+"No," said Rollo, "I have nothing but my five-franc pieces."
+
+"Then I will lend you twopence," said Mr. George. "You can pay me the
+first change you get in France."
+
+"But I cannot get any pennies in France," said Rollo.
+
+"True," said Mr. George; "you will get sous there. You must pay me four
+sous. A penny is equal to two sous.
+
+"I will pay your bill at the hotel, too," continued Mr. George, "as I
+suppose they will make out yours and mine together, and you can pay me
+your share to-morrow, when we land. Here is your ticket, however. You
+must take charge of that."
+
+"But suppose I lose it?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Then you will have to pay over again," said Mr. George; "that is all.
+You will lose about twenty francs; unless, indeed," he continued, "your
+father should call it a casualty."
+
+So Mr. George went back to the boat, and Rollo continued his walk,
+thinking on the way of the question which his uncle had suggested,
+whether his father would consider the loss of his ticket a casualty or
+not. He determined, however, very resolutely, that he would not lose it;
+and so he put it away safely in his wallet, and then went on. The road
+was very smooth and pleasant to walk in, being bordered by green fields
+on the one hand, and the water of the harbor on the other. Rollo came at
+length to the hill. There were successive terraces, with houses built
+upon them, on the sides of the hill, and paths leading to the summit.
+Rollo had a fine view of the sea, and of the vessels and steamers which
+were passing slowly in the offing, on their way up and down the channel;
+but though he looked long and eagerly for the coast of France, it was
+not to be seen.
+
+Rollo rambled about the hill for a considerable time; for at that season
+of the year the twilight continued very long, and it did not become dark
+till quite late. When, at length, the shadows of the evening began to
+shut in upon the landscape, he returned to the ferry, and the ferryman
+rowed him back again to the hotel.
+
+It was now nearly nine o'clock, and, of course, three hours remained
+before the time of embarkation would arrive. Rollo was not sorry for
+this, as he thought that there would be enough to amuse and occupy him
+all this time on and around the pier. His first duty, however, was to go
+and report himself to Mr. George as having returned from his walk. This
+he did. He found his uncle very busy in his room, writing his journal.
+
+"Now, Rollo," said Mr. George, "it is three hours before we are to
+leave. What are you going to do all that time?"
+
+"O, I shall find plenty to amuse myself with," said Rollo.
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George. "You may play about wherever you are sure
+it is safe. Don't go near the edge of the pier, unless there is somebody
+at hand to pull you out of the water with a boathook, if you fall in.
+Amuse yourself as long as you can; and when you are tired of taking care
+of yourself, come to me, and I will tell you what to do."
+
+Rollo, having received these instructions, left his uncle to his work,
+and went away. He descended the stairs, and went out upon the pier
+again, and after amusing himself, by examining every thing there, he
+concluded to go on board the steamer. A train of cars had arrived from
+London while he and his uncle had been on the other side of the water,
+and there were now several new passengers in the cabin, who were
+choosing and marking their berths, or talking together about the voyage.
+
+Rollo thought that, in order to make sure that his ticket was all right,
+he would climb up into his berth and see; and then, when he was there,
+it seemed to him a very funny place to sleep in; so he laid down his
+head upon the round cushion to try it. While he was in this position,
+his attention was attracted by the sound of children's voices on the
+stairs, talking French. Presently these children came into the cabin.
+Their mother was with them. There were two of them, and they were not
+more than five or six years old. Rollo was exceedingly astonished to
+hear such little children talk French so well. Rollo listened to see if
+he could understand what they said. He had studied French himself for a
+year or two, and could say a great many things. In fact, he had been
+accustomed to consider himself quite a good French scholar. But he now
+found that all his acquisitions dwindled into utter insignificance, when
+compared with the power over the language possessed by those little
+girls.
+
+The French party did not remain very long in the cabin where Rollo was,
+but passed at once through a door which led to a small ladies' cabin
+near. There were other persons, however, continually coming and going,
+and Rollo was interested in watching their movements, and in listening
+to the fragments of conversation which he heard. He found his position
+very comfortable, too, and the sounds around him produced so lulling an
+effect, that, before long, he insensibly closed his eyes. In a word, in
+less than fifteen minutes after he climbed up into his berth to see what
+sort of a place it was, he had put it fully to the test of experiment,
+by going fast asleep in it.
+
+In about half an hour after this, Mr. George, coming to the end of a
+paragraph in his journal, laid down his pen, drew a long breath, looked
+out the window, and then rang the bell. In a few minutes the chambermaid
+came.
+
+"Mary," said he, "I wish to ask the porter to go out and look about on
+the pier, and in the packet, and see if he can see any thing of that boy
+that came with me."
+
+"Very well, sir," said Mary, with a quick courtesy; and she immediately
+disappeared.
+
+In about five minutes she came back, and said that the young master was
+in his berth in the packet, sound asleep.
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George, in his turn. "Much obliged to you." He
+then went on with his writing.
+
+The first thing that Rollo himself was conscious of, after falling
+asleep in his berth, was a feeling of some one pulling him gently by the
+shoulder. He opened his eyes, and saw before him a face that he did not
+exactly know, and yet it was not entirely strange. The man had his hand
+upon Rollo's shoulder, and was endeavoring to wake him.
+
+"Your ticket, if you please, sir."
+
+Rollo stared wildly a minute, first at the man, and then about the
+cabin. It was night. Lamps were burning, and the cabin was full of
+people. Some were in their berths, some in groups on the seats, and one
+or two were just preparing to lie down. The engine was in motion, and
+the ship was evidently going fast through the water. In fact, the
+steamer was rocking and rolling as she went on, indicating that she was
+already far out at sea.
+
+"Your ticket, if you please, sir," repeated the clerk.
+
+Rollo glanced around to his uncle's berth, and there he saw his uncle
+lying quietly in his place, his head being on a cushion close to the one
+on which Rollo's head had been lying.
+
+"Uncle George," said Rollo, "he wants my ticket."
+
+"Well," said Mr. George, without moving, "give him your ticket."
+
+Rollo then recollected that he had his ticket in his wallet. So, after
+fumbling for a time in his pocket, he brought out his wallet, and
+produced the ticket, and handed it to the clerk.
+
+"Thank you, sir," said the clerk, taking the ticket. At the same time he
+put two other tickets in Rollo's wallet, in the place of the one which
+he had taken out. As he did this, he pointed to one of the small ones,
+saying,--
+
+"That's for the landing."
+
+Rollo shut up his wallet, and put it in his pocket.
+
+"A shilling, if you please," said the clerk.
+
+Rollo had no shilling, and was still not much more than half awake. So
+he turned to his uncle again.
+
+"Uncle George," said he, "he wants a shilling."
+
+"Well, pay him a shilling, then," said Mr. George.
+
+Rollo now felt for his purse, and taking out one of his five-franc
+pieces, he gave it to the clerk, who, in return, gave him back a
+quantity of change. Rollo attempted to count the change, but he soon
+perceived that his ideas of francs and shillings were all in confusion.
+So he turned the change all together into his purse, put the purse back
+into his pocket, lay his head down upon his cushion again, shut his
+eyes, and in one minute was once more fast asleep.
+
+Some hours afterward he woke again, of his own accord. He opened his
+eyes and looked about him, and perceiving that it was morning, he
+climbed down from his berth, and then went up upon the deck. The coast
+of France was all before him, in full view, and the steamer was rapidly
+drawing near to it. He went to the bow of the vessel to get a nearer
+view. He saw directly before him a place where there were piers, and
+batteries, and other constructions indicating a town, while on either
+hand there extended long ranges of cliffs, with smooth, green slopes of
+land above, and broad, sandy shores below. In half an hour more the
+steamer arrived at the entrance of the harbor, which was formed of two
+long piers, built at a little distance from each other, and projecting
+quite into the sea. The steamer glided rapidly along between these high
+walls of stone, until, at length, it entered a broad basin, which was
+bordered by a continuation of these walls, and hemmed in on every side
+beyond the walls of the pier with ranges of the most quaint, and queer,
+and picturesque-looking buildings that Rollo ever saw.
+
+[Illustration: ENTERING DIEPPE.]
+
+These buildings were not close to the pier, but were back far enough to
+leave room for a street between them and the water. Such a street is
+called a _quay_.[B] Quays are built in almost all the cities of Europe
+where there are rivers or basins of water for shipping; and they are
+very pleasant streets to walk in, having usually large and elegant
+buildings on one side, and vessels and steamers on the other.
+
+[B] Pronounced _kee_.
+
+By the time that the steamer had entered the port, almost all the
+passengers had come up from below, and Mr. George among the rest. Mr.
+George came, expecting to find that, as they were now about to land, the
+baggage would be brought out, and that the several passengers would be
+called upon to select their own. But there was no movement of this kind.
+The baggage had all been put down into the hold the night before, and
+now the hatches were still closed, and there seemed to be no signs of
+any preparation to open them.
+
+In the mean time, the steamer gradually drew near to the pier. The
+engine was stopped. Ropes were thrown out. People in queer dresses, some
+of them soldiers, who were standing on the pier, caught the ropes and
+fastened them. The steamer was thus brought to her place and secured
+there.
+
+There was now, however, no rush to get on shore,--such as Rollo had
+always been accustomed to witness on board an American steamer on her
+arrival,--but every thing was quiet and still. By and by a plank was
+laid. Then the passengers were called upon to get out their tickets.
+Then they began to walk over the plank, each one giving up his landing
+ticket as he passed.
+
+When Mr. George and Rollo reached the pier, they found, on looking
+around them, that they were not yet at liberty. On the opposite side of
+the quay was a building, with a sign over it, in French, meaning
+custom-house office for packet boats; and there were two long ropes
+stretched, one from the stem and the other from the stern of the
+steamer, to the opposite sides of the door of this building, so as to
+enclose a space on the quay, in front of the building, in such a manner
+as to hem the passengers in, and make it necessary for them to pass
+through the custom house. The ropes were guarded by soldiers, dressed in
+what seemed to Rollo the queerest possible uniforms. They all talked
+French--even those who had talked English when they came on board the
+packet boat on the other side.
+
+"I can't understand a word they say," said Rollo.
+
+"Nor I," said Mr. George; "but we can watch and see what they will do."
+
+It did not require long watching, for no sooner had Mr. George said
+these words than he observed that the passengers were all going toward
+the door of the custom-house, and that, as they went, they were taking
+their passports out. Nobody can enter France without a passport. A
+passport is a paper given to the traveller by his own government. This
+paper tells the traveller's name, describes his person, and requests
+that the French government will allow him to pass through their country.
+Frenchmen themselves must have a passport too, though this is of a
+little different kind. All must have a passport of some kind or other,
+and all this machinery of ropes and soldiers was to make it sure that
+every one of the passengers had the proper document.
+
+The passengers accordingly took out their passports as they went into
+the custom-house door, and there passed, in single file, before an
+officer seated at a desk, who took them in turn, opened them, copied the
+names in his book, and then gave them back to the owners. Mr. George and
+Rollo followed on in the line. When their passports had been given back
+to them, they went on with the rest until they came out from the
+custom-house at another door, which brought them upon the quay outside
+of the ropes.
+
+"What's to be done next?" said Rollo.
+
+"I am sure I don't know," said Mr. George, "I suppose we shall see."
+
+There was an omnibus standing near, marked, "For the Iron Road,"--that
+being the French name for railroad,--but nobody seemed to be getting
+into it. In fact, the passengers, as fast as they came out from the
+custom-house, seemed all very quiet, as if waiting for something. A
+great many of them seemed to be French people, and they fell into little
+groups, and began to talk very volubly together, some finding friends
+who had come down to the quay to meet them, and others making friends,
+apparently, for the occasion, of the soldiers and idlers that were
+standing around.
+
+"Could not you ask some of them," said Rollo, "what we are to do next?"
+
+"I don't believe they would understand my French," said Mr. George. "I
+am sure I don't understand theirs." In a moment, however, he turned to a
+young man who was standing near, who seemed to be a waiter or servant
+man belonging to the place.
+
+"Do you speak English?"
+
+"Yes, sir," said the man, in a very foreign accent, but yet in a very
+pleasant tone.
+
+"What are we waiting for?" asked Mr. George.
+
+"You will wait, sir, for the baggages, and then for the visit of the
+baggages."
+
+"How long?" said Mr. George.
+
+"Twenty minutes," said the man. He also gave Mr. George to understand
+that he and Rollo might go and have some breakfast, if they chose. But
+Mr. George thought it was not safe for them to go away from the spot. So
+they waited where they were.
+
+In a few minutes the hatches were opened on board the vessel, and the
+sailors began to hoist out the trunks. As fast as they were brought up
+to the decks men took them on shore, and carried them into the
+custom-house by the same door where the passengers had entered. When all
+the baggage was carried in, the ropes were taken down, and the
+passengers went to the custom-house door again, to attend to the
+examination of the baggage. A soldier stood at the door to prevent too
+many going in at a time. Mr. George and Rollo followed the rest, and at
+length it came their turn to have their trunks examined. This was done
+very quick--the officers appearing to think, from the appearance of the
+travellers, that they would not be likely to have any smuggled goods in
+their possession. The officer, accordingly, just looked into the trunks,
+and then shut down the lids, and marked them passed. A porter then took
+them out at the side door. There, on Mr. George's telling them in French
+that they were going to Paris by the railroad, the trunks were put upon
+a cart, while Mr. George and Rollo got into the omnibus, and then they
+were very soon driving along the quay, in the direction, as they
+supposed, of the Paris railway station.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+JOURNEY TO PARIS.
+
+
+The omnibus which Mr. George and Rollo had entered contained several
+other passengers, some of whom had carpet bags and valises with them, as
+if they, too, were going to Paris. Besides the driver, there was a
+conductor, whose place was upon the step of the omnibus, behind. The
+conductor opened and shut the doors for the passengers when they wished
+to get in or out, and took the fare.
+
+"How much is the fare?" said Rollo to Mr. George.
+
+"I don't know," said Mr. George, shaking his head. He spoke, however, in
+a very unconcerned tone, as if it were of very little consequence
+whether he knew or not.
+
+"What are you going to do about it, then?" said Rollo.
+
+"I shall say, 'How much?' to him, when we get out; and then, if I do not
+understand his answer, I shall give him a large piece of money, and let
+him give me back as much change as he likes."
+
+Rollo resolved that he would do so too.
+
+Next to Mr. George and Rollo in the omnibus there sat a gentleman and
+lady, who seemed to be, as they really were, a new-married pair. They
+were making their bridal tour. The lady was dressed plainly, but well,
+in travelling costume, and she had a handsome morocco carriage bag
+hanging upon her arm. The gentleman was quite loaded with shawls, and
+boxes, and umbrellas, and small bags, which he had upon his lap or at
+his feet. Besides this, the lady had a trunk, which, together with that
+of her husband, had been left behind, to come on the cart. She was very
+anxious about this trunk, for it contained all her fine dresses. Her
+husband was interested in the novel sights and scenes that presented
+themselves to view in passing along the street; but she thought only of
+the trunk.
+
+"What strange costumes, Estelle!" said he. "Look! See that woman! What a
+funny cap!"
+
+"Yes," said Estelle; "but, Charley, don't you think it would have been
+better for us to have brought our trunks with us on the omnibus?"
+
+"I don't know," said her husband. "It is too late to think of that now.
+I've no doubt that they are safe enough where they are. Look! There's a
+girl with wooden shoes on. Those are the wooden shoes we have read about
+so often in books. Look!"
+
+Estelle glanced her eyes, for an instant, toward the wooden shoes, and
+then began to look back along the street again, watching anxiously for
+the trunks.
+
+At length the omnibus approached the station. It entered through a
+magnificent portal, under an arch. There was a soldier walking back and
+forth, with his musket in his hand, bayonet fixed, to guard the
+entrance. None but actual travellers were allowed to enter. The omnibus,
+having entered the court, stopped before a splendid portico, where there
+was a door leading into the building. The passengers paid their fares,
+and got out. On entering the building, they found themselves in a
+spacious apartment, with a great variety of partitions, offices,
+enclosures, and railings, presenting themselves on every hand, the
+meaning of all which it was very difficult to understand. There were
+also signs marked first class, and second class, and third class, and
+placards of notices to travellers, and time tables, and various similar
+things. On the back side of the room were doors and windows, looking out
+to a platform, where the train of cars was seen, apparently all ready to
+set off. But the partitions and railings which were in the way
+prevented the company from going out there.
+
+There were a number of travellers in this room, several parties having
+arrived there before the omnibus came. Many of these persons were
+waiting quietly, talking in little groups, or resting themselves by
+sitting upon their carpet bags. Others were looking about eagerly and
+anxiously, wondering what they were to do, or trying to find somebody
+who could tell them about the baggage. Estelle was the most restless and
+uneasy of all. She went continually to the door to look down the road,
+to see if the cart was coming.
+
+"Charles," said she, "what a shame it is that they don't come with the
+trunks! The train is all ready, and will go off before they come."
+
+"O, no," said her husband; "I think not. Don't be anxious about them.
+I've no doubt they will be here in time. Come with me, and let us look
+about the station, and see how it differs from ours."
+
+But Estelle would not allow her thoughts to be diverted from her trunk.
+She remained on the steps, looking anxiously down the road. Some of the
+other passengers who were unused to travelling, seeing her look so
+anxious, and not understanding what she said, supposed that some
+accident had happened, or that some unusual delay had occurred, and they
+began to be anxious too. Just then a bell began to ring out upon the
+platform.
+
+"There!" exclaimed Estelle. "The train is going! What shall we do? Why
+_can't_ you ask somebody, Charles?"
+
+"Why, I can't speak French," said Charles; "and they would not
+understand me if I ask in English."
+
+"Yes they would," said Estelle; "I'm sure they would. There are so many
+English travellers going on these roads now, that it must be that they
+have men here that speak English. There's a man," said she, pointing to
+a person in livery who was standing within a sort of enclosure.
+
+Mr. Charles, thus urged, walked across the hall to the railing, though
+very reluctantly, and asked the man if he could tell him why the trunks
+did not come.
+
+"Sir?" said the man, in French, and looking as if he did not understand.
+
+"Do you speak English?" asked Mr. Charles.
+
+"There," said the man, pointing across the room. Mr. Charles looked, and
+saw another man, who, by the livery or uniform which he wore, seemed to
+be a porter belonging to the station, standing by a window. He
+accordingly went across to ask the question of him.
+
+"Do you speak English, sir?" said he.
+
+"Yes, sare," replied the man, speaking with great formality, and in a
+very foreign accent, making, at the same time, a very polite bow.
+
+"What is the reason that our baggage does not come?" asked Mr. Charles.
+
+"_Yes_, sare," replied the porter, speaking in the same manner.
+
+"Why does not it come?" asked Mr. Charles again. "We put it upon a cart
+at the custom-house, and why does not it come?"
+
+"Yes, sare," replied the porter, with another very polite bow.
+
+Mr. Charles, perceiving that the porter's knowledge of English
+consisted, apparently, in being able to say, "Yes, sir," and mortified
+at the absurd figure which he made in attempting to make useless
+inquiries in such a way, bowed in his turn, and went back to Estelle in
+a state of greater alienation of heart from her than he had ever
+experienced before. And as this book may, perhaps, be read sometimes by
+girls as well as boys, I will here, for their benefit, add the remark,
+that there is no possible way by which a lady can more effectually
+destroy any kind feeling which a gentleman may entertain for her than
+by forcing him to exhibit himself thus in an awkward and ridiculous
+light, by her unreasonable exactions on journeys, or rides, or walks, or
+excursions of any kind that they may be taking together.
+
+Rollo and his uncle George had witnessed this scene, and had both been
+much interested in watching the progress of it. Rollo did not know but
+that there was some real cause for solicitude about the baggage,
+especially as several of the lady passengers who were standing with
+Estelle at the door seemed to be anxiously looking down the road.
+
+"Do you feel any anxiety about our trunks coming?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Not the least," said Mr. George, quietly.
+
+"Why not?" asked Rollo. "Are you sure that they will come?"
+
+"No," said Mr. George; "but there are a good many excellent reasons why
+I should not feel any anxiety about them. In the first place, I have
+some little confidence in the railway arrangements made in this country.
+The French are famous all the world over for their skill in
+systematizing and regulating all operations of this kind, so that they
+shall work in the most sure and perfect manner. It does not seem at all
+probable to me, therefore, that they can manage so clumsily here, on one
+of the great lines between England and France, as to get all the trunks
+of a whole steamer load of passengers upon a cart, and then loiter with
+it on the way to the station, and let the train go off without it."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "that's a good reason; but you said there were
+several."
+
+"Another is, that, if they are capable of managing so clumsily as to
+have such a thing happen, we cannot help it, and have nothing to do but
+to bear it quietly. We put our trunks in the proper place to have them
+brought here. We could not have done otherwise, with propriety, for that
+was the regular mode provided for conveying the baggage; and if there is
+a failure to get it here, we are not to fret about it, but to take it as
+we would a storm, or a break down, or any other casualty--that is, take
+it quietly."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo; "that's a good reason. Are there any more?"
+
+"There is one more," said Mr. George; "and that is, I am not anxious
+about the trunks coming in season, for I don't care a fig whether they
+come or not."
+
+"O, uncle George!" exclaimed Rollo.
+
+"I do not," said Mr. George; "for if they do not come, the only
+consequence will be, that we shall have to wait two or three hours for
+the next train, which will give us just time to ramble about a little in
+this queer-looking town of Dieppe, and get some breakfast, and perhaps
+have some curious adventures in trying to talk French. In fact, I rather
+hope the baggage won't come."
+
+Mr. George was destined to be disappointed in this rising desire, for,
+while he and Rollo were talking, Estelle came running in to her husband
+with a countenance full of joy, saying that the cart had come, and
+urging him to come and get their trunks off as quick as possible. Her
+eagerness was increased by hearing the bell again, which now began to
+toll, leading her to think that the train was going off immediately. The
+porters, however, whose business it was to carry the trunks in, did not
+seem to be at all disturbed by the sound, but began to take off the
+trunks, one by one, and convey them up into the station. Here they were
+placed upon a sort of counter, from whence they were taken off on the
+other side, and weighed in a curiously contrived pair of scales placed
+there for the purpose. If any trunk weighed over a certain number of
+pounds,--the amount which, according to the regulations of the road,
+each passenger was allowed to carry,--then the surplus had to be paid
+for. There was a little office close to the weighing machine; and as
+fast as the trunks were weighed, the result was reported to the clerk,
+who made out a bill for the surplus, whatever it was, and the passenger
+paid it through an opening. If there was no surplus weight, then they
+gave the passenger a similar bill, which was to be his check for his
+trunk at the end of the journey. Every thing was, however, so admirably
+arranged, that all this was done very rapidly.
+
+Mr. Charles, when he found that the trunks were all to be weighed,
+proposed to go with Estelle to the cars, so as to get a good seat for
+her; but Estelle chose to remain and make sure that her trunk was
+attended to. It happened that Mr. George's trunk and Rollo's were
+weighed among the first; and as soon as they got their checks, Mr.
+George said,--
+
+"Now for our seats in the cars."
+
+"But which way are we to go?" said Rollo.
+
+"I don't know," said Mr. George. "Go and show that man your ticket, and
+ask him where we are to go."
+
+"In French?" said Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George.
+
+So Rollo went to the man who was standing by a sort of gateway which led
+through a partition railing, as if he were there to guard the passage;
+and holding up his little pasteboard ticket, he said, in French,--
+
+"Where to go?"
+
+The man looked at the ticket, and, seeing that first class was printed
+upon it, he pointed in a certain direction, and said something in
+French, speaking, however, in so rapid and voluble a manner, that Rollo
+could not understand a single word. He, however, understood the sign.
+
+"This way, uncle George," said Rollo. "He says we must go this way."
+
+Following the indication which the man had given, Mr. George and Rollo
+passed out upon the platform, where they found the train ready for them.
+There were various attendants upon the platform, dressed in a quaint
+sort of uniform, the livery, as it were, of the railroad company. One of
+them looked at Rollo's ticket, and then opened the door of a first-class
+car. The cars were made like those in England, in separate compartments,
+each compartment being like a large coach, with one front seat, and one
+back, facing each other. There were four places; that is, room for four
+passengers on each seat. Of course, only those at the ends were near
+the window. Rollo and Mr. George took the two seats nearest the window
+on the side where they got in, as one of the seats at the opposite side
+was already occupied by a gentleman. The gentleman seemed to be an
+Englishman, for he was reading the London Times.
+
+Rollo and Mr. George had been seated only two or three minutes before
+Estelle and her husband came along, Estelle leading the way. The
+attendant opened the door of the car, and Estelle, followed by her
+husband, got in. They passed between Mr. George and Rollo, and stood
+there for a moment, looking about for a good seat. A freight train was
+slowly trundling by at this time on an adjoining track, so that what
+they said was not very audible; but still, Mr. George and Rollo could
+hear it.
+
+"I want a seat by the window," said Estelle, "where I can look out and
+see the country. Ask that gentleman if he would not be willing to take a
+middle seat, and let us sit together by the window."
+
+"We had better go to some other car," said her husband, in an undertone.
+"_He_ wishes to see the country, probably, himself, and has come early,
+perhaps, so as to get a good seat."
+
+"O, no," said Estelle; "this is a very nice car; and he would just as
+soon change as not, I have no doubt. Ask him, Charley; do."
+
+So Estelle moved to one side for her husband to pass. Mr. Charles, thus
+urged, approached the gentleman, and said, in a very bland and
+respectful manner,--
+
+"Should you have any objection, sir, to move your seat, so as to let
+this lady sit by the window?"
+
+The gentleman raised his eyes from his paper, and looked at Mr. Charles
+an instant, and then answered quietly,--
+
+"I prefer this seat, sir."
+
+He then went on with his reading as before.
+
+Estelle pouted her lip, and said, though in a tone too low, perhaps, for
+the gentleman to hear, "What a rude man!"
+
+"We will give you _these_ seats, sir," said Mr. George, "if you would
+like them."
+
+"Yes, they'll do just as well," said Estelle, speaking to her husband.
+
+Mr. George rose, and saying, "Come, Rollo," he left the car.
+
+Mr. George had some trouble in looking for other seats; but at length he
+succeeded in finding two that were as good as those which they had left.
+
+"I think she might at least have thanked you for giving up your seat to
+accommodate her," said Rollo.
+
+"I did not do it to accommodate her," said Mr. George; "I did it to get
+out of the sight and hearing of her. I would not ride from here to Paris
+in the same car with such a fussmaker for all the prospects in France. I
+had rather be shut up in a freight car."
+
+"How much trouble she makes her husband!" said Rollo.
+
+"It is not the trouble," said Mr. George, "it is the mortification and
+annoyance. She is a perpetual torment. If that's the way that young
+wives treat their husbands on the bridal tour, I'm thankful that I am
+not a bridegroom."
+
+The train soon set out, and Mr. George and Rollo, forgetting Estelle,
+soon began to enjoy the ride. They were both extremely interested in the
+views which they obtained from their windows as they passed along, and
+with the antique and quaint appearance of the country--the ancient stone
+cottages, with thatched roofs; the peasants, in their picturesque
+dresses; the immense tracts of cultivated country, divided in green and
+brown patches, like the beds of a garden, but with no fences or
+enclosures of any kind to be seen; the great forests, with trees planted
+closely in rows, like the corn in an American cornfield; and the
+roadways which they occasionally passed--immense avenues, bordered on
+either hand with double rows of majestic trees, and extending across the
+country, as straight as the street of a city, till lost in the horizon.
+These and a thousand other things, which were all the time presenting
+themselves to view, kept the travellers continually full of wonder and
+delight.
+
+After going on thus for several hours, the train stopped in a very
+spacious depot, where there was a large refreshment room; and as one of
+the attendants called out that there would be ten minutes of rest, both
+Mr. George and Rollo got out, and went into the refreshment room. They
+found a great multitude of cakes and meats spread out upon an immense
+counter, and dishes of every kind, all totally unknown to them. They, of
+course, could not call for any thing; but, after taking a survey, they
+helped themselves to what they thought looked as if it might be good,
+and then paid in the same way, by letting the girls that attended the
+tables help themselves to money which the travellers held out to them in
+their hands. They then took their seats again in the car, and soon
+afterward the train moved on.
+
+The place where they had stopped was Rouen, which, as well as Dieppe and
+Paris, the reader will find, on examining any map of France. In the
+course of the ride from Rouen to Paris, Mr. George and Rollo fell into
+quite a conversation, in which Rollo received a great deal of very good
+advice from Mr. George in respect to the care of himself when he should
+get to Paris.
+
+"I suppose that I should be sure to get lost," said Rollo, "if I should
+attempt to go out in such a great city alone."
+
+"No," said Mr. George, "not at all. A person can walk about a great way,
+sometimes, in a strange city, without getting lost. All he has to do is
+to take care, at first, to go only in such directions as that he can
+keep the way home in his mind."
+
+"I don't know what you mean, exactly, by that," said Rollo.
+
+"Why, suppose you were in a great city, and you come out at the door of
+your hotel, and there you find a long, straight street. You walk along
+that street half a mile. Then don't you think you could find your way
+home?"
+
+"Yes," said Rollo.
+
+"Certainly," said Mr. George, "because you have it in your mind that the
+way home is directly back by that same street, till you come to the
+hotel. Now, suppose that, after going along in that street for half a
+mile, you should come to a great church, upon a corner, and should turn
+there to the right, and go for some distance in another street leading
+off from the first one; don't you think you could _then_ find your way
+home?"
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I should go back to the church, and then turn to the
+left, and so go home."
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George; "by proceeding cautiously in that way,
+carrying your way home in your mind with you all the time, you can
+ramble a great deal about a strange city without getting lost, and go
+farther and farther every day.
+
+"Then, besides, if you do get lost, it is of no consequence. You can
+always ask the way back; or, if worst comes to worst, you can take a
+cab, and tell the man to drive you home."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I suppose I could always do that."
+
+"Only you must be sure," said Mr. George, "not to forget the name of
+your hotel. Once I was walking about in Paris, and I saw a colored girl
+on the sidewalk, before me, who seemed to be inquiring something of the
+people that she met, without appearing to get any satisfactory answer. I
+thought she was an American girl; and so I went to her, and asked her in
+French what she wanted to know--for I observed that she was speaking
+French. She said she wished to know what was the name of the hotel where
+most of the Americans lodged. I could not speak French very well myself,
+and so I could not ask her for any explanations; but I supposed that she
+belonged to some American party, and had lost her way in going somewhere
+of an errand, and had forgotten the name of the hotel. So I told her the
+names of two or three hotels where Americans were accustomed to lodge,
+and she went away."
+
+"Did she find her own hotel?" asked Rollo.
+
+"I don't know," said Mr. George. "I never knew what became of her."
+
+"How did she learn French, do you suppose?" asked Rollo.
+
+"I presume she came from New Orleans," replied Mr. George, "where nearly
+all the people speak French."
+
+Thus our two travellers beguiled their journey, by talking sometimes
+about the novel and curious objects which presented themselves to view,
+in the landscape, as the train rolled rapidly along on its way, and
+sometimes about what they expected to see and to do on their arrival in
+Paris. At length, the indications that they were approaching the great
+capital began to multiply on every hand. The villages were more
+frequent. Villas, parks, and palaces came into view; and here and there
+an ancient castle reposed on the slope of a distant hill, or frowned
+from its summit. At length, Rollo, turning his head to the window
+opposite to the one where he had been looking out, exclaimed suddenly,--
+
+"Look there! Uncle George, what's that?"
+
+Mr. George said that that was Napoleon's famous Triumphal Arch, that
+forms the grand entrance to Paris, on the way to the royal palaces. It
+was a large, square building, splendidly adorned with sculptures and
+architectural ornaments, and towering high into the air out of the midst
+of a perfect sea of houses, streets, avenues, trees, gardens, and
+palaces, which covered the whole country around. It stood upon a
+commanding elevation, which made its magnitude and its height seem all
+the more impressive. Through the centre of it was a magnificent archway,
+wide enough for four carriages to pass abreast.
+
+"It is the Triumphal Arch," said Mr. George, "by which all grand
+processions enter Paris on great public days of rejoicing. We will go
+out and see it some day. It is called the Triumphal Arch of Neuilly,
+because it is on the road that leads to Neuilly."[C]
+
+[C] It is also called the Arc de l'Etoile. Etoile means _star_, and the
+French give that name to a place where several roads diverge from one
+point. Roads so diverging form a sort of star. The reader will find this
+arch on any map of Paris, with the roads diverging from it.
+
+By this time the Triumphal Arch had passed out of view, and presently
+the train of cars began to be shut in by buildings, and the usual
+indications appeared of the approach to a great station. Queer-looking
+signals, of mysterious meaning,--some red, some blue, some round, some
+square,--glided by, and men in strange and fantastic costumes stood on
+the right hand and on the left, with little flags in their hands, and
+one arm extended, as if to show the locomotive the way.
+
+At length the convoy (as the French call a railway train) came to a
+stand, and an attendant, in uniform, opened the door of the car. Mr.
+George and Rollo got out and looked about, quite bewildered with the
+magnificence of the scene around them. The station was very extensive,
+and was very splendid in its construction, and there were immense
+numbers of people going and coming in it in all directions. Still, every
+thing was so well regulated that there was no disorder or confusion.
+There was a line of carriages drawn up in a certain place near the
+platform; but the coachmen remained quietly by them, awaiting calls from
+the passengers, instead of vociferously and clamorously offering their
+services, as is customary at the stations in America. Nor was there any
+pushing or crowding for trunks and baggage. In fact, the trunks were all
+to be examined before they could go into the city; for there are
+separate duties for the city of Paris, in addition to those for France.
+The baggage was, therefore, all taken from the baggage car, and arranged
+in an immense apartment, on counters, which extended all around the
+sides, and up and down the middle; and then, when all was ready, the
+passengers were admitted, and each one claimed his own. Mr. George and
+Rollo easily found their trunks, and, on presenting their tickets, an
+officer required them to open the trunks, that he might see if there was
+any thing contraband inside. As soon, however, as he perceived that Mr.
+George and Rollo were foreigners, and that their trunks had come from
+beyond sea, he shut down the lids again, saying, "It is well." A porter
+then took the trunks and carried them out to a carriage.
+
+"Hotel of the Rhine, Place Vendome," said Mr. George, in French, to the
+coachman, by way of directing him where to go.
+
+[Illustration: THE ARRIVAL.]
+
+"Yes--yes--yes--yes," said the coachman.
+
+It is so natural and easy for the French to talk, that they generally
+use all the words they can to express their meaning, besides an infinity
+of gestures. Thus, when they wish to say yes, they often repeat the yes
+four or five times, in a very rapid manner, thus:--
+
+Yes--yes--yes--yes.
+
+Mr. George got into the coach, and Rollo followed him. As they drove
+along the streets, Rollo tried to look out the window and see; but the
+window was so small, and the streets were so narrow, and the coachman,
+moreover, drove so fast, that he had very little opportunity to make
+observations. At length he caught a momentary glimpse of a monstrous
+column standing in the middle of an open square; and immediately
+afterward the carriage drove in under an archway, and came to a stand,
+in a small, open court, surrounded with lofty buildings. This was the
+hotel. There was a small room, which served as a porter's lodge, in this
+court, near where the coach stopped. A girl came to the door of this
+lodge to receive the guests. She bowed to Mr. George and Rollo with
+great politeness, and seemed glad to see them. Mr. George spoke to her
+in French, to say what rooms he wished to engage. What he said,
+literally translated, was this:--
+
+"We want two chambers for ourselves, at the third, and an apartment of
+three pieces, at the second, for a gentleman, lady, and their young
+girl, whom we attend to-morrow."
+
+The girl, who was very neatly and prettily dressed, and was very
+agreeable in her manners, immediately said, "Very well," and rang a
+bell. A servant man came at the summons, and, taking the trunks, showed
+Mr. George and Rollo up to their rooms.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE GARDEN OF THE TUILERIES.
+
+
+The first Sunday that Rollo spent in Paris he met with quite a singular
+adventure.
+
+His father and mother had arrived the evening before, and had
+established themselves quite comfortably in the "apartment of three
+pieces," which Mr. George had engaged for them. An apartment, according
+to the French use of the term, is not a single room, but a group of
+rooms, suitable to be occupied by one family. The number of _pieces_ is
+the number of rooms.
+
+Mr. Holiday's three rooms were a small but beautifully furnished parlor,
+where they had breakfast, and two bed rooms. One bed room was for
+himself and Mrs. Holiday, and the other was for Jennie. There were a
+great many splendid mirrors in these rooms, and other elegant furniture.
+The floors were not carpeted, but were formed of dark and polished wood,
+curiously inlaid, with rugs here and there at the doors and before the
+sofas and chairs. There was a small, square rug before every chair, and
+a large one before the sofa. There were a great many other curious
+things to be observed in the arrangements of the room. The fireplace,
+for example, was closed by plates of sheet iron, which could be shoved
+up and down like the sashes of a window; while the windows themselves
+opened like doors, each having a great brass fastening, like a latch, in
+the middle, and hinges at the sides.
+
+Rollo had gone with his father and mother to church in the morning, and
+at about one o'clock they returned. Rollo and Jennie remained at home,
+after one, for an hour or two, waiting for their uncle George to come.
+He had gone away somewhere, and had not yet returned. While thus
+waiting, the children sat at the window of their parlor, which they
+opened by swinging the two sides of the sash entirely back, so that they
+could see out to great advantage. The window opened down quite low; but
+there was a strong iron bar passing across from side to side, to keep
+them from falling out. The children sat at this window, amusing
+themselves with what they could see in the square. The name of the
+square was the Place Vendome. There was a very large and lofty column in
+the centre of it. This column is very greatly celebrated for its
+magnitude and its beauty. It is twelve feet in diameter, and nearly a
+hundred and forty feet high. But what is most remarkable is, that the
+whole exterior of it, enormous as the mass is, is formed of brass. The
+brass was obtained by melting up the cannons which Napoleon took from
+his enemies. At the end of one of his campaigns he found that he had
+twelve hundred cannons which he had taken from the Russians and
+Austrians, with whom he had been at war; and after reflecting for some
+time on the question, what he should do with them, he concluded to send
+them to Paris, and there to have them made into this enormous column, to
+ornament the centre of the Place Vendome.
+
+The column, though made of brass, is not bright upon the outside, but
+dark, like bronze, and the surface is ornamented with figures in what
+are called bas relief, representing the battles and victories in which
+the cannon out of which the column was composed were taken from the
+enemy.
+
+Rollo and Jennie, in looking at this column from the window of their
+hotel, observed that around the foot of it there was a square space
+enclosed by an iron railing, forming a sort of yard. There was a gate in
+the front side of this railing. This gate was open; but there were two
+soldiers standing by it, with guns in their hands, as if to prevent any
+body from going in.
+
+The column itself, as is usual with such columns, did not stand directly
+upon the ground, but upon a square pedestal, which was built of massive
+blocks of granite, resting on a deep and strong foundation; and as the
+column itself was twelve feet in diameter, the pedestal, being
+necessarily somewhat larger, was quite a considerable structure. In the
+front of it, opposite the gate in the iron railing, was a door. The door
+was open, but nothing was to be seen but darkness within.
+
+"I wonder what they do in there?" said Rollo. "The gate is open, and the
+door is open; but I suppose the soldiers would not let any body go in to
+see. Do you suppose, Jennie, that it can be possible that there is any
+way to get up to the top of the column by going in at that door?"
+
+"Yes," replied Jennie; and so saying, she pointed eagerly to the top of
+the column, and added, "For there are some boys up there now."
+
+Rollo looked up to the top of the column. There was a statue of Napoleon
+upon the summit, which appeared to be of about the ordinary size of a
+man, though it is really about eight times as large as life, being twice
+as large in every dimension. It looks small, on account of its being so
+high in the air. Beneath this statue and around the top of the column
+the children saw that there was a small gallery, with a railing on the
+outside of it. Several persons were standing on this gallery, leaning on
+the railing. At first Rollo thought that they were sculptured figures
+placed there, like the statue of Napoleon on the top, for ornament; but
+presently he saw some of them move about, which convinced him that they
+were real men. Two of them were soldiers, as was evident from the red
+uniform which they wore. But they all looked exceedingly small.
+
+"There must be a staircase inside," said Rollo, "or else some ladders.
+If not, how could those men get up?"
+
+"Yes," said Jennie.
+
+"I should like to go up there very much," said Rollo, "if I could only
+get by the soldiers."
+
+"I should not dare to go up to such a high place," said Jennie, shaking
+her head solemnly.
+
+At the foot of the column and outside of the railing which formed the
+enclosure around the pedestal was a very broad and smooth place, as
+smooth as a floor, and raised like a sidewalk above the street. It was
+very broad, and people walked over it in passing through the square.
+There was only one way of passing through the square, and that was from
+north to south. From east to west there was no street, but the ranges of
+houses and palaces continued on those sides unbroken. These edifices
+presented a very fine architectural frontage toward the square, and gave
+to the whole space which they enclosed a very rich and grand appearance.
+Over the doors of two or three of the houses there were small tricolored
+flags flying; and wherever these flags were, there were soldiers on the
+sidewalk below guarding the doors. But neither Rollo nor Jennie was able
+to imagine what this could mean.
+
+About three o'clock, when Rollo and Jennie had began to be tired of
+looking at the column, their mother came into the room. She said that
+Mr. Holiday was fatigued and was going to lie down, and that neither he
+nor herself would go out again. Rollo then asked if he and Jennie might
+go out and take a walk. His mother seemed to hesitate about it, but
+presently said that she would go and ask Mr. Holiday if he thought it
+would be safe. She accordingly went into the bed room, and very soon
+returned, saying that Mr. Holiday thought it would be safe for them to
+go if he gave them some directions.
+
+"He says," added Mrs. Holiday, "that you may get ready, and then go into
+his room, and he will give you the directions. Only you must not talk
+much with him, for it hurts him to talk. Hear what he has to say, and
+then come out immediately."
+
+So the children made themselves ready, and then went into their father's
+room. They found him sitting in a great arm chair by a window where the
+sun was shining. He looked pale and tired. When the children came in,
+however, he turned to them with a smile, and said,--
+
+"Children, I am glad you are going out to take a walk. You can go very
+safely, if you follow my directions.
+
+"This is the Place Vendome. There are only two ways of going out of it.
+One leads to the north, and the other to the south.
+
+"If you take the road which goes to the north, that is, that way," said
+Mr. Holiday, pointing, "you will go out by the street which is called
+the Street of Peace.[D] The Street of Peace is straight, and pretty
+broad; and if you follow it to the end of it, you will come to the
+Boulevards."
+
+[D] Mr. Holiday called this street, of course, by its French name; but
+we give its name here in English, for the convenience of the reader, who
+may, perhaps, not be able to pronounce French.
+
+"What are the Boulevards?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Hush!" said Jennie, gently touching Rollo at the same time with her
+hand.
+
+"Boulevards," said Mr. Holiday, "means bulwarks. A great many years ago
+there was a line of bulwarks or fortifications all around Paris; but at
+length, when the city grew too large for them, they levelled them down
+and made a very broad and handsome street where they had been, and then
+afterward made a new line of fortifications farther out. This broad and
+handsome street, or rather, series of streets, is called the Boulevards.
+It extends almost entirely around the city. Of course, when you get into
+the Boulevards, you are in no danger of losing yourselves; for you can
+go on as far as you please, either way, and then come back to the Street
+of Peace again, and then come home."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I understand."
+
+Here Jennie gently touched Rollo again, to remind him that he was not to
+talk.
+
+"You will know the Boulevards at once when you come to them," continued
+Mr. Holiday, "they are so much broader and more beautiful than any of
+the other streets of Paris. Even the sidewalks are as wide as many
+ordinary streets; and there are rows of young trees along the edges of
+the sidewalks. Now, if you choose, you can go out from the Place Vendome
+on the northern side, by the Street of Peace, and so walk on till you
+come to the Boulevards. Then you can walk along the Boulevards as far as
+you please.
+
+"Or," continued Mr. Holiday, "you can take the opposite course. You can
+go out of the Place Vendome on the southern side. That will bring you
+directly in the garden of the Tuileries."
+
+"I should like to go into a garden," said Jennie, "and see the flowers."
+
+"You will see," continued Mr. Holiday, "as soon as you begin to go out
+of the Place Vendome, at a little distance before you, perhaps as far as
+two or three blocks in New York, a wall of green trees."
+
+"A wall of green trees!" exclaimed Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said his father. "It is a thick row of trees growing in the
+garden, and having the side toward the street trimmed smooth and
+straight like a wall. The entrance through this range of trees, opposite
+the gateway where you go into the garden, looks like an archway in a
+green wall. You will see it before you as soon as you turn the corner of
+this hotel into the street that leads that way. You can walk straight on
+till you come to the place. There you will find the entrance to the
+garden. There is a very high iron palisade along the side of the garden
+toward the street, with the rows of trees which I have spoken of inside
+of it. There is a gateway through this palisade where you can go in.
+There are two soldiers there to guard the gateway."
+
+"Then how can we get in?" asked Jennie.
+
+"O, go right in," replied Mr. Holiday. "Pay no attention to the
+soldiers. They will not say any thing to you. They are only sentinels.
+
+"After you pass through the gateway, you keep on in the same direction,
+without turning to the right hand or to the left, just as if you were
+going across the garden. You go on in this way till you get to the
+middle alley, which is a very wide alley, that runs up and down the
+middle of the garden. This alley is called the Grand Alley, and it is a
+very grand alley indeed. It is as broad as a very wide street, and it is
+nearly two miles long.[A] It begins at the palace of the Tuileries, in
+the middle of the city, and extends through the whole length of the
+gardens of the Tuileries; and then, passing out through great gates at
+the foot of the garden, it extends through the Elysian Fields, away out
+to the great Triumphal Arch of the Star, which you saw from the cars
+when you were coming into the city.
+
+"Now, when you get into the Grand Alley, which you will know by its
+being the broadest, and smoothest, and most splendid grand walk that you
+ever saw, you must stop for a minute, and look both ways. I'll tell you
+what you will see. First, if you turn to the left, that is, toward the
+east, you will see at the end of the alley, in that direction, a long
+range of splendid buildings, extending across from side to side. In the
+opposite direction, at the top of a long, gentle slope, a mile and a
+half away, you will see the grand Triumphal Arch. That is at the barrier
+of the city. The view is not entirely open, however, out to the arch.
+About midway, in the centre of the Grand Alley, is a tall obelisk,
+standing on a high pedestal, and farther along there are one or two
+fountains. Still you can see the Triumphal Arch very plainly, it is so
+large, and it stands so high.
+
+"Now, the Grand Alley is nearly two miles long, and, wherever you may be
+in it, you can always see the palace at one end, the arch at the other,
+and the Egyptian obelisk in the middle. So that, as long as you walk
+back and forth in this alley, keeping these things in sight, you cannot
+lose your way.
+
+"Only I ought to say," continued Mr. Holiday, "that the garden does not
+extend all the way to the barrier. The garden extends, perhaps, half a
+mile. Near the bottom of it is a great basin or pond of water, with a
+stone margin to it all around. You will have to go round this basin, for
+the centre of it is exactly in the middle of the Grand Alley. Then you
+come very soon to the end of the garden, and you will go out through
+great iron gates, but still you will keep on in the same direction. Here
+you will come to a very large, open square, with the obelisk in the
+centre of it, and fountains and statues in it all around. Still you will
+keep straight on across this square, only you will have to turn aside to
+go round the obelisk. After you pass through the square, the Grand Alley
+still continues on, though now it becomes a Grand Avenue, leading
+through pleasure grounds, with ranges of trees and of buildings on
+either side. It becomes very wide here, being as wide as two or three
+ordinary streets, and will be filled with carriages and horsemen. But
+there will be good broad sidewalks for you on either hand, under the
+shade of the trees; and you will know where you are all the time, for
+you can always see the palace at one end of the view, and the great
+Triumphal Arch at the other, with the obelisk in the middle between
+them.
+
+"The amount of it is," added Mr. Holiday, speaking in a tone as if he
+were about finishing his instructions, "you can go out of the Place
+Vendome to the north, and keep straight on till you come to the
+Boulevards, and walk there either way as far as you like. Or you can go
+south, and keep straight on till you come to the middle of the Grand
+Alley of the garden of the Tuileries, and then walk in the Grand Alley
+and the Grand Avenue which forms the continuation of it as long as you
+like. Which way will you go?"
+
+"I would rather go to the garden," said Rollo, looking toward Jennie.
+
+"Yes," said Jennie, "and so would I."
+
+Thus it was settled that they were to take the street which led toward
+the south from the Place Vendome; and so, bidding their father good by,
+they went away. Before leaving the house, however, Rollo went to a
+secretary which stood in the parlor, and took down a map, in order to
+show Jennie the places which his father had mentioned, and to make it
+sure that they understood the directions which they had received. Rollo
+found the Place Vendome very readily upon the map, and the street
+leading to the gardens. He also found the Grand Alley running through
+the garden; and following this alley between the rows of trees, he
+showed Jennie a small circle which he thought must be the basin of
+water, and the place where the obelisk stood; and finally he pointed out
+the place where the Grand Alley widened out into the Grand Avenue and
+led on toward the barrier.
+
+Jennie did not understand the map very well; but she seemed satisfied
+with Rollo's assurances that he himself could find all the places.
+
+"It is all right, you may depend," said Rollo. "I can find the way, you
+may be sure."
+
+So he put up the map, bade his mother good by, and then he and Jennie
+sallied forth.
+
+The hotel was situated on the corner of the Place Vendome and the street
+which led toward the garden; and as soon as the children had turned this
+corner, after coming out from under the archway of the hotel, they saw
+at some distance before them, at the end of the street, the iron
+palisade, and the green wall of trees above it, which formed the
+boundary of the garden.
+
+"There it is!" exclaimed Rollo. "There is the garden and the gateway!
+and it is not very far!"
+
+The children walked along upon the sidewalk hand in hand, looking
+sometimes at the elegant carriages which rolled by them from time to
+time in the street, and sometimes at the groups of ladies and children
+that passed them on the sidewalk. At the first corner that they came to,
+Rollo's attention was attracted by the sight of a man who had a box on
+the edge of the sidewalk, with a little projection on the top of it
+shaped like a man's foot. Rollo wondered what it was for. Just before he
+reached the place, however, he saw a gentleman, who then happened to
+come along, stop before the box and put his foot on the projection.
+Immediately the man took out some brushes and some blacking from the
+inside of the box, which was open on the side where the man was
+standing, and began to brush the gentleman's boot.
+
+"Now, how convenient that is!" said Rollo. "If you get your shoes or
+your boots muddy or dusty, you can stop and have them brushed."
+
+So saying, he looked down at his own boots, almost in hopes that he
+should find that they needed brushing, in order that he might try the
+experiment; but they looked very clean and bright, and there seemed to
+be no excuse for having them brushed again.
+
+Besides, Jennie was pulling him by the hand, to hasten him along. She
+said at the same time, in an undertone,--
+
+"Look, Rollo, look! See! there is a blind lady walking along before us!"
+
+"Blind?" repeated Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said Jennie; "don't you see the little dog leading her?"
+
+There was a little dog walking along at a little distance before the
+lady, with a beautiful collar round his neck, and a cord attached to it.
+The lady had the other end of the cord in her hand.
+
+"I don't believe she is blind," said Rollo.
+
+As the children passed by the lady she turned and looked at them, or
+seemed to look, and manifested no indications of being blind. Afterward
+Jennie saw a great many other ladies walking with little dogs, which
+they led, or which led them, by means of a cord which the owner of the
+dog held in her hand. There were so many of these cases that Jennie was
+compelled to give up the idea of their being blind; but she said that
+she never knew any body but blind people led about by dogs before.
+
+At length the children arrived at the entrance to the garden. It was on
+the farther side of a broad and beautiful street which ran along there,
+just outside of the enclosure. The palisades were of iron, though the
+tops were tipped with gilding, and they were very high. They were more
+than twice as high as a man's head. The lower ends of them were set
+firmly in a wall of very substantial masonry. The gateway was very wide,
+and it had sentry boxes on each side of it. A soldier, with his bayonet
+fixed, was standing in front of each sentry box. When Jennie saw these
+soldiers she shrank back, and seemed afraid to go in. In fact, Rollo
+himself appeared somewhat disposed to hesitate. In a moment, however, a
+number of persons who came along upon the sidewalk turned in at the
+gates, and went into the yard. The soldiers paid no attention to them.
+Rollo and Jane, seeing this, took courage, and went in, too.
+
+On passing through the gates, the children found themselves on a very
+broad terrace, which ran along on that side of the garden. The surface
+of the terrace was gravelled for a walk, and it was very smooth and
+beautiful. While standing on, or walking upon it, you could look on one
+side, through the palisade, and see the carriages in the street, and on
+the other side you could look over a low wall down into the garden,
+which was several feet below. The descent into the garden was by a
+flight of stone steps. The children, after staying a little time upon
+the terrace, went down the steps. They came out upon a very broad
+avenue, or alley, which formed the side of the garden. This alley was
+very broad indeed, so broad that it was divided into three by orange
+trees, which extended up and down in long rows parallel to the street,
+almost as far as you could see, and forming beautiful vistas in each
+direction. These orange trees, though very large, were not set in the
+ground, but were planted in monstrous boxes, painted green and set on
+rollers. The reason of this was, so that they could be moved away in the
+winter, and put in a building where they could be kept warm.
+
+This broad alley, the great side alley of the garden on the side toward
+the city, was called the Alley of the Oranges. There is another similar
+alley on the opposite side of the garden, which is toward the river, and
+that is called the Alley of the Riverside.
+
+Passing across the three portions of the Alley of the Oranges, the
+children went on toward the centre of the garden. Instead, however, of
+such a garden as they had expected to see, with fruits and flowers in
+borders and beds, and serpentine walks winding among them, as Jennie had
+imagined, the children found themselves in a sort of forest, the trees
+of which were planted regularly in rows, with straight walks here and
+there under them.
+
+"What a strange garden!" said Jennie.
+
+"Yes," said Rollo. "But we must not stop here. We must go straight on
+through the trees until we come to the Grand Alley."
+
+In fact, Rollo could see the Grand Alley, as he thought, at some
+distance before him, with people walking up and down in it. There were
+several people, too, in the same walk with Rollo and Jane, some going
+with them toward the Grand Alley, and others coming back from it. Among
+these were two children, just big enough to go alone, who were prattling
+in French together very fluently as they walked along before their
+father and mother. Jennie said she wondered how such little children
+could learn to speak French so well. Another child, somewhat older than
+these, was trundling a hoop, and at length unfortunately she fell down
+and hurt herself. So, leaving her hoop upon the ground, she came toward
+the maid who had care of her, crying, and sobbing, and uttering broken
+exclamations, all in French, which seemed to Rollo and Jane very
+surprising.
+
+At length the children came out into the Grand Alley. They knew it
+immediately when they reached it, by its being so broad and magnificent,
+and by the splendid views which were presented on every hand.
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "this is it, I am sure. There is the obelisk; and
+there, beyond it, on the top of that long hill, is the Triumphal Arch;
+and there, the other way, is the palace of the Tuileries. Here is a
+seat, Jennie. Let's go and sit down."
+
+So saying, Rollo led Jennie to a stone seat which was placed on one side
+of the alley, at the margin of the grove; and there they sat for some
+time, greatly admiring the splendid panorama which was spread out before
+them. What happened to them for the remainder of their walk will be
+described in the next chapter.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+THE ELYSIAN FIELDS.
+
+
+After sitting a little time upon the stone bench, Rollo and Jennie rose
+and resumed their walk. The alley was extremely broad, and it was almost
+filled with parties of ladies and gentlemen, and with groups of
+children, who were walking to and fro, some going out toward the
+Triumphal Arch, and some returning. Rollo and Jennie, as they walked
+along, said very little to each other, their attention being almost
+wholly absorbed by the gay and gorgeous scene which surrounded them. At
+length they perceived that, at a little distance before them, the people
+were separating to the right hand and to the left, and going round in a
+sort of circuit; and, on coming to the place, they found that the great
+basin, or pond of water, which Mr. Holiday had described to them, was
+there. This pond was very large, much larger than Rollo had expected
+from his father's account of it. It was octagonal in form, and was
+bordered all around with stone. There were a number of children
+standing in groups on the brink, at different places; some were watching
+the motions of the gold fish that were swimming in the water, and others
+were looking at a little ship which a boy was sailing on the pond. The
+boy had a long thread tied to the bow of his ship; and when the wind had
+blown it out upon the pond to the length of the string, he would pull it
+back to the shore again, and then proceed to send it forth on another
+voyage.
+
+Rollo thought it strange that they should be thus employed on the
+Sabbath; for he had been brought up to believe, that, although it was
+very right and proper to take a quiet walk in a garden or in the fields
+toward the close of the day, it was not right, but would, on the other
+hand, be displeasing to God, for any one, old or young, to spend any
+part of the day which God had consecrated to his own service and to the
+spiritual improvement of the soul in ordinary sports and amusements.
+Jennie, too, had the same feeling; and accordingly, after standing with
+Rollo for a moment near the margin of the water, looking at the fishes
+and the vessels, and at the group of children that were there, she began
+to pull Rollo by the hand, saying,--
+
+"Come, Rollo, I think we had better go along."
+
+Rollo at once acceded to this proposal, and they both walked on. They
+soon found themselves passing out of the garden, though the space on
+each side of the broad alley in which they were walking was bordered
+with so many walls, palisades, terraces, statues, and columns, and the
+gateway which led out from the garden into the square was so broad, and
+was so filled up, moreover, with the people who were going and coming,
+that it was difficult to tell where the garden ended and the great
+square began. At length, however, it began to be plain that they were
+out of the garden; for the view, instead of being shut in by trees,
+became very widely extended on either hand. It was terminated on one
+side by ranges of magnificent buildings, and on the other by bridges
+leading across the river, with various grand and imposing edifices
+beyond. In the centre of the square the tall form of the obelisk towered
+high into the air, gently tapering as it ascended, and terminating
+suddenly at its apex in a point.
+
+The square, though open, was not empty. Besides the obelisk, which stood
+in the centre of it, on its lofty pedestal, there were two great
+fountains and colossal statues of marble; and lofty columns of bronze
+and gilt, for the gaslights; and raised sidewalks, smooth as a floor,
+formed of a sort of artificial stone, which was continuous over the
+whole surface, which was covered by it, without fissure or seam. There
+were roadways, also, crossing the place in various directions, with
+carriages and horsemen upon them continually coming and going. The great
+fountains were very curiously contrived. The constructions were thirty
+or forty feet high. They consisted of three great basins, one above the
+other. The smallest was at the top, and was, of course, high in the air.
+A column of water was spouting out from the middle of it, and, after
+rising a little way into the air, the water fell back into the basin,
+and, filling it full, it ran over the edge of it into the basin below.
+
+This was the middle basin, and, besides the water which fell into it
+from the basin above, it received also a great supply from streams that
+came from the great basin below, like the jets from the hose of a fire
+engine when a house is on fire. There was a row of bronze figures,
+shaped like men, in the water of the lowest basin of all, each holding a
+fish in his arms; and the jets of water which were thrown up to the
+middle basin from the lower one came out of the mouths of these fishes.
+The fishes were very large, and they were shaped precisely like real
+fishes, although they were made of bronze.
+
+The children looked at the fountains as they walked along, and at length
+came to the foot of the obelisk. They stopped a minute or two there, and
+looked up to the top of it. It was as tall as a steeple. Rollo was
+wondering whether it would be possible in any way to get to the top of
+it; and he told Jennie that he did not think that there was any way, for
+he did not see any place where any body could stand if they should
+succeed in getting there. While they both stood thus gazing upward, they
+suddenly heard a well-known voice behind them, saying,--
+
+"Well, children, what do you think of the Obelisk of Luxor?"
+
+They turned round and beheld their uncle George. They were, of course,
+very much astonished to see him. He was walking with another young
+gentleman, a friend of his from America, whom he had accidentally met
+with in Paris. When the children had recovered from the surprise of thus
+unexpectedly meeting him, he repeated his question.
+
+"What do you think of the obelisk?"
+
+"I don't believe it is so high," replied Rollo, "as the column in the
+Place Vendome."
+
+"No," replied Mr. George, "it is not."
+
+"Nor so large," added Rollo.
+
+"No," said Mr. George.
+
+"And I don't believe that there is any way to get to the top of it,"
+added Rollo.
+
+"No," said Mr. George, "there is not. The column in the Place Vendome is
+hollow, and has a staircase inside; but this obelisk is solid from top
+to bottom, and is formed of one single stone. That is the great wonder
+of it."
+
+[Illustration: THE OBELISK.]
+
+"Look up," said Mr. George, "to the top of it. It is as high as a
+steeple. See how large it is, too, at the base. Think how enormously
+heavy such an immense stone must be. What a work it must have been to
+lift it up and stand it on its end! Besides, it does not rest upon the
+ground, but upon another monstrous stone, the pedestal of which is
+nearly thirty feet high; so that, in setting it up in its place, the
+engineers had not only to lift it up on end, but they had to raise the
+whole mass, bodily, twenty or thirty feet into the air. I suppose it was
+one of the greatest lifts that ever was made.
+
+"There is another thing that is very curious about the obelisk,"
+continued Mr. George, "and that is its history. It was not made
+originally for this place. It was made in Egypt, thousands and thousands
+of years ago, nobody knows how long. There are several others of the
+same kind still standing. Some years ago, this one and another were
+given to the French by the government of Egypt, and the French king sent
+a large company of men to take this one down and bring it to Paris. They
+built an immense vessel on purpose for transporting it. This vessel they
+sent to Egypt. It went up the Nile as near to the place where the
+obelisk stood as it could go. The place was called Luxor. The obelisk
+stood back at some distance from the river; and there were several Arab
+huts near it, which it was necessary to pull down. There were also
+several other houses in the way by the course which the obelisk must
+take in going to the river. The French engineers bought all these
+houses, and pulled them down. Then they made a road leading from the
+place where the obelisk stood to the river. Then they cased the whole
+stone in wood, to prevent its getting broken or injured on the way. Then
+they lowered it down by means of immense machines which they constructed
+for the purpose, and so proceeded to draw it to the river. But with all
+their machines, it was a prodigiously difficult work to get it along. It
+took eight hundred men to move it, and so slowly did it go that these
+eight hundred men worked three months in getting it to the landing.
+There they made a great platform, and so rolled it on board the float.
+There was a steamer at hand to take it in tow, and it was brought to
+France. It then took five or six months to bring it across the country
+from the sea shore to Paris.
+
+"When, at last, they got it here, it took them nearly a year to
+construct the machines for raising it. They built the pedestal for it to
+stand upon, which you see is as high as a two-story house, and then
+appointed a day for the raising. All the world, almost, came to see.
+This whole square was full. There were more than a hundred thousand
+persons here. The king came, and his family, and all his generals and
+great officers. It was the greatest raising that ever was seen."
+
+"Why, there must have been just as great a raising," said Rollo, "when
+they first put it up in Egypt."
+
+"No," said Mr. George; "because there it stood nearly upon the ground,
+but here it is on the top of a lofty pedestal. Look there! Those are
+pictures of the machines which they raised it by."
+
+So saying, Mr. George pointed to beautifully gilded diagrams which were
+sculptured upon one side of the pedestal. There were beams, and ropes,
+and pulleys without number, with the obelisk among them; but Rollo could
+not understand the operation of the machinery very well. The obelisk
+itself was covered on all sides with ancient Egyptian hieroglyphics,
+deeply cut into the stone; but the children could not understand the
+hieroglyphics any better than they could the machinery.
+
+After looking some time longer at the obelisk and the various objects of
+interest that were around it, the whole party walked on together. Mr.
+George said that he and his friend were going up the avenue of the
+Elysian Fields, and that, if Rollo and Jennie would walk along behind
+them, they would not get lost. Jennie was very glad of this; for the
+crowd of people that were coming and going was getting to be very great,
+and she was a little afraid. Rollo, on the other hand, was rather sorry.
+The Triumphal Arch at the farther end of the avenue was in full view,
+and thus he felt sure of his way; and he was ambitious of the honor of
+being the sole guide in the excursion which he and Jane were taking. He,
+however, could not well decline his uncle's invitation; so, when the two
+gentlemen moved on, Rollo and Jennie followed them.
+
+The Grand Avenue was a very broad and beautiful roadway, gently
+ascending toward the barrier, and now perfectly thronged with carriages
+and horsemen. There were also two side avenues, one on each side of the
+central one. These were for foot passengers. There were rows of trees
+between. Beyond the side avenues there extended on either hand a wood,
+formed of large and tall trees, planted in rows, and standing close
+enough together to shade the whole ground. They were, however, far
+enough apart to allow of open and unobstructed motion among them. Under
+these trees, and in open spaces which were left here and there among
+them, there were booths, and stalls, and tables, and tents, and all
+sorts of contrivances for entertainment and pleasure, with crowds of
+people gathered around them in groups, or moving slowly from one to the
+other. There were men, some dressed like gentlemen, and others wearing
+blue, cartmen's frocks; and women, some with bonnets and some with caps;
+and children of all ages and sizes; and soldiers without number, with
+blue coats, and dark-red trousers, and funny caps, without any brim,
+except the visor. In the midst of all these multitudes Mr. George and
+the gentleman who was with him slowly led the way up the side avenue,
+Rollo and Jennie following them, quite bewildered with the extraordinary
+spectacles which were continually presenting themselves to view on every
+hand. The attention of the children was drawn from one object or
+incident to another, with so much suddenness, and so rapidly, that they
+had no time to understand one thing before it passed away and something
+else came forward into view and diverted their thoughts; and before they
+had recovered from the surprise which this second thing awakened, they
+had come to a third, more strange and wonderful, perhaps, than either of
+the preceding.
+
+A boy, very young, and very fantastically dressed, came riding along
+through the crowd, mounted on the smallest and prettiest black pony
+that Rollo had ever seen, and distributing as he passed along some sort
+of small printed papers to all who came near enough to get them. Rollo
+tried to get one of the papers to see what it was, but he did not
+succeed.
+
+"How I wish I had such a pony as that!" said Rollo.
+
+"So do I," said Jennie. "But what are the people doing in that ring?"
+
+Rollo saw a close ring of people all crowding around something on the
+ground. There was a man inside the ring, calling out something very loud
+and very incessantly. Rollo put his head between two of the spectators
+to see. There was a man seated in the centre, on the ground, with a
+cloth spread out before him, on which was a monstrous heap of stockings,
+of all kinds and colors, which he was selling as fast as possible to the
+men and women that had gathered around him. He sold them very cheap, and
+the people bought them very fast. He put the money, as fast as he
+received it, in his cap, which lay on the ground before him, and served
+him for a cash box.
+
+"Come, Rollo," said Jane, pulling Rollo by the hand, "we must go along.
+Uncle George is almost out of sight."
+
+Rollo turned back into the avenue again, and began to walk along. In a
+moment more he saw a large boy standing behind a curious-looking stove
+in an open space near, and baking griddle cakes. There was a very nice
+table by his side, covered with a white cloth, and a plate, on which the
+boy turned out the griddle cakes as fast as they were baked. There were
+several children about him, buying the cakes and eating them.
+
+"Ah, Jennie," said Rollo, "look at these cakes! How I should like some
+of them! If it were not that it is Sunday, I would go and buy some."
+
+"O Rollo!" exclaimed Jennie, "look here! See what's coming!"
+
+Rollo looked, and saw that the ladies and gentlemen on the broad walk
+before them were moving to one side and the other, to make room for a
+most elegant little omnibus, drawn by six goats, that were harnessed
+before it like horses. The omnibus was made precisely like a large
+omnibus, such as are used in the streets of Paris for grown persons;
+only this one was small, just large enough for the goats to draw. It was
+very beautifully painted, and had elegant silken curtains. It was full
+of children, who were looking out the windows with very smiling faces,
+as if they were enjoying their ride very much. A very pretty little
+boy, about seven years of age, was holding the reins of the goats, and
+appearing to drive; but there was a large boy walking along by the side
+of the goats all the time, to take care that they did not go wrong. The
+omnibus belonged to his father, who kept it to let children ride in it
+on their paying him a small sum for each ride.
+
+Jennie was very much pleased with the omnibus; but what followed it
+pleased her still more. This was a carriage, made in all respects like a
+real carriage, and large enough to contain several children. It was
+open, like a barouche, so that the children who were riding in it could
+see all around them perfectly well. It had two seats inside, besides a
+high seat in front for the coachman, and one behind for the footman.
+There were children upon all these seats. There was one on the
+coachman's box to drive. The carriage, like the omnibus, was drawn by
+goats, only there were four instead of six. The coachman drove them by
+means of long, silken reins.
+
+As soon as the omnibus and the carriage had passed by, and the crowd had
+closed again behind them so as to conceal them from view, Rollo and
+Jennie looked about for Mr. George and the other gentleman; but they
+were nowhere to be seen. Jane was quite frightened; but Rollo said he
+did not care.
+
+"Look there!" said Rollo, pointing back.
+
+"What is it?" said Jennie.
+
+"The obelisk," said Rollo.
+
+Jane saw the tall, needle-like form of the obelisk towering into the air
+from the middle of the great square behind them, and a part of the long
+front of the Tuileries, at the end of a vista of trees, far beyond.
+
+"As long as we have the obelisk in sight," said Rollo, "we cannot get
+lost."
+
+Just then Rollo's attention was called to a broad sheet of paper
+fastened up upon a tree that he was passing by. He stopped to see what
+it was. A little girl, about as old as Jennie, came up at the same time,
+leading the maid who had the care of her by the hand. This child began
+to read what was printed on the card. She read aloud, enunciating the
+words very slowly, syllable by syllable, and in a voice so clear, and
+rich, and silvery, that it was delightful to hear her. She seemed
+pleased to observe that Rollo and Jane were listening to her; and when
+she got through she turned to them, as if to apologize for not reading
+better, and said, in French, and with a pleasant smile upon her
+countenance,--
+
+"I am learning to read; but I cannot read too much yet, you see."
+
+By too much she meant very well, that being the way that the French
+express themselves in such a case.
+
+Rollo understood what she said, but he did not think it prudent to
+attempt to reply in the same language; so he said simply, in English,--
+
+"And yet I think my father would give five hundred dollars if I could
+read French like that. He'd be _glad_ to do it."
+
+As Rollo spoke these words the child looked earnestly in his face, the
+smile gradually disappearing from her features and being replaced by a
+look of perplexity and wonder. She then turned and led the maid away.
+
+There were a great many booths and stands about, some in open spaces and
+some under the trees. At one they had all sorts of cakes for sale; at
+another toys of every kind, such as hoops, balls, kites, balloons,
+rocking horses, and all such things; and at a third pictures, some
+large, some small, some plain, and some beautifully colored. At one
+place, by the side of the avenue where most of the people were walking,
+there stood a man, with a tall and gayly-painted can on his back. It was
+covered with common drapery below; but the top was bright, and towered
+like a spire above the man's head. There was a round bar, like the leg
+of a chair, which went from the bottom of the can to the ground, to
+support it, and take the weight off the man's shoulders when he was
+standing still. The man was standing still now, and was all the time
+tinkling a little bell, to call the attention of the people to what he
+had to sell. It was something to drink. There were two kinds of drink in
+the can, separated from each other by a division in the interior. There
+were two small pipes, one for each kind of drink, leading from the
+bottom of the can round by the side of the man to the front, with
+stopcocks at the end, where he could draw out the drink conveniently.
+There was also a little rack to hold the glasses. There were three
+glasses; for the man sometimes had three customers at a time. While
+Rollo and Jane were looking at this man, a boy came up for a drink. The
+man took one of the glasses from the little rack, and filled it by
+turning one of the stopcocks. When the boy had taken his drink and paid
+the money, the man wiped the glass with a towel which he kept for the
+purpose; and then, putting it back in its place on the rack, he went on
+tinkling his little bell.
+
+In the mean time, the crowd of people seemed to increase, and it
+appeared to Rollo and Jennie, when they came to observe particularly,
+that they were nearly all walking one way, and that was up the avenue,
+as if there were some place in that direction where they were all going.
+Rollo supposed that, of course, it was a church. He had been told by his
+father, when they were travelling in England, that when he was in any
+strange place on Sunday, and wished to find the way to church, one good
+method was to observe in the streets whenever he saw any considerable
+number of people moving in the same direction, and to join and follow
+them. He would, in such cases, his father said, be very sure to be
+conducted to a church, and after going in he would generally find some
+one who would show him a seat. Rollo and Jennie had often practised on
+this plan. In fact, they took a particular interest and pleasure in
+going to church in this way, as there was something a little of the
+nature of adventure in it.
+
+When, accordingly, the children observed that the great mass of the
+people that filled the two side avenues, as well as the carriages that
+were in the central one, were all moving steadily onward together,
+paying little attention to the booths, and stalls, and other places and
+means of amusement which were to be seen under the trees on either hand,
+he concluded that, while some of the people of Paris were willing to
+amuse themselves with sports and exhibitions on Sunday, the more
+respectable portion would not stop to look at them, but went straight
+forward to church; and he and Jennie resolved to follow their example.
+
+"I should like to see all these things very much," said Rollo, "some
+other day; but now we will go on, Jennie, to the church, where the rest
+of the people are going."
+
+Jennie very cordially approved of this plan, and so they walked on
+together. It happened that, at the time when they came to this
+determination, there was walking just before them a party, consisting
+apparently of a father and mother and their two children. The father and
+mother walked together first, and the two children, hand in hand,
+followed. The oldest child was a girl, of about Jennie's age. The other
+was a very small boy, just beginning to learn to talk. Rollo and Jennie
+came immediately behind these children, and were very much interested in
+hearing them talk together, especially to hear the little one prattling
+in French. He called his sister Adrienne, and she called him Antoine.
+Thus Rollo and Jennie knew the names of the children, but they had no
+way of finding out what were the names of the father and mother.
+
+"Now, Jennie," said Rollo, in a low tone, "I think we had better follow
+this party, and keep close to them all the time, and then, when we get
+to the church, perhaps they will give us a seat."
+
+Jennie liked this proposal very much, and so she and Rollo walked along
+after Adrienne and Antoine, not too near them, but so near as to keep
+them always in sight. Sometimes the party turned aside from the avenue
+to walk under the trees, and sometimes they stopped a few minutes to
+look at some curious exhibition or spectacle which was to be seen. At
+one place a man had a square marked off, and enclosed with a line to
+keep the crowd back; and in the middle he had an electrical machine,
+with which he gave shocks to any of the bystanders who were willing to
+take them. A boy kept turning the machine all the time. At another place
+was a little theatre, mounted on a high box, so that all could see, with
+little images about as large as dolls dancing on the stage, or holding
+dialogues with each other. The words were really spoken by a man who was
+concealed in the box below; but as the little images moved about
+continually, and made all sorts of gesticulations, corresponding with
+what was said, it seemed to the bystanders precisely as if they were
+speaking themselves. Besides this, the images would walk about, scold
+each other, quarrel and fight each other, run out at little doors, and
+then come in again, and do a great many other things which it was very
+wonderful to see such little figures do.
+
+There were places, too, where there were great whirling machines, under
+splendid tents and canopies, with horses, and boats, and ships, and
+cradles at the circumference of them, all of which were made to sail
+round and round through the air, carrying the children that were mounted
+on the horses or sitting in the ships and boats. There were also several
+places for shooting at a mark with little spring guns, which were loaded
+with peas instead of bullets. There were figures of bears, lions,
+tigers, ducks, deer, and other animals at a little distance, which were
+kept moving along all the time by machinery, for the children to shoot
+at with the peas. If they hit any of them they drew a prize, consisting
+of cake or gingerbread, or of some sort of plaything or toy, of which
+great numbers were hanging up about the shooting place. All these, and a
+great many other similar contrivances for amusing people, Rollo and Jane
+saw, as they passed along; but they did not stop to look at them,
+excepting when the gentleman and lady stopped whom they were following.
+This was seldom, however; and so they went, on the whole, very steadily
+forward, up the long and gentle ascent, until, at length, they reached
+the great Triumphal Arch at the Neuilly Barrier.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+A GREAT MISTAKE.
+
+
+As they approached the arch, the children gazed upon it with
+astonishment, being greatly impressed with its magnitude and height.
+There were a great many men on the top of it. Their heads and shoulders
+were visible from below, as they stood leaning over the parapet. They,
+however, looked exceedingly small.
+
+Rollo and Jennie would have liked to stop and look longer at the arch;
+but they did not wish to separate from Adrienne and Antoine, who kept
+walking steadily on all the time with their father and mother. Rollo
+supposed, as has been said before, that this party were going to some
+church; but they were not. They were going to a place called the
+Hippodrome.
+
+The Hippodrome, far from being a church, is a place of amusement. It is
+used for equestrian performances, and feats of strength and agility, and
+balloon ascension, and all similar entertainments.
+
+The Hippodrome is a long, oval enclosure, with eight or ten ranges of
+seats extending all around it, and rising one above another, like the
+seats of the Coliseum at Rome. There is a roof extending all around over
+the seats; but the area within is so large that it could not well be
+covered with a roof. Besides, if there were a roof over it, how could
+the balloons go up?
+
+Then, moreover, the spectacles which are exhibited in the Hippodrome
+appear to much better advantage when seen in the open light of day than
+if they were under the cover of a roof, so long as the spectators
+themselves are protected from the sun and from any sudden showers.
+
+The area in the middle of the Hippodrome is about one hundred yards long
+and fifty yards wide. It is so large that there is room for a good wide
+road all around it, and also for another road up and down the middle,
+with little gardens of grass and flowers between. At the very centre is
+a round area, where there is a concealed canal of water to represent a
+stream. This water is ordinarily covered with planks, and the planks are
+covered with a very thick canvas carpet, and this with sand; so that the
+water is entirely concealed, and the horsemen ride over it just as they
+do over any other part of the area. When they wish to use it, to show
+how the horses could leap over streams, they take off the sand, roll up
+the carpet, and carry away the planks; and there they have a very good
+representation of a stream.
+
+The performances at the Hippodrome are very various. Sometimes whole
+troops of horse come in from between two great curtains at one end, all
+elegantly caparisoned and mounted, some by men and some by girls, but
+all, whether men or girls, dressed in splendid uniforms. These troops
+ride round and round the area, and up and down in the middle of it,
+performing a great variety of evolutions in the most rapid and
+surprising manner.
+
+Then there are races of various kinds. Some are run by beautiful girls,
+who come out mounted on elegant gray horses that are mottled like
+leopards, each of the riders having a scarf over her shoulders of a
+different color from the rest, so that they may be all readily
+distinguished from each other in the race. Then there are races of
+chariots, three running at a time, round and round the area; and of
+small ponies, with monkeys on them for riders. There are various
+contrivances, too, for athletic and gymnastic feats, such as masts and
+poles for climbers to ascend, and other similar apparatus. All these
+things give the interior of the Hippodrome quite a gay and lively
+appearance, and the area necessary for them is so large that the ranges
+of seats surrounding it are sufficient to accommodate ten thousand
+spectators.
+
+It was to this place that Adrienne and Antoine, with their father and
+mother, were going, while Rollo and Jennie supposed that they were going
+to a church. There was nothing to lead Rollo to suspect his mistake in
+the aspect of the building as he approached the entrance to it; for the
+sides of it were hidden by trees and other buildings, and the portal,
+though very large and very gayly decorated, seemed still, so far as
+Rollo could get a glimpse of it through the crowds of people, only to
+denote that it was the entrance to some very splendid public edifice,
+without at all indicating the nature of the purposes to which it was
+devoted.
+
+The immense concourse of people which were pouring into the Hippodrome
+divided themselves at the gates into two portions, and passed up an
+ascent to enter at side doors. Rollo and Jane, following their guides,
+went toward the right. They observed that the father of Adrienne and
+Antoine stopped at a little window near the entrance, to pay the price
+of admission for himself and wife and his two children and to get the
+tickets. He paid full price for his two children, and so took four full
+tickets. Rollo and Jane did not see him pay the money. They only
+observed that there was a crowd at the little window, and they saw
+Antoine's father take the tickets. They did not know what this meant,
+however; but they followed on. When they all came to the doorway which
+led up to the ranges of seats, the man whose duty it was to take the
+tickets supposed that the four children all belonged to the same family,
+and that they had been admitted at half price, and that, accordingly,
+two of the tickets were for the father and mother, and the other two for
+the four children. So he let them all pass on together, especially as
+there was, at that time, such a throng of people crowding in that there
+was no time to stop and make any inquiries.
+
+Rollo and Jane were carried along by the current up a flight of stairs,
+which came out among the ranges of seats; and after moving along for
+some distance till they came to a vacancy they sat down, and began to
+look around and survey the spacious and splendid interior into which
+they had entered. They were at once overwhelmed with the magnificence of
+the spectacle which was presented to view. Instead of a church, they
+found a vast open area extended before them, surrounded with long
+ranges of seats, and laid out in the interior in the most graceful and
+beautiful manner.
+
+"Jennie," said Rollo, after gazing about for some moments, almost
+bewildered, "if this is any kind of meeting at all, I think it must be a
+camp meeting."
+
+Jennie was completely bewildered, and had no opinion on the subject
+whatever; so she said nothing.
+
+"That's the place for the choir, I suppose," said Rollo, pointing to a
+sort of raised platform with a balustrade in front, which was built
+among the seats in the middle of one of the sides of the Hippodrome.
+"But then," he added, after a moment's pause, "I don't see any pulpit,
+unless that is it."
+
+As he said this, Rollo pointed to a balcony with a rich canopy over it,
+which was built up among the seats, directly opposite to the musician's
+gallery, on the other side of the arena. This balcony was for the use of
+the emperor, and his family and friends, when they chose to come and
+witness the spectacles in the Hippodrome.
+
+These speculations of Rollo's were suddenly interrupted by the striking
+up of martial music, by a full band of trumpets, drums, clarinets,
+hautboys, and horns, from the musician's gallery. Soon afterwards the
+curtains opened at the farther end of the arena, and a magnificent troop
+of horse, mounted by male and female riders, all dressed in the gayest
+and most splendid costumes, came prancing in. As soon as Rollo had
+recovered from his astonishment at this spectacle, he turned to Jennie,
+and said,--
+
+"Jennie, it is not any church or meeting at all; and I think we had
+better go home."
+
+"I think so too," said Jennie.
+
+"I should like to come here some other day," added Rollo; "and I mean to
+ask my father to let us come. Uncle George will come with us. But _now_
+we had better go home."
+
+So the children rose from their seats and began to move toward the door.
+It was some time before they could get out, so great was the number of
+people still coming in. They, however, finally succeeded, and were quite
+relieved when they found themselves once more in the open air.
+
+They turned their steps immediately toward home. Jane, however, soon
+began to feel very tired; and so Rollo said he would stop the first
+omnibus that came along. The avenue was full of carriages of every kind;
+and pretty soon an omnibus, headed down the obelisk, appeared among
+them. Rollo made a signal for the conductor to stop, and he and Jennie
+got in.
+
+They had a very pleasant ride back through the Elysian Fields, and
+around the great square where the obelisk stands. They then entered the
+street which runs along by the side of the gardens of the Tuileries, and
+advanced in it toward the heart of the city. Rollo made a sign for the
+conductor to stop when the omnibus reached that part of the street which
+was opposite to the entrance into the garden where he and Jennie had
+gone in. This was, of course, also opposite to the street leading into
+the Place Vendome. It was but a short walk from this place to the hotel.
+About six o'clock the children arrived at the hotel, and the table was
+already set for dinner. Mr. Holiday was reclining on a couch in the
+room, and Mrs. Holiday had been reading to him. Rollo's uncle George was
+also in the room. Mrs. Holiday laid down her book when the children came
+in. Rollo and Jennie sat down upon a sofa, not far from their father's
+couch. They were glad to rest.
+
+"Well, children," said Mrs. Holiday, "have you had a pleasant walk?"
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "a very pleasant walk indeed. We have seen a great
+many very curious things. But I believe we made a mistake."
+
+"What mistake?" asked Mrs. Holiday.
+
+"Why, we followed a great many people that we thought were going to
+church; but, instead of that, they led us into a great place that I
+think was some sort of circus."
+
+Here Mr. George looked up very eagerly and began to laugh.
+
+"I declare!" said he. "I shouldn't wonder if you got into the
+Hippodrome."
+
+"I don't know what it was," said Rollo. "When we first went in we saw
+that it was not a church; but we did not know but that it might be some
+sort of camp meeting. But pretty soon they began to bring horses in and
+ride them around, and so we came out."
+
+Here Mr. George fell into a long and uncontrollable paroxysm of
+laughter, during the intervals of which he said, in broken language, as
+he walked about the room endeavoring to get breath and recover his
+self-control, that it was the best thing he had heard since he landed at
+Liverpool. The idea of following the crowd of Parisians in the Champs
+Elysées on Sunday afternoon, with the expectation of being conducted to
+church, and then finally taking the Hippodrome for a camp meeting! Rollo
+himself, though somewhat piqued at having his adventure put in so
+ridiculous a light, could not help laughing too; and even his father and
+mother smiled.
+
+"Never mind, Rollo," said his mother, at length. "I don't think you were
+at all to blame; though I am glad that you came out when you found what
+sort of a place it was."
+
+"O, no," said Mr. George, as he gradually recovered his self-control,
+"you were not to blame in the least. The rule you followed is a very
+good one for England and America; but it does not apply to France. Going
+with the multitude Sunday afternoons, in Paris, will take you any where
+but to church."
+
+Notwithstanding the concurrence of opinion between Rollo's mother and
+his uncle that he had done nothing wrong, neither he nor Jennie could
+help feeling some degree of uneasiness and some little dissatisfaction
+with themselves in respect to the manner in which they had spent the
+afternoon. They had both been accustomed to consider the Sabbath as a
+day solemnly consecrated to the worship of God and to the work of
+preparation for heaven. It is true that the day sometimes seemed very
+long to them, as it does to all children; and though they had always
+been allowed to take quiet walks in the gardens and grounds around the
+house, still they usually got tired, before night came, of being so
+quiet and still. Notwithstanding this, however, they had no disposition
+to break over the rule which, as they supposed, the law of God enjoined
+upon them. They fully believed that God himself had ordained that there
+should be one day in seven from which all the usual occupations and
+amusements of life should be excluded, and which should be consecrated
+wholly to rest, to religious contemplation, and to prayer; and they were
+very willing to submit to the ordinance, though it brought with it upon
+them, as children, burdens and restrictions which it was sometimes quite
+onerous for them to bear.
+
+When night came, Rollo found that he always felt much happier if he had
+kept the Sabbath strictly, than when he attempted, either secretly or
+openly, to evade the duty. There was a sort of freshness and vigor, too,
+with which he engaged in the employments of the week on Monday morning,
+which, though he had never stopped to account for it philosophically, he
+enjoyed very highly, and which made Monday morning the brightest and
+most animated morning of the week. So Rollo was accustomed to acquiesce
+very willingly in the setting apart of the sacred day to religious
+observances and to rest, thinking that the restraints and restrictions
+which it imposed were amply compensated for by the peace and comfort
+which it brought to his mind when he observed it aright, and by the
+novelty and freshness of the charm with which it invested the ordinary
+pursuits and enjoyments of life when it was over.
+
+Accordingly, on this occasion, feeling a little dissatisfied with
+himself and uneasy in mind, in consequence of the manner in which he had
+spent the afternoon, Rollo determined to make all the atonement for his
+fault, if fault it was, that was now in his power. Accordingly, when the
+family rose from the table after dinner, which was about seven o'clock,
+and his father and mother went and sat upon the sofa together, which
+stood in the recess of a window looking out upon the Place Vendome,
+Rollo said to Jane, in an undertone,--
+
+"Jennie, come with me."
+
+He said this in the tone of an invitation, not of command; and Jennie
+understood at once, from her experience on former occasions, that Rollo
+had some plan for her entertainment or gratification. So she got down
+from her chair and went off with him very readily.
+
+They went out at a door which led into their mother's bed room.
+
+"Jennie," said Rollo, as he walked along with her across the room, "I am
+going to get the Bible and sit down here by the window and read in it.
+Would not you like to read with me?"
+
+"Yes," said Jennie, "if you will find a pretty story to read about.
+There are a great many toward the first part of the Bible."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I will."
+
+"And let us go into my room to read," said Jennie. "I like my room the
+best."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "I like your room best, too."
+
+So Rollo took the Bible off from the table of his father's room, and
+then he and Jennie went on together into Jennie's room. This room was a
+little boudoir, which opened from Mr. and Mrs. Holiday's room; it was a
+charming little place, and it was no wonder that Jennie liked it. It was
+hung with drapery all around, except where the window was, on one side,
+and a large looking glass and a picture on two other sides. There was
+even a curtain over the door, so that when you were in, and the door was
+shut, and the curtain over it was let down, you seemed to be entirely
+secluded from all the world. This drapery was green, and the room, being
+entirely enclosed in it, might have seemed sombre had it not been for
+the brilliancy and beauty of the furniture, and the variegated colors
+and high polish of the floor. There was an elegant bedstead and bed in
+the back part of the room, with a carved canopy over it. There was a
+bureau also, with drawers, where Jennie kept her clothes; and a little
+fireplace, with a pretty brass fender before it; and a marble mantel
+piece above, with a clock and two vases of flowers upon it. There were a
+great many other curious and beautiful articles of furniture in the
+room, which gave it a very attractive appearance, and made it, in fact,
+as pretty a place of seclusion as a lady could desire to have. Jennie
+enjoyed this room very much indeed; but still, after all,
+notwithstanding the expensiveness and beauty of the decorations which
+adorned it, I do not know that Jennie enjoyed it any more than she did a
+little seat that she had under some lilac bushes, near the brook at the
+bottom of her father's garden, at home.
+
+There was a small couch in the recess of the window in Jennie's boudoir;
+and here she and Rollo established themselves, with the Bible lying open
+before them upon a small table which they had placed before the couch to
+hold it. They raised their own seats by means of large, square cushions
+which were there, so as to bring themselves to the right height for
+reading from the book while it lay upon the table; and they put their
+feet upon a tabouret which belonged to the room. The tabouret was made
+for a seat, but it answered an admirable purpose for a foot-stool. As
+soon as the two children were thus comfortably established, they opened
+the Bible, and Rollo began to turn over the leaves in the books of
+Samuel and of Kings, in order to find something which he thought would
+interest Jennie.
+
+At length he found a chapter which seemed, so far as he could judge by
+running his eye along the verses, to consist principally of narration
+and dialogue; and so he determined to begin the reading at once.
+
+"Now," said he, "Jennie, I will read one verse, and then you shall read
+one, and I will tell you the meaning of all the words that you don't
+know."
+
+Jennie was much pleased with this arrangement, and she read the verses
+which came to her with great propriety. It is true that there were a
+great many words at which she was obliged to hesitate some little time
+before she could pronounce them; and there were others which she could
+not pronounce at all. Rollo had the tact to wait just long enough in
+these cases. By telling children too quick when they are endeavoring to
+spell out a word, we deprive them of the pleasure of surmounting the
+difficulty themselves; and, by waiting too long, we perplex and
+discourage them. There are very few children who, when they are hearing
+their younger brothers and sisters read, have the proper discretion on
+this point. In fact, a great many full-grown teachers fail in this
+respect most seriously, and make the business of reading on the part of
+their pupils a constant source of disappointment and vexation to them,
+when it might have been a pleasure.
+
+Rollo, too, besides the patient and kind encouragement which he afforded
+to Jane in her attempts to read her verses herself, read those which
+fell to his share in a very distinct and deliberate manner, keeping the
+place all the while with his finger, so that Jennie might easily follow
+him. He stopped also from time to time to explain the story to Jennie,
+and to talk about the several incidents that were described in it, in
+order to make it sure that Jennie understood them all. It would have
+been much easier for him to have taken the book himself, and to have
+read the whole chapter off at once, fluently. But this would have
+defeated his whole object; which was, not to do what he could do most
+easily, but to do good and help Jennie. If a boy were going up a high
+hill, with his sister in his company, it would be easier for him to go
+directly on and leave his sister behind. A selfish boy would be likely
+to do this; but a generous-minded boy would prefer to go slowly, and
+help his sister along over the rocks and up the steep places.
+
+Rollo and Jane both became so much interested in their reading that they
+continued it almost an hour. It then began to be dark, and so they put
+the book away. Their mother came in about that time, and was very much
+pleased when she found how Rollo and Jennie had been employed; and Rollo
+and Jennie themselves experienced a substantial and deeply-seated
+feeling of satisfaction and comfort that all the merry-making of the
+Elysian Fields could never give. If any of the readers of this book have
+any doubt of this, let them try the experiment themselves. At some time,
+after they have been spending a portion of the Sabbath in such a way as
+to give them an inward feeling of uneasiness and self-condemnation, let
+them engage for a time in the voluntary performance of some serious
+duty, as Rollo did, and in the spirit and temper which he manifested,
+and see how strongly it will tend to bring back their peace of mind and
+restore them to happiness. To try the experiment more effectually still,
+spend the whole Sabbath in this manner, and then see with what a feeling
+of quiet and peaceful satisfaction you will go to bed at night, and
+with what a joyous and buoyant spirit you will awake on Monday morning.
+
+Before Rollo left Paris, he went, one Tuesday afternoon, with his mother
+and Jennie and his uncle George, to see the performances at the
+Hippodrome, and he enjoyed the spectacle very much indeed. Besides the
+performances which have already been described, there were two others
+which astonished him exceedingly. In one of these a man came into the
+middle of the area, and there the assistants lifted up a large and heavy
+pole, which they poised in the air, and then set the lower end of it in
+a sort of socket which was made in an apron which the man wore, which
+socket was fastened securely to the man's hips and shoulders by strong
+straps, so that he could sustain the weight of the pole by means of
+them. The pole was about thirty feet high, and the top was branched like
+a pitchfork. It was shaped, in fact, exactly like a pitchfork, except
+that there was a bar across from the top of one branch to the top of the
+other, and a rope hanging down from the middle of the bar half way down
+to the place of bifurcation--that is, to the place where the straight
+part of the pole ended and the branches began. Things being thus
+arranged, a boy, who was about twelve years old, apparently, came out,
+and, leaping up upon the man's shoulders, began to climb up the pole.
+When he reached the top of it he took hold of the rope, and by means of
+the rope climbed up to the bar. Here he began to perform a great variety
+of the most astonishing evolutions, the man all the time poising the
+pole in the air. The boy would climb about the bar in every way, drawing
+himself up sometimes backwards and sometimes forward, and swinging to
+and fro, and turning over and over in every conceivable position. He
+would hang to the bar sometimes by his hands and sometimes by his
+legs--sometimes with his head downward, sometimes with his feet
+downward. He would whirl round and round over the bar a great many
+times, till Rollo and Jane were tired of seeing him, and then he would
+rest by hanging to the pole by the back_ of his head_, without touching
+the bar with any other part of his body. All this time the man who held
+the pole kept it carefully poised, moving to and fro about the area
+continually in following the oscillations.
+
+[Illustration: THE HIPPODROME.]
+
+The other performance was in some respects more extraordinary still.
+There was a mast set up in the ground, thirty or forty feet high. At the
+ground, ten feet from the foot of the mast, there commenced an inclined
+plane, formed of a plank about a foot or eighteen inches wide, which
+ascended in a spiral direction round and round the mast till it reached
+the top. A man ascended this plane by means of a large ball, about two
+feet in diameter, which he rolled up standing upon it, and rolling it by
+stepping continually on the ascending side. There was no ledge or guard
+whatever to keep the ball from rolling off the plane--nothing but a
+narrow plank ascending continually, and winding in a spiral manner
+around the mast. This experiment it was quite frightful to see. Several
+of the children who were sitting near Mr. George's party began to cry,
+saying, "O, he will fall--he will fall!" In fact, Jennie could not bear
+to look at him, and so she shut her eyes; and even Mrs. Holiday looked
+another way. But Rollo watched it through, and saw the man go on up to
+the very top of the mast, and stand there on his ball on the top, forty
+feet above the ground, with his hands extended in triumph. After
+remaining there a short time, he came down as he had gone up; and when
+he reached the ground, he rolled his ball along, keeping on it all the
+time, till he came to a chariot which was waiting to receive him. He
+stepped from the ball off to the chariot, and was then driven all around
+the ring, being received every where, as he passed, with the
+acclamations of the spectators.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+CARLOS.
+
+
+One morning, just after breakfast, when Rollo and Jennie were sitting at
+the window of their hotel, looking at a band of about forty drummers
+that were arranging themselves on the Asphaltum, in the Place Vendome,
+in front of the column, preparatory to an exercise of practice on their
+instrument, Mr. George came into the room. Mr. George took up a
+newspaper which was lying upon the table, and, seating himself in a
+large arm chair which was near, he read from it for a few minutes, and
+then, laying down the paper, said,--
+
+"Rollo, how do you pronounce L-o-u-v-o-i-s?"
+
+Mr. George did not speak the word, but spelled it letter by letter.
+
+"I don't know," said Rollo.
+
+"Because," said Mr. George, "that is the name of the hotel where I have
+gone."
+
+"What made you go away from this hotel, uncle George?" asked Jennie.
+"Didn't you like it?"
+
+"Yes," replied Mr. George, "I liked it very much. But I wanted to change
+the scene. I had become very familiar with every thing in this part of
+the city, and with the modes of life in this hotel. So I thought I would
+change, and go to some other quarter of the city, where I could see
+Paris, and Paris life, in new aspects."
+
+"I wish I had gone with you," said Rollo. "I wonder if my father would
+not let me go now. Is there a room for me at your hotel?" he added,
+looking up eagerly.
+
+"I don't know," said Mr. George. "You can ask when you go there. But to
+day I am going to see the Garden of Plants; and you may go with me, if
+you like."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "I should like to go very much."
+
+"And may I go, too?" said Jennie.
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George, "if your mother is willing."
+
+"Well," said Jennie, joyfully, "I'll go and ask her. Only I wish it was
+a garden of flowers instead of a garden of plants."
+
+So Jennie went to ask her mother if she might go with her uncle George.
+She soon returned with her shawl and bonnet on, and then, Mr. George
+leading the way, they all went together down stairs, and got into a
+carriage which was waiting for them at the door. The carriage was an
+open one, with the top turned back, so that they all had a fine
+opportunity to see the streets and the persons passing as they rode
+along.
+
+Mr. George directed the coachman to drive first to his hotel; and the
+carriage, leaving the Place Vendome on the northern side, entered into a
+perfect maze of narrow streets, through which it advanced toward the
+heart of the city.
+
+After a time, they came to a long, straight street, which led across the
+city, through the centre of it, from the river to the Boulevards; and
+when they were about in the middle of this street, the attention of the
+children was attracted by a very long and gloomy-looking building, which
+formed one side of the street for a considerable distance before them.
+It had no windows toward the street, but only a range of square recesses
+in the walls, of the form of windows, but without any glass. Jennie
+asked Mr. George if it was the prison.
+
+"Not exactly," said Mr. George; "and yet there is one room in it where
+there are more than a hundred men, and they are not permitted to speak a
+loud word."
+
+"Let's go and see them," said Rollo.
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George; "we will."
+
+So saying, he called upon the coachman to stop opposite to a great
+archway which opened through the building near the middle of it. Mr.
+George and the children descended from the carriage and went in under
+the archway. Looking through, they saw a large court yard, with grass,
+and trees, and a fountain. They did not, however, go on into this court
+yard, but turned to the right to a very broad flight of steps which
+seemed to lead into the building. There was a man in uniform, with a
+cocked hat upon his head, who stood in the passage way to guard the
+entrance. He made no objection, however, to the party's going in; and so
+they all went on up the stairway.
+
+After passing through a series of magnificent passages and vestibules,
+with very broad staircases, and massive stone balustrades, and other
+marks of a very ancient and venerable style of architecture, Mr. George
+led the way through an open door, where the children saw extended before
+them, as far as the eye could reach, a long range of rooms, opening into
+one another, and all filled with bookshelves and books. The rooms had
+windows only on one side; that is, on the side next the courtyard; and
+the doors which led from one room to the other were all near that side
+of the room. Thus three sides of each room were almost wholly unbroken,
+and they were all filled with bookshelves and books. The doors which led
+from one room to another were all in a range; so that standing at one
+end, opposite to one of these doors, the spectator could look through
+the whole range of rooms to the other end. The distance was, moreover,
+so great, that, though there was a group of several persons standing at
+the farther end of the range of rooms at the time that Rollo entered,
+they looked so small and so indistinct that Rollo could not count them
+to tell how many there were.
+
+"It is a library," said Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George, "it is the National Library of Paris, one of the
+largest libraries in the world. The books have been accumulating here
+for ages."
+
+"I don't see what can be the use of such a large library," said Rollo;
+"nobody can possibly read all the books."
+
+"No," said Mr. George, "they cannot read them all; but they may wish to
+consult them. There are often particular reasons for seeing some
+particular book, which was published so long ago that it is not now to
+be found in common bookstores; in such cases, people come here, and they
+are pretty sure to find the book in this collection."
+
+There were several parties of ladies and gentlemen to be seen, at
+different distances, walking along the range of rooms, all of whom
+seemed to be visitors. Mr. George, himself, walked on, and the children
+followed him. They passed from one apartment to another, amazed at the
+number of books. They were all neatly arranged on bookshelves, which
+extended from the floor to the ceiling, and were protected by a wire
+netting in front; so that, although the visitors could see the books,
+they could not take them down.
+
+Mr. George and the children walked on, until, at length, they came to
+the end of the range of rooms, and there they found another range,
+running at right angles to the first, back from the street. They turned
+and walked along through these rooms, too. The floors of all the rooms
+were very smooth and glossy, being formed of narrow boards, of
+dark-colored wood, curiously inlaid, and highly polished. Rollo told
+Jennie that he believed he could slide on such floors as well as he
+could on ice, if he thought they would let him try. He knew very well,
+however, that it would not be proper to try. Besides, he observed that
+there were standing at different distances along the range of rooms
+certain men, in uniform, who seemed to be officers stationed in the
+library to guard against any thing like irregularity or disorder on the
+part of the visitors.
+
+Besides the books, there were a great many other things to interest
+visitors in the rooms of the library, such as models of buildings,
+statues, collections of coins, medals, and precious gems, and other
+similar curiosities. These things were arranged on tables and in cases
+made expressly for them, and placed in the various rooms. The tables and
+cases occupy, generally, the central parts of the rooms that they were
+placed in, so as not to interfere with the use of the sides of the rooms
+for books. In one place was a collection of some of the oldest books
+that ever were printed, showing the style of typography that prevailed
+when the art of printing was first discovered. Mr. George took great
+interest in looking at these. Rollo and Jennie, however, did not think
+much of them; and so, while their uncle was examining these ancient
+specimens, they went to the windows and looked out into the court yard.
+This court formed a green and beautiful garden, shaded with trees and
+adorned with fountains and walks. The visitors could see that the
+buildings of the library extended in long ranges all around it.
+
+At length, at the end of the second range of rooms, the party came to a
+third range, which was parallel to the first, and which extended along
+the back side of the court yard. The children could not go into these
+apartments, for the entrance to them was closed by a glass partition.
+They could, however, look through the partition and see what there was
+within. They beheld a very long hall, which was several hundred feet in
+length, apparently, and quite wide, and it was lined on both sides with
+bookshelves and books. Long tables were extended up and down this hall,
+with a great number of gentlemen sitting at them, all engaged in silent
+study. Some were reading; some were writing; some were looking at books
+of maps or engravings. There were desks at various places up and down
+the room, with officers belonging to the library sitting at them, and
+several messengers, dressed in uniform, going to and fro bringing books.
+Mr. George explained to the children that there was another entrance to
+this room, leading from the court yard by a separate staircase, and that
+any person who wished to read or study might go in there and sit at
+those tables, only he must be still, and not disturb the studies of the
+rest. If he wished for any book, he could not go and get it from the
+shelves, but must write the title of it in full on a slip of paper, and
+carry it to one of the desks. The officer would take the slip and give
+it to one of the messengers, who would then go and get the book.
+
+After looking through the glass partition at this great company of
+readers and students until their curiosity was satisfied, the children
+turned away, and Mr. George conducted them back through the long ranges
+of rooms by the same way that they came. When, at length, they got back
+to the staircase where they had come up, Mr. George, instead of going
+out where he had come in, descended by another way, through new
+corridors and passages, until he came to a room where a considerable
+number of people were sitting at tables, looking at books of engravings.
+The sides of this room, and of several others opening into it, were
+filled with bound volumes of prints and engravings, some plain and some
+colored, but very beautiful. Many of the volumes were very large; but
+however large they might be, it was very easy to turn over the leaves
+and see the pictures, for the tables, or rather, desks, in the middle of
+the room, were so contrived that a book, placed upon them, was held at
+precisely the right slope to be seen to advantage by persons sitting
+before it. Mr. George told the children, in a whisper, that any one
+might ask for any book there was there, and the attendants would place
+it on one of the tables for him, where he might sit and look at the
+prints in it as long as he pleased.
+
+"Some day," continued Mr. George, "we will come here and look over some
+of these books; but to-day we must go to the Garden of Plants."
+
+Mr. George then led the children back to the carriage, and ordered the
+coachman to drive to his hotel.
+
+The hotel was situated on the site of an open square, which, though by
+no means so grand and magnificent as the Place Vendome, was still a very
+pleasant place.
+
+There was a fountain in the centre, with a large basin of water around
+it. Outside of this basin the square was paved with asphaltum, and was
+as hard and smooth as a floor. The pavement was shaded with trees, which
+were planted at equal distances all over it; and under the trees there
+were seats, where various persons were sitting. There were many
+children, too, playing about under the trees, some trundling hoop, some
+jumping rope, and some playing horses.
+
+The carriage stopped at the door of the hotel, and Mr. George took the
+children up to his room. It was a front room, and it looked out upon the
+square. The children went to the window, and, while Mr. George was
+getting ready to go, they amused themselves by looking at the children
+that were playing on the square.
+
+Among the other children, there was a boy, apparently about eight years
+of age, who was sitting apart from the rest of the children, on a bench
+by himself. His complexion was dark, and his hair very black and glossy.
+He was very neatly and prettily dressed, though in a very peculiar
+style, his costume being quite different from any thing that Rollo had
+ever before seen. He had a ball in his hand, which now and then he
+tossed into the air.
+
+"He has not any body to play with," said Rollo to Jennie. "I have a
+great mind to go down and play with him while uncle George is getting
+ready."
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George; "you can go. I shall not be ready for
+nearly half an hour. We do not wish to get to the Garden of Plants
+before twelve o'clock."
+
+Rollo hesitated a little about going down, and while he was hesitating
+the boy rose from his seat and came toward the hotel. He entered under
+the archway, and presently Rollo heard him coming up the staircase. He
+then determined to hesitate no longer; so he went out into the passage
+way to see him.
+
+The boy had reached the top of the staircase when Rollo went out, and
+was just then coming along the hall. He looked at Rollo with a smile as
+he came toward him, and this encouraged Rollo to speak to him.
+
+"Can't you find any one to play with you?" said Rollo.
+
+The boy shook his head, but did not speak.
+
+He meant by this that he did not understand what Rollo said; but Rollo
+thought he meant that he could not find any one to play with him.
+
+"I will play with you," said Rollo; and as he spoke he held out his
+hands, with the wrists together and the palms open between them, in a
+manner customary with boys for catching a ball.
+
+The boy understood the sign, though he did not understand the words. He
+tossed the ball to Rollo, and Rollo caught it. Rollo then tossed it back
+again. Presently Rollo made signs to the boy to sit down upon the floor
+at one end of the hall, while he sat down at the other, explaining his
+wishes also at the same time in words. The boy talked too, in reply to
+Rollo, accompanying what he said with signs and gestures. They got along
+thus together in their play very well, each one imagining that he helped
+to convey his meaning to the other by what he said, while, in fact,
+neither understood a word that was spoken by the other, and so took
+notice of nothing but the signs.
+
+Rollo listened attentively once or twice to short replies that his new
+friend made to him, in order to see if he could not distinguish some
+words in it that he could understand; but he could not; and he finally
+concluded that it must be some other language than French that the boy
+was speaking. He was sorry for this; for he could understand short
+sentences in French pretty well, and could speak short sentences himself
+in reply. When, however, he tried to speak to the boy in French, he
+observed that he did not appear to understand him any better than when
+he spoke in English. This confirmed him in the opinion that the boy must
+belong to some other nation.
+
+After playing together for some time with the ball, the two boys began
+to feel quite acquainted with each other. Rollo wished very much to find
+out his new companion's name; so he asked him, in English,--
+
+"What is your name?"
+
+The boy smiled, and throwing the ball across again to Rollo as he spoke,
+said something in reply; but it was a great deal too much to be his
+name. What he said was, when interpreted into English, "My father
+bought this ball for me, and gave two francs for it."
+
+Then Rollo thought he would try French; so he translated his question,
+and asked it in French.
+
+"And I am going to carry it with me to Switzerland and Italy," said the
+boy, speaking still in the unknown tongue.
+
+"That can't be your name, either," said Rollo, "I am very sure."
+
+Then, after a moment's pause, he added, in an eager voice and manner, as
+if a new idea had suddenly struck him,--
+
+"We are going to the Garden of Plants--uncle George, and Jennie, and I;
+wouldn't you like to go, too?"
+
+The boy smiled, and held out his hands for Rollo to roll the ball to
+him, saying something at the same time which to Rollo seemed totally
+unmeaning.
+
+"He does not understand me, I suppose; but I know how I can explain it
+to him."
+
+So he rose from the floor, and, by means of a great deal of earnest
+gesticulation and beckoning, he induced the boy to get up too, and
+follow him. Rollo led the way into his uncle's chamber. The boy seemed
+pleased, though a little timid, in going in.
+
+"Uncle George," said Rollo, "here is a boy that cannot talk. Are you
+willing that I should invite him to go with us to the Garden of Plants?"
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George; "though I don't see how you are going to do it."
+
+Rollo led the boy to the window, and pointed to the carriage, which
+stood down before the door below. Then he opened a map of Paris which
+lay upon the table, and found the Garden of Plants laid down upon it,
+and showed it to the boy. Then he pointed to his uncle George, to
+Jennie, and to himself, and then to the carriage. Then he made a motion
+with his hand to denote going. By these gesticulations he conveyed the
+idea quite distinctly to his new acquaintance that they were all going
+to the Garden of Plants. He then finally pointed to the boy himself, and
+also to the carriage, and looked at him with an inquiring look, which he
+meant as an invitation to the boy to accompany them. The boy paid close
+attention to all these signs; and when Rollo had finished, instead of
+either nodding or shaking his head, in token of his accepting or
+declining the invitation, as Rollo expected he would have done, he took
+up the map, and, making certain mysterious gestures, which Rollo could
+not comprehend, he walked off rapidly out of the room.
+
+Rollo looked at his uncle George with an expression of great
+astonishment on his countenance.
+
+"What does that mean?" said he.
+
+"Perhaps he has gone to ask his father or his mother," suggested Mr.
+George.
+
+"He has," exclaimed Rollo, "he has; that's it, I'm sure."
+
+So Rollo went out immediately into the hall to wait till the boy came
+back.
+
+In a few minutes a door opened, which led into a suite of apartments in
+the rear of the hotel, and the boy, with the map in his hand, came into
+the hall, nodding his head, and looking very much pleased; talking all
+the time, moreover, in a very voluble but perfectly unintelligible
+manner. A moment after he came the door opened again, and a very
+respectably dressed man, of middle age, came into the hall. The boy
+pointed to Rollo, and said something to this man.
+
+"Are you going to the Garden of Plants?" said the man to Rollo, speaking
+in English, though with a very decidedly foreign accent.
+
+"Yes, sir," said Rollo.
+
+"And did you invite Carlos to go with you?"
+
+"Yes, sir," said Rollo; "only I did not know that his name was Carlos.
+He told me something very different from that. What language is it that
+he talks? Is it French?"
+
+"No," replied the man, "it is Spanish. He is a Spanish boy. He cannot
+understand a word of French or English. But he may go with you to the
+Garden of Plants."
+
+"Are you his father, sir?" asked Rollo.
+
+"No," replied the man, "I am his father's courier."[E]
+
+[E] A courier is a traveling servant. A good courier understands all the
+principal languages of Europe, and is acquainted with all the routes and
+modes of travelling. He takes all the care of the party that employs
+him; makes bargains for them; finds out good hotels for them to go to;
+pays the bills; obtains all necessary information; and does every thing
+for them, in fact, which is required in making the tour of Europe.
+
+So saying, the man passed on, leaving Rollo and Carlos together.
+
+"Come, Carlos," said Rollo, "let us go into uncle George's room, and see
+if he is not ready to go."
+
+Rollo beckoned as he spoke, and Carlos, understanding his action, though
+not his words, immediately followed him. In fact, during all his
+subsequent intercourse with Carlos, Rollo continued to talk to him just
+as if he could understand, and Carlos talked also in reply.
+
+It is true, that, if Rollo had been asked whether he supposed that
+Carlos understood what he said, he would have answered no; and yet he
+continually forgot to act upon this belief, but talked on, under the
+influence of a sort of instinctive feeling that good plain English, such
+as he took care to speak, could not fail to convey ideas to any boy that
+heard it. Under the influence of a similar feeling, Carlos talked
+Spanish to Rollo, each imagining that the other understood him, at least
+in some degree, while, in fact, neither understood any thing but the
+signs and gestures which accompanied the language.
+
+Just as they were about to set out, one of Mr. George's friends called
+to see him; and when he found that the party were going to the Garden of
+Plants, he wished to go too. There was scarcely room for so many in the
+carriage, and so Rollo proposed that he and Carlos should go in an
+omnibus.
+
+"There is an omnibus," said he, "that goes there through the Boulevards,
+close by here; and Carlos and I will go in that, and then we can find
+you in the garden."
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George.
+
+"Come, Carlos, come with me," said Rollo; "we are going to find an
+omnibus."
+
+Carlos perceived that Rollo was proposing that they should go somewhere
+together, but he did not know where, or for what; nor did he care. He
+was ready to assent to any thing. So he and Rollo, leaving the rest of
+the party in the act of getting into the carriage, walked along up the
+street which led to the Boulevards.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+THE GARDEN OF PLANTS.
+
+
+Rollo and Carlos had not gone far before they came to a place where two
+children had set up what they called a _chapel_, under the archway which
+led to the interior of the house where they lived. A real chapel, in
+Catholic countries, is any consecrated place, large or small, containing
+an altar, and a crucifix, and other sacred emblems, where masses are
+said and other religious services are performed. Real chapels are made
+in the alcoves of churches, in monuments over tombs, and in other
+similar places, and children have toy chapels to play with. There are
+little crucifixes, and candlesticks, and communion cups, and other
+similar things for sale at the toy shops. Sometimes the children buy
+these things and arrange them on a small table, in a corner of the room,
+for play, just as in Protestant countries they arrange a pulpit and
+chairs for a congregation, and so make believe have a meeting. Sometimes
+the children bring out their chapel and set it near the sidewalk, by
+the street, and then hold out a little plate to ask the passers by for
+contributions. There are almost always some people more good matured
+than wise, who will give them a sou or two; and thus they often made up
+quite a little purse of money.
+
+In this case, as Rollo and Carlos were passing along, the little girl,
+who was very nicely dressed in holiday costume, held out a small plate,
+saying,--
+
+"One sou, gentlemen, if you please, for the little chapel."
+
+Rollo and Carlos stopped to look at the chapel.
+
+"What pretty little candles!" said Rollo, talking half to himself and
+half to Carlos, "and how tall! I wish I had some of them for Jennie."
+
+"I have got a chapel at home," said Carlos.
+
+"She wants us to give her a sou," continued Rollo. "Would you?"
+
+"And I will show it to you if you ever come to Barcelona," said Carlos.
+
+"I don't know whether to give her a sou or not," said Rollo. "Would you,
+Carlos?"
+
+"My candlesticks are of real silver," said Carlos, "but these are not."
+
+Rollo finally concluded to give the girl a sou, thinking that he was in
+some measure bound to do it, after having stopped so long to look at her
+chapel; and then he and Carlos walked on as before. As they went on they
+continued to talk together, from time to time, Rollo in English and
+Carlos in Spanish, neither of them, however, paying any attention to
+what the other said. This was a very good plan, for there was a sense of
+companionship in this sort of conversation, though it communicated no
+ideas. They took the same kind of pleasure in it, probably, that birds
+do in the singing of their mates. In fact, it often happens, when a
+group of children are talking together in a language which they all
+understand, that each one talks for the pleasure of talking, and none of
+them pay any attention to what the others say.
+
+Presently the two boys reached the Boulevard. It was a very broad and
+magnificent street, and the sidewalks were very wide. The sidewalks,
+wide as they were, were thronged with foot passengers, and the street
+itself was full of carriages. Very soon an omnibus came along; but it
+was full. There are a great many curious contrivances about a French
+omnibus; one of which is, that there is a sign, with the word
+_complete_, in French, painted upon it in large letters. The sign is
+placed directly over the door of the omnibus behind, and is attached to
+the top of the coach by a hinge at the lower edge. When the omnibus is
+full, the conductor who rides on the step behind pulls up this sign, by
+means of a cord attached to it, and then all the people on the sidewalks
+can see that there is no room for them. When any passengers get out so
+as to make room for others, then the conductor lets this sign down, and
+it lies flat upon the top of the coach, out of sight, until the omnibus
+gets full again, when it is drawn up as before.
+
+"Complete," said Rollo, pointing to the sign, which was up and in full
+view. "That omnibus is full."
+
+"Yes," said Carlos, "I see him. His cap is so high that he can't wear it
+in the omnibus, and so he has to take it off."
+
+"But there will be another one pretty soon," said Rollo.
+
+"If I were a soldier," said Carlos, "I would never get into an omnibus
+at all. I would have an elegant black horse with a long tail, and I
+would go galloping through the streets on my horse."
+
+At length an omnibus came along which was not full, and Rollo and Carlos
+got into it. After meeting with various adventures on the way, and
+changing from one omnibus to another, according to the system which
+prevails in Paris, they finally reached the gates of the garden. There
+was a sentry box on each side of the gates, and soldiers, with bayonets
+fixed, guarding the entrance. There were, however, a great many people
+going in. The soldiers did not prevent them. They had orders to allow
+all persons who were quiet and orderly, and had no dogs with them, to
+enter freely. So Rollo and Carlos passed directly in.
+
+Rollo's first feeling was that of astonishment at the extent and variety
+of the scenes and prospects which opened before him. Instead of a small
+garden, laid out in gravel walks, and beds of flowers, as he had
+imagined, he found himself entering a perfect maze of winding walks,
+which were bordered on all sides by an endless variety of enclosures,
+groups of shrubbery, groves, huts, cabins, yards, ponds of water, and
+every other element of rural scenery. The whole, as it first burst upon
+Rollo's eye, formed a most enchanting landscape, and extended farther
+than he could see. The walks meandered about in the most winding and
+devious ways. The spaces between them were enclosed by neat little
+fences of lattice work, and were divided into little parks, or fields,
+in each of which some strange and unknown animals were feeding. There
+were ponds, with a quantity of birds of the gayest plumage sailing upon
+them; and green slopes, with goats, or deer, or sheep, of the most
+extraordinary forms and colors, grazing in them. At one place Rollo
+stopped to look at a small basin of water, with a broad stone margin all
+around it, which was completely covered with turtles and tortoises of
+all colors and sizes. The animals were lying there asleep, basking in
+the sun. A little farther on was a beautiful little yard, almost
+surrounded with trees and shrubbery, where three or four ostriches, with
+long necks, and heads higher than Rollo's, were walking about with a
+very majestic air. And farther still there was a little field, the
+occupants of which excited the astonishment of the boys to a still
+higher degree. They were three giraffes. One of them, with his head
+twenty feet in the air, was cropping the leaves from the top of a tall
+tree. The second was standing still, quietly looking at the groups of
+visitors that were gazing upon him from without the paling; while the
+third was amusing himself by galloping about the yard, with a sort of
+rolling motion that it was most astonishing to see.
+
+Rollo and Carlos advanced among these scenes, drawn from one to the
+other by the new objects which every where presented themselves to
+view, and uttering to each other continual exclamations of astonishment.
+In fact, they talked incessantly to one another as they walked on,
+pointing out, each to the other, whatever attracted their attention, and
+making all sorts of comments upon what they saw.
+
+Presently a low, bellowing sound was heard among the trees at a little
+distance.
+
+"Hark!" said Rollo, in English, putting his hand upon Carlos's shoulder.
+"What's that? I hear a roaring."
+
+"Hark!" said Carlos, in Spanish. "What's that? I hear a roaring."
+
+Neither of the boys understood the words which the other spoke; but they
+knew very well that they were both listening to and talking about the
+roaring.
+
+"Let's go and see what it is," said Rollo.
+
+"We'll go and see," said Carlos.
+
+So off they started together in the direction of the sound. They walked
+along a short distance, passing several beautiful little enclosures,
+where quiet and gentle-looking animals, of various forms, were grazing
+in their mimic pastures, or lying at rest before the doors of the
+thatched-roofed cabins that had been built for them instead of barns,
+until at length they came to a place where a long range of buildings
+opened to view before them, the fronts of which, instead of showing
+doors and windows, were formed of gratings of iron. The interior of this
+range was divided into compartments, each one of which formed an immense
+cage. These cages were all filled with lions, tigers, panthers,
+leopards, hyenas, and other ferocious beasts of prey. Some were walking
+to and fro restlessly in their narrow prisons; others were lying down;
+and others still were crouched in a corner of their cage, where they
+remained motionless, gazing with a sullen air upon the visitors who
+stood looking at them from without the grating.
+
+Rollo and Carlos walked back and forth in front of these cages several
+times, looking at the animals. They admired the beauty and grace of the
+tigers and leopards, and the majestic dignity of the lions. There were a
+lion and a lioness together in one cage. The lioness was walking
+restlessly to and fro; while the lion sat crouched in the back part of
+the cage, with an expression upon his countenance in which the lofty
+pride and majesty of his character, and the patience and submissiveness
+which pertained to his situation, were combined.
+
+"Poor fellow!" said Rollo; "if I had you and your cage in Africa, where
+you belong, I would open the door and let you go."
+
+Just at this moment the attention of both Rollo and Carlos was suddenly
+arrested by a most unearthly sound at a little distance from them, which
+seemed to be intermediate between a scream and a roar. It was so loud,
+too, as to be truly terrific.
+
+"What's that?" said Rollo, suddenly, in English.
+
+"Ah, what a dreadful bray that is!" said Carlos, in Spanish.
+
+"Would you go out there and see what it is?" said Rollo.
+
+"Hark! Let's go there and see what it is," said Carlos.
+
+So the boys started together to go in the direction of the sound.
+
+It is impossible, however, for a stranger in the Garden of Plants to be
+sure of going any considerable distance in any one direction, for the
+walks are meandering and circuitous beyond description. They wind about
+perpetually in endless mazes; and the little fields, and parks, and
+gardens that are enclosed between them are so enveloped in shrubbery,
+and the view, moreover, is so intercepted with the huts and cabins
+built for the animals, and with the palings and networks made to confine
+them, that it is impossible to see far in any direction. Besides, there
+is so much to attract the attention, and to excite curiosity and wonder,
+at every step, that one is continually drawn away from one alley to
+another, till he gets hopelessly bewildered.
+
+The huts and cabins which were made for the animals were very curious,
+and many of them were so pretty, with their rustic walls and thatched
+roof, that Rollo was extremely pleased with them. He stopped before one
+of them, which was the residence of a pair of beautiful lamas, and told
+Carlos that he meant to ask his uncle George to take particular notice
+how it was made, and so make one for him for a play-house when he got
+home.
+
+"And I wonder," said he, "where my uncle George and Jennie are. I don't
+see how we are ever to find them. I did not know that this garden was so
+large and so full of trees and bushes."
+
+"Look there!" said Carlos, pointing through an opening in the shrubbery
+along the winding walk. "What are they doing there?"
+
+Rollo, understanding the gesture, though not the words, turned in the
+direction that Carlos indicated, and saw that there was quite a crowd
+of men, women, and children at the place, all engaged, evidently, in
+looking at something or other very intently.
+
+"Let's go and see," said Rollo.
+
+So the boys went along that way together. They soon came in view of a
+very high and strong palisade, which, though it was half concealed by
+trees and shrubbery, evidently enclosed quite a considerable area, in
+the centre of which was a large stone building, like a castle, with
+projecting wings and towers, and immense gateways opening into it on
+various sides. This building was the residence of all the
+_monsters_--the elephants, the giraffes, the rhinoceros, and the
+hippopotamus. Each of these species had its own separate apartment in
+the castle; and the ground surrounding it, within the great palisade,
+was divided into as many yards as there were doors; so that each kind of
+animal had its own proper enclosure. In one of these enclosures the
+rhinoceros was walking about, clothed in his plated and invulnerable
+hide; and in the next there were two elephants. The crowd of people were
+chiefly occupied in looking at the elephants. The palisade was very
+heavy and strong, being formed of timbers pointed at the top, and nearly
+as high as the elephants could reach. These palisades were, however,
+not close together. They were far enough apart to allow of the elephants
+putting their trunks through to the people outside, and also to give the
+people a good opportunity to look. Though these timbers were thus set at
+some distance apart from each other, they wore still connected together,
+and all held firmly in their places, by two iron rails which passed
+through them all, one near the top, and the other near the bottom, of
+the palisade, all along the range. They thus formed a fencing so heavy
+and strong that even the elephants could not break it down.
+
+The visitors could not come quite up to the elephants; for outside of
+this great palisade, at a distance of about three feet from it, there
+was a high paling, made expressly to keep the spectators back. At the
+time when Rollo and Carlos came to the place the elephants were putting
+their trunks through to the people, in order to be fed with nuts, cake,
+gingerbread, and other such things which the people had ready to give
+them. Sometimes they would order the elephants to hold up their trunks
+and open their mouths, and then the men would try to toss pieces of
+gingerbread in. The elephants were always ready to do this when ordered,
+though their mouths, when they opened them, were so small that the
+people very seldom succeeded in aiming the missile so that it would go
+in.
+
+Rollo and Carlos looked about among the crowd that were assembled at
+this place to see if Mr. George was among them; but he was not; and so,
+after amusing themselves for some time with the elephants, they walked
+along to see what else there was in the garden.
+
+There were a great many people in the garden besides those who seemed to
+have come to see the animals. There were groups of children, that seemed
+to belong in the vicinity, playing in the _walks, some jumping ropes,
+and others_ building little houses of gravel stones. There were women
+seated on benches in various little shady nooks and corners, some
+sewing, others taking care of babies; while others, at little stands and
+stalls, sold gingerbread and cakes. At one place Rollo stopped to look
+at two little children that were playing in the gravel and throwing the
+little pebble stones about. Their grandmother, who was sitting near,
+said something to them in French.
+
+"What does she say?" asked Carlos.
+
+"She says," replied Rollo, "you must not throw gravel in your little
+sister's face."
+
+The question in this case and the answer fitted each other very well;
+but it was a mere matter of accident, for neither of the boys
+understood what the other had said.
+
+Pretty soon the boys came to a place where a great number of people were
+standing on a sort of parapet, and leaning upon an iron railing, where
+they seemed to be looking down into some cavity. They hurried to the
+place, and, stepping up upon the parapet, they looked down too, and
+found there a range of dens below the surface of the ground, all full of
+bears. These dens were sunken yards, six or eight feet deep, and
+enclosed with perpendicular walls all around, so that the bears could
+not possibly get out. There were iron railings around the top, and a
+great many people were standing there looking down to the bears. There
+were four or five of these yards, all in a row; and as there were many
+great trees overshadowing them, the place was cool and pleasant. Some of
+the bears were walking about on the stone pavement which formed the
+bottom of the dens; others were sitting on their hind legs, and holding
+up their fore paws to catch the pieces of gingerbread which were thrown
+down to them by the people above. There were a number of little birds
+hopping about there, picking up the crums that were left, though they
+took care to keep out of the way of the bears. Rollo and Carlos bought
+some cakes of gingerbread of a woman who kept a stall near by, and,
+breaking them into pieces, they threw them down to the bears. They threw
+the most to a great white bear that was in one of the dens, and who
+particularly attracted their attention. Rollo told Carlos that he
+supposed this bear must have come from the north pole. The boys were
+both by this time rather hungry; but they were so much interested in
+seeing the bears try to catch the pieces of gingerbread that they did
+not think to eat any of it themselves, but threw it all down to them,
+all except one piece which Rollo gave to a little girl who stood beside
+him, to let her throw it, because she had none of her own. For this
+kindness the girl thanked Rollo, in French, in a very polite and proper
+manner.
+
+After being satisfied with seeing the bears, the boys wandered on
+wherever they saw the most to attract them, until at length they came to
+what is called the palace of the monkeys, which pleased them more than
+any thing they had seen. This palace is an enormous round cage, as high
+as a house, and nearly a hundred feet in diameter, with a range of stone
+buildings all around it on the back side. These buildings have little
+rooms in them, where the monkeys live in the winter, and where they
+always sleep at night. They go out into the cage to play. The cage is
+formed of slender iron posts and railing, so that the people standing
+outside can see the monkeys at their sports and gambols. They play with
+each other in every possible way, and frolic just as if they were in
+their native woods. They climb up the smooth iron posts, pursuing one
+another; and then, leaping across through the air, they catch upon a
+rope, from which they swing themselves across to the branch of a tree.
+Some of these branches have bells attached to them; and the monkey, when
+he gets upon such a one, will spring it up and down till he sets the
+bell to ringing, and then, assisted by the return of the branch, he
+bounds away through the air to some rope, or pole, or railing that he
+sees within his reach. The agility which these animals display in these
+feats is truly astonishing.
+
+Rollo and Carlos watched their evolutions with great interest. There was
+an excellent place to see, for the land opposite the cage ascended in
+such a manner that those more remote could look over the heads of those
+that were nearer. Besides this, there were quite a number of chairs
+under the trees, at the upper part of this ascent; and Rollo, perceiving
+that several of them were vacant, sat down in one, and made a sign to
+Carlos to sit down in another. They could now look at the monkeys, and
+rest at the same time. Presently a woman came along and said to Rollo,
+in French,--
+
+"Please pay the chairs, sir."
+
+Rollo recollected immediately that at all such places in Paris chairs
+were kept to be let, those who used them paying two sous apiece for the
+privilege. So he took out four sous and gave the woman.
+
+"I did not think of there being any thing to pay for these chairs," said
+he to Carlos. "But then, I don't care. It is worth four sous to get a
+good rest, as tired as I am. I'm pretty hungry, too. I wish I had not
+given all my gingerbread to the bears."
+
+Carlos made no reply to this suggestion; though there is no doubt that
+he would have readily assented to what Rollo said, if he had understood
+it. The boys remained some time looking at the monkeys, and then
+strolled away into other parts of the garden. Very soon they came to a
+place where Rollo spied at some distance before him, under some immense
+old trees in a sort of a valley, what he thought was a restaurant.
+
+"See these monstrous big trees!" said Carlos; "and there are tables
+under them."
+
+The boys made all haste to the spot, and found to their great joy that
+it was a restaurant. There was a plain but very picturesque-looking
+house, antique and venerable; and before it, on a green, under the
+spreading branches of some enormous old trees, a number of small tables,
+with seats around them.
+
+"Now, Carlos," said Rollo, "we will have some bread and butter and a
+good cup of coffee."
+
+[Illustration: THE RESTAURANT.]
+
+So they sat down at one of the pleasantest tables, and very soon a
+waiter came to see what they would have. Rollo called for coffee and
+bread and butter for two. In a short time the waiter came, bringing two
+great cups, which he filled half with coffee and half with boiled milk.
+He brought also a supply of very nice butter, and a loaf of bread shaped
+like a stick of wood. It was about as large round as Rollo's arm, and
+twice as long. The waiter laid this bread across the table for Rollo and
+Carlos to cut off as much from it as they might want. This is what they
+call having "bread at discretion."
+
+The boys enjoyed this banquet very much indeed. Besides the coffee, they
+had water, which they sweetened in the tumblers with large lumps of
+white sugar. They talked all the time while they were eating, each in
+his own language, and laughed very merrily. "After all," said Rollo,
+"this is the very best place in the whole garden. Feeding the bears is
+very good fun; but this is infinitely better."
+
+After remaining for half an hour at the table, and eating till their
+appetites were completely satisfied, they concluded to go back and see
+the monkeys again.
+
+In the mean time, Mr. George and his friend, with Jennie, had been
+engaged in an entirely different part of the garden; for the whole
+enclosure is so large that it takes many days to see the whole. On one
+side, bordering on a street, there is a long row of houses and gardens,
+occupied by professors, who give courses of lectures on the plants and
+animals which the garden contains. On another is a magnificent range of
+buildings, occupied as a museum, containing endless collections of dried
+plants, of minerals and shells, of skeletons, and the stuffed skins of
+birds and beasts. Then there is a very large tract of level land,
+between two splendid avenues, all laid out in beds of plants and
+flowers, forming a series of parterres, extending as far as the eye can
+reach, and presenting the gayest and most beautiful combination of
+colors that can be conceived. Jennie was very much delighted with all
+these things, as she walked about in these parts of the garden with her
+uncle, though she was somewhat uneasy all the time because she could not
+see any thing of Rollo.
+
+"I don't believe," said she at last to her uncle, as they were standing
+on the margin of a beautiful little artificial pond, full of lilies and
+other aquatic plants, "I don't believe that we can find him at all in
+such a large garden."
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George; "there'll be no difficulty. There is one
+universal rule for finding boys in the Garden of Plants."
+
+"What is that?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Go to the places where they keep the monkeys and the elephants," said
+Mr. George; "and if you don't find them there at once, wait a few
+minutes, and they'll be pretty sure to come."
+
+It was as Mr. George had predicted; for, on going to the palace of the
+monkeys, there they found Rollo and Carlos laughing very heartily to see
+a big monkey holding a little one in its arms as a human mother would a
+baby.
+
+The party, when thus united, went together once more over the principal
+places where the two divisions of it had gone separately before, so that
+all might have a general idea of the whole domain; and then, going out
+at a different gate from the one by which they had entered, they went
+home, all resolving to come again, if possible, at some future day.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+AN EXCURSION.
+
+
+ONE day, about one o'clock, after Rollo had been in Paris about a
+fortnight, he came into the hotel from a walk which he had been taking,
+and there found his mother and Jennie putting on their bonnets. He asked
+them where they were going. They said they were going to take a ride
+with Mr. George.
+
+"May I go, too?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Why--yes," said his mother, hesitatingly. "I suppose there will be
+room. Or you may stay at home here with your father. He is asleep in his
+room."
+
+It is generally the case with children, both boys and girls, when they
+are young, that if they can get any sort of consent, however reluctant,
+from their parents, to any of their requests, they are satisfied, and
+take the boon thus hesitatingly accorded to them as readily as if it had
+been granted to them in the freest and most cordial manner. With
+gentlemen and ladies, however, it is different. They generally have
+more delicacy, and are seldom willing to accept of any favor unless
+circumstances are such that it can be granted in a very free and cordial
+manner. They will scarcely ever, in any case, ask to be permitted to
+join any party that others have formed; and when they do ask, if they
+perceive the slightest doubt or hesitation on the part of their friends
+in acceding to their proposal, they infer that it would be, for some
+reason or other, inconvenient for them to go; and they accordingly, at
+once, give up all intention of going.
+
+Rollo, though still a boy, was beginning to have some of the honorable
+sentiments and feelings of a man; and when he perceived that his mother
+hesitated a little about granting his request, he decided immediately
+not to go and ride. Besides, he liked the idea of staying with his
+father.
+
+"Well," said he, "I will stay here. My father may wish for something
+when he wakes up."
+
+"I don't suppose, however, after all," added his mother, "that it is
+really necessary for you to stay on his account. His bell is within
+reach; and Alfred will come immediately when he rings."
+
+"But I should _like_ to stay," said Rollo; "and besides, I can get ahead
+one more day in my French."
+
+Rollo was writing a course of French exercises, and his task was one
+lesson for every day. The rule was, that he was to write this exercise
+immediately after breakfast, unless he had written it before; that is,
+either on the same day before breakfast, or on a previous day. Now,
+Rollo desired to be free after breakfast, for that was a very pleasant
+time to go out. Besides, there were often plans and excursions formed
+for that time, which he was invited to join; and he could not join them
+unless his lesson for the day had been written. So he took pains to
+write his exercises, as much as possible, in advance. Whenever there
+came a rainy day he would write two or three lessons, and sometimes he
+would write early in the morning. He was now nearly a week in advance.
+Instead of being satisfied with this, however, he began to be quite
+interested in seeing how far ahead he could get. This feeling was what
+led him to think that he would take this opportunity to write a French
+lesson.
+
+Accordingly, when his mother and Jennie had gone, he seated himself at
+his table and began his work. The writing of the exercise took about an
+hour. When the work was finished, and while Rollo was preparing to put
+his books away, he heard a movement in his father's room. He got up
+from his seat and opened the door, gently, saying,--
+
+"Father, are you awake?"
+
+"Yes," said his father. "Are you there, Rollo?"
+
+Rollo found his father sitting up in a great arm chair, by the side of
+his bed. He had a dressing gown on.
+
+"How do you feel, father?" said Rollo.
+
+"I think I feel better," said Mr. Holiday. As he said this he put on his
+slippers, and then stood up upon the rug that lay in front of his bed.
+
+"Yes," said he, "I certainly feel better--a great deal better."
+
+"I am very glad," said Rollo.
+
+"Where is your mother?" asked Mr. Holiday, as he walked across the room
+to the glass.
+
+"She has gone out to take a ride," said Rollo, "with uncle George and
+Jennie."
+
+"That's right," said Mr. Holiday. "I am very glad that she has gone. And
+have you been staying here to take care of me?" he asked.
+
+"Yes, sir," said Rollo. "I have been writing another French lesson. I
+have got them all written now to next Friday."
+
+"Ah," said Mr. Holiday, "that's excellent. That's what the farmers call
+being forehanded."
+
+"Now, Rollo," said Mr. Holiday, after a little pause, "I feel so much
+better that I should like to go somewhere and take a ride myself. I
+don't care much where. If there is any where that you wish to go, I will
+go with you. Come, I will put myself entirely at your disposal. Let us
+see what you can do to give me a ride and entertain me."
+
+Rollo was very much pleased indeed with this proposal. He decided
+instantly what he would do. He had seen that morning an _affix_, as the
+French call it, that is, a placard posted on a wall among a hundred
+others, setting forth that there was to be a balloon ascension that
+afternoon at the Hippodrome, at three o'clock, to be followed by various
+equestrian performances. Rollo immediately mentioned this to his father,
+and asked him if he should be willing to go there. His father said that
+he should; adding, that he would like to see the balloon go up very
+much.
+
+"Then when we come home," said Rollo, "you must ride slowly along
+through the Elysian Fields, and let me see the booths, and the games
+that they are playing there."
+
+"Very well," said his father; "I will take some newspapers with me, and
+I will sit still in the carriage while you go and see the booths and the
+games."
+
+This plan being thus resolved upon, and all arranged, Alfred was
+summoned and ordered to get the carriage ready, and to put the top down.
+When Alfred reported that the carriage was at the door, Mr. Holiday and
+Rollo went down and got in, and were soon in the midst of the stream of
+equipages that were going up the grand avenue of the Elysian Fields.
+They arrived at the Hippodrome in time to get an excellent seat, and
+they remained there two hours. They saw the balloon, with a man and
+young girl in the car below it, rise majestically into the air, and soar
+away until it was out of sight. The fearless aeronauts seemed entirely
+at their ease while they were ascending to the dizzy height. They sat in
+the car waving banners and throwing down bouquets of flowers as long as
+they could be seen.
+
+After this there was a series of performances with horses, which
+delighted Rollo very much. Troops of men came out upon the arena,
+mounted on beautiful chargers, and armed with lances and coats of mail,
+as in ancient times. After riding their elegantly caparisoned horses
+round and round the ring several times, they formed into squadrons and
+attacked each other with their lances in sham battles. After this,
+fences of hurdles were put up across the course, in various places, and
+girls, mounted on beautiful white horses and elegantly dressed, rode
+around, leaping over the fences in a surprising manner. These and
+similar performances continued until near five o'clock, and then the
+immense assembly broke up, and the people, some in carriages and some on
+foot, moved away over the various roads and avenues which diverge from
+the Star.
+
+Rollo and his father got into their carriage, which had been waiting for
+them all this time, and passing the Triumphal Arch, they entered the
+Grand Avenue of the Elysian Fields, on their return to the city.
+
+They descended the slope which led down to the Round Point at a rapid
+rate. Here, after passing the Round Point, the road became level, and
+the region of groves and booths, and of games and frolicking, began.
+
+"Now," said Rollo, "I should like to drive slowly, so that, if I come to
+any thing that I wish to get out and see, I can see it."
+
+"Very well," said his father; "give Alfred your orders."
+
+"Alfred," said Rollo, "draw up as near as you can to the sidewalk on the
+right hand, and walk the horses, so that I can see what there is."
+
+"And in the mean time," said Mr. Holiday, "I will read my papers."
+
+So Mr. Holiday took his newspapers out of his pocket and began to read
+them, while Rollo, standing up in the carriage, began to survey the
+crowd that filled the walks and groves that bordered the avenue, in
+order to select some object of attraction to be examined more closely.
+
+"Only I wish, father," said Rollo, "that I had somebody here with me to
+go and see the things--Jennie or Carlos. I wish Carlos was here."
+
+"It is very easy to go and get him," said his father, with his eyes
+still on his newspaper.
+
+"May I?" said Rollo.
+
+"Any thing you please," said Mr. Holiday. "You are in command this
+afternoon. You may give Alfred any orders you please."
+
+"Then, Alfred," said Rollo, "drive to the Hotel Louvois as fast as you
+can."
+
+As he said this, Mr. Holiday folded up his paper and Rollo took his
+seat, while Alfred, turning the horses away from the sidewalk, set them
+to trotting briskly along the avenue.
+
+"Only, father," said Rollo, "I shall prevent your reading your papers."
+
+"No matter for that," said Mr. Holiday. "I shall like a good brisk ride
+along the Boulevards quite as well."
+
+The horses, kept always by Alfred in the very best condition, trotted
+forward at a rapid rate, leaving scores of omnibuses, cabs, and
+citadines behind, and keeping pace with the splendid chariots of the
+French and English aristocracy that thronged the avenue. Presently Rollo
+observed a peculiar movement among the carriages before them, as if they
+were making way for something that was coming; and at the same time he
+saw hundreds of people running forward from the groves and booths,
+across the side avenues, to the margin of the carriage way.
+
+"The emperor!" said Alfred, drawing in his horses at the same time.
+
+An instant afterward, Rollo, who, on hearing Alfred's words, started
+from his seat and stood up in the carriage to look, saw two elegantly
+dressed officers, in splendid uniforms, galloping along toward them in
+the middle of the avenue. They were followed at a little distance by two
+others; and then came a very beautiful barouche, drawn by four glossy
+black horses, magnificently caparisoned. Two gentlemen were seated in
+this carriage, one of whom bowed repeatedly to the crowd that were
+gazing at the spectacle from the sides of the avenue as he rode rapidly
+along. Behind this carriage came another, with a gentleman and a lady in
+it, and afterward two more troopers. The whole cavalcade moved on so
+rapidly, that, before Rollo had had scarcely time to look at it, it had
+passed entirely by.
+
+"The emperor!" said Alfred to Rollo. "He is going out to take a ride."
+
+"Is that the emperor?" exclaimed Rollo. "He looks like any common man.
+But if I had four such beautiful black horses as he has got, I should be
+glad. I would drive them myself, instead of having a coachman."
+
+The movement and the sensation produced by the passing of the emperor
+and his train along the avenue immediately subsided, and the other
+carriages resumed their ordinary course. Alfred's horses trotted on
+faster than ever. A thousand picturesque and striking objects glided
+rapidly by--the trees and the booths of the Elysian Fields; the tall,
+gilded lampposts, and the spouting fountains of the Place de la
+Concorde; omnibuses, cabs, wagons, chariots, and foot passengers without
+number; and, finally, the tall column of the Place Vendome. Winding
+round in a graceful curve through this magnificent square, the carriage
+rolled on in the direction of the Boulevards, and, after going rapidly
+on for nearly half a mile in that spacious avenue, it turned into the
+street which led to the hotel. It stopped, at length, before the door,
+and Rollo got out, while Mr. Holiday remained in the carriage. Rollo
+went up stairs, and after about five minutes he came down again,
+bringing not only Carlos with him, but also his uncle George. Mr.
+Holiday invited Mr. George to go with them for the remainder of the
+ride. This invitation Mr. George accepted; and so the two gentlemen
+taking the back seat, and Rollo and Carlos the front, Alfred took them
+all back to the Elysian Fields together.
+
+They remained nearly an hour in the Elysian Fields. During this time
+Rollo's father and his uncle George staid in the carriage by the
+roadside, talking together, while Rollo and Carlos went in among the
+walks and groves to see the various spectacles which were exhibited
+there. They would come back from time to time to the carriage, in order
+that Rollo might describe to his father what they found, or ask
+permission to take part in some amusement. For instance, at one time he
+came and said, very eagerly,--
+
+"Father, here is a great whirling machine, with ships and horses going
+round and round. Carlos and I want to ride on it. The horses are in
+pairs, two together. Carlos can get on one of them, in one of the pairs,
+and I on the other. We can go round twenty times for two sous."
+
+"Very well," said his father.
+
+So Rollo and Carlos went back to the whirling machine. It was very
+large, and was very gayly painted, and ornamented with flags and
+banners. The vessels and the horses were attached to the ends of long
+arms, which were supported by iron rods that came down from the top of
+the central post, so that they were very strong. The horses were as
+large as small ponies, and the vessels were as big as little boats--each
+one having seats for four children. When Rollo and Carlos went back, the
+machine had just taken up its complement of passengers for one turn, and
+was then commencing its rotation. There were a great many persons
+standing by it, pleased to see how happy the children were in going
+round so merrily. There was an iron paling all around the machine, to
+keep the spectators at a safe distance, otherwise they might come too
+near, and so be struck, and perhaps seriously hurt, by the horses or the
+boats, when they were put in motion.
+
+As soon as the twenty turns had been taken the machine stopped, and the
+children who had had their ride were taken off the horses and out of the
+boats, all except a few who were going to pay again and have a second
+ride. Rollo and Carlos then went inside the enclosure, and, going up
+some steps placed there for the purpose, they mounted their horses.
+Very soon the machine began to revolve, and they were whirled round and
+round twenty times with the greatest rapidity. The arms of the machine,
+too, were long, so that the circle which the horses and the vessels
+described was quite large, and the whole twenty revolutions made quite a
+considerable ride.
+
+After finishing their circuit and dismounting from their horses, the
+boys next came to a whirling machine, which revolved vertically instead
+of horizontally; that is, instead of whirling the rider round and round
+near the level of the ground, it carried them up, over, and down. There
+was a great wheel, which revolved on an axis, like a vertical mill
+wheel. This wheel was double, and between the two circumferences the
+seats of the passengers were hung in such a manner that in revolving
+they swung freely, so as to keep the heads of the people always
+uppermost. These seats had high backs and sides, and a sort of bar in
+front for the people to take hold of, otherwise there would have been
+great danger of their falling out. As it was, they were carried so
+swiftly, and so high, and the seats swung to and fro so violently when
+the machine was in rapid motion, that the men and girls who were in the
+seats filled the ear with their screams and shouts of laughter.
+
+Rollo and Carlos, after seeing this machine revolve, went to the
+carriage to ask if they might go in it the next time.
+
+"No," said Mr. Holiday. "I am not sure that it is safe."
+
+So the boys went away from the carriage back under the trees again, and
+walked along to see what the next exhibition might be. The carriage
+moved on in the avenue a little way to keep up with them.
+
+The boys strolled along through the crowd a little while longer, looking
+for a moment, as they passed, now at the stalls for selling gingerbread
+and cakes, now at a display of pictures on a long line,--the sheets
+being fastened to the line by pins, like clothes upon a clothes
+line,--now at a company of singers, singing upon a stage under a canopy,
+and now again at a little boy, about seven or eight years old, who was
+tumbling head over heels on a little carpet which he had spread on the
+ground, and then carrying round his cap to the bystanders, in hopes that
+some of them would give him a sou. At length their attention was
+attracted by some large boys, who were engaged at a stand at a little
+distance in shooting at a mark with what seemed to be small guns. These
+guns, however, discharged themselves by means of a spring coiled up
+within the barrel, instead of gunpowder; and the bullets which they
+shot were peas. Rollo had seen these shooting-places before, when he
+went through the Fields on the first Sunday after he came; so he did not
+stop long here, but called Carlos's attention to something that he had
+never seen before, which was going on at a place a little under a tree,
+a little farther along. A large boy seemed to be pitching quoits. There
+were a number of persons around him looking on. There was a sort of box
+placed near the tree, the bottom of which was about two feet square. It
+had a back next the tree, and two sides, but it had no front or top. In
+fact, it was almost precisely like a wheelbarrow without any wheel,
+legs, or handles.
+
+[Illustration: SINGING IN THE OPEN AIR.]
+
+The bottom or floor of this box had a great many round and flat plates
+of brass upon it, about four inches in diameter, and about four inches
+apart from each other. The player had ten other plates in his hand, of
+the same size with those which were upon the bottom of the plate. He
+took these, one by one, and standing back at a certain distance, perhaps
+about as far as one good long pace, pitched them, as boys do quoits, in
+upon the floor of the box. What he tried to do was, to cover up one of
+the disks in the box so that no part of it could be seen. If he did so
+he was to have a prize; and he paid two sous for the privilege of
+playing. The prizes consisted of little articles of porcelain, bronzes,
+cheap jewelry, images, and other similar things, which were all placed
+conspicuously on shelves against the tree, above the box, in view of the
+player.
+
+It seemed to the bystanders as if it would be not at all difficult to
+toss the disks so as with ten to cover one; but those who tried seemed
+to find it very difficult to accomplish the object. Even if the disks
+which they tossed fell in the right place, they would rebound or slide
+away, and sometimes knock away those which were already well placed.
+Still, after trying once, the players wore usually unwilling to give up
+without trying a second, and even a third and fourth time, so that they
+generally lost six or eight sous before they were willing to stop;
+especially as the man himself would now and then play the disks, and he,
+having made himself skilful by great practice, found no difficulty in
+piling up his ten disks wherever he wished them to go.
+
+"I could do it, I verily believe," said Rollo. "I should like to try. I
+mean to go and ask my father if I may."
+
+So Rollo went to the carriage to state the case to his father, and ask
+his permission to see if he could not pitch the disks so as to cover one
+of the plates on the board. His father hesitated.
+
+"So far as trying the experiment is concerned," said Mr. Holiday, "as a
+matter of dexterity and skill, there is no harm; but so far as the hope
+of getting a prize by it is concerned, it is of the nature of gaming."
+
+"I should think it was more of the nature of a reward for merit and
+excellence," said Mr. George.
+
+"No," said Mr. Holiday; "for in one or two trials made by chance
+passengers coming along to such a place, the result must depend much
+more on chance than on adroitness or skill.
+
+"I will tell you what you may do, Rollo," continued Mr. Holiday. "You
+may pay the man the two sous and try the experiment, provided you
+determine beforehand not to take any prize if you succeed. Then you will
+pay your money simply for the use of his apparatus, to amuse yourself
+with a gymnastic performance, and not stake it in hope of a prize."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "that is all I want." And off he ran.
+
+"It seems to me that that is a very nice distinction that you made,"
+said Mr. George, as soon as Rollo had gone, "and that those two things
+are very near the line."
+
+"Yes," replied Mr. Holiday, "it is a nice distinction, but it is a very
+true one. The two things are very near the line; but then, one of them
+is clearly on one side, and the other on the other. For a boy to pay for
+the use of such an apparatus for the purpose of trying his eye and his
+hand is clearly right; but to stake his money in hopes of winning a
+prize is wrong, for it is gaming. It is gaming, it is true, in this
+case, on an exceedingly small scale. Still it is gaming, and so is the
+beginning of a road which has a very dreadful end. Is not it so?"
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George, "I think it is."
+
+As might have been expected, Rollo did not succeed in covering one of
+the disks. The disks that he threw spread all over the board. The money
+that he paid was, however, well spent, for he had much more than two
+sous' worth of satisfaction in making the experiment.
+
+Rollo found a great many other things to interest him in the various
+stalls and stands that he visited; but at length he got tired of them
+all, and, coming back to the carriage, told his father that he was ready
+to go home.
+
+"Very well," said his father. "I don't know but that your uncle George
+and I are ready, too, though we have not quite got through with our
+papers. But we can finish them at home."
+
+So Rollo and Carlos got into the carriage, and all the party went home
+to dinner.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+ROLLO'S NARRATIVE.
+
+
+One evening, when Rollo had been making a long excursion during the day
+with his uncle George, and had dined with him, at the close of it, at a
+restaurant's in the Boulevards, he went home about eight o'clock to the
+hotel to see his father and mother and Jennie, and tell them where he
+had been. He found his mother in her room putting on her bonnet. She
+said she was going to take a ride along the Boulevards with a gentleman
+and lady who were going to call for her.
+
+"And where is father?" said Rollo.
+
+"He has gone to bed, and is asleep by this time. You must be careful not
+to disturb him."
+
+"And Jennie?" asked Rollo.
+
+"She has gone to bed, too," said his mother; "but she is not asleep, and
+I presume she will be very glad to see you. You can go in her room."
+
+"Well, I will," said Rollo. "But, mother, I should like to go and ride
+with you. Will there be room for me?"
+
+"Yes," said his mother. "There will be room, I suppose, in the carriage;
+but it would not be proper for me to take you, for I am going on an
+invitation from others. The invitation was to me alone, and I have no
+right to extend it to any body else.
+
+"But this you can do, if you please," continued his mother. "You can
+take our carriage, and let Alfred drive you, and so follow along after
+our party. Only in that case you would not have any company. You would
+be in a carriage alone."
+
+"Never mind that," said Rollo. "I should like that. I would put the top
+back, and then I could see all around. I should have a grand ride. I'll
+go. I wish Jennie had not gone to bed; she could have gone with me."
+
+"No," replied his mother; "Jennie is not well to-night. She has got
+cold, and she went to bed early on that account. But she will be very
+glad to have you go and see her."
+
+So Rollo went into Jennie's room. As soon as he opened the door, Jennie
+pushed aside the curtains, and said,--
+
+"Ah, Rollo, is that you? I am very glad that you have come."
+
+"I can't stay but a little while," said Rollo. "I am going to take a
+ride with mother."
+
+"Are you going with mother?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Not in the carriage with her," replied Rollo; "but I am going in the
+same party. I am going to have a carriage all to myself."
+
+"O, no, Rollo," said Jennie, in a beseeching tone. "Don't go away. Stay
+here with me, please. I am all alone, and have not any body to amuse
+me."
+
+"But you will go to sleep pretty soon," said Rollo.
+
+"No," replied Jennie; "I am not sleepy the least in the world. See."
+
+Here Jennie opened her eyes very wide, and looked Rollo full in the
+face, by way of demonstrating that she was not sleepy.
+
+Rollo felt very much perplexed. When he pictured to himself, in
+imagination, the idea of being whirled rapidly through the Boulevards,
+on such a pleasant summer evening, in a carriage which he should have
+all to himself, with the top down so that he could see every thing all
+around him, and of the brilliant windows of the shops, the multitudes of
+ladies and gentlemen taking their coffee at the little round tables on
+the sidewalk in front of the coffee saloons, the crowds of people coming
+and going, and the horsemen and carriages thronging the streets, the
+view was so enchanting that it was very hard for him to give up the
+promised pleasure. He, however, determined to do it; so he said,--
+
+"Well, Jennie, I'll stay. I will go out and tell mother that I am not
+going to ride, and then I will come back."
+
+For the first half hour after Mrs. Holiday went away, Rollo was occupied
+with Jennie in looking over some very pretty French picture books which
+Mrs. Holiday had bought for her that day, to amuse her because she was
+sick. Jennie had looked them all over before; but now that Rollo had
+come, it gave her pleasure to look them over again, and talk about them
+with him. Jennie sat up in the bed, leaning back against the pillows and
+bolsters, and Rollo sat in a large and very comfortable arm chair, which
+he had brought up for this purpose to the bedside. The books lay on a
+monstrous square pillow of down, half as large as the bed itself, which,
+according to the French fashion, is always placed on the top of the bed.
+Rollo and Jennie would take the books, one at a time, and look them
+over, talking about the pictures, and showing the prettiest ones to each
+other. Thus the time passed very pleasantly. At length, however, Jennie,
+having looked over all the books, drew herself down into the bed, and
+began to ask Rollo where he had been that day.
+
+"I have been with uncle George," said Rollo. "He said that he was going
+about to see a great many different places, and that I might go with him
+if I chose, though he supposed that most of them were places that I
+should not care to see. But I did. I liked to see them all."
+
+"What places did you go to?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Why, first we went to see the workshops. I did not know before that
+there were so many. Uncle George says that Paris is one of the greatest
+manufacturing places in the world; only they make things by hand, in
+private shops, and not in great manufactories, by machinery. Uncle
+George says there must be as much as eight or ten square miles of these
+shops in Paris. They are piled up to six or eight stories high. Some of
+the streets look like ranges of chalky cliffs facing each other, such as
+we see at some places on the sea shore."
+
+"What do they make in the shops?" asked Jennie.
+
+"O, all sorts of curious and beautiful things. They have specimens of
+the things that they make up, put up, like pictures in a frame, in
+little glass cases, on the wall next the street. We walked along through
+several streets and looked at these specimens. There were purses, and
+fringes, and watches, and gold and silver chains, and beautiful
+portemonnaies, and clocks, and jewelry of all kinds, and ribbons, and
+opera glasses, and dressing cases, and every thing you can think of."
+
+"Yes," said Jennie, "I have seen all such things in the shop windows in
+the Palais Royal and in the Boulevards."
+
+"Ah, those are the shops where they sell the things," said Rollo; "but
+these shops that uncle George and I went to see are where they make
+them. We went to one place where they were making artificial flowers,
+and such beautiful things you never saw. The rooms were full of girls,
+all making artificial flowers."
+
+"Why did not you bring me home some of them?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Why--I don't know," replied Rollo. "I did not think to ask if I could
+buy any of them.
+
+"Then, after we had gone about in the workshops till we had seen enough,
+we went to the Louvre to see the paintings; though on the way we stopped
+to see a _crčche_."
+
+Rollo pronounced the word very much as if it had been spelled crash.
+
+"A crash!" exclaimed Jennie. "Did a building tumble down?"
+
+"O, no," said Rollo, "it was not that. It was a place where they keep a
+great many babies. The poor women who have to go out to work all day
+carry their babies to this place in the morning, and leave them there to
+be taken care of, and then come and get them at night. There are some
+nuns there, dressed all in white, to take care of the babies. They put
+them in high cradles that stand all around the room."
+
+"Were they all crying?" asked Jennie.
+
+"O, no," said Rollo, "they were all still. When we went in they were all
+just waking up. The nuns put them to sleep all at the same time. Every
+cradle had a baby in it. Some were stretching their arms, and some were
+opening their eyes, and some were trying to get up. As fast as they got
+wide awake, the nuns would take them up and put them on the floor, at a
+place where there was a carpet for them to creep upon and play."
+
+"I wish I could go and see them," said Jennie.
+
+"You can," replied Rollo. "Any body can go and see them. The nuns like
+to have people come. They keep every thing very white and nice. The
+cradles were very pretty."
+
+"Did they rock?" asked Jennie.
+
+"No," replied Rollo; "they were made to swing, and not to rock. They
+were up so high from the floor that they could not be made to rock very
+well. We stayed some time in this place, and then we went away."
+
+"And where did you go next?" asked Jennie.
+
+"We went to the Louvre to see the famous gallery of paintings. It is a
+quarter of a mile long, and the walls are covered with paintings on both
+sides, the whole distance."
+
+"Except where the windows are, I suppose," said Jennie.
+
+"No," replied Rollo, "there are no interruptions for windows. The
+windows are up high in the ceiling, for the room is very lofty. There is
+room for two or three rows of paintings below the windows. It is a
+splendid long room."
+
+"Were the pictures very pretty?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Not very," said Rollo. "At least, I did not think so; but uncle George
+told me it was a very famous gallery. There were a great many other
+rooms besides, all carved and gilded most magnificently, and an immense
+staircase of marble, wide enough for an army to go up and down. There
+were several large rooms, too, full of ancient marble statues; but I did
+not like them very much. They looked very dark and dingy. The paintings
+were prettier than they.
+
+"There were a great many persons in the painting gallery at work copying
+the paintings," continued Rollo. "Some were girls, and some were young
+men. There was one boy there not much bigger than I."
+
+"I don't see how so small a boy could learn to paint so well," said
+Jennie.
+
+"Why, he was not so very small," said Rollo. "He was bigger than I am,
+and I am growing to be pretty large. Besides, they have excellent
+schools here where they learn to draw and to paint. We went to see one
+of them."
+
+"Did it look like one of our schools?" asked Jennie.
+
+"O, no," replied Rollo; "it seemed to me more like a splendid palace
+than a school. We went through an iron gate into a court, and across the
+court to a great door, where a man came to show us the rooms. There were
+a great many elegant staircases, and passage ways, and halls, with
+pictures, and statues, and models of cities, and temples, and ruins, and
+every thing else necessary for the students."
+
+"Were the students there?" asked Jennie.
+
+"No," replied Rollo; "but we saw the room where they worked, and we saw
+the last lesson that they had."
+
+"What was it?" asked Jennie.
+
+"It was a subject which the professor gave them for a picture; and all
+of them were to paint a picture on that subject, each one according to
+his own ideas. We saw the paintings that they had made. There were
+twenty or thirty of them. The subject was written on a sheet of paper,
+and put up in the room where they could all see it."
+
+"What was the subject?" asked Jennie.
+
+"It was something like this," replied Rollo: "An old chestnut tree in a
+secluded situation, the roots partly denuded by an inundation from a
+stream. Cattle in the foreground, on the right. Time, sunset."
+
+"And did all the pictures have an old chestnut tree in them?" asked
+Jennie.
+
+"Yes," said Rollo; "and the roots were all out of the ground on one
+side, and there were cows in the foreground of them all. But the forms
+of the trees, and the position of the cattle, and the landscape in the
+back ground were different in every one."
+
+"I should like to see them," said Jennie.
+
+"Then," said Rollo, "when we came away from this place we walked along
+on the quay by the side of the river, looking over the parapet down to
+the bank below."
+
+"Was it a pretty place?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "a very pretty place indeed. There were great
+floating houses in the water, for the baths, with wheels turning in the
+current to pump up water, and little flower gardens along the brink of
+the stream. At least, in some places there were flower gardens; and in
+others there was a wall along the water, with boys sitting on the edge
+of it, fishing. Presently we came to a place where there was an opening
+in the parapet and stairs to go down to the water. You go down two or
+three steps first, and then the stairs turn each way. At the turning
+there was a man who had fishing poles, and nets, and fishing lines to
+sell or let. He had some to let for three sous an hour. I proposed to
+uncle George that we should hire two of them and go down and fish a
+little while."
+
+"And what did he say?" asked Jennie.
+
+"He laughed, and said that for him to spend his time while he was in
+Paris in fishing in the Seine would be perfectly preposterous. He said
+that his time in Europe cost him not less than a dollar for every hour."
+
+"A dollar for every hour?" exclaimed Jennie.
+
+"Yes," replied Rollo. "He says that his two passages across the Atlantic
+will have cost three hundred dollars, and the other expenses of his tour
+as much as five hundred more, which makes eight hundred dollars, and
+that he will not have more than one hundred days, probably, from the
+time of his landing in England to the time of his sailing again. That
+makes it about eight dollars a day. Now, there are not more than eight
+hours in a day suitable for going about and seeing what is to be seen;
+so that his time in the middle of the day costs him a dollar an hour;
+and he could not afford, he said, to spend it in fishing.
+
+"However," continued Rollo, "he said that I might look at the man's
+fishing apparatus; and if I found that it was different from that which
+the boys used in America, I might buy some of it to carry home."
+
+"And did you?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Yes," replied Rollo. And so saying, he put his hand in his pocket and
+took out a small parcel put up in a piece of French newspaper. He
+unrolled this parcel and showed Jennie what it contained. Jennie sat up
+in bed very eagerly in order to see it. First there came out a small
+net.
+
+"This net, you see," said Rollo, "is to be put upon a hoop or a ring of
+wire when I get to America. I did not buy a hoop, because it would fill
+up my trunk too much. But I can make one when I get home.
+
+"Then here are the fishing lines," continued Rollo. "I bought two of
+them. They were very cheap."
+
+The fishing lines were very pretty. Each had a small round cork upon the
+end of a quill. The corks were red, touched with blue. There was a
+sinker for each, made of large shot.
+
+"The man put in several spare sinkers for me," resumed Rollo, "in case
+these should come off." So saying, he opened a small paper and showed
+Jennie several large-sized shot, each of which had a cleft in the side
+of it for putting in the line. The intention was that the lead should be
+closed over the line, after the line had been inserted in it, by means
+of a light blow with a hammer, and thus the sinker would be secured to
+its place.
+
+"I like a net best to catch fishes with," said Jennie, "because that
+does not hurt them."
+
+"True," said Rollo, "a net is a great deal better on that account. You
+see I put a hoop around to keep the mouth of the net open, and then
+fasten it to the end of a long handle. Then you stand on the bank of the
+brook and put the net down into the water, and when a fish comes along
+you dip him up."
+
+"Yes," said Jennie, "that is an excellent way."
+
+"Then you could put him in a small pail of water," said Rollo, "and
+carry him home, and then you could put him in a bowl and see him swim
+about."
+
+"Yes," said Jennie, "I wish you would give me this net."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "I will. I shall go down by the river again some
+day, and then I can buy another for myself."
+
+"So you can," said Jennie: "or, if you don't get another, I can lend you
+mine when you wish to fish with it."
+
+So Rollo put up his fishing tackle again, and then Jennie asked him
+where else he went.
+
+"Why, we walked along the quay," said Rollo, "a long way, past several
+bridges, until at last we came to a bridge leading over to an island in
+the river, where there was a great cathedral church, which uncle George
+said he wished to see. It was the Church of Notre Dame. It was an
+immense great church, with two towers very high; but it was very old.
+The outside of it seemed to be all crumbling to pieces."
+
+"Did you go in?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Yes," replied Rollo. "It is open all the time, and people are all the
+time going and coming. We went in. There was an old woman sitting just
+inside the door, with a string of beads in her hands, counting them.
+There were two or three other old women there, knitting. I could not see
+much of the inside of the church when we first went in, there were so
+many columns; but I could hear the birds flying about and singing away
+up high among the vaults and arches."
+
+"The birds inside the church!" said Jennie. "I should think they would
+drive them out."
+
+"I don't know how they could drive them out," said Rollo, "it was so
+high up to where they were flying. The arch of the ceiling seemed like a
+stone sky. There were so many pillars to keep up this roof, that, when
+we first went in, we could not see any end to the church at all.
+However, we walked along, and after a while we came to the end.
+
+"There were a great many curious things to see in the church," continued
+Rollo. "There were a great many little chapels along the sides of it,
+and curious images sculptured in stone, and people doing curious things
+all about in different places. We walked about there for half an hour.
+At last we found a congregation."
+
+"A congregation!"
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "we came to a place, at last, which was divided off
+by a kind of railing; and there was a congregation there, sitting in
+chairs. Some were kneeling in chairs, and some were kneeling on the
+stone floor. They were reading in little prayer books and looking
+about."
+
+"Was any body preaching to them?" asked Jennie.
+
+"No," said Rollo, "but there were some priests at the altar doing
+something there; but I could not understand what they were doing. We
+stopped there a little while, and then we came away. We walked along to
+another part of the church, and at length we came to another enclosure,
+where a great many people were collected. Mr. George went up to see what
+it was, and he said he believed it was a baptism; but I could not get
+near enough to see."
+
+"And what did you do next?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Why, we came out of the church, and crossed over by a bridge to this
+side of the river, and then walked down along the quay till we came to a
+place where there was a tall bronze column, somewhat like this column in
+the Place Vendome. Uncle George said that he wished to see it, because
+it stood on the place where a famous old castle and prison used to stand
+in former times, called the Bastile. He said that the people made an
+insurrection and battered the old prison down, because the government
+was so cruel in shutting up innocent prisoners in it. They built fires
+against the doors, and battered against them with heavy timbers until
+they broke them in, and then they let the prisoners out and set the
+prison on fire. Uncle George said that I should take great interest in
+reading about it one of these days; but I think I should like to read
+about it now."
+
+"I should, too," said Jennie.
+
+"They afterward took away all the stones of the Bastile," continued
+Rollo, "and made this tall bronze column in its place. There is a figure
+of a man on it, standing on tiptoe."
+
+"I should think he would blow down in a high wind," said Jennie.
+
+"I don't know why he does not, I am sure," rejoined Rollo. "I wanted to
+go up to the top of the column and see how he was fastened there; but
+uncle George said he was too tired. So we came away. In fact, I was very
+willing to come away, for I saw a great crowd at a certain broad place
+on the sidewalk, not far from there, and I wished to go and see what it
+was."
+
+"And did you go?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Yes," replied Rollo, "and I found it was a man who had made a great
+ring of people all about him, and was trying to get them to give fifteen
+sous to see him shut himself up in a small box. The box was on the
+pavement, all ready. It was quite small. It did not seem possible that a
+man could be shut up in it."
+
+"How big was it?" asked Jennie.
+
+"O, I don't know, exactly," said Rollo. "It was quite small."
+
+"Was it no bigger than that," said Jennie, holding her two hands a few
+inches apart, so as to indicate what she would consider quite a small
+box.
+
+"O, yes," said Rollo, "it was a great deal bigger than that. It was only
+a little smaller than you would think a man could get into. The box was
+square, and was made of tin, but painted black.
+
+[Illustration: PERFORMANCE ON THE BOULEVARDS.]
+
+"There was an organ at one end of the ring, with a man playing upon it,
+to draw the crowd together. In front of the organ was a woman, with a
+baby in her arms, and another little child playing about her. The man
+said that this was his family, and that he had to support them by his
+experiments. In front of the woman was the box. In front of the box was
+the man, who stood there, generally, telling what he was going to do,
+and calling upon the people to throw in their sous. In front of the man
+was a carpet, on the pavement, and in the middle of the carpet a tin
+plate. From time to time the people would throw sous over into the
+circle. The man would then pick them up and put them into the plate, and
+tell the people how many there lacked. There must be fifteen, he said,
+or he could not perform the experiment. He kept talking all the time to
+the people, and saying funny things to make them laugh.
+
+"At last all the fifteen sous were in, and then the man went to the box.
+He brought out a soldier who was standing among the people, and placed
+him near the box, so that he might shut the cover down when the man was
+in. The man then stepped into the box. The upper edge of it was not
+higher than his knees. He then began to kneel down in the box, crossing
+his legs under him; and then he crouched his body down into it, and
+curled in his head, and then----
+
+"Jennie!" said Rollo, interrupting himself. He observed that Jennie was
+very still, and he was not sure that she was listening.
+
+Jennie did not answer. She was fast asleep.
+
+"She's gone to sleep," said Rollo, "without hearing the end of the
+story. However, the soldier put the lid down, and shut the man entirely
+in."
+
+Rollo thought that, as he was so near the end, he might as well finish
+the story, even if his auditor was asleep.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+CONCLUSION.
+
+
+Rollo's adventures in Paris were brought, at length, for the time being,
+to a somewhat abrupt termination, by an invitation which he received
+suddenly at breakfast one morning, from his uncle George, to set off
+with him the next day for Switzerland. Rollo was very eager to accept
+this invitation from the moment that it was offered him. It is true that
+he was not at all tired of Paris; and there were a great many places,
+both in the city and in the environs, that he was still desirous to see.
+
+Rollo had only one day's notice of the proposed journey to Switzerland,
+and that day was spent almost entirely in getting the passports ready.
+This business devolved on Rollo himself, as his uncle was engaged in
+some other way that day; and he proposed, therefore, that Rollo should
+undertake the work of getting the passports stamped. Rollo accordingly
+did so. He took a carriage and went round to the various offices, and
+attended to the business very well, though he encountered some
+difficulties in doing it. His uncle George was very much pleased when he
+came home that night and found that Rollo had got the passports all
+ready. Carlos went with Rollo to the passport offices, for company,
+though he could not, of course, render him any assistance.[F]
+
+[F] A full account of Rollo's adventures in getting the passports
+stamped will be given in the first chapter of Rollo in Switzerland.
+
+Rollo dined that evening with his uncle George and Carlos at a
+restaurant. There are hundreds of these restaurants scattered all over
+the city of Paris, and many of them are furnished and decorated in a
+style of splendor that is magnificent beyond description. Mr. George
+took Rollo and Carlos to one of the finest of them. It was in the
+Boulevards.
+
+The aspect of the room, when Rollo entered it, was very imposing. It was
+lined on all sides with mirrors, with carved and gilded pilasters
+between them, and a richly ornamented cornice above. The ceiling,
+overhead, was panelled, and was painted in fresco with the most graceful
+and elegant devices. The floor was laid in a beautiful mosaic of wood,
+brilliantly polished. The room was filled with tables, all set out for
+dinner in the nicest manner, with silver plate, elegant porcelain, and
+glasses that reflected the light in the most resplendent manner. A great
+many gay groups of ladies and gentlemen were seated at these tables,
+taking dinner; while the waiters, with snow-white napkins on their arms,
+were walking about in a rapid, but in a very gentle and noiseless
+manner, to wait upon them. At the back side of the room there sat two
+beautiful young women, behind a sort of counter, which was raised a
+little above the rest of the floor, so that they could survey the whole
+scene. It was the duty of these young women to keep the accounts of what
+was ordered at the several tables, and to receive the money which was
+paid by the guests, the waiters carrying it to them from the different
+parties at the tables when they paid. These ladies were the presiding
+officers, as it were, in the saloon; and the guests all bowed to them
+very respectfully, both when they came in and when they went away.
+
+Mr. George selected a table for himself and the two boys, and they had
+an excellent dinner there. There was a printed book, large though thin,
+on every table, giving a list of the different articles--more than five
+hundred in all. From these Mr. George and the boys selected what they
+liked, and the waiters brought it to them.
+
+The party remained at this restaurant, eating their dinner and taking
+their coffee after it, for more than an hour; and then they went away.
+
+That evening Rollo went into his father's room to bid his father good
+by, for he expected to set off for Switzerland the next morning very
+early. He found his father sitting in an arm chair by a window, reading
+a book. Mr. Holiday laid his book down and talked for some time with
+Rollo about his proposed tour in Switzerland, and gave him a great deal
+of preparatory information about the mountains, the glaciers, the
+torrents, the avalanches, and other wonderful things that Rollo expected
+to see. Rollo was very much interested in these accounts.
+
+"I am very glad that uncle George invited me to go with him," said he.
+
+"So am I," said his father.
+
+"Because," added Rollo, "I expect to have a very pleasant time."
+
+"True," replied his father; "but that is not the reason precisely why
+_I_ am glad that he invited you."
+
+"What is your reason, then?" asked Rollo.
+
+"I am glad," replied Mr. Holiday, "because his asking you to go with him
+into Switzerland is a sign that you have been a good boy while under
+his care here in France. Boys that are selfish, troublesome, and
+disobedient, in one ride or journey, find usually that their company is
+not desired a second time. It is now two or three weeks since your uncle
+George invited you to come with him from London to Paris, and during all
+this time you have been mainly under his care; and now he invites you to
+go with him on a still more extended tour. I think you must have
+conducted yourself in a very considerate or gentlemanly manner, and
+proved yourself a pleasant travelling companion, or you would not have
+received this new invitation."
+
+Rollo was very much gratified at hearing his father speak in this
+manner. So he shook hands with him, and bade him good by.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Rollo in Paris, by Jacob Abbott
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROLLO IN PARIS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 22956-8.txt or 22956-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/2/9/5/22956/
+
+Produced by D. Alexander, Janet Blenkinship and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/22956-8.zip b/22956-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8e7ce29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-8.zip
diff --git a/22956-h.zip b/22956-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dce97e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h.zip
diff --git a/22956-h/22956-h.htm b/22956-h/22956-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56d2cda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h/22956-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,5448 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg eBook of Rollo In Paris, by Jacob Abbott.
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+    p {  margin-top: .75em;
+         text-align: justify;
+         margin-bottom: .75em;
+         }
+    h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {
+         text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+         clear: both;
+         }
+    hr { width: 33%;
+	 margin-top: 2em;
+	 margin-bottom: 2em;
+         margin-left: auto;
+         margin-right: auto;
+         clear: both;
+       }
+
+    table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+
+    body{margin-left: 10%;
+         margin-right: 10%;
+        }
+
+    .pagenum  { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
+            /*  visibility: hidden;  */
+                position: absolute;
+                left: 92%;
+                font-size: smaller;
+                text-align: right;
+              } /* page numbers */
+
+    .linenum  {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 4%;} /* poetry number */
+    .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;}
+
+
+     .bbox     {border: solid 2px;}
+    .centerbox { width: 40%;         /* heading box */
+                 margin: 0 auto;
+                 text-align: center;
+                 padding: 1em;
+                 }
+
+    .center   {text-align: center;}
+    .smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+
+    .caption  {font-weight: bold;}
+
+    .figcenter   {margin: auto; text-align: center; margin-top: 3em;}
+
+     img { /* the default inline image has */
+	border: 3px solid; color: #F8F8F8; /* a thin black line border.. */
+	padding: 1px; /* ..spaced a bit out from the graphic */ }
+
+    .footnotes        {border: dashed 1px;}
+    .footnote         {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;}
+    .footnote .label  {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;}
+    .fnanchor         {vertical-align: super; font-size: .8em; text-decoration: none;}
+
+
+    // -->
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Rollo in Paris, by Jacob Abbott
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Rollo in Paris
+
+Author: Jacob Abbott
+
+Release Date: October 11, 2007 [EBook #22956]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROLLO IN PARIS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by D. Alexander, Janet Blenkinship and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+<h1>ROLLO IN PARIS,<br /><br /></h1>
+
+<h4>BY<br /><br /></h4>
+
+<h2>JACOB ABBOTT.<br /><br /></h2>
+
+<p class="center">BOSTON:<br />
+
+W. J. REYNOLDS AND COMPANY,<br />
+
+No. 24 CORNHILL,<br />
+
+1854.<br /><br />
+
+Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1854, by<br />
+<span class="smcap">Jacob Abbott</span>,<br /><br />
+
+In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of
+Massachusetts.<br /><br />
+
+STEREOTYPED AT THE<br />
+
+BOSTON STEREOTYPE FOUNDRY.<br /><br />
+
+G. C. RAND BOOK AND WOOD CUT PRINTER.</p>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 369px;">
+<a name="frontis" id="frontis"></a>
+<img src="images/i003.jpg" width="369" height="600" alt="" title="" />
+<span class="caption">Restaurant (Caf&eacute;) on the Boulevards.<br />Page <a href='#Page_223'><b>223</b></a>.</span>
+</div>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 372px;">
+<img src="images/i004.jpg" width="372" height="600" alt="" title="ROLLO&#39;S TOUR IN EUROPE" />
+</div>
+
+<p><br /><br /></p>
+<div class="centerbox bbox">
+
+<h4>ROLLO'S TOUR IN EUROPE.</h4>
+<p class="center">
+ORDER OF THE VOLUMES.<br />
+<br />
+ROLLO ON THE ATLANTIC.<br />
+ROLLO IN PARIS.<br />
+ROLLO IN SWITZERLAND.<br />
+ROLLO IN LONDON.<br />
+ROLLO ON THE RHINE.<br />
+ROLLO IN SCOTLAND.<br />
+ROLLO IN GENEVA.<br />
+ROLLO IN HOLLAND.
+</p></div>
+
+<p><br /><br /></p>
+
+<h3>PRINCIPAL PERSONS OF THE STORY.</h3>
+
+
+<div class='centered'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="PRINCIPAL PERSONS OF THE STORY.">
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Rollo</span>; twelve years of age.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Mr.</span> and <span class="smcap">Mrs. Holiday</span>; Rollo's father and mother, travelling in Europe.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Thanny</span>; Rollo's younger brother.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Jane</span>; Rollo's cousin, adopted by Mr. and Mrs. Holiday.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Mr. George</span>; a young gentleman, Rollo's uncle.</td></tr>
+</table></div>
+
+<p><br /></p>
+<h2>CONTENTS</h2>
+
+
+<div class='centered'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2"  width="75%" cellspacing="0" summary="CONTENTS">
+<tr><th colspan="2" align='center'>CHAPTER</th><th align='right'>PAGE</th></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>I.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;<span class="smcap">The Arrangements</span>,</td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_11'><b>11</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>II.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;<span class="smcap">Crossing the Channel</span>,</td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_34'><b>34</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>III.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;<span class="smcap">Journey to Paris</span>,</td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_56'><b>56</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IV.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;<span class="smcap">The Garden of the Tuileries</span>,</td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_80'><b>80</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>V.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;<span class="smcap">The Elysian Fields</span>,</td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_100'><b>100</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VI.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;<span class="smcap">A Great Mistake</span>,</td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_122'><b>122</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VII.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;<span class="smcap">Carlos</span>,</td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_143'><b>143</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VIII.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;<span class="smcap">The Garden of Plants</span>,</td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_162'><b>162</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IX.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;<span class="smcap">An Excursion</span>,</td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_183'><b>183</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>X.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;<span class="smcap">Rollo's Narrative</span>,</td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_202'><b>202</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XI.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;<span class="smcap">Conclusion</span>,</td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_222'><b>222</b></a></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="ENGRAVINGS" id="ENGRAVINGS"></a>ENGRAVINGS.</h2>
+
+
+
+<div class='centered'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2"  width="75%" cellspacing="0" summary="ENGRAVINGS">
+<tr><td align='left'>&nbsp;</td><td align='right'><a href='#frontis'><b>Frontispiece.</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Dinner at New Haven,</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_32'><b>32</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Entering Dieppe,</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_49'><b>49</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Arrival,</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_77'><b>77</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Obelisk,</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_105'><b>105</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Hippodrome,</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#HIPPODROME'><b>140</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Restaurant,</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_179'><b>179</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Singing in the Open Air,</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#SINGING'><b>197</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Performance on the Boulevards,</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_219'><b>219</b></a></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><br /><br /><a name="ROLLO_IN_PARIS" id="ROLLO_IN_PARIS"></a>ROLLO IN PARIS.<br /><br /></h2>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Chapter_I" id="Chapter_I"></a><span class="smcap">Chapter I.</span></h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">The Arrangements.</span></h3>
+
+
+<p>Gentlemen and ladies at the hotels, in London, generally dine about six
+or seven o'clock, each party or family by themselves, in their own
+private parlor. One evening, about eight o'clock, just after the waiter
+had removed the cloth from the table where Rollo's father and mother,
+with Rollo himself and his cousin Jennie, had been dining, and left the
+table clear, Mr. Holiday rose, and walked slowly and feebly&mdash;for he was
+quite out of health, though much better than he had been&mdash;towards a
+secretary which stood at the side of the room.</p>
+
+<p>"Now," said he, "we will get out the map and the railway guide, and see
+about the ways of getting to France."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Jennie were at this time at the window, looking at the
+vehicles which were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span> passing by along the Strand. The Strand is a street
+of London, and one of the most lively and crowded of them all. As soon
+as Rollo heard his father say that he was going to get the map and the
+railway guide, he said to Jane,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Let's go and see."</p>
+
+<p>So they both went to the table, and there, kneeling up upon two
+cushioned chairs which they brought forward for the purpose, they leaned
+over upon the table where their father was spreading out the map, and
+thus established themselves very comfortably as spectators of the
+proceedings.</p>
+
+<p>"Children," said Mr. Holiday, "do you come here to listen, or to talk?"</p>
+
+<p>"To listen," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"O, very well," said Mr. Holiday; "then I am glad that you have come."</p>
+
+<p>In obedience to this intimation, Rollo and Jane took care not to
+interrupt Mr. Holiday even to ask a question, but looked on and listened
+very patiently and attentively for nearly half an hour, while he pointed
+out to Mrs. Holiday the various routes, and ascertained from the guide
+books the times at which the trains set out, and the steamers sailed,
+for each of them, and also the cost of getting to Paris by the several
+lines. If the readers of this<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span> book were themselves actually in London,
+and were going to Paris, as Rollo and Jennie were, they would be
+interested, perhaps, in having all this information laid before them in
+full detail. As it is, however, all that will be necessary, probably, is
+to give such a general statement of the case as will enable them to
+understand the story.</p>
+
+<p>By looking at any map of Europe, it will be seen that England is
+separated from France by the English Channel, a passage which, though it
+looks quite narrow on the map, is really very wide, especially toward
+the west. The narrowest place is between Dover and Calais, where the
+distance across is only about twenty-two miles. This narrow passage is
+called the Straits of Dover. It would have been very convenient for
+travellers that have to pass between London and Paris if this strait had
+happened to lie in the line, or nearly in the line, between these two
+cities; but it does not. It lies considerably to the eastward of it; so
+that, to cross the channel at the narrowest part, requires that the
+traveller should take quite a circuit round. To go by the shortest
+distance, it is necessary to cross the channel at a place where Dieppe
+is the harbor, on the French side, and New Haven on the English. There
+are other places of crossing, some of which are attended with one
+ad<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span>vantage, and others with another. In some, the harbors are not good,
+and the passengers have to go off in small boats, at certain times of
+tide, to get to the steamers. In others, the steamers leave only when
+the tide serves, which may happen to come at a very inconvenient hour.
+In a word, it is always quite a study with tourists, when they are ready
+to leave London for Paris, to determine by which of the various lines it
+will be best for their particular party, under the particular
+circumstances in which they are placed, to go.</p>
+
+<p>After ascertaining all the facts very carefully, and all the advantages
+and disadvantages of each particular line, Mr. Holiday asked his wife
+what she thought they had better do.</p>
+
+<p>"The cheapest line is by the way of New Haven," said Mrs. Holiday.</p>
+
+<p>"That's of no consequence, I think, now," said Mr. Holiday. "The
+difference is not very great."</p>
+
+<p>"For our whole party, it will make four or five pounds," said Mrs.
+Holiday.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Mr. Holiday, "I am travelling to recover my health, and
+every thing must give way to that. If I can only get well, I can earn
+money fast enough, when I go home, to replace what we expend. The only
+question is, Which way will be the pleasantest and the most
+comfortable?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Then," said Mrs. Holiday, "I think we had better go by the way of Dover
+and Calais, where we have the shortest passage by sea."</p>
+
+<p>"I think so too," said Mr. Holiday; "so that point is settled."</p>
+
+<p>"Father," said Rollo, "I wish you would let Jennie and me go to Paris by
+ourselves alone, some other way."</p>
+
+<p>The reader who has perused the narrative of Rollo's voyage across the
+Atlantic will remember that, through a very peculiar combination of
+circumstances, he was left to make that voyage under his own charge,
+without having any one to take care of him. He was so much pleased with
+the result of that experiment, and was so proud of his success in acting
+as Jennie's protector, that he was quite desirous of trying such an
+experiment again.</p>
+
+<p>"O, no!" said his father.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, father, I got along well enough in coming over," replied Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"True," said his father; "and if any accident, or any imperious
+necessity, should lead to your setting out for Paris without any escort,
+I have no doubt that you would get through safely. But it is one thing
+for a boy to be put into such a situation by some unforeseen and
+unexpected contingency, and quite another thing<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span> for his father
+deliberately to form such a plan for him."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo looked a little disappointed, but he did not reply. In fact, he
+felt that his father was right.</p>
+
+<p>"But I'll tell you," added Mr. Holiday. "If your uncle George is willing
+to go by some different route from ours, you may go with him."</p>
+
+<p>"And Jennie?" inquired Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Why! Jennie?" repeated Mr. Holiday, hesitating. "Let me think. Yes,
+Jennie may go with you, if she pleases, if her mother is willing."</p>
+
+<p>Jennie always called Mrs. Holiday her mother, although she was really
+her aunt.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you willing, mother," asked Rollo, very eagerly.</p>
+
+<p>Mrs. Holiday was at a loss what to say. She was very desirous to please
+Rollo, and at the same time she wished very much to have Jennie go with
+her. However, she finally decided the question by saying that Jennie
+might go with whichever party she pleased.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo's uncle George had not been long in England. He had come out from
+America some time after Rollo himself did, so that Rollo had not
+travelled with him a great deal. Mr. George was quite young, though he
+was a great<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span> deal older than Rollo&mdash;too old to be much of a companion
+for his nephew. Rollo liked him very much, because he was always kind to
+him; but there was no very great sympathy between them, for Mr. George
+was never much interested in such things as would please a boy. Besides,
+he was always very peremptory and decisive, though always just, in his
+treatment of Rollo, whenever he had him under his charge. Rollo was,
+however, very glad when his father consented that he and his uncle
+George might go to Paris together.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George was out that day, and he did not come home until Rollo had
+gone to bed. Rollo, however, saw him early the next morning, and told
+him what his father had said.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Mr. George, after hearing his story, "and what do you
+propose that we should do?"</p>
+
+<p>"I propose that you, and Jennie, and I should go by the way of New Haven
+and Dieppe," replied Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Why?" said Mr. George.</p>
+
+<p>"You see it is cheaper that way," said Rollo. "We can go that way for
+twenty-four shillings. It costs two and three pounds by the other ways."</p>
+
+<p>"That's a consideration," said Mr. George.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"For the pound you would save," said Rollo, "you could buy a very
+handsome book in Paris."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo suggested these considerations because he had often heard his
+uncle argue in this way before. He had himself another and a secret
+reason why he wished to go by the New Haven route; but we are all very
+apt, when giving reasons to others, to present such as we think will
+influence them, and not those which really influence us.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George looked into the guide book at the pages which Rollo pointed
+out, and found that it was really as Rollo had said.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said he, "I'll go that way with you."</p>
+
+<p>So that was settled, too.</p>
+
+<p>A short time after this conversation, Rollo's father and mother, and
+also Jennie, came in. Mr. Holiday rang the bell for the waiter to bring
+up breakfast. Jennie, when she found that it was really decided that her
+father and mother were to go one way, and her uncle George and Rollo
+another, was quite at a loss to determine which party she herself should
+join. She thought very justly that there would probably be more incident
+and adventure to be met with in going with Rollo; but then, on the other
+hand, she was extremely unwilling to be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span> separated from her mother. She
+stood by her mother's side, leaning toward her in an attitude of
+confiding and affectionate attachment, while the others were talking
+about the details of the plan.</p>
+
+<p>"I rather think there is one thing that you have forgotten," said Mr.
+Holiday, "and which, it strikes me, is a decided objection to your plan;
+and that is, that the steamer for to-morrow, from New Haven, leaves at
+midnight."</p>
+
+<p>"That's the very reason why I wanted to go that way," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, Rollo!" exclaimed his mother.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, mother," said Rollo. "There would be so much fun in setting out at
+midnight. Think, Jennie!" added Rollo, addressing his cousin, "we should
+sit up till midnight! And then to see all the people going on board by
+the light of lanterns and torches. I wonder if there'll be a moon. Let's
+look in the almanac, and see if there'll be a moon."</p>
+
+<p>"But, George," said Mrs. Holiday, "you will not wish to set off at
+midnight. I think you had better change your plan, after all."</p>
+
+<p>But Mr. George did not seem to think that the midnight departure of the
+boat was any objection to the New Haven plan. He had noticed that that
+was the time set for leaving<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span> New Haven the next night, and he thought
+that, on the whole, the arrangement would suit his plans very well. He
+would have a good long evening to write up his journal, which he said
+was getting rather behindhand. The water, too, would be more likely to
+be smooth in the night, so that there would be less danger of
+seasickness. Besides, he thought that both Rollo and himself would
+become very sleepy by sitting up so late, and so would fall directly to
+sleep as soon as they got into their berths on board the steamer, and
+sleep quietly till they began to draw near to the coast of France. The
+distance across the channel, at that point, was such, that the steamer,
+in leaving at midnight, would not reach Dieppe till five or six o'clock
+the next morning.</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly, the arrangements were all made for Rollo's departure the
+next day, with his uncle George, for New Haven. Jennie finally decided
+to go with her father and mother. The idea of sailing at midnight
+determined her; for such an adventure, attractive as it was in Rollo's
+eyes, seemed quite formidable in hers. Rollo had a very pleasant ride to
+New Haven, amusing himself all the way with the beauties of English
+scenery and the continual novelties that every where met his eye. When
+they at<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span> last arrived at New Haven, they found that the harbor consisted
+merely of a straight, artificial canal, cut in from the sea, where
+probably some small stream had originally issued. The sides of this
+harbor were lined with piers, and on one of the piers was a great hotel,
+forming a part, as it were, of the railway station. There were a few
+houses and other buildings near, but there was no town to be seen. The
+railway was on one side of the hotel, and the water was on the other.
+When the train stopped, one of the railway servants opened the door for
+Mr. George and Rollo to get out, and Mr. George went directly into the
+hotel to make arrangements for rooms and for dinner, while Rollo, eager
+to see the ships and the water, went through the house to the pier on
+the other side. He found that there was a pretty broad space on the
+pier, between the hotel and the water, with a shed upon it for
+merchandise, and extra tracks for freight trains. The water was quite
+low in the harbor, and the few vessels that were lying at the pier walls
+were mostly grounded in the mud. There was one steamboat lying opposite
+the hotel, but it was down so low that, at first, Rollo could only see
+the top of the smoke-pipe. Rollo went to the brink of the pier and
+looked down. The steamer appeared very small.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span> It was painted black.
+There were very few people on board. Rollo had a great mind to go on
+board himself, as there was a plank leading down from the pier to the
+top of the paddle box. But it looked rather steep, and so Rollo
+concluded to postpone going on board till Mr. George should come out
+with him after dinner.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo looked about upon the pier a few minutes, and then went into the
+hotel. He passed through a spacious hall, and then through a passage
+way, from which he could look into a large room, the sides of which were
+formed of glass, so that the people who were in the room could see out
+all around them. The front of the room looked out upon the pier, the
+back side upon the passage way. A third side was toward the vestibule,
+and the fourth toward the coffee room. There were shelves around this
+room, within, and tables, and desks, and people going to and fro there.
+In fact, it seemed to be the office of the hotel.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo advanced to one of the openings that was toward the passage way,
+and asked which was the way to the coffee room. The girl pointed to the
+door which led to it, and Rollo went in.</p>
+
+<p>He found a large and beautiful room, with several tables set for dinner
+in different parts of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span> it, and sideboards covered with silver, and
+glasses against the walls. On one side there were several large and
+beautiful windows, which looked out upon the pier, and opposite to each
+of these windows was a small dinner table, large enough, however, for
+two persons. Mr. George had taken one of these tables, and when Rollo
+came in he was sitting near it, reading a newspaper.</p>
+
+<p>"Come, Rollo," said he, "I have ordered dinner, and we shall just have
+time to arrange our accounts while they are getting it ready."</p>
+
+<p>So saying, Mr. George took out his pocket book, and also a small pocket
+inkstand, and a pen, and put them all upon the table.</p>
+
+<p>"Your father's plan," he continued, "is this: He is to pay all expenses
+of transportation, at the same rate that he pays for himself; so that,
+whatever you save by travelling in cheap ways, is your own."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo, smiling, "I mean to walk sometimes, and save it all."</p>
+
+<p>"He is also to pay the expense of your lodgings."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Generally, of course, you will have lodgings with him, but sometimes
+you will be away from him; as, for instance, to-night. In such cases, I
+pay for your lodgings, on your father's account."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo, "I understand that."</p>
+
+<p>"He also pays the expense of all casualties."</p>
+
+<p>"So he said," replied Rollo; "but I don't understand what he means by
+that, very well."</p>
+
+<p>"Why, you may meet with accidents that will cost money to repair, or get
+into difficulties which will require money to get out of. For instance,
+you may lose your ticket, and so have to pay twice over; or you may get
+lost yourself, in Paris, and so have to hire a man with a carriage to
+bring you home. For all such things, the money is not to come from your
+purse. Your father will pay."</p>
+
+<p>"Suppose it is altogether my fault," said Rollo. "Then I think I ought
+to pay."</p>
+
+<p>"But your father said that he was sure you would not be to blame for
+such accidents; though I think he is mistaken there. I have no doubt,
+myself, that nearly all the accidents that will happen to you will come
+from boyish heedlessness and blundering on your part."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll see," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Mr. George, "we'll see."</p>
+
+<p>"Then, as to your board," continued Mr. George, "your father said that
+you might do as you pleased about that. He would pay it, or you might,
+and be allowed five francs a day for it."</p>
+
+<p>"Five francs is about a dollar, is it not?" asked Rollo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Mr. George, "very nearly. But you had better not reckon
+by dollars, now, at all, but by francs altogether. That's a franc."</p>
+
+<p>So saying, Mr. George took a silver coin out of his pocket, and showed
+it to Rollo. It was nearly as large as a quarter of a dollar, or an
+English shilling, but not quite. A quarter of a dollar is worth
+twenty-five cents, an English shilling twenty-four, and a franc about
+twenty cents.</p>
+
+<p>"You can have five of those a day to pay your own board with."</p>
+
+<p>"And how much would it cost me at a boarding house, in Paris, to pay my
+board?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, we don't board at boarding houses in Paris," said Mr. George. "We
+have rooms at a hotel, and then we get breakfast and dinner wherever we
+please, at coffee rooms and dining rooms all over the city, wherever we
+happen to be, or wherever we take a fancy to go. You can get a very
+excellent breakfast for a franc and a half. A beefsteak, or an omelet,
+and bread and butter and coffee."</p>
+
+<p>"That's enough for breakfast," said Rollo. "And then, dinner?"</p>
+
+<p>"You can get a first-rate dinner for two francs, or even less. That
+makes three francs and a half."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"And tea?"</p>
+
+<p>"They never take tea in Paris," said Mr. George. "The French don't take
+tea."</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know," replied Mr. George, "unless it is because the English
+<i>do</i>. Whatever is done in London, you generally find that just the
+contrary is done in Paris."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't we have any thing, then, after dinner?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Mr. George. "The French generally go and take a seat at a
+little round table on the sidewalk, and have a little glass of brandy
+and a cigar."</p>
+
+<p>Here Rollo threw his head back, and laughed loud and long. He was
+greatly amused at the idea of his making an allowance, in calculating
+how far his five francs would go, for a glass of brandy and a cigar. Mr.
+George himself, sedate as he was, could not but smile.</p>
+
+<p>"The fact is," said he, at length, "there are only two meals to
+calculate for, and they will not cost, upon an average, more than three
+francs and a half, if we are prudent and economical, and go to plain and
+not expensive places. But then there is the immense amount that you will
+be always wishing to spend for cakes, and candy, and oranges, and nuts,
+and bonbons of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span> all sorts and kinds. There is an endless variety of such
+things in Paris. You will find half a dozen cake shops in every street,
+with fifty different kinds of gingerbread and cake in them, all of the
+richest and most delicious description."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo, "I shall want some of those things."</p>
+
+<p>"No doubt," said Mr. George, "you will make yourself sick eating them,
+I'll venture to say, before you have been in Paris twenty-four hours."</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Rollo, shaking his head resolutely; "and I think I had better
+take the five francs and pay my own board."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said Mr. George, "and that provides for every thing except
+incidentals. Your father said that I might pay you five francs a day for
+incidentals and pocket money. That is to include all your personal
+expenses of every kind, except what we have already provided for. There
+will be excursions, and tickets to concerts and shows, and carriage
+hire, and toys that you will want to buy, and all such things. The
+amount of it is, that your father pays all your expenses for
+transportation, for lodging, and for casualties. You pay every thing
+else, and are allowed ten francs a day for it. I am to be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span> treasurer,
+and to have the whole charge of your funds, except so far as I find it
+prudent and safe to intrust them to you, and you are to buy nothing at
+all against my consent."</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing at all?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Mr. George, "nothing at all. You are not to expend a single
+centime in any way that I object to."</p>
+
+<p>"What is a centime?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"It is of the value of less than one fourth of a cent," replied Mr.
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"But I should think I might buy such little things as that would come
+to, of myself," said Rollo. "Suppose I should wish to buy a small piece
+of gingerbread for a cent."</p>
+
+<p>"Say for a sou,"<a name="FNanchor_A_1" id="FNanchor_A_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_1" class="fnanchor">[A]</a> replied Mr. George. "There are no cents in Paris."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," rejoined Rollo, "suppose I should wish to spend a <i>sou</i> for
+gingerbread, and eat it, and you should object to it."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," replied Mr. George; "and suppose you were to wish to spend
+a sou for poison, and drink it."</p>
+
+<p>"But I should not be likely to buy poison," said Rollo, laughing.</p>
+
+<p>"Nor should I be likely to object to your<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span> buying gingerbread," rejoined
+Mr. George. "A boy, however, may, it is clear, do mischief with a little
+money as well as with a great deal; and, therefore, the power in his
+guardian should be absolute and entire. At any rate, so it is in this
+case. If I see fit to forbid your expending a single sou for any thing
+whatever, I can, and you will have no remedy till we see your father
+again; and then you can ask him to put you under some other person's
+care. Until he does this, however, the control is absolute and entire in
+my hands. I would not take charge of a boy on any other terms."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Rollo, "I agree to it."</p>
+
+<p>"And now," said Mr. George, "I am ready to begin your account."</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George then took a small account book from his pocket book as he
+said this, and, opening it at the beginning, he wrote across the top of
+the two pages which came together the words,</p>
+
+<p><i>Rollo Holiday, in Account with his Father.</i></p>
+
+<p>On the corner of the left-hand page he wrote Dr., which stands for
+debtor; and on that of the right-hand page, Cr., which stands for
+creditor.</p>
+
+<p>"There," said he, "now I shall enter, from time to time, on the creditor
+side, all the money that becomes due to you; and on the debtor side,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span>
+all that I pay to you. Then, by striking a balance, we can always tell
+how much of your money there is in my hands.</p>
+
+<p>"Let me see," continued Mr. George. "Your father and mother concluded
+finally to go by the way of Folkstone. The fare that way is two pound
+eleven. This way, it is one pound four. I am to pay you the difference.
+The difference is one pound seven; and one pound seven, in francs,
+is&mdash;let me see how much."</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George made a calculation with a pencil and paper, and found that it
+amounted to thirty-three francs seventy-five centimes.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't understand reckoning by francs and centimes very well," said
+Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied Mr. George, "that is your misfortune; and you'll have to
+bear it as well as you can till you get out of it."</p>
+
+<p>So Mr. George entered the francs&mdash;thirty-three seventy-five&mdash;in Rollo's
+book.</p>
+
+<p>"You have got thirty-three francs to begin with," said he; "that's a
+pretty good stock.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, there is your allowance of ten francs per day. I will enter that
+weekly. There are three days in this week, including to-day and Sunday.
+That makes thirty francs."</p>
+
+<p>So Mr. George entered the thirty francs.</p>
+
+<p>"There," said he, "the whole amount due you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span> up to Monday morning is
+sixty-three francs seventy-five centimes. That is sixty-three francs and
+three fourths. A hundred centimes make a franc.</p>
+
+<p>"And now," continued Mr. George, "I will make you a payment, so as to
+put you in funds, and that must be put down on the other side. How much
+would you like?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know," said Rollo; "a few francs, I suppose."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you got a purse?" asked Mr. George. "Let me see it."</p>
+
+<p>So Rollo took out a small leather bag which he had bought in London.</p>
+
+<p>"That's it," said Mr. George. "I'll give you ten francs. When you want
+more, you can have it&mdash;that is, provided it is due to you."</p>
+
+<p>Here Mr. George rang a bell, and a waiter came in immediately. Mr.
+George handed the waiter a sovereign, and asked him to get change for it
+in French money. The waiter took the money, and presently came in with
+five five-franc pieces. These he presented very respectfully to Mr.
+George. Mr. George took two of them and gave them to Rollo. The others
+he put into his own pocket. The five-franc pieces were very bright and
+new, and they were of about the size of silver dollars. Rollo<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span> was very
+much pleased with his portion, and put them in his purse, quite proud of
+having so much spending money.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i029.jpg" width="600" height="520" alt="THE DINNER AT NEW HAVEN." title="" />
+<span class="caption">THE DINNER AT NEW HAVEN.</span>
+</div>
+
+
+<p>"And you say that I must not spend any of it without first asking you,"
+said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"O, no," replied Mr. George, "I have not said any such thing. That would
+be a great deal of trouble, both for you and for me."</p>
+
+<p>"But I thought you said that I was not to spend any thing without your
+consent."</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Mr. George, "I said <i>against</i> my consent. I may forbid your
+spending whenever<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span> I think proper; but I shall not do so, so long as I
+find you always ask me in doubtful cases. Spend for yourself freely,
+whenever you are sure it is right. When you are not sure, ask me. If I
+find you abuse the privilege, I shall have to restrict you. Otherwise,
+not."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo was well satisfied with this understanding of the case; and just
+then the waiter came in, bearing a handsome silver tureen containing
+soup, which he put down upon the table, between Mr. George and Rollo. So
+the writing materials and the purses were put away, and the two
+travellers were soon occupied very busily in eating their dinner.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Chapter_II" id="Chapter_II"></a><span class="smcap">Chapter II.</span></h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Crossing the Channel.</span></h3>
+
+
+<p>Mr. Holiday had two reasons for making the arrangements described in the
+last chapter, in respect to Rollo's expenses. In the first place, it
+would gratify Rollo himself, who would feel more independent, and more
+like a man, he thought, in being allowed thus, in some measure, to have
+the charge and control of his own expenditures. But his second and
+principal reason was, that he might accustom his son, in early life, to
+bear pecuniary responsibilities, and to exercise judgment and discretion
+in the use of money. Many young men never have any training of this sort
+till they become of age. Before that time, whenever they wish for money,
+they go to their father and ask for it. They take all they can get; and
+when that is gone, they go and ask for more. They have no direct
+personal motive for exercising prudence and economy, and they have no
+experience of the evils that result from thriftlessness and
+prod<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span>igality. It is much better for all children that they should have
+pecuniary responsibilities, such as are suited to their years, thrown
+upon them in their youth, when the mistakes they make in acquiring their
+experience are of little moment. The same mistakes made after they
+become of age might be their ruin.</p>
+
+<p>In carrying the system into effect in Rollo's case, there seemed to be
+something very abrupt, at least, if not positively harsh, in Mr.
+George's mode of dealing with him. And yet Rollo did not dislike it. He
+felt that his uncle was treating him more like a man, on this account,
+or rather more like a large boy, and not like a child. In fact, a part
+of the rough handling which Rollo got from his uncle was due to this
+very circumstance&mdash;Mr. George having observed that he did not mind being
+knocked about a little.</p>
+
+<p>After dinner, Rollo proposed to his uncle that they should go out and
+take a walk.</p>
+
+<p>"I will go with you a few minutes," said Mr. George, "and then I must
+return to my room, and write up my journal."</p>
+
+<p>"Say half an hour," rejoined Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," replied Mr. George, "we will say half an hour."</p>
+
+<p>So they sallied forth upon the pier behind the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span> hotel. Mr. George took a
+general survey of the harbor, and of the vessels that were lying in it,
+and also of the peaks and headlands which were seen at the mouth of it,
+toward the sea.</p>
+
+<p>"I should like to be on that hill," said Mr. George, "to look off over
+the channel, and see if I could discern the coast of France from it."</p>
+
+<p>"Let's go there," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"That would take more than half an hour," replied Mr. George.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, at any rate, let's go on board the steamer," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>So, taking Mr. George by the hand, he led him along to the brink of the
+pier. Mr. George looked over, and saw the steamer lying at rest in its
+muddy bed below.</p>
+
+<p>"Is it possible?" said Mr. George, in a tone of great astonishment.</p>
+
+<p>"Can it be possible?" repeated Mr. George.</p>
+
+<p>"What?" inquired Rollo. "What is it that surprises you so much?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why, to find such a steamer as this for the travel on one of the great
+thoroughfares between England and France. Let's go down on board."</p>
+
+<p>So Mr. George led the way, and Rollo followed down the plank. The plank
+landed them on the top of the paddle box. From that place,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span> a few steps
+led to the deck. They walked along the deck a short distance toward the
+stern, and there they found a door, and a small winding staircase
+leading down into the cabin. They descended these stairs, one before the
+other, for the space was not wide enough to allow of their going
+together; and when they reached the foot of them they found themselves
+in a small cabin, with one tier of berths around the sides. The cabin
+was not high enough for two. There were berths for about twenty or
+thirty passengers. The cabin was very neatly finished; and there was a
+row of cushioned seats around it, in front of the berths. In one corner,
+by the side of the door where Mr. George and Rollo had come in, was a
+small desk, with writing materials upon it. This Rollo supposed must be
+the "captain's office."</p>
+
+<p>While Mr. George sat surveying the scene, and mentally comparing this
+insignificant boat to the magnificent steamers on the Hudson River, in
+America, with their splendid and capacious cabins on three different
+decks, their promenade saloons, sometimes one hundred and fifty feet
+long, with ranges of elegant state rooms on either hand, and sofas, and
+couches, and <i>t&ecirc;te-&agrave;-t&ecirc;tes</i> without number, in the middle, his
+perplexity increased.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I do not understand it at all," said he to Rollo. "I thought that there
+would at least be as much travelling between London and Paris, the two
+greatest cities in the world, as between New York and Albany. And yet
+there are half a dozen steamers every day on the North River, carrying
+from five hundred to one thousand passengers; while here, on the most
+direct and cheapest route between London and Paris, is one single
+steamer, that could not possibly carry one hundred passengers, and she
+only goes once in two days."</p>
+
+<p>Just then a young man, who seemed to be the clerk of the boat, came down
+the cabin stairs, and, seeing Mr. George and Rollo there, he asked them
+if they had taken their berths. They said that they had not; but they
+immediately proceeded to choose their berths, or rather their <i>places</i>,
+for there were no divisions separating the sleeping-places from each
+other except what was formed by the cushions. There was a long cushion
+for each sleeper, covered with crimson velvet or plush; and a round
+cushion, shaped like a bolster, and covered in the same way, for his
+head. On these cushions the passengers were expected to lie down without
+undressing, placing themselves in a row, head to head, and feet to feet.
+Mr. George chose two<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span> of these sleeping-places, one for himself, and the
+other for Rollo, and the clerk marked them with a ticket.</p>
+
+<p>Our two travellers then went up on deck again, and from the deck they
+ascended the plank to the pier. It was now nearly sunset, and it was a
+very pleasant evening. They sauntered slowly along the pier, until they
+came to a place where some steps led down to the water. There were
+several small boats at the foot of the steps, and in one of them was a
+man doing something to the rudder. Rollo saw that on the other side of
+the water was another long staircase leading down from the bank there,
+so as to form a landing-place for small boats at all times of tide. He
+also looked up and down the harbor, but he could see no bridge, and so
+he supposed that this must be a sort of ferry for the people who wished
+to cross from one side to the other.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the man who was in the boat saw Mr. George and Rollo standing
+upon the pier, he rose up in his boat, and touching his hat at the same
+time, or rather making a sort of jerk with his hand, which was meant to
+represent a touch of the hat, he asked him if he would like to be rowed
+across to the other side.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, I don't know," said Mr. George. "What's the ferriage?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"That's just as the gentleman pleases," said the man, with another jerk
+at his hat.</p>
+
+<p>"And how much do they generally please?" said Mr. George. "What's the
+common custom?"</p>
+
+<p>"O, gentlemen gives us what they likes," said the man. "We always leaves
+it to them entirely."</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George was silent. After a moment's pause, the boatman said again,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Would you like to go, sir? Very nice boat."</p>
+
+<p>"Not on those terms," said Mr. George. "If you will tell me what the
+usual ferriage is, I can then tell you whether we wish to go or not."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, sir," replied the man, "gentlemen usually gives us about twopence
+apiece."</p>
+
+<p>"Twopence apiece. Very well, we will go."</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George did not wait to ask Rollo whether he would like to go before
+he decided the question. He would have considered this a mere waste of
+time, for Rollo was always ready to go, no matter where.</p>
+
+<p>So they got into the boat, and were rowed across the water. They
+ascended the stairs on the other side, and walked a little way in a
+smooth road which led along the bank. Rollo wished to go farther; but
+Mr. George said that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span> his time had expired, and that he must go back.
+"But you may stay," said he to Rollo, "as long as you please, provided
+that you come back before dark."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo was much pleased with this permission, as he wished to go to the
+top of the hill, at the outlet of the harbor, and look at the prospect.
+He promised to return before dark.</p>
+
+<p>"Have you any change," said Mr. George, "to pay your ferriage back?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Rollo, "I have nothing but my five-franc pieces."</p>
+
+<p>"Then I will lend you twopence," said Mr. George. "You can pay me the
+first change you get in France."</p>
+
+<p>"But I cannot get any pennies in France," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"True," said Mr. George; "you will get sous there. You must pay me four
+sous. A penny is equal to two sous.</p>
+
+<p>"I will pay your bill at the hotel, too," continued Mr. George, "as I
+suppose they will make out yours and mine together, and you can pay me
+your share to-morrow, when we land. Here is your ticket, however. You
+must take charge of that."</p>
+
+<p>"But suppose I lose it?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Then you will have to pay over again," said<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span> Mr. George; "that is all.
+You will lose about twenty francs; unless, indeed," he continued, "your
+father should call it a casualty."</p>
+
+<p>So Mr. George went back to the boat, and Rollo continued his walk,
+thinking on the way of the question which his uncle had suggested,
+whether his father would consider the loss of his ticket a casualty or
+not. He determined, however, very resolutely, that he would not lose it;
+and so he put it away safely in his wallet, and then went on. The road
+was very smooth and pleasant to walk in, being bordered by green fields
+on the one hand, and the water of the harbor on the other. Rollo came at
+length to the hill. There were successive terraces, with houses built
+upon them, on the sides of the hill, and paths leading to the summit.
+Rollo had a fine view of the sea, and of the vessels and steamers which
+were passing slowly in the offing, on their way up and down the channel;
+but though he looked long and eagerly for the coast of France, it was
+not to be seen.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo rambled about the hill for a considerable time; for at that season
+of the year the twilight continued very long, and it did not become dark
+till quite late. When, at length, the shadows of the evening began to
+shut in upon the landscape, he returned to the ferry,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span> and the ferryman
+rowed him back again to the hotel.</p>
+
+<p>It was now nearly nine o'clock, and, of course, three hours remained
+before the time of embarkation would arrive. Rollo was not sorry for
+this, as he thought that there would be enough to amuse and occupy him
+all this time on and around the pier. His first duty, however, was to go
+and report himself to Mr. George as having returned from his walk. This
+he did. He found his uncle very busy in his room, writing his journal.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, Rollo," said Mr. George, "it is three hours before we are to
+leave. What are you going to do all that time?"</p>
+
+<p>"O, I shall find plenty to amuse myself with," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said Mr. George. "You may play about wherever you are sure
+it is safe. Don't go near the edge of the pier, unless there is somebody
+at hand to pull you out of the water with a boathook, if you fall in.
+Amuse yourself as long as you can; and when you are tired of taking care
+of yourself, come to me, and I will tell you what to do."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo, having received these instructions, left his uncle to his work,
+and went away. He descended the stairs, and went out upon the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span> pier
+again, and after amusing himself, by examining every thing there, he
+concluded to go on board the steamer. A train of cars had arrived from
+London while he and his uncle had been on the other side of the water,
+and there were now several new passengers in the cabin, who were
+choosing and marking their berths, or talking together about the voyage.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo thought that, in order to make sure that his ticket was all right,
+he would climb up into his berth and see; and then, when he was there,
+it seemed to him a very funny place to sleep in; so he laid down his
+head upon the round cushion to try it. While he was in this position,
+his attention was attracted by the sound of children's voices on the
+stairs, talking French. Presently these children came into the cabin.
+Their mother was with them. There were two of them, and they were not
+more than five or six years old. Rollo was exceedingly astonished to
+hear such little children talk French so well. Rollo listened to see if
+he could understand what they said. He had studied French himself for a
+year or two, and could say a great many things. In fact, he had been
+accustomed to consider himself quite a good French scholar. But he now
+found that all his acquisitions dwindled into utter insignificance, when
+compared<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span> with the power over the language possessed by those little
+girls.</p>
+
+<p>The French party did not remain very long in the cabin where Rollo was,
+but passed at once through a door which led to a small ladies' cabin
+near. There were other persons, however, continually coming and going,
+and Rollo was interested in watching their movements, and in listening
+to the fragments of conversation which he heard. He found his position
+very comfortable, too, and the sounds around him produced so lulling an
+effect, that, before long, he insensibly closed his eyes. In a word, in
+less than fifteen minutes after he climbed up into his berth to see what
+sort of a place it was, he had put it fully to the test of experiment,
+by going fast asleep in it.</p>
+
+<p>In about half an hour after this, Mr. George, coming to the end of a
+paragraph in his journal, laid down his pen, drew a long breath, looked
+out the window, and then rang the bell. In a few minutes the chambermaid
+came.</p>
+
+<p>"Mary," said he, "I wish to ask the porter to go out and look about on
+the pier, and in the packet, and see if he can see any thing of that boy
+that came with me."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well, sir," said Mary, with a quick courtesy; and she immediately
+disappeared.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In about five minutes she came back, and said that the young master was
+in his berth in the packet, sound asleep.</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said Mr. George, in his turn. "Much obliged to you." He
+then went on with his writing.</p>
+
+<p>The first thing that Rollo himself was conscious of, after falling
+asleep in his berth, was a feeling of some one pulling him gently by the
+shoulder. He opened his eyes, and saw before him a face that he did not
+exactly know, and yet it was not entirely strange. The man had his hand
+upon Rollo's shoulder, and was endeavoring to wake him.</p>
+
+<p>"Your ticket, if you please, sir."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo stared wildly a minute, first at the man, and then about the
+cabin. It was night. Lamps were burning, and the cabin was full of
+people. Some were in their berths, some in groups on the seats, and one
+or two were just preparing to lie down. The engine was in motion, and
+the ship was evidently going fast through the water. In fact, the
+steamer was rocking and rolling as she went on, indicating that she was
+already far out at sea.</p>
+
+<p>"Your ticket, if you please, sir," repeated the clerk.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo glanced around to his uncle's berth,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span> and there he saw his uncle
+lying quietly in his place, his head being on a cushion close to the one
+on which Rollo's head had been lying.</p>
+
+<p>"Uncle George," said Rollo, "he wants my ticket."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Mr. George, without moving, "give him your ticket."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo then recollected that he had his ticket in his wallet. So, after
+fumbling for a time in his pocket, he brought out his wallet, and
+produced the ticket, and handed it to the clerk.</p>
+
+<p>"Thank you, sir," said the clerk, taking the ticket. At the same time he
+put two other tickets in Rollo's wallet, in the place of the one which
+he had taken out. As he did this, he pointed to one of the small ones,
+saying,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"That's for the landing."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo shut up his wallet, and put it in his pocket.</p>
+
+<p>"A shilling, if you please," said the clerk.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo had no shilling, and was still not much more than half awake. So
+he turned to his uncle again.</p>
+
+<p>"Uncle George," said he, "he wants a shilling."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, pay him a shilling, then," said Mr. George.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo now felt for his purse, and taking out one of his five-franc
+pieces, he gave it to the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span> clerk, who, in return, gave him back a
+quantity of change. Rollo attempted to count the change, but he soon
+perceived that his ideas of francs and shillings were all in confusion.
+So he turned the change all together into his purse, put the purse back
+into his pocket, lay his head down upon his cushion again, shut his
+eyes, and in one minute was once more fast asleep.</p>
+
+<p>Some hours afterward he woke again, of his own accord. He opened his
+eyes and looked about him, and perceiving that it was morning, he
+climbed down from his berth, and then went up upon the deck. The coast
+of France was all before him, in full view, and the steamer was rapidly
+drawing near to it. He went to the bow of the vessel to get a nearer
+view. He saw directly before him a place where there were piers, and
+batteries, and other constructions indicating a town, while on either
+hand there extended long ranges of cliffs, with smooth, green slopes of
+land above, and broad, sandy shores below. In half an hour more the
+steamer arrived at the entrance of the harbor, which was formed of two
+long piers, built at a little distance from each other, and projecting
+quite into the sea. The steamer glided rapidly along between these high
+walls of stone, until, at length, it entered a broad basin, which was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span>
+bordered by a continuation of these walls, and hemmed in on every side
+beyond the walls of the pier with ranges of the most quaint, and queer,
+and picturesque-looking buildings that Rollo ever saw.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i046.jpg" width="600" height="527" alt="" title="" />
+<span class="caption">ENTERING DIEPPE.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>These buildings were not close to the pier, but were back far enough to
+leave room for a street between them and the water. Such a street is
+called a <i>quay</i>.<a name="FNanchor_B_2" id="FNanchor_B_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_B_2" class="fnanchor">[B]</a> Quays are built in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span> almost all the cities of Europe
+where there are rivers or basins of water for shipping; and they are
+very pleasant streets to walk in, having usually large and elegant
+buildings on one side, and vessels and steamers on the other.</p>
+
+<p>By the time that the steamer had entered the port, almost all the
+passengers had come up from below, and Mr. George among the rest. Mr.
+George came, expecting to find that, as they were now about to land, the
+baggage would be brought out, and that the several passengers would be
+called upon to select their own. But there was no movement of this kind.
+The baggage had all been put down into the hold the night before, and
+now the hatches were still closed, and there seemed to be no signs of
+any preparation to open them.</p>
+
+<p>In the mean time, the steamer gradually drew near to the pier. The
+engine was stopped. Ropes were thrown out. People in queer dresses, some
+of them soldiers, who were standing on the pier, caught the ropes and
+fastened them. The steamer was thus brought to her place and secured
+there.</p>
+
+<p>There was now, however, no rush to get on shore,&mdash;such as Rollo had
+always been accustomed to witness on board an American steamer on her
+arrival,&mdash;but every thing was quiet and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span> still. By and by a plank was
+laid. Then the passengers were called upon to get out their tickets.
+Then they began to walk over the plank, each one giving up his landing
+ticket as he passed.</p>
+
+<p>When Mr. George and Rollo reached the pier, they found, on looking
+around them, that they were not yet at liberty. On the opposite side of
+the quay was a building, with a sign over it, in French, meaning
+custom-house office for packet boats; and there were two long ropes
+stretched, one from the stem and the other from the stern of the
+steamer, to the opposite sides of the door of this building, so as to
+enclose a space on the quay, in front of the building, in such a manner
+as to hem the passengers in, and make it necessary for them to pass
+through the custom house. The ropes were guarded by soldiers, dressed in
+what seemed to Rollo the queerest possible uniforms. They all talked
+French&mdash;even those who had talked English when they came on board the
+packet boat on the other side.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't understand a word they say," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Nor I," said Mr. George; "but we can watch and see what they will do."</p>
+
+<p>It did not require long watching, for no<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span> sooner had Mr. George said
+these words than he observed that the passengers were all going toward
+the door of the custom-house, and that, as they went, they were taking
+their passports out. Nobody can enter France without a passport. A
+passport is a paper given to the traveller by his own government. This
+paper tells the traveller's name, describes his person, and requests
+that the French government will allow him to pass through their country.
+Frenchmen themselves must have a passport too, though this is of a
+little different kind. All must have a passport of some kind or other,
+and all this machinery of ropes and soldiers was to make it sure that
+every one of the passengers had the proper document.</p>
+
+<p>The passengers accordingly took out their passports as they went into
+the custom-house door, and there passed, in single file, before an
+officer seated at a desk, who took them in turn, opened them, copied the
+names in his book, and then gave them back to the owners. Mr. George and
+Rollo followed on in the line. When their passports had been given back
+to them, they went on with the rest until they came out from the
+custom-house at another door, which brought them upon the quay outside
+of the ropes.</p>
+
+<p>"What's to be done next?" said Rollo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I am sure I don't know," said Mr. George, "I suppose we shall see."</p>
+
+<p>There was an omnibus standing near, marked, "For the Iron Road,"&mdash;that
+being the French name for railroad,&mdash;but nobody seemed to be getting
+into it. In fact, the passengers, as fast as they came out from the
+custom-house, seemed all very quiet, as if waiting for something. A
+great many of them seemed to be French people, and they fell into little
+groups, and began to talk very volubly together, some finding friends
+who had come down to the quay to meet them, and others making friends,
+apparently, for the occasion, of the soldiers and idlers that were
+standing around.</p>
+
+<p>"Could not you ask some of them," said Rollo, "what we are to do next?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe they would understand my French," said Mr. George. "I
+am sure I don't understand theirs." In a moment, however, he turned to a
+young man who was standing near, who seemed to be a waiter or servant
+man belonging to the place.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you speak English?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," said the man, in a very foreign accent, but yet in a very
+pleasant tone.</p>
+
+<p>"What are we waiting for?" asked Mr. George.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"You will wait, sir, for the baggages, and then for the visit of the
+baggages."</p>
+
+<p>"How long?" said Mr. George.</p>
+
+<p>"Twenty minutes," said the man. He also gave Mr. George to understand
+that he and Rollo might go and have some breakfast, if they chose. But
+Mr. George thought it was not safe for them to go away from the spot. So
+they waited where they were.</p>
+
+<p>In a few minutes the hatches were opened on board the vessel, and the
+sailors began to hoist out the trunks. As fast as they were brought up
+to the decks men took them on shore, and carried them into the
+custom-house by the same door where the passengers had entered. When all
+the baggage was carried in, the ropes were taken down, and the
+passengers went to the custom-house door again, to attend to the
+examination of the baggage. A soldier stood at the door to prevent too
+many going in at a time. Mr. George and Rollo followed the rest, and at
+length it came their turn to have their trunks examined. This was done
+very quick&mdash;the officers appearing to think, from the appearance of the
+travellers, that they would not be likely to have any smuggled goods in
+their possession. The officer, accordingly, just looked into the trunks,
+and then shut down the lids, and marked<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span> them passed. A porter then took
+them out at the side door. There, on Mr. George's telling them in French
+that they were going to Paris by the railroad, the trunks were put upon
+a cart, while Mr. George and Rollo got into the omnibus, and then they
+were very soon driving along the quay, in the direction, as they
+supposed, of the Paris railway station.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Chapter_III" id="Chapter_III"></a><span class="smcap">Chapter III.</span></h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Journey to Paris.</span></h3>
+
+
+<p>The omnibus which Mr. George and Rollo had entered contained several
+other passengers, some of whom had carpet bags and valises with them, as
+if they, too, were going to Paris. Besides the driver, there was a
+conductor, whose place was upon the step of the omnibus, behind. The
+conductor opened and shut the doors for the passengers when they wished
+to get in or out, and took the fare.</p>
+
+<p>"How much is the fare?" said Rollo to Mr. George.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know," said Mr. George, shaking his head. He spoke, however, in
+a very unconcerned tone, as if it were of very little consequence
+whether he knew or not.</p>
+
+<p>"What are you going to do about it, then?" said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"I shall say, 'How much?' to him, when we get out; and then, if I do not
+understand his answer, I shall give him a large piece of money,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span> and let
+him give me back as much change as he likes."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo resolved that he would do so too.</p>
+
+<p>Next to Mr. George and Rollo in the omnibus there sat a gentleman and
+lady, who seemed to be, as they really were, a new-married pair. They
+were making their bridal tour. The lady was dressed plainly, but well,
+in travelling costume, and she had a handsome morocco carriage bag
+hanging upon her arm. The gentleman was quite loaded with shawls, and
+boxes, and umbrellas, and small bags, which he had upon his lap or at
+his feet. Besides this, the lady had a trunk, which, together with that
+of her husband, had been left behind, to come on the cart. She was very
+anxious about this trunk, for it contained all her fine dresses. Her
+husband was interested in the novel sights and scenes that presented
+themselves to view in passing along the street; but she thought only of
+the trunk.</p>
+
+<p>"What strange costumes, Estelle!" said he. "Look! See that woman! What a
+funny cap!"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Estelle; "but, Charley, don't you think it would have been
+better for us to have brought our trunks with us on the omnibus?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know," said her husband. "It is too late to think of that now.
+I've no doubt that they are safe enough where they are. Look!<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span> There's a
+girl with wooden shoes on. Those are the wooden shoes we have read about
+so often in books. Look!"</p>
+
+<p>Estelle glanced her eyes, for an instant, toward the wooden shoes, and
+then began to look back along the street again, watching anxiously for
+the trunks.</p>
+
+<p>At length the omnibus approached the station. It entered through a
+magnificent portal, under an arch. There was a soldier walking back and
+forth, with his musket in his hand, bayonet fixed, to guard the
+entrance. None but actual travellers were allowed to enter. The omnibus,
+having entered the court, stopped before a splendid portico, where there
+was a door leading into the building. The passengers paid their fares,
+and got out. On entering the building, they found themselves in a
+spacious apartment, with a great variety of partitions, offices,
+enclosures, and railings, presenting themselves on every hand, the
+meaning of all which it was very difficult to understand. There were
+also signs marked first class, and second class, and third class, and
+placards of notices to travellers, and time tables, and various similar
+things. On the back side of the room were doors and windows, looking out
+to a platform, where the train of cars was seen, apparently all ready to
+set off.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span> But the partitions and railings which were in the way
+prevented the company from going out there.</p>
+
+<p>There were a number of travellers in this room, several parties having
+arrived there before the omnibus came. Many of these persons were
+waiting quietly, talking in little groups, or resting themselves by
+sitting upon their carpet bags. Others were looking about eagerly and
+anxiously, wondering what they were to do, or trying to find somebody
+who could tell them about the baggage. Estelle was the most restless and
+uneasy of all. She went continually to the door to look down the road,
+to see if the cart was coming.</p>
+
+<p>"Charles," said she, "what a shame it is that they don't come with the
+trunks! The train is all ready, and will go off before they come."</p>
+
+<p>"O, no," said her husband; "I think not. Don't be anxious about them.
+I've no doubt they will be here in time. Come with me, and let us look
+about the station, and see how it differs from ours."</p>
+
+<p>But Estelle would not allow her thoughts to be diverted from her trunk.
+She remained on the steps, looking anxiously down the road. Some of the
+other passengers who were unused to travelling, seeing her look so
+anxious, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span> not understanding what she said, supposed that some
+accident had happened, or that some unusual delay had occurred, and they
+began to be anxious too. Just then a bell began to ring out upon the
+platform.</p>
+
+<p>"There!" exclaimed Estelle. "The train is going! What shall we do? Why
+<i>can't</i> you ask somebody, Charles?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why, I can't speak French," said Charles; "and they would not
+understand me if I ask in English."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes they would," said Estelle; "I'm sure they would. There are so many
+English travellers going on these roads now, that it must be that they
+have men here that speak English. There's a man," said she, pointing to
+a person in livery who was standing within a sort of enclosure.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Charles, thus urged, walked across the hall to the railing, though
+very reluctantly, and asked the man if he could tell him why the trunks
+did not come.</p>
+
+<p>"Sir?" said the man, in French, and looking as if he did not understand.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you speak English?" asked Mr. Charles.</p>
+
+<p>"There," said the man, pointing across the room. Mr. Charles looked, and
+saw another man, who, by the livery or uniform which he<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span> wore, seemed to
+be a porter belonging to the station, standing by a window. He
+accordingly went across to ask the question of him.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you speak English, sir?" said he.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sare," replied the man, speaking with great formality, and in a
+very foreign accent, making, at the same time, a very polite bow.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the reason that our baggage does not come?" asked Mr. Charles.</p>
+
+<p>"<i>Yes</i>, sare," replied the porter, speaking in the same manner.</p>
+
+<p>"Why does not it come?" asked Mr. Charles again. "We put it upon a cart
+at the custom-house, and why does not it come?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sare," replied the porter, with another very polite bow.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Charles, perceiving that the porter's knowledge of English
+consisted, apparently, in being able to say, "Yes, sir," and mortified
+at the absurd figure which he made in attempting to make useless
+inquiries in such a way, bowed in his turn, and went back to Estelle in
+a state of greater alienation of heart from her than he had ever
+experienced before. And as this book may, perhaps, be read sometimes by
+girls as well as boys, I will here, for their benefit, add the remark,
+that there is no possible way by which a lady can more effectually
+destroy any kind<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span> feeling which a gentleman may entertain for her than
+by forcing him to exhibit himself thus in an awkward and ridiculous
+light, by her unreasonable exactions on journeys, or rides, or walks, or
+excursions of any kind that they may be taking together.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and his uncle George had witnessed this scene, and had both been
+much interested in watching the progress of it. Rollo did not know but
+that there was some real cause for solicitude about the baggage,
+especially as several of the lady passengers who were standing with
+Estelle at the door seemed to be anxiously looking down the road.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you feel any anxiety about our trunks coming?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Not the least," said Mr. George, quietly.</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?" asked Rollo. "Are you sure that they will come?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Mr. George; "but there are a good many excellent reasons why
+I should not feel any anxiety about them. In the first place, I have
+some little confidence in the railway arrangements made in this country.
+The French are famous all the world over for their skill in
+systematizing and regulating all operations of this kind, so that they
+shall work in the most sure and perfect manner. It does not seem at<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span> all
+probable to me, therefore, that they can manage so clumsily here, on one
+of the great lines between England and France, as to get all the trunks
+of a whole steamer load of passengers upon a cart, and then loiter with
+it on the way to the station, and let the train go off without it."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Rollo, "that's a good reason; but you said there were
+several."</p>
+
+<p>"Another is, that, if they are capable of managing so clumsily as to
+have such a thing happen, we cannot help it, and have nothing to do but
+to bear it quietly. We put our trunks in the proper place to have them
+brought here. We could not have done otherwise, with propriety, for that
+was the regular mode provided for conveying the baggage; and if there is
+a failure to get it here, we are not to fret about it, but to take it as
+we would a storm, or a break down, or any other casualty&mdash;that is, take
+it quietly."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo; "that's a good reason. Are there any more?"</p>
+
+<p>"There is one more," said Mr. George; "and that is, I am not anxious
+about the trunks coming in season, for I don't care a fig whether they
+come or not."</p>
+
+<p>"O, uncle George!" exclaimed Rollo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I do not," said Mr. George; "for if they do not come, the only
+consequence will be, that we shall have to wait two or three hours for
+the next train, which will give us just time to ramble about a little in
+this queer-looking town of Dieppe, and get some breakfast, and perhaps
+have some curious adventures in trying to talk French. In fact, I rather
+hope the baggage won't come."</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George was destined to be disappointed in this rising desire, for,
+while he and Rollo were talking, Estelle came running in to her husband
+with a countenance full of joy, saying that the cart had come, and
+urging him to come and get their trunks off as quick as possible. Her
+eagerness was increased by hearing the bell again, which now began to
+toll, leading her to think that the train was going off immediately. The
+porters, however, whose business it was to carry the trunks in, did not
+seem to be at all disturbed by the sound, but began to take off the
+trunks, one by one, and convey them up into the station. Here they were
+placed upon a sort of counter, from whence they were taken off on the
+other side, and weighed in a curiously contrived pair of scales placed
+there for the purpose. If any trunk weighed over a certain number of
+pounds,&mdash;the amount which, accord<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span>ing to the regulations of the road,
+each passenger was allowed to carry,&mdash;then the surplus had to be paid
+for. There was a little office close to the weighing machine; and as
+fast as the trunks were weighed, the result was reported to the clerk,
+who made out a bill for the surplus, whatever it was, and the passenger
+paid it through an opening. If there was no surplus weight, then they
+gave the passenger a similar bill, which was to be his check for his
+trunk at the end of the journey. Every thing was, however, so admirably
+arranged, that all this was done very rapidly.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Charles, when he found that the trunks were all to be weighed,
+proposed to go with Estelle to the cars, so as to get a good seat for
+her; but Estelle chose to remain and make sure that her trunk was
+attended to. It happened that Mr. George's trunk and Rollo's were
+weighed among the first; and as soon as they got their checks, Mr.
+George said,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Now for our seats in the cars."</p>
+
+<p>"But which way are we to go?" said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know," said Mr. George. "Go and show that man your ticket, and
+ask him where we are to go."</p>
+
+<p>"In French?" said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Mr. George.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>So Rollo went to the man who was standing by a sort of gateway which led
+through a partition railing, as if he were there to guard the passage;
+and holding up his little pasteboard ticket, he said, in French,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Where to go?"</p>
+
+<p>The man looked at the ticket, and, seeing that first class was printed
+upon it, he pointed in a certain direction, and said something in
+French, speaking, however, in so rapid and voluble a manner, that Rollo
+could not understand a single word. He, however, understood the sign.</p>
+
+<p>"This way, uncle George," said Rollo. "He says we must go this way."</p>
+
+<p>Following the indication which the man had given, Mr. George and Rollo
+passed out upon the platform, where they found the train ready for them.
+There were various attendants upon the platform, dressed in a quaint
+sort of uniform, the livery, as it were, of the railroad company. One of
+them looked at Rollo's ticket, and then opened the door of a first-class
+car. The cars were made like those in England, in separate compartments,
+each compartment being like a large coach, with one front seat, and one
+back, facing each other. There were four places; that is, room for four
+passengers on each seat. Of course, only those at the ends were near
+the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span> window. Rollo and Mr. George took the two seats nearest the window
+on the side where they got in, as one of the seats at the opposite side
+was already occupied by a gentleman. The gentleman seemed to be an
+Englishman, for he was reading the London Times.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Mr. George had been seated only two or three minutes before
+Estelle and her husband came along, Estelle leading the way. The
+attendant opened the door of the car, and Estelle, followed by her
+husband, got in. They passed between Mr. George and Rollo, and stood
+there for a moment, looking about for a good seat. A freight train was
+slowly trundling by at this time on an adjoining track, so that what
+they said was not very audible; but still, Mr. George and Rollo could
+hear it.</p>
+
+<p>"I want a seat by the window," said Estelle, "where I can look out and
+see the country. Ask that gentleman if he would not be willing to take a
+middle seat, and let us sit together by the window."</p>
+
+<p>"We had better go to some other car," said her husband, in an undertone.
+"<i>He</i> wishes to see the country, probably, himself, and has come early,
+perhaps, so as to get a good seat."</p>
+
+<p>"O, no," said Estelle; "this is a very nice car; and he would just as
+soon change as not, I have no doubt. Ask him, Charley; do."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>So Estelle moved to one side for her husband to pass. Mr. Charles, thus
+urged, approached the gentleman, and said, in a very bland and
+respectful manner,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Should you have any objection, sir, to move your seat, so as to let
+this lady sit by the window?"</p>
+
+<p>The gentleman raised his eyes from his paper, and looked at Mr. Charles
+an instant, and then answered quietly,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"I prefer this seat, sir."</p>
+
+<p>He then went on with his reading as before.</p>
+
+<p>Estelle pouted her lip, and said, though in a tone too low, perhaps, for
+the gentleman to hear, "What a rude man!"</p>
+
+<p>"We will give you <i>these</i> seats, sir," said Mr. George, "if you would
+like them."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, they'll do just as well," said Estelle, speaking to her husband.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George rose, and saying, "Come, Rollo," he left the car.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George had some trouble in looking for other seats; but at length he
+succeeded in finding two that were as good as those which they had left.</p>
+
+<p>"I think she might at least have thanked you for giving up your seat to
+accommodate her," said Rollo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I did not do it to accommodate her," said Mr. George; "I did it to get
+out of the sight and hearing of her. I would not ride from here to Paris
+in the same car with such a fussmaker for all the prospects in France. I
+had rather be shut up in a freight car."</p>
+
+<p>"How much trouble she makes her husband!" said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"It is not the trouble," said Mr. George, "it is the mortification and
+annoyance. She is a perpetual torment. If that's the way that young
+wives treat their husbands on the bridal tour, I'm thankful that I am
+not a bridegroom."</p>
+
+<p>The train soon set out, and Mr. George and Rollo, forgetting Estelle,
+soon began to enjoy the ride. They were both extremely interested in the
+views which they obtained from their windows as they passed along, and
+with the antique and quaint appearance of the country&mdash;the ancient stone
+cottages, with thatched roofs; the peasants, in their picturesque
+dresses; the immense tracts of cultivated country, divided in green and
+brown patches, like the beds of a garden, but with no fences or
+enclosures of any kind to be seen; the great forests, with trees planted
+closely in rows, like the corn in an American cornfield; and the
+roadways which they occasionally passed&mdash;immense avenues, bor<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span>dered on
+either hand with double rows of majestic trees, and extending across the
+country, as straight as the street of a city, till lost in the horizon.
+These and a thousand other things, which were all the time presenting
+themselves to view, kept the travellers continually full of wonder and
+delight.</p>
+
+<p>After going on thus for several hours, the train stopped in a very
+spacious depot, where there was a large refreshment room; and as one of
+the attendants called out that there would be ten minutes of rest, both
+Mr. George and Rollo got out, and went into the refreshment room. They
+found a great multitude of cakes and meats spread out upon an immense
+counter, and dishes of every kind, all totally unknown to them. They, of
+course, could not call for any thing; but, after taking a survey, they
+helped themselves to what they thought looked as if it might be good,
+and then paid in the same way, by letting the girls that attended the
+tables help themselves to money which the travellers held out to them in
+their hands. They then took their seats again in the car, and soon
+afterward the train moved on.</p>
+
+<p>The place where they had stopped was Rouen, which, as well as Dieppe and
+Paris, the reader will find, on examining any map of France. In<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span> the
+course of the ride from Rouen to Paris, Mr. George and Rollo fell into
+quite a conversation, in which Rollo received a great deal of very good
+advice from Mr. George in respect to the care of himself when he should
+get to Paris.</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose that I should be sure to get lost," said Rollo, "if I should
+attempt to go out in such a great city alone."</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Mr. George, "not at all. A person can walk about a great way,
+sometimes, in a strange city, without getting lost. All he has to do is
+to take care, at first, to go only in such directions as that he can
+keep the way home in his mind."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know what you mean, exactly, by that," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, suppose you were in a great city, and you come out at the door of
+your hotel, and there you find a long, straight street. You walk along
+that street half a mile. Then don't you think you could find your way
+home?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly," said Mr. George, "because you have it in your mind that the
+way home is directly back by that same street, till you come to the
+hotel. Now, suppose that, after going along in that street for half a
+mile, you should<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span> come to a great church, upon a corner, and should turn
+there to the right, and go for some distance in another street leading
+off from the first one; don't you think you could <i>then</i> find your way
+home?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo, "I should go back to the church, and then turn to the
+left, and so go home."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said Mr. George; "by proceeding cautiously in that way,
+carrying your way home in your mind with you all the time, you can
+ramble a great deal about a strange city without getting lost, and go
+farther and farther every day.</p>
+
+<p>"Then, besides, if you do get lost, it is of no consequence. You can
+always ask the way back; or, if worst comes to worst, you can take a
+cab, and tell the man to drive you home."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo, "I suppose I could always do that."</p>
+
+<p>"Only you must be sure," said Mr. George, "not to forget the name of
+your hotel. Once I was walking about in Paris, and I saw a colored girl
+on the sidewalk, before me, who seemed to be inquiring something of the
+people that she met, without appearing to get any satisfactory answer. I
+thought she was an American girl; and so I went to her, and asked her in
+French<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span> what she wanted to know&mdash;for I observed that she was speaking
+French. She said she wished to know what was the name of the hotel where
+most of the Americans lodged. I could not speak French very well myself,
+and so I could not ask her for any explanations; but I supposed that she
+belonged to some American party, and had lost her way in going somewhere
+of an errand, and had forgotten the name of the hotel. So I told her the
+names of two or three hotels where Americans were accustomed to lodge,
+and she went away."</p>
+
+<p>"Did she find her own hotel?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know," said Mr. George. "I never knew what became of her."</p>
+
+<p>"How did she learn French, do you suppose?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"I presume she came from New Orleans," replied Mr. George, "where nearly
+all the people speak French."</p>
+
+<p>Thus our two travellers beguiled their journey, by talking sometimes
+about the novel and curious objects which presented themselves to view,
+in the landscape, as the train rolled rapidly along on its way, and
+sometimes about what they expected to see and to do on their arrival in
+Paris. At length, the indications that they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span> were approaching the great
+capital began to multiply on every hand. The villages were more
+frequent. Villas, parks, and palaces came into view; and here and there
+an ancient castle reposed on the slope of a distant hill, or frowned
+from its summit. At length, Rollo, turning his head to the window
+opposite to the one where he had been looking out, exclaimed suddenly,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Look there! Uncle George, what's that?"</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George said that that was Napoleon's famous Triumphal Arch, that
+forms the grand entrance to Paris, on the way to the royal palaces. It
+was a large, square building, splendidly adorned with sculptures and
+architectural ornaments, and towering high into the air out of the midst
+of a perfect sea of houses, streets, avenues, trees, gardens, and
+palaces, which covered the whole country around. It stood upon a
+commanding elevation, which made its magnitude and its height seem all
+the more impressive. Through the centre of it was a magnificent archway,
+wide enough for four carriages to pass abreast.</p>
+
+<p>"It is the Triumphal Arch," said Mr. George, "by which all grand
+processions enter Paris on great public days of rejoicing. We will go
+out and see it some day. It is called the Triumphal<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span> Arch of Neuilly,
+because it is on the road that leads to Neuilly."<a name="FNanchor_C_3" id="FNanchor_C_3"></a><a href="#Footnote_C_3" class="fnanchor">[C]</a></p>
+
+
+<p>By this time the Triumphal Arch had passed out of view, and presently
+the train of cars began to be shut in by buildings, and the usual
+indications appeared of the approach to a great station. Queer-looking
+signals, of mysterious meaning,&mdash;some red, some blue, some round, some
+square,&mdash;glided by, and men in strange and fantastic costumes stood on
+the right hand and on the left, with little flags in their hands, and
+one arm extended, as if to show the locomotive the way.</p>
+
+<p>At length the convoy (as the French call a railway train) came to a
+stand, and an attendant, in uniform, opened the door of the car. Mr.
+George and Rollo got out and looked about, quite bewildered with the
+magnificence of the scene around them. The station was very extensive,
+and was very splendid in its construction, and there were immense
+numbers of people going and coming in it in all directions. Still, every
+thing was so well regulated<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span> that there was no disorder or confusion.
+There was a line of carriages drawn up in a certain place near the
+platform; but the coachmen remained quietly by them, awaiting calls from
+the passengers, instead of vociferously and clamorously offering their
+services, as is customary at the stations in America. Nor was there any
+pushing or crowding for trunks and baggage. In fact, the trunks were all
+to be examined before they could go into the city; for there are
+separate duties for the city of Paris, in addition to those for France.
+The baggage was, therefore, all taken from the baggage car, and arranged
+in an immense apartment, on counters, which extended all around the
+sides, and up and down the middle; and then, when all was ready, the
+passengers were admitted, and each one claimed his own. Mr. George and
+Rollo easily found their trunks, and, on presenting their tickets, an
+officer required them to open the trunks, that he might see if there was
+any thing contraband inside. As soon, however, as he perceived that Mr.
+George and Rollo were foreigners, and that their trunks had come from
+beyond sea, he shut down the lids again, saying, "It is well." A porter
+then took the trunks and carried them out to a carriage.</p>
+
+<p>"Hotel of the Rhine, Place Vendome," said<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span> Mr. George, in French, to the
+coachman, by way of directing him where to go.</p>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i074.jpg" width="600" height="522" alt="" title="" />
+<span class="caption">THE ARRIVAL.</span>
+</div>
+
+
+<p>"Yes&mdash;yes&mdash;yes&mdash;yes," said the coachman.</p>
+
+<p>It is so natural and easy for the French to talk, that they generally
+use all the words they can to express their meaning, besides an infinity
+of gestures. Thus, when they wish to say yes, they often repeat the yes
+four or five times, in a very rapid manner, thus:<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span>&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>Yes&mdash;yes&mdash;yes&mdash;yes.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George got into the coach, and Rollo followed him. As they drove
+along the streets, Rollo tried to look out the window and see; but the
+window was so small, and the streets were so narrow, and the coachman,
+moreover, drove so fast, that he had very little opportunity to make
+observations. At length he caught a momentary glimpse of a monstrous
+column standing in the middle of an open square; and immediately
+afterward the carriage drove in under an archway, and came to a stand,
+in a small, open court, surrounded with lofty buildings. This was the
+hotel. There was a small room, which served as a porter's lodge, in this
+court, near where the coach stopped. A girl came to the door of this
+lodge to receive the guests. She bowed to Mr. George and Rollo with
+great politeness, and seemed glad to see them. Mr. George spoke to her
+in French, to say what rooms he wished to engage. What he said,
+literally translated, was this:&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"We want two chambers for ourselves, at the third, and an apartment of
+three pieces, at the second, for a gentleman, lady, and their young
+girl, whom we attend to-morrow."</p>
+
+<p>The girl, who was very neatly and prettily<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span> dressed, and was very
+agreeable in her manners, immediately said, "Very well," and rang a
+bell. A servant man came at the summons, and, taking the trunks, showed
+Mr. George and Rollo up to their rooms.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Chapter_IV" id="Chapter_IV"></a><span class="smcap">Chapter IV</span>.</h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">The Garden of the Tuileries</span>.</h3>
+
+
+<p>The first Sunday that Rollo spent in Paris he met with quite a singular
+adventure.</p>
+
+<p>His father and mother had arrived the evening before, and had
+established themselves quite comfortably in the "apartment of three
+pieces," which Mr. George had engaged for them. An apartment, according
+to the French use of the term, is not a single room, but a group of
+rooms, suitable to be occupied by one family. The number of <i>pieces</i> is
+the number of rooms.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Holiday's three rooms were a small but beautifully furnished parlor,
+where they had breakfast, and two bed rooms. One bed room was for
+himself and Mrs. Holiday, and the other was for Jennie. There were a
+great many splendid mirrors in these rooms, and other elegant furniture.
+The floors were not carpeted, but were formed of dark and polished wood,
+curiously inlaid, with rugs here and there at the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span> doors and before the
+sofas and chairs. There was a small, square rug before every chair, and
+a large one before the sofa. There were a great many other curious
+things to be observed in the arrangements of the room. The fireplace,
+for example, was closed by plates of sheet iron, which could be shoved
+up and down like the sashes of a window; while the windows themselves
+opened like doors, each having a great brass fastening, like a latch, in
+the middle, and hinges at the sides.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo had gone with his father and mother to church in the morning, and
+at about one o'clock they returned. Rollo and Jennie remained at home,
+after one, for an hour or two, waiting for their uncle George to come.
+He had gone away somewhere, and had not yet returned. While thus
+waiting, the children sat at the window of their parlor, which they
+opened by swinging the two sides of the sash entirely back, so that they
+could see out to great advantage. The window opened down quite low; but
+there was a strong iron bar passing across from side to side, to keep
+them from falling out. The children sat at this window, amusing
+themselves with what they could see in the square. The name of the
+square was the Place Vendome. There was a very large and lofty column in
+the centre of it.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span> This column is very greatly celebrated for its
+magnitude and its beauty. It is twelve feet in diameter, and nearly a
+hundred and forty feet high. But what is most remarkable is, that the
+whole exterior of it, enormous as the mass is, is formed of brass. The
+brass was obtained by melting up the cannons which Napoleon took from
+his enemies. At the end of one of his campaigns he found that he had
+twelve hundred cannons which he had taken from the Russians and
+Austrians, with whom he had been at war; and after reflecting for some
+time on the question, what he should do with them, he concluded to send
+them to Paris, and there to have them made into this enormous column, to
+ornament the centre of the Place Vendome.</p>
+
+<p>The column, though made of brass, is not bright upon the outside, but
+dark, like bronze, and the surface is ornamented with figures in what
+are called bas relief, representing the battles and victories in which
+the cannon out of which the column was composed were taken from the
+enemy.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Jennie, in looking at this column from the window of their
+hotel, observed that around the foot of it there was a square space
+enclosed by an iron railing, forming a sort of yard. There was a gate in
+the front side of this<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span> railing. This gate was open; but there were two
+soldiers standing by it, with guns in their hands, as if to prevent any
+body from going in.</p>
+
+<p>The column itself, as is usual with such columns, did not stand directly
+upon the ground, but upon a square pedestal, which was built of massive
+blocks of granite, resting on a deep and strong foundation; and as the
+column itself was twelve feet in diameter, the pedestal, being
+necessarily somewhat larger, was quite a considerable structure. In the
+front of it, opposite the gate in the iron railing, was a door. The door
+was open, but nothing was to be seen but darkness within.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder what they do in there?" said Rollo. "The gate is open, and the
+door is open; but I suppose the soldiers would not let any body go in to
+see. Do you suppose, Jennie, that it can be possible that there is any
+way to get up to the top of the column by going in at that door?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Jennie; and so saying, she pointed eagerly to the top of
+the column, and added, "For there are some boys up there now."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo looked up to the top of the column. There was a statue of Napoleon
+upon the summit, which appeared to be of about the ordinary<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span> size of a
+man, though it is really about eight times as large as life, being twice
+as large in every dimension. It looks small, on account of its being so
+high in the air. Beneath this statue and around the top of the column
+the children saw that there was a small gallery, with a railing on the
+outside of it. Several persons were standing on this gallery, leaning on
+the railing. At first Rollo thought that they were sculptured figures
+placed there, like the statue of Napoleon on the top, for ornament; but
+presently he saw some of them move about, which convinced him that they
+were real men. Two of them were soldiers, as was evident from the red
+uniform which they wore. But they all looked exceedingly small.</p>
+
+<p>"There must be a staircase inside," said Rollo, "or else some ladders.
+If not, how could those men get up?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"I should like to go up there very much," said Rollo, "if I could only
+get by the soldiers."</p>
+
+<p>"I should not dare to go up to such a high place," said Jennie, shaking
+her head solemnly.</p>
+
+<p>At the foot of the column and outside of the railing which formed the
+enclosure around the pedestal was a very broad and smooth place, as
+smooth as a floor, and raised like a sidewalk<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span> above the street. It was
+very broad, and people walked over it in passing through the square.
+There was only one way of passing through the square, and that was from
+north to south. From east to west there was no street, but the ranges of
+houses and palaces continued on those sides unbroken. These edifices
+presented a very fine architectural frontage toward the square, and gave
+to the whole space which they enclosed a very rich and grand appearance.
+Over the doors of two or three of the houses there were small tricolored
+flags flying; and wherever these flags were, there were soldiers on the
+sidewalk below guarding the doors. But neither Rollo nor Jennie was able
+to imagine what this could mean.</p>
+
+<p>About three o'clock, when Rollo and Jennie had began to be tired of
+looking at the column, their mother came into the room. She said that
+Mr. Holiday was fatigued and was going to lie down, and that neither he
+nor herself would go out again. Rollo then asked if he and Jennie might
+go out and take a walk. His mother seemed to hesitate about it, but
+presently said that she would go and ask Mr. Holiday if he thought it
+would be safe. She accordingly went into the bed room, and very soon
+returned, saying that Mr. Holiday thought it would be safe for them to
+go if he gave them some directions.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"He says," added Mrs. Holiday, "that you may get ready, and then go into
+his room, and he will give you the directions. Only you must not talk
+much with him, for it hurts him to talk. Hear what he has to say, and
+then come out immediately."</p>
+
+<p>So the children made themselves ready, and then went into their father's
+room. They found him sitting in a great arm chair by a window where the
+sun was shining. He looked pale and tired. When the children came in,
+however, he turned to them with a smile, and said,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Children, I am glad you are going out to take a walk. You can go very
+safely, if you follow my directions.</p>
+
+<p>"This is the Place Vendome. There are only two ways of going out of it.
+One leads to the north, and the other to the south.</p>
+
+<p>"If you take the road which goes to the north, that is, that way," said
+Mr. Holiday, pointing, "you will go out by the street which is called
+the Street of Peace.<a name="FNanchor_D_4" id="FNanchor_D_4"></a><a href="#Footnote_D_4" class="fnanchor">[D]</a> The Street of Peace is straight, and pretty
+broad; and if you follow it to the end of it, you will come to the
+Boulevards."</p>
+
+
+<p>"What are the Boulevards?" asked Rollo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Hush!" said Jennie, gently touching Rollo at the same time with her
+hand.</p>
+
+<p>"Boulevards," said Mr. Holiday, "means bulwarks. A great many years ago
+there was a line of bulwarks or fortifications all around Paris; but at
+length, when the city grew too large for them, they levelled them down
+and made a very broad and handsome street where they had been, and then
+afterward made a new line of fortifications farther out. This broad and
+handsome street, or rather, series of streets, is called the Boulevards.
+It extends almost entirely around the city. Of course, when you get into
+the Boulevards, you are in no danger of losing yourselves; for you can
+go on as far as you please, either way, and then come back to the Street
+of Peace again, and then come home."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo, "I understand."</p>
+
+<p>Here Jennie gently touched Rollo again, to remind him that he was not to
+talk.</p>
+
+<p>"You will know the Boulevards at once when you come to them," continued
+Mr. Holiday, "they are so much broader and more beautiful than any of
+the other streets of Paris. Even the sidewalks are as wide as many
+ordinary streets; and there are rows of young trees along the edges of
+the sidewalks. Now, if you choose, you can go out from the Place Vendome
+on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span> northern side, by the Street of Peace, and so walk on till you
+come to the Boulevards. Then you can walk along the Boulevards as far as
+you please.</p>
+
+<p>"Or," continued Mr. Holiday, "you can take the opposite course. You can
+go out of the Place Vendome on the southern side. That will bring you
+directly in the garden of the Tuileries."</p>
+
+<p>"I should like to go into a garden," said Jennie, "and see the flowers."</p>
+
+<p>"You will see," continued Mr. Holiday, "as soon as you begin to go out
+of the Place Vendome, at a little distance before you, perhaps as far as
+two or three blocks in New York, a wall of green trees."</p>
+
+<p>"A wall of green trees!" exclaimed Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said his father. "It is a thick row of trees growing in the
+garden, and having the side toward the street trimmed smooth and
+straight like a wall. The entrance through this range of trees, opposite
+the gateway where you go into the garden, looks like an archway in a
+green wall. You will see it before you as soon as you turn the corner of
+this hotel into the street that leads that way. You can walk straight on
+till you come to the place. There you will find the entrance to the
+garden. There is a very high<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span> iron palisade along the side of the garden
+toward the street, with the rows of trees which I have spoken of inside
+of it. There is a gateway through this palisade where you can go in.
+There are two soldiers there to guard the gateway."</p>
+
+<p>"Then how can we get in?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"O, go right in," replied Mr. Holiday. "Pay no attention to the
+soldiers. They will not say any thing to you. They are only sentinels.</p>
+
+<p>"After you pass through the gateway, you keep on in the same direction,
+without turning to the right hand or to the left, just as if you were
+going across the garden. You go on in this way till you get to the
+middle alley, which is a very wide alley, that runs up and down the
+middle of the garden. This alley is called the Grand Alley, and it is a
+very grand alley indeed. It is as broad as a very wide street, and it is
+nearly two miles long.[A] It begins at the palace of the Tuileries, in
+the middle of the city, and extends through the whole length of the
+gardens of the Tuileries; and then, passing out through great gates at
+the foot of the garden, it extends through the Elysian Fields, away out
+to the great Triumphal Arch of the Star, which you saw<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span> from the cars
+when you were coming into the city.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, when you get into the Grand Alley, which you will know by its
+being the broadest, and smoothest, and most splendid grand walk that you
+ever saw, you must stop for a minute, and look both ways. I'll tell you
+what you will see. First, if you turn to the left, that is, toward the
+east, you will see at the end of the alley, in that direction, a long
+range of splendid buildings, extending across from side to side. In the
+opposite direction, at the top of a long, gentle slope, a mile and a
+half away, you will see the grand Triumphal Arch. That is at the barrier
+of the city. The view is not entirely open, however, out to the arch.
+About midway, in the centre of the Grand Alley, is a tall obelisk,
+standing on a high pedestal, and farther along there are one or two
+fountains. Still you can see the Triumphal Arch very plainly, it is so
+large, and it stands so high.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, the Grand Alley is nearly two miles long, and, wherever you may be
+in it, you can always see the palace at one end, the arch at the other,
+and the Egyptian obelisk in the middle. So that, as long as you walk
+back and forth in this alley, keeping these things in sight, you cannot
+lose your way.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Only I ought to say," continued Mr. Holiday, "that the garden does not
+extend all the way to the barrier. The garden extends, perhaps, half a
+mile. Near the bottom of it is a great basin or pond of water, with a
+stone margin to it all around. You will have to go round this basin, for
+the centre of it is exactly in the middle of the Grand Alley. Then you
+come very soon to the end of the garden, and you will go out through
+great iron gates, but still you will keep on in the same direction. Here
+you will come to a very large, open square, with the obelisk in the
+centre of it, and fountains and statues in it all around. Still you will
+keep straight on across this square, only you will have to turn aside to
+go round the obelisk. After you pass through the square, the Grand Alley
+still continues on, though now it becomes a Grand Avenue, leading
+through pleasure grounds, with ranges of trees and of buildings on
+either side. It becomes very wide here, being as wide as two or three
+ordinary streets, and will be filled with carriages and horsemen. But
+there will be good broad sidewalks for you on either hand, under the
+shade of the trees; and you will know where you are all the time, for
+you can always see the palace at one end of the view, and the great<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span>
+Triumphal Arch at the other, with the obelisk in the middle between
+them.</p>
+
+<p>"The amount of it is," added Mr. Holiday, speaking in a tone as if he
+were about finishing his instructions, "you can go out of the Place
+Vendome to the north, and keep straight on till you come to the
+Boulevards, and walk there either way as far as you like. Or you can go
+south, and keep straight on till you come to the middle of the Grand
+Alley of the garden of the Tuileries, and then walk in the Grand Alley
+and the Grand Avenue which forms the continuation of it as long as you
+like. Which way will you go?"</p>
+
+<p>"I would rather go to the garden," said Rollo, looking toward Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Jennie, "and so would I."</p>
+
+<p>Thus it was settled that they were to take the street which led toward
+the south from the Place Vendome; and so, bidding their father good by,
+they went away. Before leaving the house, however, Rollo went to a
+secretary which stood in the parlor, and took down a map, in order to
+show Jennie the places which his father had mentioned, and to make it
+sure that they understood the directions which they had received. Rollo
+found the Place Vendome very readily upon the map, and the street
+leading to the gardens.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span> He also found the Grand Alley running through
+the garden; and following this alley between the rows of trees, he
+showed Jennie a small circle which he thought must be the basin of
+water, and the place where the obelisk stood; and finally he pointed out
+the place where the Grand Alley widened out into the Grand Avenue and
+led on toward the barrier.</p>
+
+<p>Jennie did not understand the map very well; but she seemed satisfied
+with Rollo's assurances that he himself could find all the places.</p>
+
+<p>"It is all right, you may depend," said Rollo. "I can find the way, you
+may be sure."</p>
+
+<p>So he put up the map, bade his mother good by, and then he and Jennie
+sallied forth.</p>
+
+<p>The hotel was situated on the corner of the Place Vendome and the street
+which led toward the garden; and as soon as the children had turned this
+corner, after coming out from under the archway of the hotel, they saw
+at some distance before them, at the end of the street, the iron
+palisade, and the green wall of trees above it, which formed the
+boundary of the garden.</p>
+
+<p>"There it is!" exclaimed Rollo. "There is the garden and the gateway!
+and it is not very far!"</p>
+
+<p>The children walked along upon the sidewalk hand in hand, looking
+sometimes at the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span> elegant carriages which rolled by them from time to
+time in the street, and sometimes at the groups of ladies and children
+that passed them on the sidewalk. At the first corner that they came to,
+Rollo's attention was attracted by the sight of a man who had a box on
+the edge of the sidewalk, with a little projection on the top of it
+shaped like a man's foot. Rollo wondered what it was for. Just before he
+reached the place, however, he saw a gentleman, who then happened to
+come along, stop before the box and put his foot on the projection.
+Immediately the man took out some brushes and some blacking from the
+inside of the box, which was open on the side where the man was
+standing, and began to brush the gentleman's boot.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, how convenient that is!" said Rollo. "If you get your shoes or
+your boots muddy or dusty, you can stop and have them brushed."</p>
+
+<p>So saying, he looked down at his own boots, almost in hopes that he
+should find that they needed brushing, in order that he might try the
+experiment; but they looked very clean and bright, and there seemed to
+be no excuse for having them brushed again.</p>
+
+<p>Besides, Jennie was pulling him by the hand, to hasten him along. She
+said at the same time, in an undertone,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span>&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Look, Rollo, look! See! there is a blind lady walking along before us!"</p>
+
+<p>"Blind?" repeated Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Jennie; "don't you see the little dog leading her?"</p>
+
+<p>There was a little dog walking along at a little distance before the
+lady, with a beautiful collar round his neck, and a cord attached to it.
+The lady had the other end of the cord in her hand.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe she is blind," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>As the children passed by the lady she turned and looked at them, or
+seemed to look, and manifested no indications of being blind. Afterward
+Jennie saw a great many other ladies walking with little dogs, which
+they led, or which led them, by means of a cord which the owner of the
+dog held in her hand. There were so many of these cases that Jennie was
+compelled to give up the idea of their being blind; but she said that
+she never knew any body but blind people led about by dogs before.</p>
+
+<p>At length the children arrived at the entrance to the garden. It was on
+the farther side of a broad and beautiful street which ran along there,
+just outside of the enclosure. The palisades were of iron, though the
+tops were tipped with gilding, and they were very high. They<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span> were more
+than twice as high as a man's head. The lower ends of them were set
+firmly in a wall of very substantial masonry. The gateway was very wide,
+and it had sentry boxes on each side of it. A soldier, with his bayonet
+fixed, was standing in front of each sentry box. When Jennie saw these
+soldiers she shrank back, and seemed afraid to go in. In fact, Rollo
+himself appeared somewhat disposed to hesitate. In a moment, however, a
+number of persons who came along upon the sidewalk turned in at the
+gates, and went into the yard. The soldiers paid no attention to them.
+Rollo and Jane, seeing this, took courage, and went in, too.</p>
+
+<p>On passing through the gates, the children found themselves on a very
+broad terrace, which ran along on that side of the garden. The surface
+of the terrace was gravelled for a walk, and it was very smooth and
+beautiful. While standing on, or walking upon it, you could look on one
+side, through the palisade, and see the carriages in the street, and on
+the other side you could look over a low wall down into the garden,
+which was several feet below. The descent into the garden was by a
+flight of stone steps. The children, after staying a little time upon
+the terrace, went down the steps. They came out upon a very broad
+avenue, or alley, which formed the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span> side of the garden. This alley was
+very broad indeed, so broad that it was divided into three by orange
+trees, which extended up and down in long rows parallel to the street,
+almost as far as you could see, and forming beautiful vistas in each
+direction. These orange trees, though very large, were not set in the
+ground, but were planted in monstrous boxes, painted green and set on
+rollers. The reason of this was, so that they could be moved away in the
+winter, and put in a building where they could be kept warm.</p>
+
+<p>This broad alley, the great side alley of the garden on the side toward
+the city, was called the Alley of the Oranges. There is another similar
+alley on the opposite side of the garden, which is toward the river, and
+that is called the Alley of the Riverside.</p>
+
+<p>Passing across the three portions of the Alley of the Oranges, the
+children went on toward the centre of the garden. Instead, however, of
+such a garden as they had expected to see, with fruits and flowers in
+borders and beds, and serpentine walks winding among them, as Jennie had
+imagined, the children found themselves in a sort of forest, the trees
+of which were planted regularly in rows, with straight walks here and
+there under them.</p>
+
+<p>"What a strange garden!" said Jennie.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo. "But we must not stop here. We must go straight on
+through the trees until we come to the Grand Alley."</p>
+
+<p>In fact, Rollo could see the Grand Alley, as he thought, at some
+distance before him, with people walking up and down in it. There were
+several people, too, in the same walk with Rollo and Jane, some going
+with them toward the Grand Alley, and others coming back from it. Among
+these were two children, just big enough to go alone, who were prattling
+in French together very fluently as they walked along before their
+father and mother. Jennie said she wondered how such little children
+could learn to speak French so well. Another child, somewhat older than
+these, was trundling a hoop, and at length unfortunately she fell down
+and hurt herself. So, leaving her hoop upon the ground, she came toward
+the maid who had care of her, crying, and sobbing, and uttering broken
+exclamations, all in French, which seemed to Rollo and Jane very
+surprising.</p>
+
+<p>At length the children came out into the Grand Alley. They knew it
+immediately when they reached it, by its being so broad and magnificent,
+and by the splendid views which were presented on every hand.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo, "this is it, I am sure. There<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span> is the obelisk; and
+there, beyond it, on the top of that long hill, is the Triumphal Arch;
+and there, the other way, is the palace of the Tuileries. Here is a
+seat, Jennie. Let's go and sit down."</p>
+
+<p>So saying, Rollo led Jennie to a stone seat which was placed on one side
+of the alley, at the margin of the grove; and there they sat for some
+time, greatly admiring the splendid panorama which was spread out before
+them. What happened to them for the remainder of their walk will be
+described in the next chapter.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Chapter_V" id="Chapter_V"></a><span class="smcap">Chapter V.</span></h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">The Elysian Fields.</span></h3>
+
+
+<p>After sitting a little time upon the stone bench, Rollo and Jennie rose
+and resumed their walk. The alley was extremely broad, and it was almost
+filled with parties of ladies and gentlemen, and with groups of
+children, who were walking to and fro, some going out toward the
+Triumphal Arch, and some returning. Rollo and Jennie, as they walked
+along, said very little to each other, their attention being almost
+wholly absorbed by the gay and gorgeous scene which surrounded them. At
+length they perceived that, at a little distance before them, the people
+were separating to the right hand and to the left, and going round in a
+sort of circuit; and, on coming to the place, they found that the great
+basin, or pond of water, which Mr. Holiday had described to them, was
+there. This pond was very large, much larger than Rollo had expected
+from his father's account of it. It was octagonal in form, and was
+bordered all around with stone.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span> There were a number of children
+standing in groups on the brink, at different places; some were watching
+the motions of the gold fish that were swimming in the water, and others
+were looking at a little ship which a boy was sailing on the pond. The
+boy had a long thread tied to the bow of his ship; and when the wind had
+blown it out upon the pond to the length of the string, he would pull it
+back to the shore again, and then proceed to send it forth on another
+voyage.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo thought it strange that they should be thus employed on the
+Sabbath; for he had been brought up to believe, that, although it was
+very right and proper to take a quiet walk in a garden or in the fields
+toward the close of the day, it was not right, but would, on the other
+hand, be displeasing to God, for any one, old or young, to spend any
+part of the day which God had consecrated to his own service and to the
+spiritual improvement of the soul in ordinary sports and amusements.
+Jennie, too, had the same feeling; and accordingly, after standing with
+Rollo for a moment near the margin of the water, looking at the fishes
+and the vessels, and at the group of children that were there, she began
+to pull Rollo by the hand, saying,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Come, Rollo, I think we had better go along."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Rollo at once acceded to this proposal, and they both walked on. They
+soon found themselves passing out of the garden, though the space on
+each side of the broad alley in which they were walking was bordered
+with so many walls, palisades, terraces, statues, and columns, and the
+gateway which led out from the garden into the square was so broad, and
+was so filled up, moreover, with the people who were going and coming,
+that it was difficult to tell where the garden ended and the great
+square began. At length, however, it began to be plain that they were
+out of the garden; for the view, instead of being shut in by trees,
+became very widely extended on either hand. It was terminated on one
+side by ranges of magnificent buildings, and on the other by bridges
+leading across the river, with various grand and imposing edifices
+beyond. In the centre of the square the tall form of the obelisk towered
+high into the air, gently tapering as it ascended, and terminating
+suddenly at its apex in a point.</p>
+
+<p>The square, though open, was not empty. Besides the obelisk, which stood
+in the centre of it, on its lofty pedestal, there were two great
+fountains and colossal statues of marble; and lofty columns of bronze
+and gilt, for the gaslights; and raised sidewalks, smooth as a floor,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span>
+formed of a sort of artificial stone, which was continuous over the
+whole surface, which was covered by it, without fissure or seam. There
+were roadways, also, crossing the place in various directions, with
+carriages and horsemen upon them continually coming and going. The great
+fountains were very curiously contrived. The constructions were thirty
+or forty feet high. They consisted of three great basins, one above the
+other. The smallest was at the top, and was, of course, high in the air.
+A column of water was spouting out from the middle of it, and, after
+rising a little way into the air, the water fell back into the basin,
+and, filling it full, it ran over the edge of it into the basin below.</p>
+
+<p>This was the middle basin, and, besides the water which fell into it
+from the basin above, it received also a great supply from streams that
+came from the great basin below, like the jets from the hose of a fire
+engine when a house is on fire. There was a row of bronze figures,
+shaped like men, in the water of the lowest basin of all, each holding a
+fish in his arms; and the jets of water which were thrown up to the
+middle basin from the lower one came out of the mouths of these fishes.
+The fishes were very large, and they were shaped precisely like real
+fishes, although they were made of bronze.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The children looked at the fountains as they walked along, and at length
+came to the foot of the obelisk. They stopped a minute or two there, and
+looked up to the top of it. It was as tall as a steeple. Rollo was
+wondering whether it would be possible in any way to get to the top of
+it; and he told Jennie that he did not think that there was any way, for
+he did not see any place where any body could stand if they should
+succeed in getting there. While they both stood thus gazing upward, they
+suddenly heard a well-known voice behind them, saying,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Well, children, what do you think of the Obelisk of Luxor?"</p>
+
+<p>They turned round and beheld their uncle George. They were, of course,
+very much astonished to see him. He was walking with another young
+gentleman, a friend of his from America, whom he had accidentally met
+with in Paris. When the children had recovered from the surprise of thus
+unexpectedly meeting him, he repeated his question.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think of the obelisk?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe it is so high," replied Rollo, "as the column in the
+Place Vendome."</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied Mr. George, "it is not."</p>
+
+<p>"Nor so large," added Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Mr. George.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"And I don't believe that there is any way to get to the top of it,"
+added Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Mr. George, "there is not. The column in the Place Vendome is
+hollow, and has a staircase inside; but this obelisk is solid from top
+to bottom, and is formed of one single stone. That is the great wonder
+of it."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i102.jpg" width="600" height="530" alt="" title="" />
+<span class="caption">THE OBELISK.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"Look up," said Mr. George, "to the top of it. It is as high as a
+steeple. See how large it is, too, at the base. Think how enormously
+heavy such an immense stone must be. What a work<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span> it must have been to
+lift it up and stand it on its end! Besides, it does not rest upon the
+ground, but upon another monstrous stone, the pedestal of which is
+nearly thirty feet high; so that, in setting it up in its place, the
+engineers had not only to lift it up on end, but they had to raise the
+whole mass, bodily, twenty or thirty feet into the air. I suppose it was
+one of the greatest lifts that ever was made.</p>
+
+<p>"There is another thing that is very curious about the obelisk,"
+continued Mr. George, "and that is its history. It was not made
+originally for this place. It was made in Egypt, thousands and thousands
+of years ago, nobody knows how long. There are several others of the
+same kind still standing. Some years ago, this one and another were
+given to the French by the government of Egypt, and the French king sent
+a large company of men to take this one down and bring it to Paris. They
+built an immense vessel on purpose for transporting it. This vessel they
+sent to Egypt. It went up the Nile as near to the place where the
+obelisk stood as it could go. The place was called Luxor. The obelisk
+stood back at some distance from the river; and there were several Arab
+huts near it, which it was necessary to pull down. There were also
+several other houses in the way by the course<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span> which the obelisk must
+take in going to the river. The French engineers bought all these
+houses, and pulled them down. Then they made a road leading from the
+place where the obelisk stood to the river. Then they cased the whole
+stone in wood, to prevent its getting broken or injured on the way. Then
+they lowered it down by means of immense machines which they constructed
+for the purpose, and so proceeded to draw it to the river. But with all
+their machines, it was a prodigiously difficult work to get it along. It
+took eight hundred men to move it, and so slowly did it go that these
+eight hundred men worked three months in getting it to the landing.
+There they made a great platform, and so rolled it on board the float.
+There was a steamer at hand to take it in tow, and it was brought to
+France. It then took five or six months to bring it across the country
+from the sea shore to Paris.</p>
+
+<p>"When, at last, they got it here, it took them nearly a year to
+construct the machines for raising it. They built the pedestal for it to
+stand upon, which you see is as high as a two-story house, and then
+appointed a day for the raising. All the world, almost, came to see.
+This whole square was full. There were more than a hundred thousand
+persons here. The king came,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span> and his family, and all his generals and
+great officers. It was the greatest raising that ever was seen."</p>
+
+<p>"Why, there must have been just as great a raising," said Rollo, "when
+they first put it up in Egypt."</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Mr. George; "because there it stood nearly upon the ground,
+but here it is on the top of a lofty pedestal. Look there! Those are
+pictures of the machines which they raised it by."</p>
+
+<p>So saying, Mr. George pointed to beautifully gilded diagrams which were
+sculptured upon one side of the pedestal. There were beams, and ropes,
+and pulleys without number, with the obelisk among them; but Rollo could
+not understand the operation of the machinery very well. The obelisk
+itself was covered on all sides with ancient Egyptian hieroglyphics,
+deeply cut into the stone; but the children could not understand the
+hieroglyphics any better than they could the machinery.</p>
+
+<p>After looking some time longer at the obelisk and the various objects of
+interest that were around it, the whole party walked on together. Mr.
+George said that he and his friend were going up the avenue of the
+Elysian Fields, and that, if Rollo and Jennie would walk along<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span> behind
+them, they would not get lost. Jennie was very glad of this; for the
+crowd of people that were coming and going was getting to be very great,
+and she was a little afraid. Rollo, on the other hand, was rather sorry.
+The Triumphal Arch at the farther end of the avenue was in full view,
+and thus he felt sure of his way; and he was ambitious of the honor of
+being the sole guide in the excursion which he and Jane were taking. He,
+however, could not well decline his uncle's invitation; so, when the two
+gentlemen moved on, Rollo and Jennie followed them.</p>
+
+<p>The Grand Avenue was a very broad and beautiful roadway, gently
+ascending toward the barrier, and now perfectly thronged with carriages
+and horsemen. There were also two side avenues, one on each side of the
+central one. These were for foot passengers. There were rows of trees
+between. Beyond the side avenues there extended on either hand a wood,
+formed of large and tall trees, planted in rows, and standing close
+enough together to shade the whole ground. They were, however, far
+enough apart to allow of open and unobstructed motion among them. Under
+these trees, and in open spaces which were left here and there among
+them, there were booths, and stalls, and tables, and tents, and all
+sorts of contrivances for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span> entertainment and pleasure, with crowds of
+people gathered around them in groups, or moving slowly from one to the
+other. There were men, some dressed like gentlemen, and others wearing
+blue, cartmen's frocks; and women, some with bonnets and some with caps;
+and children of all ages and sizes; and soldiers without number, with
+blue coats, and dark-red trousers, and funny caps, without any brim,
+except the visor. In the midst of all these multitudes Mr. George and
+the gentleman who was with him slowly led the way up the side avenue,
+Rollo and Jennie following them, quite bewildered with the extraordinary
+spectacles which were continually presenting themselves to view on every
+hand. The attention of the children was drawn from one object or
+incident to another, with so much suddenness, and so rapidly, that they
+had no time to understand one thing before it passed away and something
+else came forward into view and diverted their thoughts; and before they
+had recovered from the surprise which this second thing awakened, they
+had come to a third, more strange and wonderful, perhaps, than either of
+the preceding.</p>
+
+<p>A boy, very young, and very fantastically dressed, came riding along
+through the crowd, mounted on the smallest and prettiest black pony<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span>
+that Rollo had ever seen, and distributing as he passed along some sort
+of small printed papers to all who came near enough to get them. Rollo
+tried to get one of the papers to see what it was, but he did not
+succeed.</p>
+
+<p>"How I wish I had such a pony as that!" said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"So do I," said Jennie. "But what are the people doing in that ring?"</p>
+
+<p>Rollo saw a close ring of people all crowding around something on the
+ground. There was a man inside the ring, calling out something very loud
+and very incessantly. Rollo put his head between two of the spectators
+to see. There was a man seated in the centre, on the ground, with a
+cloth spread out before him, on which was a monstrous heap of stockings,
+of all kinds and colors, which he was selling as fast as possible to the
+men and women that had gathered around him. He sold them very cheap, and
+the people bought them very fast. He put the money, as fast as he
+received it, in his cap, which lay on the ground before him, and served
+him for a cash box.</p>
+
+<p>"Come, Rollo," said Jane, pulling Rollo by the hand, "we must go along.
+Uncle George is almost out of sight."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo turned back into the avenue again, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span> began to walk along. In a
+moment more he saw a large boy standing behind a curious-looking stove
+in an open space near, and baking griddle cakes. There was a very nice
+table by his side, covered with a white cloth, and a plate, on which the
+boy turned out the griddle cakes as fast as they were baked. There were
+several children about him, buying the cakes and eating them.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, Jennie," said Rollo, "look at these cakes! How I should like some
+of them! If it were not that it is Sunday, I would go and buy some."</p>
+
+<p>"O Rollo!" exclaimed Jennie, "look here! See what's coming!"</p>
+
+<p>Rollo looked, and saw that the ladies and gentlemen on the broad walk
+before them were moving to one side and the other, to make room for a
+most elegant little omnibus, drawn by six goats, that were harnessed
+before it like horses. The omnibus was made precisely like a large
+omnibus, such as are used in the streets of Paris for grown persons;
+only this one was small, just large enough for the goats to draw. It was
+very beautifully painted, and had elegant silken curtains. It was full
+of children, who were looking out the windows with very smiling faces,
+as if they were enjoying their ride very much. A<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span> very pretty little
+boy, about seven years of age, was holding the reins of the goats, and
+appearing to drive; but there was a large boy walking along by the side
+of the goats all the time, to take care that they did not go wrong. The
+omnibus belonged to his father, who kept it to let children ride in it
+on their paying him a small sum for each ride.</p>
+
+<p>Jennie was very much pleased with the omnibus; but what followed it
+pleased her still more. This was a carriage, made in all respects like a
+real carriage, and large enough to contain several children. It was
+open, like a barouche, so that the children who were riding in it could
+see all around them perfectly well. It had two seats inside, besides a
+high seat in front for the coachman, and one behind for the footman.
+There were children upon all these seats. There was one on the
+coachman's box to drive. The carriage, like the omnibus, was drawn by
+goats, only there were four instead of six. The coachman drove them by
+means of long, silken reins.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the omnibus and the carriage had passed by, and the crowd had
+closed again behind them so as to conceal them from view, Rollo and
+Jennie looked about for Mr. George and the other gentleman; but they
+were no<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span>where to be seen. Jane was quite frightened; but Rollo said he
+did not care.</p>
+
+<p>"Look there!" said Rollo, pointing back.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" said Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"The obelisk," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>Jane saw the tall, needle-like form of the obelisk towering into the air
+from the middle of the great square behind them, and a part of the long
+front of the Tuileries, at the end of a vista of trees, far beyond.</p>
+
+<p>"As long as we have the obelisk in sight," said Rollo, "we cannot get
+lost."</p>
+
+<p>Just then Rollo's attention was called to a broad sheet of paper
+fastened up upon a tree that he was passing by. He stopped to see what
+it was. A little girl, about as old as Jennie, came up at the same time,
+leading the maid who had the care of her by the hand. This child began
+to read what was printed on the card. She read aloud, enunciating the
+words very slowly, syllable by syllable, and in a voice so clear, and
+rich, and silvery, that it was delightful to hear her. She seemed
+pleased to observe that Rollo and Jane were listening to her; and when
+she got through she turned to them, as if to apologize for not reading
+better, and said, in French, and with a pleasant smile upon her
+countenance,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span>&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"I am learning to read; but I cannot read too much yet, you see."</p>
+
+<p>By too much she meant very well, that being the way that the French
+express themselves in such a case.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo understood what she said, but he did not think it prudent to
+attempt to reply in the same language; so he said simply, in English,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"And yet I think my father would give five hundred dollars if I could
+read French like that. He'd be <i>glad</i> to do it."</p>
+
+<p>As Rollo spoke these words the child looked earnestly in his face, the
+smile gradually disappearing from her features and being replaced by a
+look of perplexity and wonder. She then turned and led the maid away.</p>
+
+<p>There were a great many booths and stands about, some in open spaces and
+some under the trees. At one they had all sorts of cakes for sale; at
+another toys of every kind, such as hoops, balls, kites, balloons,
+rocking horses, and all such things; and at a third pictures, some
+large, some small, some plain, and some beautifully colored. At one
+place, by the side of the avenue where most of the people were walking,
+there stood a man, with a tall and gayly-painted can on his back. It was
+covered with common drapery below; but the top was bright, and towered
+like<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span> a spire above the man's head. There was a round bar, like the leg
+of a chair, which went from the bottom of the can to the ground, to
+support it, and take the weight off the man's shoulders when he was
+standing still. The man was standing still now, and was all the time
+tinkling a little bell, to call the attention of the people to what he
+had to sell. It was something to drink. There were two kinds of drink in
+the can, separated from each other by a division in the interior. There
+were two small pipes, one for each kind of drink, leading from the
+bottom of the can round by the side of the man to the front, with
+stopcocks at the end, where he could draw out the drink conveniently.
+There was also a little rack to hold the glasses. There were three
+glasses; for the man sometimes had three customers at a time. While
+Rollo and Jane were looking at this man, a boy came up for a drink. The
+man took one of the glasses from the little rack, and filled it by
+turning one of the stopcocks. When the boy had taken his drink and paid
+the money, the man wiped the glass with a towel which he kept for the
+purpose; and then, putting it back in its place on the rack, he went on
+tinkling his little bell.</p>
+
+<p>In the mean time, the crowd of people seemed to increase, and it
+appeared to Rollo and Jennie,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span> when they came to observe particularly,
+that they were nearly all walking one way, and that was up the avenue,
+as if there were some place in that direction where they were all going.
+Rollo supposed that, of course, it was a church. He had been told by his
+father, when they were travelling in England, that when he was in any
+strange place on Sunday, and wished to find the way to church, one good
+method was to observe in the streets whenever he saw any considerable
+number of people moving in the same direction, and to join and follow
+them. He would, in such cases, his father said, be very sure to be
+conducted to a church, and after going in he would generally find some
+one who would show him a seat. Rollo and Jennie had often practised on
+this plan. In fact, they took a particular interest and pleasure in
+going to church in this way, as there was something a little of the
+nature of adventure in it.</p>
+
+<p>When, accordingly, the children observed that the great mass of the
+people that filled the two side avenues, as well as the carriages that
+were in the central one, were all moving steadily onward together,
+paying little attention to the booths, and stalls, and other places and
+means of amusement which were to be seen under the trees on either hand,
+he concluded that, while some of the people of Paris were willing to
+amuse them<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span>selves with sports and exhibitions on Sunday, the more
+respectable portion would not stop to look at them, but went straight
+forward to church; and he and Jennie resolved to follow their example.</p>
+
+<p>"I should like to see all these things very much," said Rollo, "some
+other day; but now we will go on, Jennie, to the church, where the rest
+of the people are going."</p>
+
+<p>Jennie very cordially approved of this plan, and so they walked on
+together. It happened that, at the time when they came to this
+determination, there was walking just before them a party, consisting
+apparently of a father and mother and their two children. The father and
+mother walked together first, and the two children, hand in hand,
+followed. The oldest child was a girl, of about Jennie's age. The other
+was a very small boy, just beginning to learn to talk. Rollo and Jennie
+came immediately behind these children, and were very much interested in
+hearing them talk together, especially to hear the little one prattling
+in French. He called his sister Adrienne, and she called him Antoine.
+Thus Rollo and Jennie knew the names of the children, but they had no
+way of finding out what were the names of the father and mother.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, Jennie," said Rollo, in a low tone, "I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span> think we had better follow
+this party, and keep close to them all the time, and then, when we get
+to the church, perhaps they will give us a seat."</p>
+
+<p>Jennie liked this proposal very much, and so she and Rollo walked along
+after Adrienne and Antoine, not too near them, but so near as to keep
+them always in sight. Sometimes the party turned aside from the avenue
+to walk under the trees, and sometimes they stopped a few minutes to
+look at some curious exhibition or spectacle which was to be seen. At
+one place a man had a square marked off, and enclosed with a line to
+keep the crowd back; and in the middle he had an electrical machine,
+with which he gave shocks to any of the bystanders who were willing to
+take them. A boy kept turning the machine all the time. At another place
+was a little theatre, mounted on a high box, so that all could see, with
+little images about as large as dolls dancing on the stage, or holding
+dialogues with each other. The words were really spoken by a man who was
+concealed in the box below; but as the little images moved about
+continually, and made all sorts of gesticulations, corresponding with
+what was said, it seemed to the bystanders precisely as if they were
+speaking themselves. Besides this, the images would walk about, scold<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span>
+each other, quarrel and fight each other, run out at little doors, and
+then come in again, and do a great many other things which it was very
+wonderful to see such little figures do.</p>
+
+<p>There were places, too, where there were great whirling machines, under
+splendid tents and canopies, with horses, and boats, and ships, and
+cradles at the circumference of them, all of which were made to sail
+round and round through the air, carrying the children that were mounted
+on the horses or sitting in the ships and boats. There were also several
+places for shooting at a mark with little spring guns, which were loaded
+with peas instead of bullets. There were figures of bears, lions,
+tigers, ducks, deer, and other animals at a little distance, which were
+kept moving along all the time by machinery, for the children to shoot
+at with the peas. If they hit any of them they drew a prize, consisting
+of cake or gingerbread, or of some sort of plaything or toy, of which
+great numbers were hanging up about the shooting place. All these, and a
+great many other similar contrivances for amusing people, Rollo and Jane
+saw, as they passed along; but they did not stop to look at them,
+excepting when the gentleman and lady stopped whom they were following.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span>
+This was seldom, however; and so they went, on the whole, very steadily
+forward, up the long and gentle ascent, until, at length, they reached
+the great Triumphal Arch at the Neuilly Barrier.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Chapter_VI" id="Chapter_VI"></a><span class="smcap">Chapter VI.</span></h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">A Great Mistake.</span></h3>
+
+
+<p>As they approached the arch, the children gazed upon it with
+astonishment, being greatly impressed with its magnitude and height.
+There were a great many men on the top of it. Their heads and shoulders
+were visible from below, as they stood leaning over the parapet. They,
+however, looked exceedingly small.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Jennie would have liked to stop and look longer at the arch;
+but they did not wish to separate from Adrienne and Antoine, who kept
+walking steadily on all the time with their father and mother. Rollo
+supposed, as has been said before, that this party were going to some
+church; but they were not. They were going to a place called the
+Hippodrome.</p>
+
+<p>The Hippodrome, far from being a church, is a place of amusement. It is
+used for equestrian performances, and feats of strength and agility, and
+balloon ascension, and all similar entertainments.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Hippodrome is a long, oval enclosure, with eight or ten ranges of
+seats extending all around it, and rising one above another, like the
+seats of the Coliseum at Rome. There is a roof extending all around over
+the seats; but the area within is so large that it could not well be
+covered with a roof. Besides, if there were a roof over it, how could
+the balloons go up?</p>
+
+<p>Then, moreover, the spectacles which are exhibited in the Hippodrome
+appear to much better advantage when seen in the open light of day than
+if they were under the cover of a roof, so long as the spectators
+themselves are protected from the sun and from any sudden showers.</p>
+
+<p>The area in the middle of the Hippodrome is about one hundred yards long
+and fifty yards wide. It is so large that there is room for a good wide
+road all around it, and also for another road up and down the middle,
+with little gardens of grass and flowers between. At the very centre is
+a round area, where there is a concealed canal of water to represent a
+stream. This water is ordinarily covered with planks, and the planks are
+covered with a very thick canvas carpet, and this with sand; so that the
+water is entirely concealed, and the horsemen ride over it just as they
+do over any other part of the area. When they wish to use it, to show
+how<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span> the horses could leap over streams, they take off the sand, roll up
+the carpet, and carry away the planks; and there they have a very good
+representation of a stream.</p>
+
+<p>The performances at the Hippodrome are very various. Sometimes whole
+troops of horse come in from between two great curtains at one end, all
+elegantly caparisoned and mounted, some by men and some by girls, but
+all, whether men or girls, dressed in splendid uniforms. These troops
+ride round and round the area, and up and down in the middle of it,
+performing a great variety of evolutions in the most rapid and
+surprising manner.</p>
+
+<p>Then there are races of various kinds. Some are run by beautiful girls,
+who come out mounted on elegant gray horses that are mottled like
+leopards, each of the riders having a scarf over her shoulders of a
+different color from the rest, so that they may be all readily
+distinguished from each other in the race. Then there are races of
+chariots, three running at a time, round and round the area; and of
+small ponies, with monkeys on them for riders. There are various
+contrivances, too, for athletic and gymnastic feats, such as masts and
+poles for climbers to ascend, and other similar apparatus. All these
+things give the interior of the Hippodrome quite a gay<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span> and lively
+appearance, and the area necessary for them is so large that the ranges
+of seats surrounding it are sufficient to accommodate ten thousand
+spectators.</p>
+
+<p>It was to this place that Adrienne and Antoine, with their father and
+mother, were going, while Rollo and Jennie supposed that they were going
+to a church. There was nothing to lead Rollo to suspect his mistake in
+the aspect of the building as he approached the entrance to it; for the
+sides of it were hidden by trees and other buildings, and the portal,
+though very large and very gayly decorated, seemed still, so far as
+Rollo could get a glimpse of it through the crowds of people, only to
+denote that it was the entrance to some very splendid public edifice,
+without at all indicating the nature of the purposes to which it was
+devoted.</p>
+
+<p>The immense concourse of people which were pouring into the Hippodrome
+divided themselves at the gates into two portions, and passed up an
+ascent to enter at side doors. Rollo and Jane, following their guides,
+went toward the right. They observed that the father of Adrienne and
+Antoine stopped at a little window near the entrance, to pay the price
+of admission for himself and wife and his two children and to get the
+tickets. He paid full price for his two children, and so took<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span> four full
+tickets. Rollo and Jane did not see him pay the money. They only
+observed that there was a crowd at the little window, and they saw
+Antoine's father take the tickets. They did not know what this meant,
+however; but they followed on. When they all came to the doorway which
+led up to the ranges of seats, the man whose duty it was to take the
+tickets supposed that the four children all belonged to the same family,
+and that they had been admitted at half price, and that, accordingly,
+two of the tickets were for the father and mother, and the other two for
+the four children. So he let them all pass on together, especially as
+there was, at that time, such a throng of people crowding in that there
+was no time to stop and make any inquiries.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Jane were carried along by the current up a flight of stairs,
+which came out among the ranges of seats; and after moving along for
+some distance till they came to a vacancy they sat down, and began to
+look around and survey the spacious and splendid interior into which
+they had entered. They were at once overwhelmed with the magnificence of
+the spectacle which was presented to view. Instead of a church, they
+found a vast open area extended before them, surrounded with long<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</a></span>
+ranges of seats, and laid out in the interior in the most graceful and
+beautiful manner.</p>
+
+<p>"Jennie," said Rollo, after gazing about for some moments, almost
+bewildered, "if this is any kind of meeting at all, I think it must be a
+camp meeting."</p>
+
+<p>Jennie was completely bewildered, and had no opinion on the subject
+whatever; so she said nothing.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the place for the choir, I suppose," said Rollo, pointing to a
+sort of raised platform with a balustrade in front, which was built
+among the seats in the middle of one of the sides of the Hippodrome.
+"But then," he added, after a moment's pause, "I don't see any pulpit,
+unless that is it."</p>
+
+<p>As he said this, Rollo pointed to a balcony with a rich canopy over it,
+which was built up among the seats, directly opposite to the musician's
+gallery, on the other side of the arena. This balcony was for the use of
+the emperor, and his family and friends, when they chose to come and
+witness the spectacles in the Hippodrome.</p>
+
+<p>These speculations of Rollo's were suddenly interrupted by the striking
+up of martial music, by a full band of trumpets, drums, clarinets,
+hautboys, and horns, from the musician's gallery.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</a></span> Soon afterwards the
+curtains opened at the farther end of the arena, and a magnificent troop
+of horse, mounted by male and female riders, all dressed in the gayest
+and most splendid costumes, came prancing in. As soon as Rollo had
+recovered from his astonishment at this spectacle, he turned to Jennie,
+and said,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Jennie, it is not any church or meeting at all; and I think we had
+better go home."</p>
+
+<p>"I think so too," said Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"I should like to come here some other day," added Rollo; "and I mean to
+ask my father to let us come. Uncle George will come with us. But <i>now</i>
+we had better go home."</p>
+
+<p>So the children rose from their seats and began to move toward the door.
+It was some time before they could get out, so great was the number of
+people still coming in. They, however, finally succeeded, and were quite
+relieved when they found themselves once more in the open air.</p>
+
+<p>They turned their steps immediately toward home. Jane, however, soon
+began to feel very tired; and so Rollo said he would stop the first
+omnibus that came along. The avenue was full of carriages of every kind;
+and pretty soon an omnibus, headed down the obelisk, appeared among
+them. Rollo made a signal for the conductor to stop, and he and Jennie
+got in.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>They had a very pleasant ride back through the Elysian Fields, and
+around the great square where the obelisk stands. They then entered the
+street which runs along by the side of the gardens of the Tuileries, and
+advanced in it toward the heart of the city. Rollo made a sign for the
+conductor to stop when the omnibus reached that part of the street which
+was opposite to the entrance into the garden where he and Jennie had
+gone in. This was, of course, also opposite to the street leading into
+the Place Vendome. It was but a short walk from this place to the hotel.
+About six o'clock the children arrived at the hotel, and the table was
+already set for dinner. Mr. Holiday was reclining on a couch in the
+room, and Mrs. Holiday had been reading to him. Rollo's uncle George was
+also in the room. Mrs. Holiday laid down her book when the children came
+in. Rollo and Jennie sat down upon a sofa, not far from their father's
+couch. They were glad to rest.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, children," said Mrs. Holiday, "have you had a pleasant walk?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo, "a very pleasant walk indeed. We have seen a great
+many very curious things. But I believe we made a mistake."</p>
+
+<p>"What mistake?" asked Mrs. Holiday.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, we followed a great many people that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</a></span> we thought were going to
+church; but, instead of that, they led us into a great place that I
+think was some sort of circus."</p>
+
+<p>Here Mr. George looked up very eagerly and began to laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"I declare!" said he. "I shouldn't wonder if you got into the
+Hippodrome."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know what it was," said Rollo. "When we first went in we saw
+that it was not a church; but we did not know but that it might be some
+sort of camp meeting. But pretty soon they began to bring horses in and
+ride them around, and so we came out."</p>
+
+<p>Here Mr. George fell into a long and uncontrollable paroxysm of
+laughter, during the intervals of which he said, in broken language, as
+he walked about the room endeavoring to get breath and recover his
+self-control, that it was the best thing he had heard since he landed at
+Liverpool. The idea of following the crowd of Parisians in the Champs
+Elys&eacute;es on Sunday afternoon, with the expectation of being conducted to
+church, and then finally taking the Hippodrome for a camp meeting! Rollo
+himself, though somewhat piqued at having his adventure put in so
+ridiculous a light, could not help laughing too; and even his father and
+mother smiled.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Never mind, Rollo," said his mother, at length. "I don't think you were
+at all to blame; though I am glad that you came out when you found what
+sort of a place it was."</p>
+
+<p>"O, no," said Mr. George, as he gradually recovered his self-control,
+"you were not to blame in the least. The rule you followed is a very
+good one for England and America; but it does not apply to France. Going
+with the multitude Sunday afternoons, in Paris, will take you any where
+but to church."</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding the concurrence of opinion between Rollo's mother and
+his uncle that he had done nothing wrong, neither he nor Jennie could
+help feeling some degree of uneasiness and some little dissatisfaction
+with themselves in respect to the manner in which they had spent the
+afternoon. They had both been accustomed to consider the Sabbath as a
+day solemnly consecrated to the worship of God and to the work of
+preparation for heaven. It is true that the day sometimes seemed very
+long to them, as it does to all children; and though they had always
+been allowed to take quiet walks in the gardens and grounds around the
+house, still they usually got tired, before night came, of being so
+quiet and still. Notwithstanding this, however, they had no disposition
+to break over the rule<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</a></span> which, as they supposed, the law of God enjoined
+upon them. They fully believed that God himself had ordained that there
+should be one day in seven from which all the usual occupations and
+amusements of life should be excluded, and which should be consecrated
+wholly to rest, to religious contemplation, and to prayer; and they were
+very willing to submit to the ordinance, though it brought with it upon
+them, as children, burdens and restrictions which it was sometimes quite
+onerous for them to bear.</p>
+
+<p>When night came, Rollo found that he always felt much happier if he had
+kept the Sabbath strictly, than when he attempted, either secretly or
+openly, to evade the duty. There was a sort of freshness and vigor, too,
+with which he engaged in the employments of the week on Monday morning,
+which, though he had never stopped to account for it philosophically, he
+enjoyed very highly, and which made Monday morning the brightest and
+most animated morning of the week. So Rollo was accustomed to acquiesce
+very willingly in the setting apart of the sacred day to religious
+observances and to rest, thinking that the restraints and restrictions
+which it imposed were amply compensated for by the peace and comfort
+which it brought to his mind when he observed it aright, and by<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</a></span> the
+novelty and freshness of the charm with which it invested the ordinary
+pursuits and enjoyments of life when it was over.</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly, on this occasion, feeling a little dissatisfied with
+himself and uneasy in mind, in consequence of the manner in which he had
+spent the afternoon, Rollo determined to make all the atonement for his
+fault, if fault it was, that was now in his power. Accordingly, when the
+family rose from the table after dinner, which was about seven o'clock,
+and his father and mother went and sat upon the sofa together, which
+stood in the recess of a window looking out upon the Place Vendome,
+Rollo said to Jane, in an undertone,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Jennie, come with me."</p>
+
+<p>He said this in the tone of an invitation, not of command; and Jennie
+understood at once, from her experience on former occasions, that Rollo
+had some plan for her entertainment or gratification. So she got down
+from her chair and went off with him very readily.</p>
+
+<p>They went out at a door which led into their mother's bed room.</p>
+
+<p>"Jennie," said Rollo, as he walked along with her across the room, "I am
+going to get the Bible and sit down here by the window and read in it.
+Would not you like to read with me?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Jennie, "if you will find a pretty story to read about.
+There are a great many toward the first part of the Bible."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo, "I will."</p>
+
+<p>"And let us go into my room to read," said Jennie. "I like my room the
+best."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Rollo, "I like your room best, too."</p>
+
+<p>So Rollo took the Bible off from the table of his father's room, and
+then he and Jennie went on together into Jennie's room. This room was a
+little boudoir, which opened from Mr. and Mrs. Holiday's room; it was a
+charming little place, and it was no wonder that Jennie liked it. It was
+hung with drapery all around, except where the window was, on one side,
+and a large looking glass and a picture on two other sides. There was
+even a curtain over the door, so that when you were in, and the door was
+shut, and the curtain over it was let down, you seemed to be entirely
+secluded from all the world. This drapery was green, and the room, being
+entirely enclosed in it, might have seemed sombre had it not been for
+the brilliancy and beauty of the furniture, and the variegated colors
+and high polish of the floor. There was an elegant bedstead and bed in
+the back part of the room, with a carved canopy over it. There was a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</a></span>
+bureau also, with drawers, where Jennie kept her clothes; and a little
+fireplace, with a pretty brass fender before it; and a marble mantel
+piece above, with a clock and two vases of flowers upon it. There were a
+great many other curious and beautiful articles of furniture in the
+room, which gave it a very attractive appearance, and made it, in fact,
+as pretty a place of seclusion as a lady could desire to have. Jennie
+enjoyed this room very much indeed; but still, after all,
+notwithstanding the expensiveness and beauty of the decorations which
+adorned it, I do not know that Jennie enjoyed it any more than she did a
+little seat that she had under some lilac bushes, near the brook at the
+bottom of her father's garden, at home.</p>
+
+<p>There was a small couch in the recess of the window in Jennie's boudoir;
+and here she and Rollo established themselves, with the Bible lying open
+before them upon a small table which they had placed before the couch to
+hold it. They raised their own seats by means of large, square cushions
+which were there, so as to bring themselves to the right height for
+reading from the book while it lay upon the table; and they put their
+feet upon a tabouret which belonged to the room. The tabouret was made
+for a seat, but it answered an admirable purpose for a foot-<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</a></span>stool. As
+soon as the two children were thus comfortably established, they opened
+the Bible, and Rollo began to turn over the leaves in the books of
+Samuel and of Kings, in order to find something which he thought would
+interest Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>At length he found a chapter which seemed, so far as he could judge by
+running his eye along the verses, to consist principally of narration
+and dialogue; and so he determined to begin the reading at once.</p>
+
+<p>"Now," said he, "Jennie, I will read one verse, and then you shall read
+one, and I will tell you the meaning of all the words that you don't
+know."</p>
+
+<p>Jennie was much pleased with this arrangement, and she read the verses
+which came to her with great propriety. It is true that there were a
+great many words at which she was obliged to hesitate some little time
+before she could pronounce them; and there were others which she could
+not pronounce at all. Rollo had the tact to wait just long enough in
+these cases. By telling children too quick when they are endeavoring to
+spell out a word, we deprive them of the pleasure of surmounting the
+difficulty themselves; and, by waiting too long, we perplex and
+discourage them. There are very few children<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</a></span> who, when they are hearing
+their younger brothers and sisters read, have the proper discretion on
+this point. In fact, a great many full-grown teachers fail in this
+respect most seriously, and make the business of reading on the part of
+their pupils a constant source of disappointment and vexation to them,
+when it might have been a pleasure.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo, too, besides the patient and kind encouragement which he afforded
+to Jane in her attempts to read her verses herself, read those which
+fell to his share in a very distinct and deliberate manner, keeping the
+place all the while with his finger, so that Jennie might easily follow
+him. He stopped also from time to time to explain the story to Jennie,
+and to talk about the several incidents that were described in it, in
+order to make it sure that Jennie understood them all. It would have
+been much easier for him to have taken the book himself, and to have
+read the whole chapter off at once, fluently. But this would have
+defeated his whole object; which was, not to do what he could do most
+easily, but to do good and help Jennie. If a boy were going up a high
+hill, with his sister in his company, it would be easier for him to go
+directly on and leave his sister behind. A self<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</a></span>ish boy would be likely
+to do this; but a generous-minded boy would prefer to go slowly, and
+help his sister along over the rocks and up the steep places.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Jane both became so much interested in their reading that they
+continued it almost an hour. It then began to be dark, and so they put
+the book away. Their mother came in about that time, and was very much
+pleased when she found how Rollo and Jennie had been employed; and Rollo
+and Jennie themselves experienced a substantial and deeply-seated
+feeling of satisfaction and comfort that all the merry-making of the
+Elysian Fields could never give. If any of the readers of this book have
+any doubt of this, let them try the experiment themselves. At some time,
+after they have been spending a portion of the Sabbath in such a way as
+to give them an inward feeling of uneasiness and self-condemnation, let
+them engage for a time in the voluntary performance of some serious
+duty, as Rollo did, and in the spirit and temper which he manifested,
+and see how strongly it will tend to bring back their peace of mind and
+restore them to happiness. To try the experiment more effectually still,
+spend the whole Sabbath in this manner, and then see with what a feeling
+of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</a></span> quiet and peaceful satisfaction you will go to bed at night, and
+with what a joyous and buoyant spirit you will awake on Monday morning.</p>
+
+<p>Before Rollo left Paris, he went, one Tuesday afternoon, with his mother
+and Jennie and his uncle George, to see the performances at the
+Hippodrome, and he enjoyed the spectacle very much indeed. Besides the
+performances which have already been described, there were two others
+which astonished him exceedingly. In one of these a man came into the
+middle of the area, and there the assistants lifted up a large and heavy
+pole, which they poised in the air, and then set the lower end of it in
+a sort of socket which was made in an apron which the man wore, which
+socket was fastened securely to the man's hips and shoulders by strong
+straps, so that he could sustain the weight of the pole by means of
+them. The pole was about thirty feet high, and the top was branched like
+a pitchfork. It was shaped, in fact, exactly like a pitchfork, except
+that there was a bar across from the top of one branch to the top of the
+other, and a rope hanging down from the middle of the bar half way down
+to the place of bifurcation&mdash;that is, to the place where the straight
+part of the pole ended and the branches began. Things being thus
+arranged,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</a></span> a boy, who was about twelve years old, apparently, came out,
+and, leaping up upon the man's shoulders, began to climb up the pole.
+When he reached the top of it he took hold of the rope, and by means of
+the rope climbed up to the bar. Here he began to perform a great variety
+of the most astonishing evolutions, the man all the time poising the
+pole in the air. The boy would climb about the bar in every way, drawing
+himself up sometimes backwards and sometimes forward, and swinging to
+and fro, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</a></span> turning over and over in every conceivable position. He
+would hang to the bar sometimes by his hands and sometimes by his
+legs&mdash;sometimes with his head downward, sometimes with his feet
+downward. He would whirl round and round over the bar a great many
+times, till Rollo and Jane were tired of seeing him, and then he would
+rest by hanging to the pole by the back<i> of his head</i>, without touching
+the bar with any other part of his body. All this time the man who held
+the pole kept it carefully poised, moving to and fro about the area
+continually in following the oscillations.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<a name="HIPPODROME" id="HIPPODROME"></a>
+<img src="images/i137.jpg" width="600" height="520" alt="" title="" />
+<span class="caption">THE HIPPODROME.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The other performance was in some respects more extraordinary still.
+There was a mast set up in the ground, thirty or forty feet high. At the
+ground, ten feet from the foot of the mast, there commenced an inclined
+plane, formed of a plank about a foot or eighteen inches wide, which
+ascended in a spiral direction round and round the mast till it reached
+the top. A man ascended this plane by means of a large ball, about two
+feet in diameter, which he rolled up standing upon it, and rolling it by
+stepping continually on the ascending side. There was no ledge or guard
+whatever to keep the ball from rolling off the plane&mdash;nothing but a
+narrow plank ascending continually, and winding in a spiral manner<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</a></span>
+around the mast. This experiment it was quite frightful to see. Several
+of the children who were sitting near Mr. George's party began to cry,
+saying, "O, he will fall&mdash;he will fall!" In fact, Jennie could not bear
+to look at him, and so she shut her eyes; and even Mrs. Holiday looked
+another way. But Rollo watched it through, and saw the man go on up to
+the very top of the mast, and stand there on his ball on the top, forty
+feet above the ground, with his hands extended in triumph. After
+remaining there a short time, he came down as he had gone up; and when
+he reached the ground, he rolled his ball along, keeping on it all the
+time, till he came to a chariot which was waiting to receive him. He
+stepped from the ball off to the chariot, and was then driven all around
+the ring, being received every where, as he passed, with the
+acclamations of the spectators.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Chapter_VII" id="Chapter_VII"></a><span class="smcap">Chapter VII.</span></h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Carlos.</span></h3>
+
+
+<p>One morning, just after breakfast, when Rollo and Jennie were sitting at
+the window of their hotel, looking at a band of about forty drummers
+that were arranging themselves on the Asphaltum, in the Place Vendome,
+in front of the column, preparatory to an exercise of practice on their
+instrument, Mr. George came into the room. Mr. George took up a
+newspaper which was lying upon the table, and, seating himself in a
+large arm chair which was near, he read from it for a few minutes, and
+then, laying down the paper, said,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Rollo, how do you pronounce L-o-u-v-o-i-s?"</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George did not speak the word, but spelled it letter by letter.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Because," said Mr. George, "that is the name of the hotel where I have
+gone."</p>
+
+<p>"What made you go away from this hotel, uncle George?" asked Jennie.
+"Didn't you like it?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Mr. George, "I liked it very much. But I wanted to change
+the scene. I had become very familiar with every thing in this part of
+the city, and with the modes of life in this hotel. So I thought I would
+change, and go to some other quarter of the city, where I could see
+Paris, and Paris life, in new aspects."</p>
+
+<p>"I wish I had gone with you," said Rollo. "I wonder if my father would
+not let me go now. Is there a room for me at your hotel?" he added,
+looking up eagerly.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know," said Mr. George. "You can ask when you go there. But to
+day I am going to see the Garden of Plants; and you may go with me, if
+you like."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Rollo, "I should like to go very much."</p>
+
+<p>"And may I go, too?" said Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Mr. George, "if your mother is willing."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Jennie, joyfully, "I'll go and ask her. Only I wish it was
+a garden of flowers instead of a garden of plants."</p>
+
+<p>So Jennie went to ask her mother if she might go with her uncle George.
+She soon returned with her shawl and bonnet on, and then, Mr. George
+leading the way, they all went together down stairs, and got into a
+carriage<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</a></span> which was waiting for them at the door. The carriage was an
+open one, with the top turned back, so that they all had a fine
+opportunity to see the streets and the persons passing as they rode
+along.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George directed the coachman to drive first to his hotel; and the
+carriage, leaving the Place Vendome on the northern side, entered into a
+perfect maze of narrow streets, through which it advanced toward the
+heart of the city.</p>
+
+<p>After a time, they came to a long, straight street, which led across the
+city, through the centre of it, from the river to the Boulevards; and
+when they were about in the middle of this street, the attention of the
+children was attracted by a very long and gloomy-looking building, which
+formed one side of the street for a considerable distance before them.
+It had no windows toward the street, but only a range of square recesses
+in the walls, of the form of windows, but without any glass. Jennie
+asked Mr. George if it was the prison.</p>
+
+<p>"Not exactly," said Mr. George; "and yet there is one room in it where
+there are more than a hundred men, and they are not permitted to speak a
+loud word."</p>
+
+<p>"Let's go and see them," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said Mr. George; "we will."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>So saying, he called upon the coachman to stop opposite to a great
+archway which opened through the building near the middle of it. Mr.
+George and the children descended from the carriage and went in under
+the archway. Looking through, they saw a large court yard, with grass,
+and trees, and a fountain. They did not, however, go on into this court
+yard, but turned to the right to a very broad flight of steps which
+seemed to lead into the building. There was a man in uniform, with a
+cocked hat upon his head, who stood in the passage way to guard the
+entrance. He made no objection, however, to the party's going in; and so
+they all went on up the stairway.</p>
+
+<p>After passing through a series of magnificent passages and vestibules,
+with very broad staircases, and massive stone balustrades, and other
+marks of a very ancient and venerable style of architecture, Mr. George
+led the way through an open door, where the children saw extended before
+them, as far as the eye could reach, a long range of rooms, opening into
+one another, and all filled with bookshelves and books. The rooms had
+windows only on one side; that is, on the side next the courtyard; and
+the doors which led from one room to the other were all near that side
+of the room. Thus three sides of each room were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</a></span> almost wholly unbroken,
+and they were all filled with bookshelves and books. The doors which led
+from one room to another were all in a range; so that standing at one
+end, opposite to one of these doors, the spectator could look through
+the whole range of rooms to the other end. The distance was, moreover,
+so great, that, though there was a group of several persons standing at
+the farther end of the range of rooms at the time that Rollo entered,
+they looked so small and so indistinct that Rollo could not count them
+to tell how many there were.</p>
+
+<p>"It is a library," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Mr. George, "it is the National Library of Paris, one of the
+largest libraries in the world. The books have been accumulating here
+for ages."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see what can be the use of such a large library," said Rollo;
+"nobody can possibly read all the books."</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Mr. George, "they cannot read them all; but they may wish to
+consult them. There are often particular reasons for seeing some
+particular book, which was published so long ago that it is not now to
+be found in common bookstores; in such cases, people come here, and they
+are pretty sure to find the book in this collection."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>There were several parties of ladies and gentlemen to be seen, at
+different distances, walking along the range of rooms, all of whom
+seemed to be visitors. Mr. George, himself, walked on, and the children
+followed him. They passed from one apartment to another, amazed at the
+number of books. They were all neatly arranged on bookshelves, which
+extended from the floor to the ceiling, and were protected by a wire
+netting in front; so that, although the visitors could see the books,
+they could not take them down.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George and the children walked on, until, at length, they came to
+the end of the range of rooms, and there they found another range,
+running at right angles to the first, back from the street. They turned
+and walked along through these rooms, too. The floors of all the rooms
+were very smooth and glossy, being formed of narrow boards, of
+dark-colored wood, curiously inlaid, and highly polished. Rollo told
+Jennie that he believed he could slide on such floors as well as he
+could on ice, if he thought they would let him try. He knew very well,
+however, that it would not be proper to try. Besides, he observed that
+there were standing at different distances along the range of rooms
+certain men, in uniform, who<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</a></span> seemed to be officers stationed in the
+library to guard against any thing like irregularity or disorder on the
+part of the visitors.</p>
+
+<p>Besides the books, there were a great many other things to interest
+visitors in the rooms of the library, such as models of buildings,
+statues, collections of coins, medals, and precious gems, and other
+similar curiosities. These things were arranged on tables and in cases
+made expressly for them, and placed in the various rooms. The tables and
+cases occupy, generally, the central parts of the rooms that they were
+placed in, so as not to interfere with the use of the sides of the rooms
+for books. In one place was a collection of some of the oldest books
+that ever were printed, showing the style of typography that prevailed
+when the art of printing was first discovered. Mr. George took great
+interest in looking at these. Rollo and Jennie, however, did not think
+much of them; and so, while their uncle was examining these ancient
+specimens, they went to the windows and looked out into the court yard.
+This court formed a green and beautiful garden, shaded with trees and
+adorned with fountains and walks. The visitors could see that the
+buildings of the library extended in long ranges all around it.</p>
+
+<p>At length, at the end of the second range of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</a></span> rooms, the party came to a
+third range, which was parallel to the first, and which extended along
+the back side of the court yard. The children could not go into these
+apartments, for the entrance to them was closed by a glass partition.
+They could, however, look through the partition and see what there was
+within. They beheld a very long hall, which was several hundred feet in
+length, apparently, and quite wide, and it was lined on both sides with
+bookshelves and books. Long tables were extended up and down this hall,
+with a great number of gentlemen sitting at them, all engaged in silent
+study. Some were reading; some were writing; some were looking at books
+of maps or engravings. There were desks at various places up and down
+the room, with officers belonging to the library sitting at them, and
+several messengers, dressed in uniform, going to and fro bringing books.
+Mr. George explained to the children that there was another entrance to
+this room, leading from the court yard by a separate staircase, and that
+any person who wished to read or study might go in there and sit at
+those tables, only he must be still, and not disturb the studies of the
+rest. If he wished for any book, he could not go and get it from the
+shelves, but must write the title of it in full on a slip of paper, and
+carry it to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</a></span> one of the desks. The officer would take the slip and give
+it to one of the messengers, who would then go and get the book.</p>
+
+<p>After looking through the glass partition at this great company of
+readers and students until their curiosity was satisfied, the children
+turned away, and Mr. George conducted them back through the long ranges
+of rooms by the same way that they came. When, at length, they got back
+to the staircase where they had come up, Mr. George, instead of going
+out where he had come in, descended by another way, through new
+corridors and passages, until he came to a room where a considerable
+number of people were sitting at tables, looking at books of engravings.
+The sides of this room, and of several others opening into it, were
+filled with bound volumes of prints and engravings, some plain and some
+colored, but very beautiful. Many of the volumes were very large; but
+however large they might be, it was very easy to turn over the leaves
+and see the pictures, for the tables, or rather, desks, in the middle of
+the room, were so contrived that a book, placed upon them, was held at
+precisely the right slope to be seen to advantage by persons sitting
+before it. Mr. George told the children, in a whisper, that any one
+might ask for any book there was there, and the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</a></span> attendants would place
+it on one of the tables for him, where he might sit and look at the
+prints in it as long as he pleased.</p>
+
+<p>"Some day," continued Mr. George, "we will come here and look over some
+of these books; but to-day we must go to the Garden of Plants."</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George then led the children back to the carriage, and ordered the
+coachman to drive to his hotel.</p>
+
+<p>The hotel was situated on the site of an open square, which, though by
+no means so grand and magnificent as the Place Vendome, was still a very
+pleasant place.</p>
+
+<p>There was a fountain in the centre, with a large basin of water around
+it. Outside of this basin the square was paved with asphaltum, and was
+as hard and smooth as a floor. The pavement was shaded with trees, which
+were planted at equal distances all over it; and under the trees there
+were seats, where various persons were sitting. There were many
+children, too, playing about under the trees, some trundling hoop, some
+jumping rope, and some playing horses.</p>
+
+<p>The carriage stopped at the door of the hotel, and Mr. George took the
+children up to his room. It was a front room, and it looked out upon the
+square. The children went to the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</a></span> window, and, while Mr. George was
+getting ready to go, they amused themselves by looking at the children
+that were playing on the square.</p>
+
+<p>Among the other children, there was a boy, apparently about eight years
+of age, who was sitting apart from the rest of the children, on a bench
+by himself. His complexion was dark, and his hair very black and glossy.
+He was very neatly and prettily dressed, though in a very peculiar
+style, his costume being quite different from any thing that Rollo had
+ever before seen. He had a ball in his hand, which now and then he
+tossed into the air.</p>
+
+<p>"He has not any body to play with," said Rollo to Jennie. "I have a
+great mind to go down and play with him while uncle George is getting
+ready."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said Mr. George; "you can go. I shall not be ready for
+nearly half an hour. We do not wish to get to the Garden of Plants
+before twelve o'clock."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo hesitated a little about going down, and while he was hesitating
+the boy rose from his seat and came toward the hotel. He entered under
+the archway, and presently Rollo heard him coming up the staircase. He
+then determined to hesitate no longer; so he went out into the passage
+way to see him.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The boy had reached the top of the staircase when Rollo went out, and
+was just then coming along the hall. He looked at Rollo with a smile as
+he came toward him, and this encouraged Rollo to speak to him.</p>
+
+<p>"Can't you find any one to play with you?" said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>The boy shook his head, but did not speak.</p>
+
+<p>He meant by this that he did not understand what Rollo said; but Rollo
+thought he meant that he could not find any one to play with him.</p>
+
+<p>"I will play with you," said Rollo; and as he spoke he held out his
+hands, with the wrists together and the palms open between them, in a
+manner customary with boys for catching a ball.</p>
+
+<p>The boy understood the sign, though he did not understand the words. He
+tossed the ball to Rollo, and Rollo caught it. Rollo then tossed it back
+again. Presently Rollo made signs to the boy to sit down upon the floor
+at one end of the hall, while he sat down at the other, explaining his
+wishes also at the same time in words. The boy talked too, in reply to
+Rollo, accompanying what he said with signs and gestures. They got along
+thus together in their play very well, each one imagining that he helped
+to convey his meaning to the other by what he said, while, in fact,
+neither understood a word that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</a></span> was spoken by the other, and so took
+notice of nothing but the signs.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo listened attentively once or twice to short replies that his new
+friend made to him, in order to see if he could not distinguish some
+words in it that he could understand; but he could not; and he finally
+concluded that it must be some other language than French that the boy
+was speaking. He was sorry for this; for he could understand short
+sentences in French pretty well, and could speak short sentences himself
+in reply. When, however, he tried to speak to the boy in French, he
+observed that he did not appear to understand him any better than when
+he spoke in English. This confirmed him in the opinion that the boy must
+belong to some other nation.</p>
+
+<p>After playing together for some time with the ball, the two boys began
+to feel quite acquainted with each other. Rollo wished very much to find
+out his new companion's name; so he asked him, in English,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"What is your name?"</p>
+
+<p>The boy smiled, and throwing the ball across again to Rollo as he spoke,
+said something in reply; but it was a great deal too much to be his
+name. What he said was, when interpreted into<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</a></span> English, "My father
+bought this ball for me, and gave two francs for it."</p>
+
+<p>Then Rollo thought he would try French; so he translated his question,
+and asked it in French.</p>
+
+<p>"And I am going to carry it with me to Switzerland and Italy," said the
+boy, speaking still in the unknown tongue.</p>
+
+<p>"That can't be your name, either," said Rollo, "I am very sure."</p>
+
+<p>Then, after a moment's pause, he added, in an eager voice and manner, as
+if a new idea had suddenly struck him,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"We are going to the Garden of Plants&mdash;uncle George, and Jennie, and I;
+wouldn't you like to go, too?"</p>
+
+<p>The boy smiled, and held out his hands for Rollo to roll the ball to
+him, saying something at the same time which to Rollo seemed totally
+unmeaning.</p>
+
+<p>"He does not understand me, I suppose; but I know how I can explain it
+to him."</p>
+
+<p>So he rose from the floor, and, by means of a great deal of earnest
+gesticulation and beckoning, he induced the boy to get up too, and
+follow him. Rollo led the way into his uncle's chamber. The boy seemed
+pleased, though a little timid, in going in.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Uncle George," said Rollo, "here is a boy that cannot talk. Are you
+willing that I should invite him to go with us to the Garden of Plants?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Mr. George; "though I don't see how you are going to do it."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo led the boy to the window, and pointed to the carriage, which
+stood down before the door below. Then he opened a map of Paris which
+lay upon the table, and found the Garden of Plants laid down upon it,
+and showed it to the boy. Then he pointed to his uncle George, to
+Jennie, and to himself, and then to the carriage. Then he made a motion
+with his hand to denote going. By these gesticulations he conveyed the
+idea quite distinctly to his new acquaintance that they were all going
+to the Garden of Plants. He then finally pointed to the boy himself, and
+also to the carriage, and looked at him with an inquiring look, which he
+meant as an invitation to the boy to accompany them. The boy paid close
+attention to all these signs; and when Rollo had finished, instead of
+either nodding or shaking his head, in token of his accepting or
+declining the invitation, as Rollo expected he would have done, he took
+up the map, and, making certain mysterious gestures, which Rollo<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</a></span> could
+not comprehend, he walked off rapidly out of the room.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo looked at his uncle George with an expression of great
+astonishment on his countenance.</p>
+
+<p>"What does that mean?" said he.</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps he has gone to ask his father or his mother," suggested Mr.
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"He has," exclaimed Rollo, "he has; that's it, I'm sure."</p>
+
+<p>So Rollo went out immediately into the hall to wait till the boy came
+back.</p>
+
+<p>In a few minutes a door opened, which led into a suite of apartments in
+the rear of the hotel, and the boy, with the map in his hand, came into
+the hall, nodding his head, and looking very much pleased; talking all
+the time, moreover, in a very voluble but perfectly unintelligible
+manner. A moment after he came the door opened again, and a very
+respectably dressed man, of middle age, came into the hall. The boy
+pointed to Rollo, and said something to this man.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you going to the Garden of Plants?" said the man to Rollo, speaking
+in English, though with a very decidedly foreign accent.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," said Rollo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"And did you invite Carlos to go with you?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," said Rollo; "only I did not know that his name was Carlos.
+He told me something very different from that. What language is it that
+he talks? Is it French?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied the man, "it is Spanish. He is a Spanish boy. He cannot
+understand a word of French or English. But he may go with you to the
+Garden of Plants."</p>
+
+<p>"Are you his father, sir?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied the man, "I am his father's courier."<a name="FNanchor_E_5" id="FNanchor_E_5"></a><a href="#Footnote_E_5" class="fnanchor">[E]</a></p>
+
+
+
+<p>So saying, the man passed on, leaving Rollo and Carlos together.</p>
+
+<p>"Come, Carlos," said Rollo, "let us go into uncle George's room, and see
+if he is not ready to go."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo beckoned as he spoke, and Carlos, understanding his action, though
+not his words, immediately followed him. In fact, during all his
+subsequent intercourse with Carlos, Rollo<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</a></span> continued to talk to him just
+as if he could understand, and Carlos talked also in reply.</p>
+
+<p>It is true, that, if Rollo had been asked whether he supposed that
+Carlos understood what he said, he would have answered no; and yet he
+continually forgot to act upon this belief, but talked on, under the
+influence of a sort of instinctive feeling that good plain English, such
+as he took care to speak, could not fail to convey ideas to any boy that
+heard it. Under the influence of a similar feeling, Carlos talked
+Spanish to Rollo, each imagining that the other understood him, at least
+in some degree, while, in fact, neither understood any thing but the
+signs and gestures which accompanied the language.</p>
+
+<p>Just as they were about to set out, one of Mr. George's friends called
+to see him; and when he found that the party were going to the Garden of
+Plants, he wished to go too. There was scarcely room for so many in the
+carriage, and so Rollo proposed that he and Carlos should go in an
+omnibus.</p>
+
+<p>"There is an omnibus," said he, "that goes there through the Boulevards,
+close by here; and Carlos and I will go in that, and then we can find
+you in the garden."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said Mr. George.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Come, Carlos, come with me," said Rollo; "we are going to find an
+omnibus."</p>
+
+<p>Carlos perceived that Rollo was proposing that they should go somewhere
+together, but he did not know where, or for what; nor did he care. He
+was ready to assent to any thing. So he and Rollo, leaving the rest of
+the party in the act of getting into the carriage, walked along up the
+street which led to the Boulevards.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Chapter_VIII" id="Chapter_VIII"></a><span class="smcap">Chapter VIII.</span></h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">The Garden of Plants.</span></h3>
+
+
+<p>Rollo and Carlos had not gone far before they came to a place where two
+children had set up what they called a <i>chapel</i>, under the archway which
+led to the interior of the house where they lived. A real chapel, in
+Catholic countries, is any consecrated place, large or small, containing
+an altar, and a crucifix, and other sacred emblems, where masses are
+said and other religious services are performed. Real chapels are made
+in the alcoves of churches, in monuments over tombs, and in other
+similar places, and children have toy chapels to play with. There are
+little crucifixes, and candlesticks, and communion cups, and other
+similar things for sale at the toy shops. Sometimes the children buy
+these things and arrange them on a small table, in a corner of the room,
+for play, just as in Protestant countries they arrange a pulpit and
+chairs for a congregation, and so make believe have a meeting. Sometimes
+the children<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</a></span> bring out their chapel and set it near the sidewalk, by
+the street, and then hold out a little plate to ask the passers by for
+contributions. There are almost always some people more good matured
+than wise, who will give them a sou or two; and thus they often made up
+quite a little purse of money.</p>
+
+<p>In this case, as Rollo and Carlos were passing along, the little girl,
+who was very nicely dressed in holiday costume, held out a small plate,
+saying,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"One sou, gentlemen, if you please, for the little chapel."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Carlos stopped to look at the chapel.</p>
+
+<p>"What pretty little candles!" said Rollo, talking half to himself and
+half to Carlos, "and how tall! I wish I had some of them for Jennie."</p>
+
+<p>"I have got a chapel at home," said Carlos.</p>
+
+<p>"She wants us to give her a sou," continued Rollo. "Would you?"</p>
+
+<p>"And I will show it to you if you ever come to Barcelona," said Carlos.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know whether to give her a sou or not," said Rollo. "Would you,
+Carlos?"</p>
+
+<p>"My candlesticks are of real silver," said Carlos, "but these are not."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo finally concluded to give the girl a sou,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</a></span> thinking that he was in
+some measure bound to do it, after having stopped so long to look at her
+chapel; and then he and Carlos walked on as before. As they went on they
+continued to talk together, from time to time, Rollo in English and
+Carlos in Spanish, neither of them, however, paying any attention to
+what the other said. This was a very good plan, for there was a sense of
+companionship in this sort of conversation, though it communicated no
+ideas. They took the same kind of pleasure in it, probably, that birds
+do in the singing of their mates. In fact, it often happens, when a
+group of children are talking together in a language which they all
+understand, that each one talks for the pleasure of talking, and none of
+them pay any attention to what the others say.</p>
+
+<p>Presently the two boys reached the Boulevard. It was a very broad and
+magnificent street, and the sidewalks were very wide. The sidewalks,
+wide as they were, were thronged with foot passengers, and the street
+itself was full of carriages. Very soon an omnibus came along; but it
+was full. There are a great many curious contrivances about a French
+omnibus; one of which is, that there is a sign, with the word
+<i>complete</i>, in French, painted upon it in large letters. The sign is
+placed directly over the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</a></span> door of the omnibus behind, and is attached to
+the top of the coach by a hinge at the lower edge. When the omnibus is
+full, the conductor who rides on the step behind pulls up this sign, by
+means of a cord attached to it, and then all the people on the sidewalks
+can see that there is no room for them. When any passengers get out so
+as to make room for others, then the conductor lets this sign down, and
+it lies flat upon the top of the coach, out of sight, until the omnibus
+gets full again, when it is drawn up as before.</p>
+
+<p>"Complete," said Rollo, pointing to the sign, which was up and in full
+view. "That omnibus is full."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Carlos, "I see him. His cap is so high that he can't wear it
+in the omnibus, and so he has to take it off."</p>
+
+<p>"But there will be another one pretty soon," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"If I were a soldier," said Carlos, "I would never get into an omnibus
+at all. I would have an elegant black horse with a long tail, and I
+would go galloping through the streets on my horse."</p>
+
+<p>At length an omnibus came along which was not full, and Rollo and Carlos
+got into it. After meeting with various adventures on the way, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</a></span>
+changing from one omnibus to another, according to the system which
+prevails in Paris, they finally reached the gates of the garden. There
+was a sentry box on each side of the gates, and soldiers, with bayonets
+fixed, guarding the entrance. There were, however, a great many people
+going in. The soldiers did not prevent them. They had orders to allow
+all persons who were quiet and orderly, and had no dogs with them, to
+enter freely. So Rollo and Carlos passed directly in.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo's first feeling was that of astonishment at the extent and variety
+of the scenes and prospects which opened before him. Instead of a small
+garden, laid out in gravel walks, and beds of flowers, as he had
+imagined, he found himself entering a perfect maze of winding walks,
+which were bordered on all sides by an endless variety of enclosures,
+groups of shrubbery, groves, huts, cabins, yards, ponds of water, and
+every other element of rural scenery. The whole, as it first burst upon
+Rollo's eye, formed a most enchanting landscape, and extended farther
+than he could see. The walks meandered about in the most winding and
+devious ways. The spaces between them were enclosed by neat little
+fences of lattice work, and were divided into little parks, or fields,
+in each of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</a></span> which some strange and unknown animals were feeding. There
+were ponds, with a quantity of birds of the gayest plumage sailing upon
+them; and green slopes, with goats, or deer, or sheep, of the most
+extraordinary forms and colors, grazing in them. At one place Rollo
+stopped to look at a small basin of water, with a broad stone margin all
+around it, which was completely covered with turtles and tortoises of
+all colors and sizes. The animals were lying there asleep, basking in
+the sun. A little farther on was a beautiful little yard, almost
+surrounded with trees and shrubbery, where three or four ostriches, with
+long necks, and heads higher than Rollo's, were walking about with a
+very majestic air. And farther still there was a little field, the
+occupants of which excited the astonishment of the boys to a still
+higher degree. They were three giraffes. One of them, with his head
+twenty feet in the air, was cropping the leaves from the top of a tall
+tree. The second was standing still, quietly looking at the groups of
+visitors that were gazing upon him from without the paling; while the
+third was amusing himself by galloping about the yard, with a sort of
+rolling motion that it was most astonishing to see.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Carlos advanced among these scenes, drawn from one to the
+other by the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</a></span> new objects which every where presented themselves to
+view, and uttering to each other continual exclamations of astonishment.
+In fact, they talked incessantly to one another as they walked on,
+pointing out, each to the other, whatever attracted their attention, and
+making all sorts of comments upon what they saw.</p>
+
+<p>Presently a low, bellowing sound was heard among the trees at a little
+distance.</p>
+
+<p>"Hark!" said Rollo, in English, putting his hand upon Carlos's shoulder.
+"What's that? I hear a roaring."</p>
+
+<p>"Hark!" said Carlos, in Spanish. "What's that? I hear a roaring."</p>
+
+<p>Neither of the boys understood the words which the other spoke; but they
+knew very well that they were both listening to and talking about the
+roaring.</p>
+
+<p>"Let's go and see what it is," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll go and see," said Carlos.</p>
+
+<p>So off they started together in the direction of the sound. They walked
+along a short distance, passing several beautiful little enclosures,
+where quiet and gentle-looking animals, of various forms, were grazing
+in their mimic pastures, or lying at rest before the doors of the
+thatched-roofed cabins that had been built for them instead of barns,
+until at length they came<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</a></span> to a place where a long range of buildings
+opened to view before them, the fronts of which, instead of showing
+doors and windows, were formed of gratings of iron. The interior of this
+range was divided into compartments, each one of which formed an immense
+cage. These cages were all filled with lions, tigers, panthers,
+leopards, hyenas, and other ferocious beasts of prey. Some were walking
+to and fro restlessly in their narrow prisons; others were lying down;
+and others still were crouched in a corner of their cage, where they
+remained motionless, gazing with a sullen air upon the visitors who
+stood looking at them from without the grating.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Carlos walked back and forth in front of these cages several
+times, looking at the animals. They admired the beauty and grace of the
+tigers and leopards, and the majestic dignity of the lions. There were a
+lion and a lioness together in one cage. The lioness was walking
+restlessly to and fro; while the lion sat crouched in the back part of
+the cage, with an expression upon his countenance in which the lofty
+pride and majesty of his character, and the patience and submissiveness
+which pertained to his situation, were combined.</p>
+
+<p>"Poor fellow!" said Rollo; "if I had you and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</a></span> your cage in Africa, where
+you belong, I would open the door and let you go."</p>
+
+<p>Just at this moment the attention of both Rollo and Carlos was suddenly
+arrested by a most unearthly sound at a little distance from them, which
+seemed to be intermediate between a scream and a roar. It was so loud,
+too, as to be truly terrific.</p>
+
+<p>"What's that?" said Rollo, suddenly, in English.</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, what a dreadful bray that is!" said Carlos, in Spanish.</p>
+
+<p>"Would you go out there and see what it is?" said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Hark! Let's go there and see what it is," said Carlos.</p>
+
+<p>So the boys started together to go in the direction of the sound.</p>
+
+<p>It is impossible, however, for a stranger in the Garden of Plants to be
+sure of going any considerable distance in any one direction, for the
+walks are meandering and circuitous beyond description. They wind about
+perpetually in endless mazes; and the little fields, and parks, and
+gardens that are enclosed between them are so enveloped in shrubbery,
+and the view, moreover, is so intercepted with the huts and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</a></span> cabins
+built for the animals, and with the palings and networks made to confine
+them, that it is impossible to see far in any direction. Besides, there
+is so much to attract the attention, and to excite curiosity and wonder,
+at every step, that one is continually drawn away from one alley to
+another, till he gets hopelessly bewildered.</p>
+
+<p>The huts and cabins which were made for the animals were very curious,
+and many of them were so pretty, with their rustic walls and thatched
+roof, that Rollo was extremely pleased with them. He stopped before one
+of them, which was the residence of a pair of beautiful lamas, and told
+Carlos that he meant to ask his uncle George to take particular notice
+how it was made, and so make one for him for a play-house when he got
+home.</p>
+
+<p>"And I wonder," said he, "where my uncle George and Jennie are. I don't
+see how we are ever to find them. I did not know that this garden was so
+large and so full of trees and bushes."</p>
+
+<p>"Look there!" said Carlos, pointing through an opening in the shrubbery
+along the winding walk. "What are they doing there?"</p>
+
+<p>Rollo, understanding the gesture, though not the words, turned in the
+direction that Carlos<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</a></span> indicated, and saw that there was quite a crowd
+of men, women, and children at the place, all engaged, evidently, in
+looking at something or other very intently.</p>
+
+<p>"Let's go and see," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>So the boys went along that way together. They soon came in view of a
+very high and strong palisade, which, though it was half concealed by
+trees and shrubbery, evidently enclosed quite a considerable area, in
+the centre of which was a large stone building, like a castle, with
+projecting wings and towers, and immense gateways opening into it on
+various sides. This building was the residence of all the
+<i>monsters</i>&mdash;the elephants, the giraffes, the rhinoceros, and the
+hippopotamus. Each of these species had its own separate apartment in
+the castle; and the ground surrounding it, within the great palisade,
+was divided into as many yards as there were doors; so that each kind of
+animal had its own proper enclosure. In one of these enclosures the
+rhinoceros was walking about, clothed in his plated and invulnerable
+hide; and in the next there were two elephants. The crowd of people were
+chiefly occupied in looking at the elephants. The palisade was very
+heavy and strong, being formed of timbers pointed at the top, and nearly
+as high as the elephants could reach.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</a></span> These palisades were, however,
+not close together. They were far enough apart to allow of the elephants
+putting their trunks through to the people outside, and also to give the
+people a good opportunity to look. Though these timbers were thus set at
+some distance apart from each other, they wore still connected together,
+and all held firmly in their places, by two iron rails which passed
+through them all, one near the top, and the other near the bottom, of
+the palisade, all along the range. They thus formed a fencing so heavy
+and strong that even the elephants could not break it down.</p>
+
+<p>The visitors could not come quite up to the elephants; for outside of
+this great palisade, at a distance of about three feet from it, there
+was a high paling, made expressly to keep the spectators back. At the
+time when Rollo and Carlos came to the place the elephants were putting
+their trunks through to the people, in order to be fed with nuts, cake,
+gingerbread, and other such things which the people had ready to give
+them. Sometimes they would order the elephants to hold up their trunks
+and open their mouths, and then the men would try to toss pieces of
+gingerbread in. The elephants were always ready to do this when ordered,
+though their mouths, when they opened them, were so small that the
+people very<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</a></span> seldom succeeded in aiming the missile so that it would go
+in.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Carlos looked about among the crowd that were assembled at
+this place to see if Mr. George was among them; but he was not; and so,
+after amusing themselves for some time with the elephants, they walked
+along to see what else there was in the garden.</p>
+
+<p>There were a great many people in the garden besides those who seemed to
+have come to see the animals. There were groups of children, that seemed
+to belong in the vicinity, playing in the <i>walks, some jumping ropes,
+and others</i> building little houses of gravel stones. There were women
+seated on benches in various little shady nooks and corners, some
+sewing, others taking care of babies; while others, at little stands and
+stalls, sold gingerbread and cakes. At one place Rollo stopped to look
+at two little children that were playing in the gravel and throwing the
+little pebble stones about. Their grandmother, who was sitting near,
+said something to them in French.</p>
+
+<p>"What does she say?" asked Carlos.</p>
+
+<p>"She says," replied Rollo, "you must not throw gravel in your little
+sister's face."</p>
+
+<p>The question in this case and the answer fitted each other very well;
+but it was a mere matter<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</a></span> of accident, for neither of the boys
+understood what the other had said.</p>
+
+<p>Pretty soon the boys came to a place where a great number of people were
+standing on a sort of parapet, and leaning upon an iron railing, where
+they seemed to be looking down into some cavity. They hurried to the
+place, and, stepping up upon the parapet, they looked down too, and
+found there a range of dens below the surface of the ground, all full of
+bears. These dens were sunken yards, six or eight feet deep, and
+enclosed with perpendicular walls all around, so that the bears could
+not possibly get out. There were iron railings around the top, and a
+great many people were standing there looking down to the bears. There
+were four or five of these yards, all in a row; and as there were many
+great trees overshadowing them, the place was cool and pleasant. Some of
+the bears were walking about on the stone pavement which formed the
+bottom of the dens; others were sitting on their hind legs, and holding
+up their fore paws to catch the pieces of gingerbread which were thrown
+down to them by the people above. There were a number of little birds
+hopping about there, picking up the crums that were left, though they
+took care to keep out of the way of the bears. Rollo and Carlos bought
+some cakes of ginger<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</a></span>bread of a woman who kept a stall near by, and,
+breaking them into pieces, they threw them down to the bears. They threw
+the most to a great white bear that was in one of the dens, and who
+particularly attracted their attention. Rollo told Carlos that he
+supposed this bear must have come from the north pole. The boys were
+both by this time rather hungry; but they were so much interested in
+seeing the bears try to catch the pieces of gingerbread that they did
+not think to eat any of it themselves, but threw it all down to them,
+all except one piece which Rollo gave to a little girl who stood beside
+him, to let her throw it, because she had none of her own. For this
+kindness the girl thanked Rollo, in French, in a very polite and proper
+manner.</p>
+
+<p>After being satisfied with seeing the bears, the boys wandered on
+wherever they saw the most to attract them, until at length they came to
+what is called the palace of the monkeys, which pleased them more than
+any thing they had seen. This palace is an enormous round cage, as high
+as a house, and nearly a hundred feet in diameter, with a range of stone
+buildings all around it on the back side. These buildings have little
+rooms in them, where the monkeys live in the winter, and where they
+always sleep at night. They go out into the cage to play. The cage is<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</a></span>
+formed of slender iron posts and railing, so that the people standing
+outside can see the monkeys at their sports and gambols. They play with
+each other in every possible way, and frolic just as if they were in
+their native woods. They climb up the smooth iron posts, pursuing one
+another; and then, leaping across through the air, they catch upon a
+rope, from which they swing themselves across to the branch of a tree.
+Some of these branches have bells attached to them; and the monkey, when
+he gets upon such a one, will spring it up and down till he sets the
+bell to ringing, and then, assisted by the return of the branch, he
+bounds away through the air to some rope, or pole, or railing that he
+sees within his reach. The agility which these animals display in these
+feats is truly astonishing.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Carlos watched their evolutions with great interest. There was
+an excellent place to see, for the land opposite the cage ascended in
+such a manner that those more remote could look over the heads of those
+that were nearer. Besides this, there were quite a number of chairs
+under the trees, at the upper part of this ascent; and Rollo, perceiving
+that several of them were vacant, sat down in one, and made a sign to
+Carlos to sit down in another. They could now look at the monkeys, and
+rest at the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</a></span> same time. Presently a woman came along and said to Rollo,
+in French,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Please pay the chairs, sir."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo recollected immediately that at all such places in Paris chairs
+were kept to be let, those who used them paying two sous apiece for the
+privilege. So he took out four sous and gave the woman.</p>
+
+<p>"I did not think of there being any thing to pay for these chairs," said
+he to Carlos. "But then, I don't care. It is worth four sous to get a
+good rest, as tired as I am. I'm pretty hungry, too. I wish I had not
+given all my gingerbread to the bears."</p>
+
+<p>Carlos made no reply to this suggestion; though there is no doubt that
+he would have readily assented to what Rollo said, if he had understood
+it. The boys remained some time looking at the monkeys, and then
+strolled away into other parts of the garden. Very soon they came to a
+place where Rollo spied at some distance before him, under some immense
+old trees in a sort of a valley, what he thought was a restaurant.</p>
+
+<p>"See these monstrous big trees!" said Carlos; "and there are tables
+under them."</p>
+
+<p>The boys made all haste to the spot, and found to their great joy that
+it was a restaurant. There<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</a></span> was a plain but very picturesque-looking
+house, antique and venerable; and before it, on a green, under the
+spreading branches of some enormous old trees, a number of small tables,
+with seats around them.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, Carlos," said Rollo, "we will have some bread and butter and a
+good cup of coffee."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i176.jpg" width="600" height="527" alt="" title="" />
+<span class="caption">THE RESTAURANT.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>So they sat down at one of the pleasantest tables, and very soon a
+waiter came to see what they would have. Rollo called for coffee and
+bread and butter for two. In a short time the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</a></span> waiter came, bringing two
+great cups, which he filled half with coffee and half with boiled milk.
+He brought also a supply of very nice butter, and a loaf of bread shaped
+like a stick of wood. It was about as large round as Rollo's arm, and
+twice as long. The waiter laid this bread across the table for Rollo and
+Carlos to cut off as much from it as they might want. This is what they
+call having "bread at discretion."</p>
+
+<p>The boys enjoyed this banquet very much indeed. Besides the coffee, they
+had water, which they sweetened in the tumblers with large lumps of
+white sugar. They talked all the time while they were eating, each in
+his own language, and laughed very merrily. "After all," said Rollo,
+"this is the very best place in the whole garden. Feeding the bears is
+very good fun; but this is infinitely better."</p>
+
+<p>After remaining for half an hour at the table, and eating till their
+appetites were completely satisfied, they concluded to go back and see
+the monkeys again.</p>
+
+<p>In the mean time, Mr. George and his friend, with Jennie, had been
+engaged in an entirely different part of the garden; for the whole
+enclosure is so large that it takes many days to see the whole. On one
+side, bordering on a street, there is a long row of houses and gar<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</a></span>dens,
+occupied by professors, who give courses of lectures on the plants and
+animals which the garden contains. On another is a magnificent range of
+buildings, occupied as a museum, containing endless collections of dried
+plants, of minerals and shells, of skeletons, and the stuffed skins of
+birds and beasts. Then there is a very large tract of level land,
+between two splendid avenues, all laid out in beds of plants and
+flowers, forming a series of parterres, extending as far as the eye can
+reach, and presenting the gayest and most beautiful combination of
+colors that can be conceived. Jennie was very much delighted with all
+these things, as she walked about in these parts of the garden with her
+uncle, though she was somewhat uneasy all the time because she could not
+see any thing of Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe," said she at last to her uncle, as they were standing
+on the margin of a beautiful little artificial pond, full of lilies and
+other aquatic plants, "I don't believe that we can find him at all in
+such a large garden."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Mr. George; "there'll be no difficulty. There is one
+universal rule for finding boys in the Garden of Plants."</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Go to the places where they keep the monkeys<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</a></span> and the elephants," said
+Mr. George; "and if you don't find them there at once, wait a few
+minutes, and they'll be pretty sure to come."</p>
+
+<p>It was as Mr. George had predicted; for, on going to the palace of the
+monkeys, there they found Rollo and Carlos laughing very heartily to see
+a big monkey holding a little one in its arms as a human mother would a
+baby.</p>
+
+<p>The party, when thus united, went together once more over the principal
+places where the two divisions of it had gone separately before, so that
+all might have a general idea of the whole domain; and then, going out
+at a different gate from the one by which they had entered, they went
+home, all resolving to come again, if possible, at some future day.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Chapter_IX" id="Chapter_IX"></a><span class="smcap">Chapter IX.</span></h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">An Excursion.</span></h3>
+
+
+<p><span class="smcap">One</span> day, about one o'clock, after Rollo had been in Paris about a
+fortnight, he came into the hotel from a walk which he had been taking,
+and there found his mother and Jennie putting on their bonnets. He asked
+them where they were going. They said they were going to take a ride
+with Mr. George.</p>
+
+<p>"May I go, too?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Why&mdash;yes," said his mother, hesitatingly. "I suppose there will be
+room. Or you may stay at home here with your father. He is asleep in his
+room."</p>
+
+<p>It is generally the case with children, both boys and girls, when they
+are young, that if they can get any sort of consent, however reluctant,
+from their parents, to any of their requests, they are satisfied, and
+take the boon thus hesitatingly accorded to them as readily as if it had
+been granted to them in the freest and most cordial manner. With
+gentlemen and ladies, however,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[Pg 184]</a></span> it is different. They generally have
+more delicacy, and are seldom willing to accept of any favor unless
+circumstances are such that it can be granted in a very free and cordial
+manner. They will scarcely ever, in any case, ask to be permitted to
+join any party that others have formed; and when they do ask, if they
+perceive the slightest doubt or hesitation on the part of their friends
+in acceding to their proposal, they infer that it would be, for some
+reason or other, inconvenient for them to go; and they accordingly, at
+once, give up all intention of going.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo, though still a boy, was beginning to have some of the honorable
+sentiments and feelings of a man; and when he perceived that his mother
+hesitated a little about granting his request, he decided immediately
+not to go and ride. Besides, he liked the idea of staying with his
+father.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said he, "I will stay here. My father may wish for something
+when he wakes up."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't suppose, however, after all," added his mother, "that it is
+really necessary for you to stay on his account. His bell is within
+reach; and Alfred will come immediately when he rings."</p>
+
+<p>"But I should <i>like</i> to stay," said Rollo; "and besides, I can get ahead
+one more day in my French."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[Pg 185]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Rollo was writing a course of French exercises, and his task was one
+lesson for every day. The rule was, that he was to write this exercise
+immediately after breakfast, unless he had written it before; that is,
+either on the same day before breakfast, or on a previous day. Now,
+Rollo desired to be free after breakfast, for that was a very pleasant
+time to go out. Besides, there were often plans and excursions formed
+for that time, which he was invited to join; and he could not join them
+unless his lesson for the day had been written. So he took pains to
+write his exercises, as much as possible, in advance. Whenever there
+came a rainy day he would write two or three lessons, and sometimes he
+would write early in the morning. He was now nearly a week in advance.
+Instead of being satisfied with this, however, he began to be quite
+interested in seeing how far ahead he could get. This feeling was what
+led him to think that he would take this opportunity to write a French
+lesson.</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly, when his mother and Jennie had gone, he seated himself at
+his table and began his work. The writing of the exercise took about an
+hour. When the work was finished, and while Rollo was preparing to put
+his books away, he heard a movement in his father's room.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[Pg 186]</a></span> He got up
+from his seat and opened the door, gently, saying,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Father, are you awake?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said his father. "Are you there, Rollo?"</p>
+
+<p>Rollo found his father sitting up in a great arm chair, by the side of
+his bed. He had a dressing gown on.</p>
+
+<p>"How do you feel, father?" said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"I think I feel better," said Mr. Holiday. As he said this he put on his
+slippers, and then stood up upon the rug that lay in front of his bed.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said he, "I certainly feel better&mdash;a great deal better."</p>
+
+<p>"I am very glad," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Where is your mother?" asked Mr. Holiday, as he walked across the room
+to the glass.</p>
+
+<p>"She has gone out to take a ride," said Rollo, "with uncle George and
+Jennie."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right," said Mr. Holiday. "I am very glad that she has gone. And
+have you been staying here to take care of me?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," said Rollo. "I have been writing another French lesson. I
+have got them all written now to next Friday."</p>
+
+<p>"Ah," said Mr. Holiday, "that's excellent. That's what the farmers call
+being forehanded."</p>
+
+<p>"Now, Rollo," said Mr. Holiday, after a little<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[Pg 187]</a></span> pause, "I feel so much
+better that I should like to go somewhere and take a ride myself. I
+don't care much where. If there is any where that you wish to go, I will
+go with you. Come, I will put myself entirely at your disposal. Let us
+see what you can do to give me a ride and entertain me."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo was very much pleased indeed with this proposal. He decided
+instantly what he would do. He had seen that morning an <i>affix</i>, as the
+French call it, that is, a placard posted on a wall among a hundred
+others, setting forth that there was to be a balloon ascension that
+afternoon at the Hippodrome, at three o'clock, to be followed by various
+equestrian performances. Rollo immediately mentioned this to his father,
+and asked him if he should be willing to go there. His father said that
+he should; adding, that he would like to see the balloon go up very
+much.</p>
+
+<p>"Then when we come home," said Rollo, "you must ride slowly along
+through the Elysian Fields, and let me see the booths, and the games
+that they are playing there."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said his father; "I will take some newspapers with me, and
+I will sit still in the carriage while you go and see the booths and the
+games."</p>
+
+<p>This plan being thus resolved upon, and all<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[Pg 188]</a></span> arranged, Alfred was
+summoned and ordered to get the carriage ready, and to put the top down.
+When Alfred reported that the carriage was at the door, Mr. Holiday and
+Rollo went down and got in, and were soon in the midst of the stream of
+equipages that were going up the grand avenue of the Elysian Fields.
+They arrived at the Hippodrome in time to get an excellent seat, and
+they remained there two hours. They saw the balloon, with a man and
+young girl in the car below it, rise majestically into the air, and soar
+away until it was out of sight. The fearless aeronauts seemed entirely
+at their ease while they were ascending to the dizzy height. They sat in
+the car waving banners and throwing down bouquets of flowers as long as
+they could be seen.</p>
+
+<p>After this there was a series of performances with horses, which
+delighted Rollo very much. Troops of men came out upon the arena,
+mounted on beautiful chargers, and armed with lances and coats of mail,
+as in ancient times. After riding their elegantly caparisoned horses
+round and round the ring several times, they formed into squadrons and
+attacked each other with their lances in sham battles. After this,
+fences of hurdles were put up across the course, in various places, and
+girls, mounted on beautiful<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[Pg 189]</a></span> white horses and elegantly dressed, rode
+around, leaping over the fences in a surprising manner. These and
+similar performances continued until near five o'clock, and then the
+immense assembly broke up, and the people, some in carriages and some on
+foot, moved away over the various roads and avenues which diverge from
+the Star.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo and his father got into their carriage, which had been waiting for
+them all this time, and passing the Triumphal Arch, they entered the
+Grand Avenue of the Elysian Fields, on their return to the city.</p>
+
+<p>They descended the slope which led down to the Round Point at a rapid
+rate. Here, after passing the Round Point, the road became level, and
+the region of groves and booths, and of games and frolicking, began.</p>
+
+<p>"Now," said Rollo, "I should like to drive slowly, so that, if I come to
+any thing that I wish to get out and see, I can see it."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said his father; "give Alfred your orders."</p>
+
+<p>"Alfred," said Rollo, "draw up as near as you can to the sidewalk on the
+right hand, and walk the horses, so that I can see what there is."</p>
+
+<p>"And in the mean time," said Mr. Holiday, "I will read my papers."</p>
+
+<p>So Mr. Holiday took his newspapers out of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[Pg 190]</a></span> his pocket and began to read
+them, while Rollo, standing up in the carriage, began to survey the
+crowd that filled the walks and groves that bordered the avenue, in
+order to select some object of attraction to be examined more closely.</p>
+
+<p>"Only I wish, father," said Rollo, "that I had somebody here with me to
+go and see the things&mdash;Jennie or Carlos. I wish Carlos was here."</p>
+
+<p>"It is very easy to go and get him," said his father, with his eyes
+still on his newspaper.</p>
+
+<p>"May I?" said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"Any thing you please," said Mr. Holiday. "You are in command this
+afternoon. You may give Alfred any orders you please."</p>
+
+<p>"Then, Alfred," said Rollo, "drive to the Hotel Louvois as fast as you
+can."</p>
+
+<p>As he said this, Mr. Holiday folded up his paper and Rollo took his
+seat, while Alfred, turning the horses away from the sidewalk, set them
+to trotting briskly along the avenue.</p>
+
+<p>"Only, father," said Rollo, "I shall prevent your reading your papers."</p>
+
+<p>"No matter for that," said Mr. Holiday. "I shall like a good brisk ride
+along the Boulevards quite as well."</p>
+
+<p>The horses, kept always by Alfred in the very best condition, trotted
+forward at a rapid rate,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[Pg 191]</a></span> leaving scores of omnibuses, cabs, and
+citadines behind, and keeping pace with the splendid chariots of the
+French and English aristocracy that thronged the avenue. Presently Rollo
+observed a peculiar movement among the carriages before them, as if they
+were making way for something that was coming; and at the same time he
+saw hundreds of people running forward from the groves and booths,
+across the side avenues, to the margin of the carriage way.</p>
+
+<p>"The emperor!" said Alfred, drawing in his horses at the same time.</p>
+
+<p>An instant afterward, Rollo, who, on hearing Alfred's words, started
+from his seat and stood up in the carriage to look, saw two elegantly
+dressed officers, in splendid uniforms, galloping along toward them in
+the middle of the avenue. They were followed at a little distance by two
+others; and then came a very beautiful barouche, drawn by four glossy
+black horses, magnificently caparisoned. Two gentlemen were seated in
+this carriage, one of whom bowed repeatedly to the crowd that were
+gazing at the spectacle from the sides of the avenue as he rode rapidly
+along. Behind this carriage came another, with a gentleman and a lady in
+it, and afterward two more troopers. The whole cavalcade moved on so<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[Pg 192]</a></span>
+rapidly, that, before Rollo had had scarcely time to look at it, it had
+passed entirely by.</p>
+
+<p>"The emperor!" said Alfred to Rollo. "He is going out to take a ride."</p>
+
+<p>"Is that the emperor?" exclaimed Rollo. "He looks like any common man.
+But if I had four such beautiful black horses as he has got, I should be
+glad. I would drive them myself, instead of having a coachman."</p>
+
+<p>The movement and the sensation produced by the passing of the emperor
+and his train along the avenue immediately subsided, and the other
+carriages resumed their ordinary course. Alfred's horses trotted on
+faster than ever. A thousand picturesque and striking objects glided
+rapidly by&mdash;the trees and the booths of the Elysian Fields; the tall,
+gilded lampposts, and the spouting fountains of the Place de la
+Concorde; omnibuses, cabs, wagons, chariots, and foot passengers without
+number; and, finally, the tall column of the Place Vendome. Winding
+round in a graceful curve through this magnificent square, the carriage
+rolled on in the direction of the Boulevards, and, after going rapidly
+on for nearly half a mile in that spacious avenue, it turned into the
+street which led to the hotel. It stopped, at length, before the door,
+and Rollo got out, while Mr. Holiday remained<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[Pg 193]</a></span> in the carriage. Rollo
+went up stairs, and after about five minutes he came down again,
+bringing not only Carlos with him, but also his uncle George. Mr.
+Holiday invited Mr. George to go with them for the remainder of the
+ride. This invitation Mr. George accepted; and so the two gentlemen
+taking the back seat, and Rollo and Carlos the front, Alfred took them
+all back to the Elysian Fields together.</p>
+
+<p>They remained nearly an hour in the Elysian Fields. During this time
+Rollo's father and his uncle George staid in the carriage by the
+roadside, talking together, while Rollo and Carlos went in among the
+walks and groves to see the various spectacles which were exhibited
+there. They would come back from time to time to the carriage, in order
+that Rollo might describe to his father what they found, or ask
+permission to take part in some amusement. For instance, at one time he
+came and said, very eagerly,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Father, here is a great whirling machine, with ships and horses going
+round and round. Carlos and I want to ride on it. The horses are in
+pairs, two together. Carlos can get on one of them, in one of the pairs,
+and I on the other. We can go round twenty times for two sous."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said his father.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[Pg 194]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>So Rollo and Carlos went back to the whirling machine. It was very
+large, and was very gayly painted, and ornamented with flags and
+banners. The vessels and the horses were attached to the ends of long
+arms, which were supported by iron rods that came down from the top of
+the central post, so that they were very strong. The horses were as
+large as small ponies, and the vessels were as big as little boats&mdash;each
+one having seats for four children. When Rollo and Carlos went back, the
+machine had just taken up its complement of passengers for one turn, and
+was then commencing its rotation. There were a great many persons
+standing by it, pleased to see how happy the children were in going
+round so merrily. There was an iron paling all around the machine, to
+keep the spectators at a safe distance, otherwise they might come too
+near, and so be struck, and perhaps seriously hurt, by the horses or the
+boats, when they were put in motion.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the twenty turns had been taken the machine stopped, and the
+children who had had their ride were taken off the horses and out of the
+boats, all except a few who were going to pay again and have a second
+ride. Rollo and Carlos then went inside the enclosure, and, going up
+some steps placed there for the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[Pg 195]</a></span> purpose, they mounted their horses.
+Very soon the machine began to revolve, and they were whirled round and
+round twenty times with the greatest rapidity. The arms of the machine,
+too, were long, so that the circle which the horses and the vessels
+described was quite large, and the whole twenty revolutions made quite a
+considerable ride.</p>
+
+<p>After finishing their circuit and dismounting from their horses, the
+boys next came to a whirling machine, which revolved vertically instead
+of horizontally; that is, instead of whirling the rider round and round
+near the level of the ground, it carried them up, over, and down. There
+was a great wheel, which revolved on an axis, like a vertical mill
+wheel. This wheel was double, and between the two circumferences the
+seats of the passengers were hung in such a manner that in revolving
+they swung freely, so as to keep the heads of the people always
+uppermost. These seats had high backs and sides, and a sort of bar in
+front for the people to take hold of, otherwise there would have been
+great danger of their falling out. As it was, they were carried so
+swiftly, and so high, and the seats swung to and fro so violently when
+the machine was in rapid motion, that the men and girls who were in the
+seats filled the ear with their screams and shouts of laughter.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[Pg 196]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Rollo and Carlos, after seeing this machine revolve, went to the
+carriage to ask if they might go in it the next time.</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Mr. Holiday. "I am not sure that it is safe."</p>
+
+<p>So the boys went away from the carriage back under the trees again, and
+walked along to see what the next exhibition might be. The carriage
+moved on in the avenue a little way to keep up with them.</p>
+
+<p>The boys strolled along through the crowd a little while longer, looking
+for a moment, as they passed, now at the stalls for selling gingerbread
+and cakes, now at a display of pictures on a long line,&mdash;the sheets
+being fastened to the line by pins, like clothes upon a clothes
+line,&mdash;now at a company of singers, singing upon a stage under a canopy,
+and now again at a little boy, about seven or eight years old, who was
+tumbling head over heels on a little carpet which he had spread on the
+ground, and then carrying round his cap to the bystanders, in hopes that
+some of them would give him a sou. At length their attention was
+attracted by some large boys, who were engaged at a stand at a little
+distance in shooting at a mark with what seemed to be small guns. These
+guns, however, discharged themselves by means of a spring coiled up
+within<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[Pg 197]</a></span> the barrel, instead of gunpowder; and the bullets which they
+shot were peas. Rollo had seen these shooting-places before, when he
+went through the Fields on the first Sunday after he came; so he did not
+stop long here, but called Carlos's attention to something that he had
+never seen before, which was going on at a place a little under a tree,
+a little farther along. A large boy seemed to be pitching quoits. There
+were a number of persons around him looking on. There was a sort of box
+placed near the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[Pg 198]</a></span> tree, the bottom of which was about two feet square. It
+had a back next the tree, and two sides, but it had no front or top. In
+fact, it was almost precisely like a wheelbarrow without any wheel,
+legs, or handles.</p>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<a name="SINGING" id="SINGING"></a>
+<img src="images/i194.jpg" width="600" height="524" alt="SINGING IN THE OPEN AIR." title="" />
+<span class="caption">SINGING IN THE OPEN AIR.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The bottom or floor of this box had a great many round and flat plates
+of brass upon it, about four inches in diameter, and about four inches
+apart from each other. The player had ten other plates in his hand, of
+the same size with those which were upon the bottom of the plate. He
+took these, one by one, and standing back at a certain distance, perhaps
+about as far as one good long pace, pitched them, as boys do quoits, in
+upon the floor of the box. What he tried to do was, to cover up one of
+the disks in the box so that no part of it could be seen. If he did so
+he was to have a prize; and he paid two sous for the privilege of
+playing. The prizes consisted of little articles of porcelain, bronzes,
+cheap jewelry, images, and other similar things, which were all placed
+conspicuously on shelves against the tree, above the box, in view of the
+player.</p>
+
+<p>It seemed to the bystanders as if it would be not at all difficult to
+toss the disks so as with ten to cover one; but those who tried seemed
+to find it very difficult to accomplish the object.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[Pg 199]</a></span> Even if the disks
+which they tossed fell in the right place, they would rebound or slide
+away, and sometimes knock away those which were already well placed.
+Still, after trying once, the players wore usually unwilling to give up
+without trying a second, and even a third and fourth time, so that they
+generally lost six or eight sous before they were willing to stop;
+especially as the man himself would now and then play the disks, and he,
+having made himself skilful by great practice, found no difficulty in
+piling up his ten disks wherever he wished them to go.</p>
+
+<p>"I could do it, I verily believe," said Rollo. "I should like to try. I
+mean to go and ask my father if I may."</p>
+
+<p>So Rollo went to the carriage to state the case to his father, and ask
+his permission to see if he could not pitch the disks so as to cover one
+of the plates on the board. His father hesitated.</p>
+
+<p>"So far as trying the experiment is concerned," said Mr. Holiday, "as a
+matter of dexterity and skill, there is no harm; but so far as the hope
+of getting a prize by it is concerned, it is of the nature of gaming."</p>
+
+<p>"I should think it was more of the nature of a reward for merit and
+excellence," said Mr. George.</p>
+
+<p>"No," said Mr. Holiday; "for in one or two<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[Pg 200]</a></span> trials made by chance
+passengers coming along to such a place, the result must depend much
+more on chance than on adroitness or skill.</p>
+
+<p>"I will tell you what you may do, Rollo," continued Mr. Holiday. "You
+may pay the man the two sous and try the experiment, provided you
+determine beforehand not to take any prize if you succeed. Then you will
+pay your money simply for the use of his apparatus, to amuse yourself
+with a gymnastic performance, and not stake it in hope of a prize."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Rollo, "that is all I want." And off he ran.</p>
+
+<p>"It seems to me that that is a very nice distinction that you made,"
+said Mr. George, as soon as Rollo had gone, "and that those two things
+are very near the line."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Mr. Holiday, "it is a nice distinction, but it is a very
+true one. The two things are very near the line; but then, one of them
+is clearly on one side, and the other on the other. For a boy to pay for
+the use of such an apparatus for the purpose of trying his eye and his
+hand is clearly right; but to stake his money in hopes of winning a
+prize is wrong, for it is gaming. It is gaming, it is true, in this
+case, on an exceedingly small scale. Still it is gaming, and so is the
+beginning of a road which has a very dreadful end. Is not it so?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[Pg 201]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Mr. George, "I think it is."</p>
+
+<p>As might have been expected, Rollo did not succeed in covering one of
+the disks. The disks that he threw spread all over the board. The money
+that he paid was, however, well spent, for he had much more than two
+sous' worth of satisfaction in making the experiment.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo found a great many other things to interest him in the various
+stalls and stands that he visited; but at length he got tired of them
+all, and, coming back to the carriage, told his father that he was ready
+to go home.</p>
+
+<p>"Very well," said his father. "I don't know but that your uncle George
+and I are ready, too, though we have not quite got through with our
+papers. But we can finish them at home."</p>
+
+<p>So Rollo and Carlos got into the carriage, and all the party went home
+to dinner.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[Pg 202]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Chapter_X" id="Chapter_X"></a><span class="smcap">Chapter X.</span></h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Rollo's Narrative.</span></h3>
+
+
+<p>One evening, when Rollo had been making a long excursion during the day
+with his uncle George, and had dined with him, at the close of it, at a
+restaurant's in the Boulevards, he went home about eight o'clock to the
+hotel to see his father and mother and Jennie, and tell them where he
+had been. He found his mother in her room putting on her bonnet. She
+said she was going to take a ride along the Boulevards with a gentleman
+and lady who were going to call for her.</p>
+
+<p>"And where is father?" said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"He has gone to bed, and is asleep by this time. You must be careful not
+to disturb him."</p>
+
+<p>"And Jennie?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"She has gone to bed, too," said his mother; "but she is not asleep, and
+I presume she will be very glad to see you. You can go in her room."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I will," said Rollo. "But, mother, I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[Pg 203]</a></span> should like to go and ride
+with you. Will there be room for me?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said his mother. "There will be room, I suppose, in the carriage;
+but it would not be proper for me to take you, for I am going on an
+invitation from others. The invitation was to me alone, and I have no
+right to extend it to any body else.</p>
+
+<p>"But this you can do, if you please," continued his mother. "You can
+take our carriage, and let Alfred drive you, and so follow along after
+our party. Only in that case you would not have any company. You would
+be in a carriage alone."</p>
+
+<p>"Never mind that," said Rollo. "I should like that. I would put the top
+back, and then I could see all around. I should have a grand ride. I'll
+go. I wish Jennie had not gone to bed; she could have gone with me."</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied his mother; "Jennie is not well to-night. She has got
+cold, and she went to bed early on that account. But she will be very
+glad to have you go and see her."</p>
+
+<p>So Rollo went into Jennie's room. As soon as he opened the door, Jennie
+pushed aside the curtains, and said,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, Rollo, is that you? I am very glad that you have come."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[Pg 204]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I can't stay but a little while," said Rollo. "I am going to take a
+ride with mother."</p>
+
+<p>"Are you going with mother?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Not in the carriage with her," replied Rollo; "but I am going in the
+same party. I am going to have a carriage all to myself."</p>
+
+<p>"O, no, Rollo," said Jennie, in a beseeching tone. "Don't go away. Stay
+here with me, please. I am all alone, and have not any body to amuse
+me."</p>
+
+<p>"But you will go to sleep pretty soon," said Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied Jennie; "I am not sleepy the least in the world. See."</p>
+
+<p>Here Jennie opened her eyes very wide, and looked Rollo full in the
+face, by way of demonstrating that she was not sleepy.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo felt very much perplexed. When he pictured to himself, in
+imagination, the idea of being whirled rapidly through the Boulevards,
+on such a pleasant summer evening, in a carriage which he should have
+all to himself, with the top down so that he could see every thing all
+around him, and of the brilliant windows of the shops, the multitudes of
+ladies and gentlemen taking their coffee at the little round tables on
+the sidewalk in front of the coffee saloons, the crowds of people coming
+and going, and the horsemen<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[Pg 205]</a></span> and carriages thronging the streets, the
+view was so enchanting that it was very hard for him to give up the
+promised pleasure. He, however, determined to do it; so he said,&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Well, Jennie, I'll stay. I will go out and tell mother that I am not
+going to ride, and then I will come back."</p>
+
+<p>For the first half hour after Mrs. Holiday went away, Rollo was occupied
+with Jennie in looking over some very pretty French picture books which
+Mrs. Holiday had bought for her that day, to amuse her because she was
+sick. Jennie had looked them all over before; but now that Rollo had
+come, it gave her pleasure to look them over again, and talk about them
+with him. Jennie sat up in the bed, leaning back against the pillows and
+bolsters, and Rollo sat in a large and very comfortable arm chair, which
+he had brought up for this purpose to the bedside. The books lay on a
+monstrous square pillow of down, half as large as the bed itself, which,
+according to the French fashion, is always placed on the top of the bed.
+Rollo and Jennie would take the books, one at a time, and look them
+over, talking about the pictures, and showing the prettiest ones to each
+other. Thus the time passed very pleasantly. At length, however, Jennie,
+having looked over all the books, drew<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[Pg 206]</a></span> herself down into the bed, and
+began to ask Rollo where he had been that day.</p>
+
+<p>"I have been with uncle George," said Rollo. "He said that he was going
+about to see a great many different places, and that I might go with him
+if I chose, though he supposed that most of them were places that I
+should not care to see. But I did. I liked to see them all."</p>
+
+<p>"What places did you go to?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, first we went to see the workshops. I did not know before that
+there were so many. Uncle George says that Paris is one of the greatest
+manufacturing places in the world; only they make things by hand, in
+private shops, and not in great manufactories, by machinery. Uncle
+George says there must be as much as eight or ten square miles of these
+shops in Paris. They are piled up to six or eight stories high. Some of
+the streets look like ranges of chalky cliffs facing each other, such as
+we see at some places on the sea shore."</p>
+
+<p>"What do they make in the shops?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"O, all sorts of curious and beautiful things. They have specimens of
+the things that they make up, put up, like pictures in a frame, in
+little glass cases, on the wall next the street. We walked along through
+several streets and looked<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[Pg 207]</a></span> at these specimens. There were purses, and
+fringes, and watches, and gold and silver chains, and beautiful
+portemonnaies, and clocks, and jewelry of all kinds, and ribbons, and
+opera glasses, and dressing cases, and every thing you can think of."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Jennie, "I have seen all such things in the shop windows in
+the Palais Royal and in the Boulevards."</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, those are the shops where they sell the things," said Rollo; "but
+these shops that uncle George and I went to see are where they make
+them. We went to one place where they were making artificial flowers,
+and such beautiful things you never saw. The rooms were full of girls,
+all making artificial flowers."</p>
+
+<p>"Why did not you bring me home some of them?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Why&mdash;I don't know," replied Rollo. "I did not think to ask if I could
+buy any of them.</p>
+
+<p>"Then, after we had gone about in the workshops till we had seen enough,
+we went to the Louvre to see the paintings; though on the way we stopped
+to see a <i>cr&egrave;che</i>."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo pronounced the word very much as if it had been spelled crash.</p>
+
+<p>"A crash!" exclaimed Jennie. "Did a building tumble down?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[Pg 208]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"O, no," said Rollo, "it was not that. It was a place where they keep a
+great many babies. The poor women who have to go out to work all day
+carry their babies to this place in the morning, and leave them there to
+be taken care of, and then come and get them at night. There are some
+nuns there, dressed all in white, to take care of the babies. They put
+them in high cradles that stand all around the room."</p>
+
+<p>"Were they all crying?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"O, no," said Rollo, "they were all still. When we went in they were all
+just waking up. The nuns put them to sleep all at the same time. Every
+cradle had a baby in it. Some were stretching their arms, and some were
+opening their eyes, and some were trying to get up. As fast as they got
+wide awake, the nuns would take them up and put them on the floor, at a
+place where there was a carpet for them to creep upon and play."</p>
+
+<p>"I wish I could go and see them," said Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"You can," replied Rollo. "Any body can go and see them. The nuns like
+to have people come. They keep every thing very white and nice. The
+cradles were very pretty."</p>
+
+<p>"Did they rock?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied Rollo; "they were made to swing, and not to rock. They
+were up so high<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[Pg 209]</a></span> from the floor that they could not be made to rock very
+well. We stayed some time in this place, and then we went away."</p>
+
+<p>"And where did you go next?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"We went to the Louvre to see the famous gallery of paintings. It is a
+quarter of a mile long, and the walls are covered with paintings on both
+sides, the whole distance."</p>
+
+<p>"Except where the windows are, I suppose," said Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied Rollo, "there are no interruptions for windows. The
+windows are up high in the ceiling, for the room is very lofty. There is
+room for two or three rows of paintings below the windows. It is a
+splendid long room."</p>
+
+<p>"Were the pictures very pretty?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Not very," said Rollo. "At least, I did not think so; but uncle George
+told me it was a very famous gallery. There were a great many other
+rooms besides, all carved and gilded most magnificently, and an immense
+staircase of marble, wide enough for an army to go up and down. There
+were several large rooms, too, full of ancient marble statues; but I did
+not like them very much. They looked very dark and dingy. The paintings
+were prettier than they.</p>
+
+<p>"There were a great many persons in the painting gallery at work copying
+the paintings,"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[Pg 210]</a></span> continued Rollo. "Some were girls, and some were young
+men. There was one boy there not much bigger than I."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see how so small a boy could learn to paint so well," said
+Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, he was not so very small," said Rollo. "He was bigger than I am,
+and I am growing to be pretty large. Besides, they have excellent
+schools here where they learn to draw and to paint. We went to see one
+of them."</p>
+
+<p>"Did it look like one of our schools?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"O, no," replied Rollo; "it seemed to me more like a splendid palace
+than a school. We went through an iron gate into a court, and across the
+court to a great door, where a man came to show us the rooms. There were
+a great many elegant staircases, and passage ways, and halls, with
+pictures, and statues, and models of cities, and temples, and ruins, and
+every thing else necessary for the students."</p>
+
+<p>"Were the students there?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied Rollo; "but we saw the room where they worked, and we saw
+the last lesson that they had."</p>
+
+<p>"What was it?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"It was a subject which the professor gave them for a picture; and all
+of them were to paint<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[Pg 211]</a></span> a picture on that subject, each one according to
+his own ideas. We saw the paintings that they had made. There were
+twenty or thirty of them. The subject was written on a sheet of paper,
+and put up in the room where they could all see it."</p>
+
+<p>"What was the subject?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"It was something like this," replied Rollo: "An old chestnut tree in a
+secluded situation, the roots partly denuded by an inundation from a
+stream. Cattle in the foreground, on the right. Time, sunset."</p>
+
+<p>"And did all the pictures have an old chestnut tree in them?" asked
+Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo; "and the roots were all out of the ground on one
+side, and there were cows in the foreground of them all. But the forms
+of the trees, and the position of the cattle, and the landscape in the
+back ground were different in every one."</p>
+
+<p>"I should like to see them," said Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Then," said Rollo, "when we came away from this place we walked along
+on the quay by the side of the river, looking over the parapet down to
+the bank below."</p>
+
+<p>"Was it a pretty place?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo, "a very pretty place indeed. There were great
+floating houses in the water, for the baths, with wheels turning in the
+current<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[Pg 212]</a></span> to pump up water, and little flower gardens along the brink of
+the stream. At least, in some places there were flower gardens; and in
+others there was a wall along the water, with boys sitting on the edge
+of it, fishing. Presently we came to a place where there was an opening
+in the parapet and stairs to go down to the water. You go down two or
+three steps first, and then the stairs turn each way. At the turning
+there was a man who had fishing poles, and nets, and fishing lines to
+sell or let. He had some to let for three sous an hour. I proposed to
+uncle George that we should hire two of them and go down and fish a
+little while."</p>
+
+<p>"And what did he say?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"He laughed, and said that for him to spend his time while he was in
+Paris in fishing in the Seine would be perfectly preposterous. He said
+that his time in Europe cost him not less than a dollar for every hour."</p>
+
+<p>"A dollar for every hour?" exclaimed Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Rollo. "He says that his two passages across the Atlantic
+will have cost three hundred dollars, and the other expenses of his tour
+as much as five hundred more, which makes eight hundred dollars, and
+that he will not have more than one hundred days, probably, from the
+time of his landing in England to the time of his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[Pg 213]</a></span> sailing again. That
+makes it about eight dollars a day. Now, there are not more than eight
+hours in a day suitable for going about and seeing what is to be seen;
+so that his time in the middle of the day costs him a dollar an hour;
+and he could not afford, he said, to spend it in fishing.</p>
+
+<p>"However," continued Rollo, "he said that I might look at the man's
+fishing apparatus; and if I found that it was different from that which
+the boys used in America, I might buy some of it to carry home."</p>
+
+<p>"And did you?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Rollo. And so saying, he put his hand in his pocket and
+took out a small parcel put up in a piece of French newspaper. He
+unrolled this parcel and showed Jennie what it contained. Jennie sat up
+in bed very eagerly in order to see it. First there came out a small
+net.</p>
+
+<p>"This net, you see," said Rollo, "is to be put upon a hoop or a ring of
+wire when I get to America. I did not buy a hoop, because it would fill
+up my trunk too much. But I can make one when I get home.</p>
+
+<p>"Then here are the fishing lines," continued Rollo. "I bought two of
+them. They were very cheap."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[Pg 214]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The fishing lines were very pretty. Each had a small round cork upon the
+end of a quill. The corks were red, touched with blue. There was a
+sinker for each, made of large shot.</p>
+
+<p>"The man put in several spare sinkers for me," resumed Rollo, "in case
+these should come off." So saying, he opened a small paper and showed
+Jennie several large-sized shot, each of which had a cleft in the side
+of it for putting in the line. The intention was that the lead should be
+closed over the line, after the line had been inserted in it, by means
+of a light blow with a hammer, and thus the sinker would be secured to
+its place.</p>
+
+<p>"I like a net best to catch fishes with," said Jennie, "because that
+does not hurt them."</p>
+
+<p>"True," said Rollo, "a net is a great deal better on that account. You
+see I put a hoop around to keep the mouth of the net open, and then
+fasten it to the end of a long handle. Then you stand on the bank of the
+brook and put the net down into the water, and when a fish comes along
+you dip him up."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Jennie, "that is an excellent way."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you could put him in a small pail of water," said Rollo, "and
+carry him home, and then you could put him in a bowl and see him swim
+about."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[Pg 215]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Jennie, "I wish you would give me this net."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Rollo, "I will. I shall go down by the river again some
+day, and then I can buy another for myself."</p>
+
+<p>"So you can," said Jennie: "or, if you don't get another, I can lend you
+mine when you wish to fish with it."</p>
+
+<p>So Rollo put up his fishing tackle again, and then Jennie asked him
+where else he went.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, we walked along the quay," said Rollo, "a long way, past several
+bridges, until at last we came to a bridge leading over to an island in
+the river, where there was a great cathedral church, which uncle George
+said he wished to see. It was the Church of Notre Dame. It was an
+immense great church, with two towers very high; but it was very old.
+The outside of it seemed to be all crumbling to pieces."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you go in?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Rollo. "It is open all the time, and people are all the
+time going and coming. We went in. There was an old woman sitting just
+inside the door, with a string of beads in her hands, counting them.
+There were two or three other old women there, knitting. I could not see
+much of the inside of the church when we first went in, there were so
+many columns; but I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[Pg 216]</a></span> could hear the birds flying about and singing away
+up high among the vaults and arches."</p>
+
+<p>"The birds inside the church!" said Jennie. "I should think they would
+drive them out."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know how they could drive them out," said Rollo, "it was so
+high up to where they were flying. The arch of the ceiling seemed like a
+stone sky. There were so many pillars to keep up this roof, that, when
+we first went in, we could not see any end to the church at all.
+However, we walked along, and after a while we came to the end.</p>
+
+<p>"There were a great many curious things to see in the church," continued
+Rollo. "There were a great many little chapels along the sides of it,
+and curious images sculptured in stone, and people doing curious things
+all about in different places. We walked about there for half an hour.
+At last we found a congregation."</p>
+
+<p>"A congregation!"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," said Rollo, "we came to a place, at last, which was divided off
+by a kind of railing; and there was a congregation there, sitting in
+chairs. Some were kneeling in chairs, and some were kneeling on the
+stone floor. They were reading in little prayer books and looking
+about."</p>
+
+<p>"Was any body preaching to them?" asked Jennie.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[Pg 217]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"No," said Rollo, "but there were some priests at the altar doing
+something there; but I could not understand what they were doing. We
+stopped there a little while, and then we came away. We walked along to
+another part of the church, and at length we came to another enclosure,
+where a great many people were collected. Mr. George went up to see what
+it was, and he said he believed it was a baptism; but I could not get
+near enough to see."</p>
+
+<p>"And what did you do next?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, we came out of the church, and crossed over by a bridge to this
+side of the river, and then walked down along the quay till we came to a
+place where there was a tall bronze column, somewhat like this column in
+the Place Vendome. Uncle George said that he wished to see it, because
+it stood on the place where a famous old castle and prison used to stand
+in former times, called the Bastile. He said that the people made an
+insurrection and battered the old prison down, because the government
+was so cruel in shutting up innocent prisoners in it. They built fires
+against the doors, and battered against them with heavy timbers until
+they broke them in, and then they let the prisoners out and set the
+prison on fire. Uncle George said that I should take great interest in
+reading about it<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[Pg 218]</a></span> one of these days; but I think I should like to read
+about it now."</p>
+
+<p>"I should, too," said Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"They afterward took away all the stones of the Bastile," continued
+Rollo, "and made this tall bronze column in its place. There is a figure
+of a man on it, standing on tiptoe."</p>
+
+<p>"I should think he would blow down in a high wind," said Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know why he does not, I am sure," rejoined Rollo. "I wanted to
+go up to the top of the column and see how he was fastened there; but
+uncle George said he was too tired. So we came away. In fact, I was very
+willing to come away, for I saw a great crowd at a certain broad place
+on the sidewalk, not far from there, and I wished to go and see what it
+was."</p>
+
+<p>"And did you go?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Rollo, "and I found it was a man who had made a great
+ring of people all about him, and was trying to get them to give fifteen
+sous to see him shut himself up in a small box. The box was on the
+pavement, all ready. It was quite small. It did not seem possible that a
+man could be shut up in it."</p>
+
+<p>"How big was it?" asked Jennie.</p>
+
+<p>"O, I don't know, exactly," said Rollo. "It was quite small."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[Pg 219]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Was it no bigger than that," said Jennie, holding her two hands a few
+inches apart, so as to indicate what she would consider quite a small
+box.</p>
+
+<p>"O, yes," said Rollo, "it was a great deal bigger than that. It was only
+a little smaller than you would think a man could get into. The box was
+square, and was made of tin, but painted black.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i216.jpg" width="600" height="537" alt="" title="" />
+<span class="caption">PERFORMANCE ON THE BOULEVARDS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"There was an organ at one end of the ring, with a man playing upon it,
+to draw the crowd<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[Pg 220]</a></span> together. In front of the organ was a woman, with a
+baby in her arms, and another little child playing about her. The man
+said that this was his family, and that he had to support them by his
+experiments. In front of the woman was the box. In front of the box was
+the man, who stood there, generally, telling what he was going to do,
+and calling upon the people to throw in their sous. In front of the man
+was a carpet, on the pavement, and in the middle of the carpet a tin
+plate. From time to time the people would throw sous over into the
+circle. The man would then pick them up and put them into the plate, and
+tell the people how many there lacked. There must be fifteen, he said,
+or he could not perform the experiment. He kept talking all the time to
+the people, and saying funny things to make them laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"At last all the fifteen sous were in, and then the man went to the box.
+He brought out a soldier who was standing among the people, and placed
+him near the box, so that he might shut the cover down when the man was
+in. The man then stepped into the box. The upper edge of it was not
+higher than his knees. He then began to kneel down in the box, crossing
+his legs under him; and then he crouched his body down into it, and
+curled in his head, and then&mdash;<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[Pg 221]</a></span>&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>"Jennie!" said Rollo, interrupting himself. He observed that Jennie was
+very still, and he was not sure that she was listening.</p>
+
+<p>Jennie did not answer. She was fast asleep.</p>
+
+<p>"She's gone to sleep," said Rollo, "without hearing the end of the
+story. However, the soldier put the lid down, and shut the man entirely
+in."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo thought that, as he was so near the end, he might as well finish
+the story, even if his auditor was asleep.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[Pg 222]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Chapter_XI" id="Chapter_XI"></a><span class="smcap">Chapter XI.</span></h2>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Conclusion.</span></h3>
+
+
+<p>Rollo's adventures in Paris were brought, at length, for the time being,
+to a somewhat abrupt termination, by an invitation which he received
+suddenly at breakfast one morning, from his uncle George, to set off
+with him the next day for Switzerland. Rollo was very eager to accept
+this invitation from the moment that it was offered him. It is true that
+he was not at all tired of Paris; and there were a great many places,
+both in the city and in the environs, that he was still desirous to see.</p>
+
+<p>Rollo had only one day's notice of the proposed journey to Switzerland,
+and that day was spent almost entirely in getting the passports ready.
+This business devolved on Rollo himself, as his uncle was engaged in
+some other way that day; and he proposed, therefore, that Rollo should
+undertake the work of getting the passports stamped. Rollo accordingly
+did so. He took a carriage and went round to the various offices,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[Pg 223]</a></span> and
+attended to the business very well, though he encountered some
+difficulties in doing it. His uncle George was very much pleased when he
+came home that night and found that Rollo had got the passports all
+ready. Carlos went with Rollo to the passport offices, for company,
+though he could not, of course, render him any assistance.<a name="FNanchor_F_6" id="FNanchor_F_6"></a><a href="#Footnote_F_6" class="fnanchor">[F]</a></p>
+
+
+<p>Rollo dined that evening with his uncle George and Carlos at a
+restaurant. There are hundreds of these restaurants scattered all over
+the city of Paris, and many of them are furnished and decorated in a
+style of splendor that is magnificent beyond description. Mr. George
+took Rollo and Carlos to one of the finest of them. It was in the
+Boulevards.</p>
+
+<p>The aspect of the room, when Rollo entered it, was very imposing. It was
+lined on all sides with mirrors, with carved and gilded pilasters
+between them, and a richly ornamented cornice above. The ceiling,
+overhead, was panelled, and was painted in fresco with the most graceful
+and elegant devices. The floor was laid in a beautiful mosaic of wood,
+brilliantly polished. The room was filled with tables, all set out for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[Pg 224]</a></span>
+dinner in the nicest manner, with silver plate, elegant porcelain, and
+glasses that reflected the light in the most resplendent manner. A great
+many gay groups of ladies and gentlemen were seated at these tables,
+taking dinner; while the waiters, with snow-white napkins on their arms,
+were walking about in a rapid, but in a very gentle and noiseless
+manner, to wait upon them. At the back side of the room there sat two
+beautiful young women, behind a sort of counter, which was raised a
+little above the rest of the floor, so that they could survey the whole
+scene. It was the duty of these young women to keep the accounts of what
+was ordered at the several tables, and to receive the money which was
+paid by the guests, the waiters carrying it to them from the different
+parties at the tables when they paid. These ladies were the presiding
+officers, as it were, in the saloon; and the guests all bowed to them
+very respectfully, both when they came in and when they went away.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. George selected a table for himself and the two boys, and they had
+an excellent dinner there. There was a printed book, large though thin,
+on every table, giving a list of the different articles&mdash;more than five
+hundred in all. From these Mr. George and the boys selected what they
+liked, and the waiters brought it to them.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[Pg 225]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The party remained at this restaurant, eating their dinner and taking
+their coffee after it, for more than an hour; and then they went away.</p>
+
+<p>That evening Rollo went into his father's room to bid his father good
+by, for he expected to set off for Switzerland the next morning very
+early. He found his father sitting in an arm chair by a window, reading
+a book. Mr. Holiday laid his book down and talked for some time with
+Rollo about his proposed tour in Switzerland, and gave him a great deal
+of preparatory information about the mountains, the glaciers, the
+torrents, the avalanches, and other wonderful things that Rollo expected
+to see. Rollo was very much interested in these accounts.</p>
+
+<p>"I am very glad that uncle George invited me to go with him," said he.</p>
+
+<p>"So am I," said his father.</p>
+
+<p>"Because," added Rollo, "I expect to have a very pleasant time."</p>
+
+<p>"True," replied his father; "but that is not the reason precisely why
+<i>I</i> am glad that he invited you."</p>
+
+<p>"What is your reason, then?" asked Rollo.</p>
+
+<p>"I am glad," replied Mr. Holiday, "because his asking you to go with him
+into Switzerland is a sign that you have been a good boy while<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[Pg 226]</a></span> under
+his care here in France. Boys that are selfish, troublesome, and
+disobedient, in one ride or journey, find usually that their company is
+not desired a second time. It is now two or three weeks since your uncle
+George invited you to come with him from London to Paris, and during all
+this time you have been mainly under his care; and now he invites you to
+go with him on a still more extended tour. I think you must have
+conducted yourself in a very considerate or gentlemanly manner, and
+proved yourself a pleasant travelling companion, or you would not have
+received this new invitation."</p>
+
+<p>Rollo was very much gratified at hearing his father speak in this
+manner. So he shook hands with him, and bade him good by.</p>
+
+
+<div class="footnotes">
+
+<h3>FOOTNOTES</h3>
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_A_1" id="Footnote_A_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_1"><span class="label">[A]</span></a> Pronounced <i>soo</i>.</p></div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_B_2" id="Footnote_B_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_B_2"><span class="label">[B]</span></a> Pronounced <i>kee</i>.</p></div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_C_3" id="Footnote_C_3"></a><a href="#FNanchor_C_3"><span class="label">[C]</span></a> It is also called the Arc de l'Etoile. Etoile means <i>star</i>,
+and the French give that name to a place where several roads diverge
+from one point. Roads so diverging form a sort of star. The reader will
+find this arch on any map of Paris, with the roads diverging from it.</p></div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_D_4" id="Footnote_D_4"></a><a href="#FNanchor_D_4"><span class="label">[D]</span></a> Mr. Holiday called this street, of course, by its French
+name; but we give its name here in English, for the convenience of the
+reader, who may, perhaps, not be able to pronounce French.</p></div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_E_5" id="Footnote_E_5"></a><a href="#FNanchor_E_5"><span class="label">[E]</span></a> A courier is a traveling servant. A good courier
+understands all the principal languages of Europe, and is acquainted
+with all the routes and modes of travelling. He takes all the care of
+the party that employs him; makes bargains for them; finds out good
+hotels for them to go to; pays the bills; obtains all necessary
+information; and does every thing for them, in fact, which is required
+in making the tour of Europe.</p></div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_F_6" id="Footnote_F_6"></a><a href="#FNanchor_F_6"><span class="label">[F]</span></a> A full account of Rollo's adventures in getting the
+passports stamped will be given in the first chapter of Rollo in
+Switzerland.</p></div></div>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Rollo in Paris, by Jacob Abbott
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROLLO IN PARIS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 22956-h.htm or 22956-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/2/9/5/22956/
+
+Produced by D. Alexander, Janet Blenkinship and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/22956-h/images/i003.jpg b/22956-h/images/i003.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..119b538
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h/images/i003.jpg
diff --git a/22956-h/images/i004.jpg b/22956-h/images/i004.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2093380
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h/images/i004.jpg
diff --git a/22956-h/images/i029.jpg b/22956-h/images/i029.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83a8d44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h/images/i029.jpg
diff --git a/22956-h/images/i046.jpg b/22956-h/images/i046.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..44e4342
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h/images/i046.jpg
diff --git a/22956-h/images/i074.jpg b/22956-h/images/i074.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..529f303
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h/images/i074.jpg
diff --git a/22956-h/images/i102.jpg b/22956-h/images/i102.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be3d987
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h/images/i102.jpg
diff --git a/22956-h/images/i137.jpg b/22956-h/images/i137.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0bb175d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h/images/i137.jpg
diff --git a/22956-h/images/i176.jpg b/22956-h/images/i176.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0685bf5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h/images/i176.jpg
diff --git a/22956-h/images/i194.jpg b/22956-h/images/i194.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..35520e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h/images/i194.jpg
diff --git a/22956-h/images/i216.jpg b/22956-h/images/i216.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac8a7a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-h/images/i216.jpg
diff --git a/22956-page-images/f001.png b/22956-page-images/f001.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb7f71e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/f001.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/f002.png b/22956-page-images/f002.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ae3c3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/f002.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/f003.jpg b/22956-page-images/f003.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf1ae31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/f003.jpg
diff --git a/22956-page-images/f004.jpg b/22956-page-images/f004.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b44263f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/f004.jpg
diff --git a/22956-page-images/f005.png b/22956-page-images/f005.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..32e2268
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/f005.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/f006.png b/22956-page-images/f006.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1854040
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/f006.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p011.png b/22956-page-images/p011.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8c0d2be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p011.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p012.png b/22956-page-images/p012.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb4b5d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p012.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p013.png b/22956-page-images/p013.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e57374
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p013.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p014.png b/22956-page-images/p014.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f2144e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p014.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p015.png b/22956-page-images/p015.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cef7df4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p015.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p016.png b/22956-page-images/p016.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1fd8f36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p016.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p017.png b/22956-page-images/p017.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..59901fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p017.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p018.png b/22956-page-images/p018.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b5084c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p018.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p019.png b/22956-page-images/p019.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..067f8b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p019.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p020.png b/22956-page-images/p020.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..facaf9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p020.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p021.png b/22956-page-images/p021.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de9e22b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p021.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p022.png b/22956-page-images/p022.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a9016a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p022.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p023.png b/22956-page-images/p023.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b24ee41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p023.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p024.png b/22956-page-images/p024.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72ffdea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p024.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p025.png b/22956-page-images/p025.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d4463e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p025.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p026.png b/22956-page-images/p026.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..445704f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p026.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p027.png b/22956-page-images/p027.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..08fbc99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p027.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p028.png b/22956-page-images/p028.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8585272
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p028.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p029.png b/22956-page-images/p029.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..86f2e57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p029.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p030.png b/22956-page-images/p030.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..509364a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p030.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p031.png b/22956-page-images/p031.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e49b98c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p031.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p032-image.jpg b/22956-page-images/p032-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ccdf27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p032-image.jpg
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p032.png b/22956-page-images/p032.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd50183
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p032.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p033.png b/22956-page-images/p033.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e22637
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p033.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p034.png b/22956-page-images/p034.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb085fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p034.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p035.png b/22956-page-images/p035.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3bfd5cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p035.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p036.png b/22956-page-images/p036.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e59fe45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p036.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p037.png b/22956-page-images/p037.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..57ebddc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p037.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p038.png b/22956-page-images/p038.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad9b84d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p038.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p039.png b/22956-page-images/p039.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..62c3700
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p039.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p040.png b/22956-page-images/p040.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6071e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p040.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p041.png b/22956-page-images/p041.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d93ba85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p041.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p042.png b/22956-page-images/p042.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1308251
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p042.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p043.png b/22956-page-images/p043.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..acc756b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p043.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p044.png b/22956-page-images/p044.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa147b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p044.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p045.png b/22956-page-images/p045.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0bbca56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p045.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p046.png b/22956-page-images/p046.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..95e9e52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p046.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p047.png b/22956-page-images/p047.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b9a3c2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p047.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p048.png b/22956-page-images/p048.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63b6f16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p048.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p049-image.jpg b/22956-page-images/p049-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6944afa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p049-image.jpg
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p049.png b/22956-page-images/p049.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e2bed4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p049.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p050.png b/22956-page-images/p050.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..80b86d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p050.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p051.png b/22956-page-images/p051.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f38f76c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p051.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p052.png b/22956-page-images/p052.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..555c680
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p052.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p053.png b/22956-page-images/p053.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e100b76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p053.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p054.png b/22956-page-images/p054.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8d7486
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p054.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p055.png b/22956-page-images/p055.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..739610c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p055.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p056.png b/22956-page-images/p056.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a03be3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p056.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p057.png b/22956-page-images/p057.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13fd634
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p057.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p058.png b/22956-page-images/p058.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6ee2984
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p058.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p059.png b/22956-page-images/p059.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9274fb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p059.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p060.png b/22956-page-images/p060.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b89929c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p060.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p061.png b/22956-page-images/p061.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e82c12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p061.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p062.png b/22956-page-images/p062.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..923776b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p062.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p063.png b/22956-page-images/p063.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0e9762
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p063.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p064.png b/22956-page-images/p064.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..405e7c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p064.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p065.png b/22956-page-images/p065.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac8ef24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p065.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p066.png b/22956-page-images/p066.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28a8a26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p066.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p067.png b/22956-page-images/p067.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a2a2c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p067.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p068.png b/22956-page-images/p068.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d939ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p068.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p069.png b/22956-page-images/p069.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e11125
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p069.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p070.png b/22956-page-images/p070.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cd38110
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p070.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p071.png b/22956-page-images/p071.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19effd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p071.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p072.png b/22956-page-images/p072.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e54be2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p072.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p073.png b/22956-page-images/p073.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e2625e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p073.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p074.png b/22956-page-images/p074.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6ce983
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p074.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p075.png b/22956-page-images/p075.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2677d2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p075.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p076.png b/22956-page-images/p076.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e46cc4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p076.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p077-image.jpg b/22956-page-images/p077-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f982ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p077-image.jpg
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p077.png b/22956-page-images/p077.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30f12ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p077.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p078.png b/22956-page-images/p078.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db8b20d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p078.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p079.png b/22956-page-images/p079.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..542b1c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p079.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p080.png b/22956-page-images/p080.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61c45b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p080.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p081.png b/22956-page-images/p081.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4bce8de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p081.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p082.png b/22956-page-images/p082.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..026ba11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p082.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p083.png b/22956-page-images/p083.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d94c81c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p083.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p084.png b/22956-page-images/p084.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3037955
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p084.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p085.png b/22956-page-images/p085.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f5716d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p085.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p086.png b/22956-page-images/p086.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e9df2fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p086.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p087.png b/22956-page-images/p087.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b31df83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p087.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p088.png b/22956-page-images/p088.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05d5407
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p088.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p089.png b/22956-page-images/p089.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3afb427
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p089.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p090.png b/22956-page-images/p090.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..06a8d0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p090.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p091.png b/22956-page-images/p091.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5513c19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p091.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p092.png b/22956-page-images/p092.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..84261a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p092.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p093.png b/22956-page-images/p093.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1905dde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p093.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p094.png b/22956-page-images/p094.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..572c8bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p094.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p095.png b/22956-page-images/p095.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f3463d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p095.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p096.png b/22956-page-images/p096.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8b880a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p096.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p097.png b/22956-page-images/p097.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8c1d2b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p097.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p098.png b/22956-page-images/p098.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45085ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p098.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p099.png b/22956-page-images/p099.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2b6bb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p099.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p100.png b/22956-page-images/p100.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4ec50f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p100.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p101.png b/22956-page-images/p101.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1b80089
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p101.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p102.png b/22956-page-images/p102.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c984ecd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p102.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p103.png b/22956-page-images/p103.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab1df79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p103.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p104.png b/22956-page-images/p104.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6ae78a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p104.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p105-image.jpg b/22956-page-images/p105-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7785683
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p105-image.jpg
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p105.png b/22956-page-images/p105.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..668a9be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p105.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p106.png b/22956-page-images/p106.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d6959a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p106.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p107.png b/22956-page-images/p107.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f157f33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p107.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p108.png b/22956-page-images/p108.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..17f0cb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p108.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p109.png b/22956-page-images/p109.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff0bfe1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p109.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p110.png b/22956-page-images/p110.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7655d97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p110.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p111.png b/22956-page-images/p111.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f32ce79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p111.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p112.png b/22956-page-images/p112.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d437983
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p112.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p113.png b/22956-page-images/p113.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf091d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p113.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p114.png b/22956-page-images/p114.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..372e423
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p114.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p115.png b/22956-page-images/p115.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..89f820c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p115.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p116.png b/22956-page-images/p116.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..781a037
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p116.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p117.png b/22956-page-images/p117.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d60e7e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p117.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p118.png b/22956-page-images/p118.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..03fec67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p118.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p119.png b/22956-page-images/p119.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0b74ff6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p119.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p120.png b/22956-page-images/p120.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5e98959
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p120.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p121.png b/22956-page-images/p121.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6fd1485
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p121.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p122.png b/22956-page-images/p122.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43bd1e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p122.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p123.png b/22956-page-images/p123.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d6b022
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p123.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p124.png b/22956-page-images/p124.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8331807
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p124.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p125.png b/22956-page-images/p125.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1fff6b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p125.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p126.png b/22956-page-images/p126.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b5e5c44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p126.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p127.png b/22956-page-images/p127.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b41155
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p127.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p128.png b/22956-page-images/p128.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2dd483
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p128.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p129.png b/22956-page-images/p129.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0965c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p129.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p130.png b/22956-page-images/p130.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dc44e36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p130.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p131.png b/22956-page-images/p131.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3ad2e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p131.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p132.png b/22956-page-images/p132.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10e86e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p132.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p133.png b/22956-page-images/p133.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a1aad4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p133.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p134.png b/22956-page-images/p134.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8dedf7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p134.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p135.png b/22956-page-images/p135.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2237d55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p135.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p136.png b/22956-page-images/p136.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1813c47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p136.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p137.png b/22956-page-images/p137.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..942c37a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p137.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p138.png b/22956-page-images/p138.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c32638
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p138.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p139.png b/22956-page-images/p139.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..06b8f85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p139.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p140-image.jpg b/22956-page-images/p140-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74e1d42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p140-image.jpg
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p140.png b/22956-page-images/p140.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7afcf35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p140.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p141.png b/22956-page-images/p141.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc3113b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p141.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p142.png b/22956-page-images/p142.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d17504
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p142.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p143.png b/22956-page-images/p143.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00ed7a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p143.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p144.png b/22956-page-images/p144.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c29966c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p144.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p145.png b/22956-page-images/p145.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d6e4cbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p145.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p146.png b/22956-page-images/p146.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d17cd97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p146.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p147.png b/22956-page-images/p147.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e76954
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p147.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p148.png b/22956-page-images/p148.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5127d0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p148.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p149.png b/22956-page-images/p149.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..84310c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p149.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p150.png b/22956-page-images/p150.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d12f26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p150.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p151.png b/22956-page-images/p151.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8476d2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p151.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p152.png b/22956-page-images/p152.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..186e1c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p152.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p153.png b/22956-page-images/p153.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e7d0a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p153.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p154.png b/22956-page-images/p154.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dfb1c7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p154.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p155.png b/22956-page-images/p155.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9d36f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p155.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p156.png b/22956-page-images/p156.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c1473c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p156.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p157.png b/22956-page-images/p157.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5697944
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p157.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p158.png b/22956-page-images/p158.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b893a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p158.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p159.png b/22956-page-images/p159.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc671c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p159.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p160.png b/22956-page-images/p160.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73d1c4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p160.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p161.png b/22956-page-images/p161.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23f5e53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p161.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p162.png b/22956-page-images/p162.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2fd31cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p162.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p163.png b/22956-page-images/p163.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..501bbd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p163.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p164.png b/22956-page-images/p164.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2513c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p164.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p165.png b/22956-page-images/p165.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..711add9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p165.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p166.png b/22956-page-images/p166.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b59d339
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p166.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p167.png b/22956-page-images/p167.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa342e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p167.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p168.png b/22956-page-images/p168.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae030cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p168.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p169.png b/22956-page-images/p169.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fca116a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p169.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p170.png b/22956-page-images/p170.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3bf905
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p170.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p171.png b/22956-page-images/p171.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2abeb97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p171.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p172.png b/22956-page-images/p172.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..025b156
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p172.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p173.png b/22956-page-images/p173.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a20d9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p173.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p174.png b/22956-page-images/p174.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7673cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p174.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p175.png b/22956-page-images/p175.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc22e1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p175.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p176.png b/22956-page-images/p176.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eca7581
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p176.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p177.png b/22956-page-images/p177.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c974a8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p177.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p178.png b/22956-page-images/p178.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff6d271
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p178.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p179-image.jpg b/22956-page-images/p179-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cad0e0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p179-image.jpg
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p179.png b/22956-page-images/p179.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9efeef8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p179.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p180.png b/22956-page-images/p180.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d00876
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p180.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p181.png b/22956-page-images/p181.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d3230e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p181.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p182.png b/22956-page-images/p182.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a07e58b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p182.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p183.png b/22956-page-images/p183.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..60f66cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p183.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p184.png b/22956-page-images/p184.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb184d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p184.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p185.png b/22956-page-images/p185.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d3dfe6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p185.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p186.png b/22956-page-images/p186.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a1a7dc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p186.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p187.png b/22956-page-images/p187.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f996650
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p187.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p188.png b/22956-page-images/p188.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2efa6f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p188.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p189.png b/22956-page-images/p189.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c525191
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p189.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p190.png b/22956-page-images/p190.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f548ebb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p190.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p191.png b/22956-page-images/p191.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..88452c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p191.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p192.png b/22956-page-images/p192.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56e9375
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p192.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p193.png b/22956-page-images/p193.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8530cbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p193.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p194.png b/22956-page-images/p194.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8fd1db3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p194.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p195.png b/22956-page-images/p195.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2841464
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p195.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p196.png b/22956-page-images/p196.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1db34f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p196.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p197-image.jpg b/22956-page-images/p197-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd0c060
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p197-image.jpg
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p197.png b/22956-page-images/p197.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74f190e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p197.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p198.png b/22956-page-images/p198.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9802aac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p198.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p199.png b/22956-page-images/p199.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b2ed2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p199.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p200.png b/22956-page-images/p200.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f15781
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p200.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p201.png b/22956-page-images/p201.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3f231b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p201.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p202.png b/22956-page-images/p202.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cdaef5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p202.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p203.png b/22956-page-images/p203.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..677f9e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p203.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p204.png b/22956-page-images/p204.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..102f490
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p204.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p205.png b/22956-page-images/p205.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f2797f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p205.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p206.png b/22956-page-images/p206.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7dbfcef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p206.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p207.png b/22956-page-images/p207.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9379e38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p207.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p208.png b/22956-page-images/p208.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ec9142e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p208.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p209.png b/22956-page-images/p209.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15405d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p209.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p210.png b/22956-page-images/p210.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d536b26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p210.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p211.png b/22956-page-images/p211.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3100ac3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p211.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p212.png b/22956-page-images/p212.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..46c5e8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p212.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p213.png b/22956-page-images/p213.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1214dc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p213.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p214.png b/22956-page-images/p214.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..314b17e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p214.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p215.png b/22956-page-images/p215.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cbca1fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p215.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p216.png b/22956-page-images/p216.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1f4857
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p216.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p217.png b/22956-page-images/p217.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e6e616
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p217.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p218.png b/22956-page-images/p218.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..25f012d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p218.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p219-image.jpg b/22956-page-images/p219-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52e3ecb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p219-image.jpg
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p219.png b/22956-page-images/p219.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2522797
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p219.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p220.png b/22956-page-images/p220.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..113e6ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p220.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p221.png b/22956-page-images/p221.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..041b9da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p221.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p222.png b/22956-page-images/p222.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e9dada
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p222.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p223.png b/22956-page-images/p223.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..841f89d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p223.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p224.png b/22956-page-images/p224.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b96a609
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p224.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p225.png b/22956-page-images/p225.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0776a49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p225.png
diff --git a/22956-page-images/p226.png b/22956-page-images/p226.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8caa64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956-page-images/p226.png
diff --git a/22956.txt b/22956.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..527b658
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,5307 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Rollo in Paris, by Jacob Abbott
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Rollo in Paris
+
+Author: Jacob Abbott
+
+Release Date: October 11, 2007 [EBook #22956]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROLLO IN PARIS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by D. Alexander, Janet Blenkinship and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ROLLO IN PARIS,
+
+BY
+
+JACOB ABBOTT.
+
+
+BOSTON:
+
+W. J. REYNOLDS AND COMPANY,
+No. 24 CORNHILL,
+1854.
+
+Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1854, by
+JACOB ABBOTT,
+
+In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of
+Massachusetts.
+
+STEREOTYPED AT THE
+BOSTON STEREOTYPE FOUNDRY.
+G. C. RAND BOOK AND WOOD CUT PRINTER.
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: Restaurant (Cafe) on the Boulevards. Page 223.]
+
+[Illustration: ROLLO'S TOUR IN EUROPE.]
+
+
+ROLLO'S TOUR IN EUROPE.
+
+ORDER OF THE VOLUMES.
+
+ROLLO ON THE ATLANTIC.
+ROLLO IN PARIS.
+ROLLO IN SWITZERLAND.
+ROLLO IN LONDON.
+ROLLO ON THE RHINE.
+ROLLO IN SCOTLAND.
+
+
+PRINCIPAL PERSONS OF THE STORY.
+
+ROLLO; twelve years of age.
+
+MR. and MRS. HOLIDAY; Rollo's father and mother, travelling in Europe.
+
+THANNY; Rollo's younger brother.
+
+JANE; Rollo's cousin, adopted by Mr. and Mrs. Holiday.
+
+MR. GEORGE; a young gentleman, Rollo's uncle.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+  CHAPTER                                                           PAGE
+
+  I.--THE ARRANGEMENTS,                                               11
+
+  II.--CROSSING THE CHANNEL,                                          34
+
+  III.--JOURNEY TO PARIS,                                             56
+
+  IV.--THE GARDEN OF THE TUILERIES,                                   80
+
+  V.--THE ELYSIAN FIELDS,                                            100
+
+  VI.--A GREAT MISTAKE,                                              122
+
+  VII.--CARLOS,                                                      143
+
+  VIII.--THE GARDEN OF PLANTS,                                       162
+
+  IX.--AN EXCURSION,                                                 183
+
+  X.--ROLLO'S NARRATIVE,                                             202
+
+  XI.--CONCLUSION,                                                   222
+
+
+
+
+ENGRAVINGS.
+
+  FRONTISPIECE.                                                     PAGE
+
+  THE DINNER AT NEW HAVEN,                                            32
+
+  ENTERING DIEPPE,                                                    49
+
+  THE ARRIVAL,                                                        77
+
+  THE OBELISK,                                                       105
+
+  THE HIPPODROME,                                                    140
+
+  THE RESTAURANT,                                                    179
+
+  SINGING IN THE OPEN AIR,                                           197
+
+  PERFORMANCE ON THE BOULEVARDS,                                     219
+
+
+
+
+ROLLO IN PARIS.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+THE ARRANGEMENTS.
+
+
+Gentlemen and ladies at the hotels, in London, generally dine about six
+or seven o'clock, each party or family by themselves, in their own
+private parlor. One evening, about eight o'clock, just after the waiter
+had removed the cloth from the table where Rollo's father and mother,
+with Rollo himself and his cousin Jennie, had been dining, and left the
+table clear, Mr. Holiday rose, and walked slowly and feebly--for he was
+quite out of health, though much better than he had been--towards a
+secretary which stood at the side of the room.
+
+"Now," said he, "we will get out the map and the railway guide, and see
+about the ways of getting to France."
+
+Rollo and Jennie were at this time at the window, looking at the
+vehicles which were passing by along the Strand. The Strand is a street
+of London, and one of the most lively and crowded of them all. As soon
+as Rollo heard his father say that he was going to get the map and the
+railway guide, he said to Jane,--
+
+"Let's go and see."
+
+So they both went to the table, and there, kneeling up upon two
+cushioned chairs which they brought forward for the purpose, they leaned
+over upon the table where their father was spreading out the map, and
+thus established themselves very comfortably as spectators of the
+proceedings.
+
+"Children," said Mr. Holiday, "do you come here to listen, or to talk?"
+
+"To listen," said Rollo.
+
+"O, very well," said Mr. Holiday; "then I am glad that you have come."
+
+In obedience to this intimation, Rollo and Jane took care not to
+interrupt Mr. Holiday even to ask a question, but looked on and listened
+very patiently and attentively for nearly half an hour, while he pointed
+out to Mrs. Holiday the various routes, and ascertained from the guide
+books the times at which the trains set out, and the steamers sailed,
+for each of them, and also the cost of getting to Paris by the several
+lines. If the readers of this book were themselves actually in London,
+and were going to Paris, as Rollo and Jennie were, they would be
+interested, perhaps, in having all this information laid before them in
+full detail. As it is, however, all that will be necessary, probably, is
+to give such a general statement of the case as will enable them to
+understand the story.
+
+By looking at any map of Europe, it will be seen that England is
+separated from France by the English Channel, a passage which, though it
+looks quite narrow on the map, is really very wide, especially toward
+the west. The narrowest place is between Dover and Calais, where the
+distance across is only about twenty-two miles. This narrow passage is
+called the Straits of Dover. It would have been very convenient for
+travellers that have to pass between London and Paris if this strait had
+happened to lie in the line, or nearly in the line, between these two
+cities; but it does not. It lies considerably to the eastward of it; so
+that, to cross the channel at the narrowest part, requires that the
+traveller should take quite a circuit round. To go by the shortest
+distance, it is necessary to cross the channel at a place where Dieppe
+is the harbor, on the French side, and New Haven on the English. There
+are other places of crossing, some of which are attended with one
+advantage, and others with another. In some, the harbors are not good,
+and the passengers have to go off in small boats, at certain times of
+tide, to get to the steamers. In others, the steamers leave only when
+the tide serves, which may happen to come at a very inconvenient hour.
+In a word, it is always quite a study with tourists, when they are ready
+to leave London for Paris, to determine by which of the various lines it
+will be best for their particular party, under the particular
+circumstances in which they are placed, to go.
+
+After ascertaining all the facts very carefully, and all the advantages
+and disadvantages of each particular line, Mr. Holiday asked his wife
+what she thought they had better do.
+
+"The cheapest line is by the way of New Haven," said Mrs. Holiday.
+
+"That's of no consequence, I think, now," said Mr. Holiday. "The
+difference is not very great."
+
+"For our whole party, it will make four or five pounds," said Mrs.
+Holiday.
+
+"Well," said Mr. Holiday, "I am travelling to recover my health, and
+every thing must give way to that. If I can only get well, I can earn
+money fast enough, when I go home, to replace what we expend. The only
+question is, Which way will be the pleasantest and the most
+comfortable?"
+
+"Then," said Mrs. Holiday, "I think we had better go by the way of Dover
+and Calais, where we have the shortest passage by sea."
+
+"I think so too," said Mr. Holiday; "so that point is settled."
+
+"Father," said Rollo, "I wish you would let Jennie and me go to Paris by
+ourselves alone, some other way."
+
+The reader who has perused the narrative of Rollo's voyage across the
+Atlantic will remember that, through a very peculiar combination of
+circumstances, he was left to make that voyage under his own charge,
+without having any one to take care of him. He was so much pleased with
+the result of that experiment, and was so proud of his success in acting
+as Jennie's protector, that he was quite desirous of trying such an
+experiment again.
+
+"O, no!" said his father.
+
+"Why, father, I got along well enough in coming over," replied Rollo.
+
+"True," said his father; "and if any accident, or any imperious
+necessity, should lead to your setting out for Paris without any escort,
+I have no doubt that you would get through safely. But it is one thing
+for a boy to be put into such a situation by some unforeseen and
+unexpected contingency, and quite another thing for his father
+deliberately to form such a plan for him."
+
+Rollo looked a little disappointed, but he did not reply. In fact, he
+felt that his father was right.
+
+"But I'll tell you," added Mr. Holiday. "If your uncle George is willing
+to go by some different route from ours, you may go with him."
+
+"And Jennie?" inquired Rollo.
+
+"Why! Jennie?" repeated Mr. Holiday, hesitating. "Let me think. Yes,
+Jennie may go with you, if she pleases, if her mother is willing."
+
+Jennie always called Mrs. Holiday her mother, although she was really
+her aunt.
+
+"Are you willing, mother," asked Rollo, very eagerly.
+
+Mrs. Holiday was at a loss what to say. She was very desirous to please
+Rollo, and at the same time she wished very much to have Jennie go with
+her. However, she finally decided the question by saying that Jennie
+might go with whichever party she pleased.
+
+Rollo's uncle George had not been long in England. He had come out from
+America some time after Rollo himself did, so that Rollo had not
+travelled with him a great deal. Mr. George was quite young, though he
+was a great deal older than Rollo--too old to be much of a companion
+for his nephew. Rollo liked him very much, because he was always kind to
+him; but there was no very great sympathy between them, for Mr. George
+was never much interested in such things as would please a boy. Besides,
+he was always very peremptory and decisive, though always just, in his
+treatment of Rollo, whenever he had him under his charge. Rollo was,
+however, very glad when his father consented that he and his uncle
+George might go to Paris together.
+
+Mr. George was out that day, and he did not come home until Rollo had
+gone to bed. Rollo, however, saw him early the next morning, and told
+him what his father had said.
+
+"Well," said Mr. George, after hearing his story, "and what do you
+propose that we should do?"
+
+"I propose that you, and Jennie, and I should go by the way of New Haven
+and Dieppe," replied Rollo.
+
+"Why?" said Mr. George.
+
+"You see it is cheaper that way," said Rollo. "We can go that way for
+twenty-four shillings. It costs two and three pounds by the other ways."
+
+"That's a consideration," said Mr. George.
+
+"For the pound you would save," said Rollo, "you could buy a very
+handsome book in Paris."
+
+Rollo suggested these considerations because he had often heard his
+uncle argue in this way before. He had himself another and a secret
+reason why he wished to go by the New Haven route; but we are all very
+apt, when giving reasons to others, to present such as we think will
+influence them, and not those which really influence us.
+
+Mr. George looked into the guide book at the pages which Rollo pointed
+out, and found that it was really as Rollo had said.
+
+"Well," said he, "I'll go that way with you."
+
+So that was settled, too.
+
+A short time after this conversation, Rollo's father and mother, and
+also Jennie, came in. Mr. Holiday rang the bell for the waiter to bring
+up breakfast. Jennie, when she found that it was really decided that her
+father and mother were to go one way, and her uncle George and Rollo
+another, was quite at a loss to determine which party she herself should
+join. She thought very justly that there would probably be more incident
+and adventure to be met with in going with Rollo; but then, on the other
+hand, she was extremely unwilling to be separated from her mother. She
+stood by her mother's side, leaning toward her in an attitude of
+confiding and affectionate attachment, while the others were talking
+about the details of the plan.
+
+"I rather think there is one thing that you have forgotten," said Mr.
+Holiday, "and which, it strikes me, is a decided objection to your plan;
+and that is, that the steamer for to-morrow, from New Haven, leaves at
+midnight."
+
+"That's the very reason why I wanted to go that way," said Rollo.
+
+"Why, Rollo!" exclaimed his mother.
+
+"Yes, mother," said Rollo. "There would be so much fun in setting out at
+midnight. Think, Jennie!" added Rollo, addressing his cousin, "we should
+sit up till midnight! And then to see all the people going on board by
+the light of lanterns and torches. I wonder if there'll be a moon. Let's
+look in the almanac, and see if there'll be a moon."
+
+"But, George," said Mrs. Holiday, "you will not wish to set off at
+midnight. I think you had better change your plan, after all."
+
+But Mr. George did not seem to think that the midnight departure of the
+boat was any objection to the New Haven plan. He had noticed that that
+was the time set for leaving New Haven the next night, and he thought
+that, on the whole, the arrangement would suit his plans very well. He
+would have a good long evening to write up his journal, which he said
+was getting rather behindhand. The water, too, would be more likely to
+be smooth in the night, so that there would be less danger of
+seasickness. Besides, he thought that both Rollo and himself would
+become very sleepy by sitting up so late, and so would fall directly to
+sleep as soon as they got into their berths on board the steamer, and
+sleep quietly till they began to draw near to the coast of France. The
+distance across the channel, at that point, was such, that the steamer,
+in leaving at midnight, would not reach Dieppe till five or six o'clock
+the next morning.
+
+Accordingly, the arrangements were all made for Rollo's departure the
+next day, with his uncle George, for New Haven. Jennie finally decided
+to go with her father and mother. The idea of sailing at midnight
+determined her; for such an adventure, attractive as it was in Rollo's
+eyes, seemed quite formidable in hers. Rollo had a very pleasant ride to
+New Haven, amusing himself all the way with the beauties of English
+scenery and the continual novelties that every where met his eye. When
+they at last arrived at New Haven, they found that the harbor consisted
+merely of a straight, artificial canal, cut in from the sea, where
+probably some small stream had originally issued. The sides of this
+harbor were lined with piers, and on one of the piers was a great hotel,
+forming a part, as it were, of the railway station. There were a few
+houses and other buildings near, but there was no town to be seen. The
+railway was on one side of the hotel, and the water was on the other.
+When the train stopped, one of the railway servants opened the door for
+Mr. George and Rollo to get out, and Mr. George went directly into the
+hotel to make arrangements for rooms and for dinner, while Rollo, eager
+to see the ships and the water, went through the house to the pier on
+the other side. He found that there was a pretty broad space on the
+pier, between the hotel and the water, with a shed upon it for
+merchandise, and extra tracks for freight trains. The water was quite
+low in the harbor, and the few vessels that were lying at the pier walls
+were mostly grounded in the mud. There was one steamboat lying opposite
+the hotel, but it was down so low that, at first, Rollo could only see
+the top of the smoke-pipe. Rollo went to the brink of the pier and
+looked down. The steamer appeared very small. It was painted black.
+There were very few people on board. Rollo had a great mind to go on
+board himself, as there was a plank leading down from the pier to the
+top of the paddle box. But it looked rather steep, and so Rollo
+concluded to postpone going on board till Mr. George should come out
+with him after dinner.
+
+Rollo looked about upon the pier a few minutes, and then went into the
+hotel. He passed through a spacious hall, and then through a passage
+way, from which he could look into a large room, the sides of which were
+formed of glass, so that the people who were in the room could see out
+all around them. The front of the room looked out upon the pier, the
+back side upon the passage way. A third side was toward the vestibule,
+and the fourth toward the coffee room. There were shelves around this
+room, within, and tables, and desks, and people going to and fro there.
+In fact, it seemed to be the office of the hotel.
+
+Rollo advanced to one of the openings that was toward the passage way,
+and asked which was the way to the coffee room. The girl pointed to the
+door which led to it, and Rollo went in.
+
+He found a large and beautiful room, with several tables set for dinner
+in different parts of it, and sideboards covered with silver, and
+glasses against the walls. On one side there were several large and
+beautiful windows, which looked out upon the pier, and opposite to each
+of these windows was a small dinner table, large enough, however, for
+two persons. Mr. George had taken one of these tables, and when Rollo
+came in he was sitting near it, reading a newspaper.
+
+"Come, Rollo," said he, "I have ordered dinner, and we shall just have
+time to arrange our accounts while they are getting it ready."
+
+So saying, Mr. George took out his pocket book, and also a small pocket
+inkstand, and a pen, and put them all upon the table.
+
+"Your father's plan," he continued, "is this: He is to pay all expenses
+of transportation, at the same rate that he pays for himself; so that,
+whatever you save by travelling in cheap ways, is your own."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, smiling, "I mean to walk sometimes, and save it all."
+
+"He is also to pay the expense of your lodgings."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo.
+
+"Generally, of course, you will have lodgings with him, but sometimes
+you will be away from him; as, for instance, to-night. In such cases, I
+pay for your lodgings, on your father's account."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I understand that."
+
+"He also pays the expense of all casualties."
+
+"So he said," replied Rollo; "but I don't understand what he means by
+that, very well."
+
+"Why, you may meet with accidents that will cost money to repair, or get
+into difficulties which will require money to get out of. For instance,
+you may lose your ticket, and so have to pay twice over; or you may get
+lost yourself, in Paris, and so have to hire a man with a carriage to
+bring you home. For all such things, the money is not to come from your
+purse. Your father will pay."
+
+"Suppose it is altogether my fault," said Rollo. "Then I think I ought
+to pay."
+
+"But your father said that he was sure you would not be to blame for
+such accidents; though I think he is mistaken there. I have no doubt,
+myself, that nearly all the accidents that will happen to you will come
+from boyish heedlessness and blundering on your part."
+
+"We'll see," said Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George, "we'll see."
+
+"Then, as to your board," continued Mr. George, "your father said that
+you might do as you pleased about that. He would pay it, or you might,
+and be allowed five francs a day for it."
+
+"Five francs is about a dollar, is it not?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Yes," replied Mr. George, "very nearly. But you had better not reckon
+by dollars, now, at all, but by francs altogether. That's a franc."
+
+So saying, Mr. George took a silver coin out of his pocket, and showed
+it to Rollo. It was nearly as large as a quarter of a dollar, or an
+English shilling, but not quite. A quarter of a dollar is worth
+twenty-five cents, an English shilling twenty-four, and a franc about
+twenty cents.
+
+"You can have five of those a day to pay your own board with."
+
+"And how much would it cost me at a boarding house, in Paris, to pay my
+board?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Why, we don't board at boarding houses in Paris," said Mr. George. "We
+have rooms at a hotel, and then we get breakfast and dinner wherever we
+please, at coffee rooms and dining rooms all over the city, wherever we
+happen to be, or wherever we take a fancy to go. You can get a very
+excellent breakfast for a franc and a half. A beefsteak, or an omelet,
+and bread and butter and coffee."
+
+"That's enough for breakfast," said Rollo. "And then, dinner?"
+
+"You can get a first-rate dinner for two francs, or even less. That
+makes three francs and a half."
+
+"And tea?"
+
+"They never take tea in Paris," said Mr. George. "The French don't take
+tea."
+
+"Why not?" asked Rollo.
+
+"I don't know," replied Mr. George, "unless it is because the English
+_do_. Whatever is done in London, you generally find that just the
+contrary is done in Paris."
+
+"Don't we have any thing, then, after dinner?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George. "The French generally go and take a seat at a
+little round table on the sidewalk, and have a little glass of brandy
+and a cigar."
+
+Here Rollo threw his head back, and laughed loud and long. He was
+greatly amused at the idea of his making an allowance, in calculating
+how far his five francs would go, for a glass of brandy and a cigar. Mr.
+George himself, sedate as he was, could not but smile.
+
+"The fact is," said he, at length, "there are only two meals to
+calculate for, and they will not cost, upon an average, more than three
+francs and a half, if we are prudent and economical, and go to plain and
+not expensive places. But then there is the immense amount that you will
+be always wishing to spend for cakes, and candy, and oranges, and nuts,
+and bonbons of all sorts and kinds. There is an endless variety of such
+things in Paris. You will find half a dozen cake shops in every street,
+with fifty different kinds of gingerbread and cake in them, all of the
+richest and most delicious description."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I shall want some of those things."
+
+"No doubt," said Mr. George, "you will make yourself sick eating them,
+I'll venture to say, before you have been in Paris twenty-four hours."
+
+"No," said Rollo, shaking his head resolutely; "and I think I had better
+take the five francs and pay my own board."
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George, "and that provides for every thing except
+incidentals. Your father said that I might pay you five francs a day for
+incidentals and pocket money. That is to include all your personal
+expenses of every kind, except what we have already provided for. There
+will be excursions, and tickets to concerts and shows, and carriage
+hire, and toys that you will want to buy, and all such things. The
+amount of it is, that your father pays all your expenses for
+transportation, for lodging, and for casualties. You pay every thing
+else, and are allowed ten francs a day for it. I am to be treasurer,
+and to have the whole charge of your funds, except so far as I find it
+prudent and safe to intrust them to you, and you are to buy nothing at
+all against my consent."
+
+"Nothing at all?" asked Rollo.
+
+"No," said Mr. George, "nothing at all. You are not to expend a single
+centime in any way that I object to."
+
+"What is a centime?" asked Rollo.
+
+"It is of the value of less than one fourth of a cent," replied Mr.
+George.
+
+"But I should think I might buy such little things as that would come
+to, of myself," said Rollo. "Suppose I should wish to buy a small piece
+of gingerbread for a cent."
+
+"Say for a sou,"[A] replied Mr. George. "There are no cents in Paris."
+
+[A] Pronounced _soo_.
+
+"Well," rejoined Rollo, "suppose I should wish to spend a _sou_ for
+gingerbread, and eat it, and you should object to it."
+
+"Very well," replied Mr. George; "and suppose you were to wish to spend
+a sou for poison, and drink it."
+
+"But I should not be likely to buy poison," said Rollo, laughing.
+
+"Nor should I be likely to object to your buying gingerbread," rejoined
+Mr. George. "A boy, however, may, it is clear, do mischief with a little
+money as well as with a great deal; and, therefore, the power in his
+guardian should be absolute and entire. At any rate, so it is in this
+case. If I see fit to forbid your expending a single sou for any thing
+whatever, I can, and you will have no remedy till we see your father
+again; and then you can ask him to put you under some other person's
+care. Until he does this, however, the control is absolute and entire in
+my hands. I would not take charge of a boy on any other terms."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "I agree to it."
+
+"And now," said Mr. George, "I am ready to begin your account."
+
+Mr. George then took a small account book from his pocket book as he
+said this, and, opening it at the beginning, he wrote across the top of
+the two pages which came together the words,
+
+_Rollo Holiday, in Account with his Father._
+
+On the corner of the left-hand page he wrote Dr., which stands for
+debtor; and on that of the right-hand page, Cr., which stands for
+creditor.
+
+"There," said he, "now I shall enter, from time to time, on the creditor
+side, all the money that becomes due to you; and on the debtor side,
+all that I pay to you. Then, by striking a balance, we can always tell
+how much of your money there is in my hands.
+
+"Let me see," continued Mr. George. "Your father and mother concluded
+finally to go by the way of Folkstone. The fare that way is two pound
+eleven. This way, it is one pound four. I am to pay you the difference.
+The difference is one pound seven; and one pound seven, in francs,
+is--let me see how much."
+
+Mr. George made a calculation with a pencil and paper, and found that it
+amounted to thirty-three francs seventy-five centimes.
+
+"I don't understand reckoning by francs and centimes very well," said
+Rollo.
+
+"No," replied Mr. George, "that is your misfortune; and you'll have to
+bear it as well as you can till you get out of it."
+
+So Mr. George entered the francs--thirty-three seventy-five--in Rollo's
+book.
+
+"You have got thirty-three francs to begin with," said he; "that's a
+pretty good stock.
+
+"Now, there is your allowance of ten francs per day. I will enter that
+weekly. There are three days in this week, including to-day and Sunday.
+That makes thirty francs."
+
+So Mr. George entered the thirty francs.
+
+"There," said he, "the whole amount due you up to Monday morning is
+sixty-three francs seventy-five centimes. That is sixty-three francs and
+three fourths. A hundred centimes make a franc.
+
+"And now," continued Mr. George, "I will make you a payment, so as to
+put you in funds, and that must be put down on the other side. How much
+would you like?"
+
+"I don't know," said Rollo; "a few francs, I suppose."
+
+"Have you got a purse?" asked Mr. George. "Let me see it."
+
+So Rollo took out a small leather bag which he had bought in London.
+
+"That's it," said Mr. George. "I'll give you ten francs. When you want
+more, you can have it--that is, provided it is due to you."
+
+Here Mr. George rang a bell, and a waiter came in immediately. Mr.
+George handed the waiter a sovereign, and asked him to get change for it
+in French money. The waiter took the money, and presently came in with
+five five-franc pieces. These he presented very respectfully to Mr.
+George. Mr. George took two of them and gave them to Rollo. The others
+he put into his own pocket. The five-franc pieces were very bright and
+new, and they were of about the size of silver dollars. Rollo was very
+much pleased with his portion, and put them in his purse, quite proud of
+having so much spending money.
+
+"And you say that I must not spend any of it without first asking you,"
+said Rollo.
+
+"O, no," replied Mr. George, "I have not said any such thing. That would
+be a great deal of trouble, both for you and for me."
+
+"But I thought you said that I was not to spend any thing without your
+consent."
+
+[Illustration: THE DINNER AT NEW HAVEN.]
+
+"No," said Mr. George, "I said _against_ my consent. I may forbid your
+spending whenever I think proper; but I shall not do so, so long as I
+find you always ask me in doubtful cases. Spend for yourself freely,
+whenever you are sure it is right. When you are not sure, ask me. If I
+find you abuse the privilege, I shall have to restrict you. Otherwise,
+not."
+
+Rollo was well satisfied with this understanding of the case; and just
+then the waiter came in, bearing a handsome silver tureen containing
+soup, which he put down upon the table, between Mr. George and Rollo. So
+the writing materials and the purses were put away, and the two
+travellers were soon occupied very busily in eating their dinner.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+CROSSING THE CHANNEL.
+
+
+Mr. Holiday had two reasons for making the arrangements described in the
+last chapter, in respect to Rollo's expenses. In the first place, it
+would gratify Rollo himself, who would feel more independent, and more
+like a man, he thought, in being allowed thus, in some measure, to have
+the charge and control of his own expenditures. But his second and
+principal reason was, that he might accustom his son, in early life, to
+bear pecuniary responsibilities, and to exercise judgment and discretion
+in the use of money. Many young men never have any training of this sort
+till they become of age. Before that time, whenever they wish for money,
+they go to their father and ask for it. They take all they can get; and
+when that is gone, they go and ask for more. They have no direct
+personal motive for exercising prudence and economy, and they have no
+experience of the evils that result from thriftlessness and
+prodigality. It is much better for all children that they should have
+pecuniary responsibilities, such as are suited to their years, thrown
+upon them in their youth, when the mistakes they make in acquiring their
+experience are of little moment. The same mistakes made after they
+become of age might be their ruin.
+
+In carrying the system into effect in Rollo's case, there seemed to be
+something very abrupt, at least, if not positively harsh, in Mr.
+George's mode of dealing with him. And yet Rollo did not dislike it. He
+felt that his uncle was treating him more like a man, on this account,
+or rather more like a large boy, and not like a child. In fact, a part
+of the rough handling which Rollo got from his uncle was due to this
+very circumstance--Mr. George having observed that he did not mind being
+knocked about a little.
+
+After dinner, Rollo proposed to his uncle that they should go out and
+take a walk.
+
+"I will go with you a few minutes," said Mr. George, "and then I must
+return to my room, and write up my journal."
+
+"Say half an hour," rejoined Rollo.
+
+"Well," replied Mr. George, "we will say half an hour."
+
+So they sallied forth upon the pier behind the hotel. Mr. George took a
+general survey of the harbor, and of the vessels that were lying in it,
+and also of the peaks and headlands which were seen at the mouth of it,
+toward the sea.
+
+"I should like to be on that hill," said Mr. George, "to look off over
+the channel, and see if I could discern the coast of France from it."
+
+"Let's go there," said Rollo.
+
+"That would take more than half an hour," replied Mr. George.
+
+"Well, at any rate, let's go on board the steamer," said Rollo.
+
+So, taking Mr. George by the hand, he led him along to the brink of the
+pier. Mr. George looked over, and saw the steamer lying at rest in its
+muddy bed below.
+
+"Is it possible?" said Mr. George, in a tone of great astonishment.
+
+"Can it be possible?" repeated Mr. George.
+
+"What?" inquired Rollo. "What is it that surprises you so much?"
+
+"Why, to find such a steamer as this for the travel on one of the great
+thoroughfares between England and France. Let's go down on board."
+
+So Mr. George led the way, and Rollo followed down the plank. The plank
+landed them on the top of the paddle box. From that place, a few steps
+led to the deck. They walked along the deck a short distance toward the
+stern, and there they found a door, and a small winding staircase
+leading down into the cabin. They descended these stairs, one before the
+other, for the space was not wide enough to allow of their going
+together; and when they reached the foot of them they found themselves
+in a small cabin, with one tier of berths around the sides. The cabin
+was not high enough for two. There were berths for about twenty or
+thirty passengers. The cabin was very neatly finished; and there was a
+row of cushioned seats around it, in front of the berths. In one corner,
+by the side of the door where Mr. George and Rollo had come in, was a
+small desk, with writing materials upon it. This Rollo supposed must be
+the "captain's office."
+
+While Mr. George sat surveying the scene, and mentally comparing this
+insignificant boat to the magnificent steamers on the Hudson River, in
+America, with their splendid and capacious cabins on three different
+decks, their promenade saloons, sometimes one hundred and fifty feet
+long, with ranges of elegant state rooms on either hand, and sofas, and
+couches, and _tete-a-tetes_ without number, in the middle, his
+perplexity increased.
+
+"I do not understand it at all," said he to Rollo. "I thought that there
+would at least be as much travelling between London and Paris, the two
+greatest cities in the world, as between New York and Albany. And yet
+there are half a dozen steamers every day on the North River, carrying
+from five hundred to one thousand passengers; while here, on the most
+direct and cheapest route between London and Paris, is one single
+steamer, that could not possibly carry one hundred passengers, and she
+only goes once in two days."
+
+Just then a young man, who seemed to be the clerk of the boat, came down
+the cabin stairs, and, seeing Mr. George and Rollo there, he asked them
+if they had taken their berths. They said that they had not; but they
+immediately proceeded to choose their berths, or rather their _places_,
+for there were no divisions separating the sleeping-places from each
+other except what was formed by the cushions. There was a long cushion
+for each sleeper, covered with crimson velvet or plush; and a round
+cushion, shaped like a bolster, and covered in the same way, for his
+head. On these cushions the passengers were expected to lie down without
+undressing, placing themselves in a row, head to head, and feet to feet.
+Mr. George chose two of these sleeping-places, one for himself, and the
+other for Rollo, and the clerk marked them with a ticket.
+
+Our two travellers then went up on deck again, and from the deck they
+ascended the plank to the pier. It was now nearly sunset, and it was a
+very pleasant evening. They sauntered slowly along the pier, until they
+came to a place where some steps led down to the water. There were
+several small boats at the foot of the steps, and in one of them was a
+man doing something to the rudder. Rollo saw that on the other side of
+the water was another long staircase leading down from the bank there,
+so as to form a landing-place for small boats at all times of tide. He
+also looked up and down the harbor, but he could see no bridge, and so
+he supposed that this must be a sort of ferry for the people who wished
+to cross from one side to the other.
+
+As soon as the man who was in the boat saw Mr. George and Rollo standing
+upon the pier, he rose up in his boat, and touching his hat at the same
+time, or rather making a sort of jerk with his hand, which was meant to
+represent a touch of the hat, he asked him if he would like to be rowed
+across to the other side.
+
+"Why, I don't know," said Mr. George. "What's the ferriage?"
+
+"That's just as the gentleman pleases," said the man, with another jerk
+at his hat.
+
+"And how much do they generally please?" said Mr. George. "What's the
+common custom?"
+
+"O, gentlemen gives us what they likes," said the man. "We always leaves
+it to them entirely."
+
+Mr. George was silent. After a moment's pause, the boatman said again,--
+
+"Would you like to go, sir? Very nice boat."
+
+"Not on those terms," said Mr. George. "If you will tell me what the
+usual ferriage is, I can then tell you whether we wish to go or not."
+
+"Well, sir," replied the man, "gentlemen usually gives us about twopence
+apiece."
+
+"Twopence apiece. Very well, we will go."
+
+Mr. George did not wait to ask Rollo whether he would like to go before
+he decided the question. He would have considered this a mere waste of
+time, for Rollo was always ready to go, no matter where.
+
+So they got into the boat, and were rowed across the water. They
+ascended the stairs on the other side, and walked a little way in a
+smooth road which led along the bank. Rollo wished to go farther; but
+Mr. George said that his time had expired, and that he must go back.
+"But you may stay," said he to Rollo, "as long as you please, provided
+that you come back before dark."
+
+Rollo was much pleased with this permission, as he wished to go to the
+top of the hill, at the outlet of the harbor, and look at the prospect.
+He promised to return before dark.
+
+"Have you any change," said Mr. George, "to pay your ferriage back?"
+
+"No," said Rollo, "I have nothing but my five-franc pieces."
+
+"Then I will lend you twopence," said Mr. George. "You can pay me the
+first change you get in France."
+
+"But I cannot get any pennies in France," said Rollo.
+
+"True," said Mr. George; "you will get sous there. You must pay me four
+sous. A penny is equal to two sous.
+
+"I will pay your bill at the hotel, too," continued Mr. George, "as I
+suppose they will make out yours and mine together, and you can pay me
+your share to-morrow, when we land. Here is your ticket, however. You
+must take charge of that."
+
+"But suppose I lose it?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Then you will have to pay over again," said Mr. George; "that is all.
+You will lose about twenty francs; unless, indeed," he continued, "your
+father should call it a casualty."
+
+So Mr. George went back to the boat, and Rollo continued his walk,
+thinking on the way of the question which his uncle had suggested,
+whether his father would consider the loss of his ticket a casualty or
+not. He determined, however, very resolutely, that he would not lose it;
+and so he put it away safely in his wallet, and then went on. The road
+was very smooth and pleasant to walk in, being bordered by green fields
+on the one hand, and the water of the harbor on the other. Rollo came at
+length to the hill. There were successive terraces, with houses built
+upon them, on the sides of the hill, and paths leading to the summit.
+Rollo had a fine view of the sea, and of the vessels and steamers which
+were passing slowly in the offing, on their way up and down the channel;
+but though he looked long and eagerly for the coast of France, it was
+not to be seen.
+
+Rollo rambled about the hill for a considerable time; for at that season
+of the year the twilight continued very long, and it did not become dark
+till quite late. When, at length, the shadows of the evening began to
+shut in upon the landscape, he returned to the ferry, and the ferryman
+rowed him back again to the hotel.
+
+It was now nearly nine o'clock, and, of course, three hours remained
+before the time of embarkation would arrive. Rollo was not sorry for
+this, as he thought that there would be enough to amuse and occupy him
+all this time on and around the pier. His first duty, however, was to go
+and report himself to Mr. George as having returned from his walk. This
+he did. He found his uncle very busy in his room, writing his journal.
+
+"Now, Rollo," said Mr. George, "it is three hours before we are to
+leave. What are you going to do all that time?"
+
+"O, I shall find plenty to amuse myself with," said Rollo.
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George. "You may play about wherever you are sure
+it is safe. Don't go near the edge of the pier, unless there is somebody
+at hand to pull you out of the water with a boathook, if you fall in.
+Amuse yourself as long as you can; and when you are tired of taking care
+of yourself, come to me, and I will tell you what to do."
+
+Rollo, having received these instructions, left his uncle to his work,
+and went away. He descended the stairs, and went out upon the pier
+again, and after amusing himself, by examining every thing there, he
+concluded to go on board the steamer. A train of cars had arrived from
+London while he and his uncle had been on the other side of the water,
+and there were now several new passengers in the cabin, who were
+choosing and marking their berths, or talking together about the voyage.
+
+Rollo thought that, in order to make sure that his ticket was all right,
+he would climb up into his berth and see; and then, when he was there,
+it seemed to him a very funny place to sleep in; so he laid down his
+head upon the round cushion to try it. While he was in this position,
+his attention was attracted by the sound of children's voices on the
+stairs, talking French. Presently these children came into the cabin.
+Their mother was with them. There were two of them, and they were not
+more than five or six years old. Rollo was exceedingly astonished to
+hear such little children talk French so well. Rollo listened to see if
+he could understand what they said. He had studied French himself for a
+year or two, and could say a great many things. In fact, he had been
+accustomed to consider himself quite a good French scholar. But he now
+found that all his acquisitions dwindled into utter insignificance, when
+compared with the power over the language possessed by those little
+girls.
+
+The French party did not remain very long in the cabin where Rollo was,
+but passed at once through a door which led to a small ladies' cabin
+near. There were other persons, however, continually coming and going,
+and Rollo was interested in watching their movements, and in listening
+to the fragments of conversation which he heard. He found his position
+very comfortable, too, and the sounds around him produced so lulling an
+effect, that, before long, he insensibly closed his eyes. In a word, in
+less than fifteen minutes after he climbed up into his berth to see what
+sort of a place it was, he had put it fully to the test of experiment,
+by going fast asleep in it.
+
+In about half an hour after this, Mr. George, coming to the end of a
+paragraph in his journal, laid down his pen, drew a long breath, looked
+out the window, and then rang the bell. In a few minutes the chambermaid
+came.
+
+"Mary," said he, "I wish to ask the porter to go out and look about on
+the pier, and in the packet, and see if he can see any thing of that boy
+that came with me."
+
+"Very well, sir," said Mary, with a quick courtesy; and she immediately
+disappeared.
+
+In about five minutes she came back, and said that the young master was
+in his berth in the packet, sound asleep.
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George, in his turn. "Much obliged to you." He
+then went on with his writing.
+
+The first thing that Rollo himself was conscious of, after falling
+asleep in his berth, was a feeling of some one pulling him gently by the
+shoulder. He opened his eyes, and saw before him a face that he did not
+exactly know, and yet it was not entirely strange. The man had his hand
+upon Rollo's shoulder, and was endeavoring to wake him.
+
+"Your ticket, if you please, sir."
+
+Rollo stared wildly a minute, first at the man, and then about the
+cabin. It was night. Lamps were burning, and the cabin was full of
+people. Some were in their berths, some in groups on the seats, and one
+or two were just preparing to lie down. The engine was in motion, and
+the ship was evidently going fast through the water. In fact, the
+steamer was rocking and rolling as she went on, indicating that she was
+already far out at sea.
+
+"Your ticket, if you please, sir," repeated the clerk.
+
+Rollo glanced around to his uncle's berth, and there he saw his uncle
+lying quietly in his place, his head being on a cushion close to the one
+on which Rollo's head had been lying.
+
+"Uncle George," said Rollo, "he wants my ticket."
+
+"Well," said Mr. George, without moving, "give him your ticket."
+
+Rollo then recollected that he had his ticket in his wallet. So, after
+fumbling for a time in his pocket, he brought out his wallet, and
+produced the ticket, and handed it to the clerk.
+
+"Thank you, sir," said the clerk, taking the ticket. At the same time he
+put two other tickets in Rollo's wallet, in the place of the one which
+he had taken out. As he did this, he pointed to one of the small ones,
+saying,--
+
+"That's for the landing."
+
+Rollo shut up his wallet, and put it in his pocket.
+
+"A shilling, if you please," said the clerk.
+
+Rollo had no shilling, and was still not much more than half awake. So
+he turned to his uncle again.
+
+"Uncle George," said he, "he wants a shilling."
+
+"Well, pay him a shilling, then," said Mr. George.
+
+Rollo now felt for his purse, and taking out one of his five-franc
+pieces, he gave it to the clerk, who, in return, gave him back a
+quantity of change. Rollo attempted to count the change, but he soon
+perceived that his ideas of francs and shillings were all in confusion.
+So he turned the change all together into his purse, put the purse back
+into his pocket, lay his head down upon his cushion again, shut his
+eyes, and in one minute was once more fast asleep.
+
+Some hours afterward he woke again, of his own accord. He opened his
+eyes and looked about him, and perceiving that it was morning, he
+climbed down from his berth, and then went up upon the deck. The coast
+of France was all before him, in full view, and the steamer was rapidly
+drawing near to it. He went to the bow of the vessel to get a nearer
+view. He saw directly before him a place where there were piers, and
+batteries, and other constructions indicating a town, while on either
+hand there extended long ranges of cliffs, with smooth, green slopes of
+land above, and broad, sandy shores below. In half an hour more the
+steamer arrived at the entrance of the harbor, which was formed of two
+long piers, built at a little distance from each other, and projecting
+quite into the sea. The steamer glided rapidly along between these high
+walls of stone, until, at length, it entered a broad basin, which was
+bordered by a continuation of these walls, and hemmed in on every side
+beyond the walls of the pier with ranges of the most quaint, and queer,
+and picturesque-looking buildings that Rollo ever saw.
+
+[Illustration: ENTERING DIEPPE.]
+
+These buildings were not close to the pier, but were back far enough to
+leave room for a street between them and the water. Such a street is
+called a _quay_.[B] Quays are built in almost all the cities of Europe
+where there are rivers or basins of water for shipping; and they are
+very pleasant streets to walk in, having usually large and elegant
+buildings on one side, and vessels and steamers on the other.
+
+[B] Pronounced _kee_.
+
+By the time that the steamer had entered the port, almost all the
+passengers had come up from below, and Mr. George among the rest. Mr.
+George came, expecting to find that, as they were now about to land, the
+baggage would be brought out, and that the several passengers would be
+called upon to select their own. But there was no movement of this kind.
+The baggage had all been put down into the hold the night before, and
+now the hatches were still closed, and there seemed to be no signs of
+any preparation to open them.
+
+In the mean time, the steamer gradually drew near to the pier. The
+engine was stopped. Ropes were thrown out. People in queer dresses, some
+of them soldiers, who were standing on the pier, caught the ropes and
+fastened them. The steamer was thus brought to her place and secured
+there.
+
+There was now, however, no rush to get on shore,--such as Rollo had
+always been accustomed to witness on board an American steamer on her
+arrival,--but every thing was quiet and still. By and by a plank was
+laid. Then the passengers were called upon to get out their tickets.
+Then they began to walk over the plank, each one giving up his landing
+ticket as he passed.
+
+When Mr. George and Rollo reached the pier, they found, on looking
+around them, that they were not yet at liberty. On the opposite side of
+the quay was a building, with a sign over it, in French, meaning
+custom-house office for packet boats; and there were two long ropes
+stretched, one from the stem and the other from the stern of the
+steamer, to the opposite sides of the door of this building, so as to
+enclose a space on the quay, in front of the building, in such a manner
+as to hem the passengers in, and make it necessary for them to pass
+through the custom house. The ropes were guarded by soldiers, dressed in
+what seemed to Rollo the queerest possible uniforms. They all talked
+French--even those who had talked English when they came on board the
+packet boat on the other side.
+
+"I can't understand a word they say," said Rollo.
+
+"Nor I," said Mr. George; "but we can watch and see what they will do."
+
+It did not require long watching, for no sooner had Mr. George said
+these words than he observed that the passengers were all going toward
+the door of the custom-house, and that, as they went, they were taking
+their passports out. Nobody can enter France without a passport. A
+passport is a paper given to the traveller by his own government. This
+paper tells the traveller's name, describes his person, and requests
+that the French government will allow him to pass through their country.
+Frenchmen themselves must have a passport too, though this is of a
+little different kind. All must have a passport of some kind or other,
+and all this machinery of ropes and soldiers was to make it sure that
+every one of the passengers had the proper document.
+
+The passengers accordingly took out their passports as they went into
+the custom-house door, and there passed, in single file, before an
+officer seated at a desk, who took them in turn, opened them, copied the
+names in his book, and then gave them back to the owners. Mr. George and
+Rollo followed on in the line. When their passports had been given back
+to them, they went on with the rest until they came out from the
+custom-house at another door, which brought them upon the quay outside
+of the ropes.
+
+"What's to be done next?" said Rollo.
+
+"I am sure I don't know," said Mr. George, "I suppose we shall see."
+
+There was an omnibus standing near, marked, "For the Iron Road,"--that
+being the French name for railroad,--but nobody seemed to be getting
+into it. In fact, the passengers, as fast as they came out from the
+custom-house, seemed all very quiet, as if waiting for something. A
+great many of them seemed to be French people, and they fell into little
+groups, and began to talk very volubly together, some finding friends
+who had come down to the quay to meet them, and others making friends,
+apparently, for the occasion, of the soldiers and idlers that were
+standing around.
+
+"Could not you ask some of them," said Rollo, "what we are to do next?"
+
+"I don't believe they would understand my French," said Mr. George. "I
+am sure I don't understand theirs." In a moment, however, he turned to a
+young man who was standing near, who seemed to be a waiter or servant
+man belonging to the place.
+
+"Do you speak English?"
+
+"Yes, sir," said the man, in a very foreign accent, but yet in a very
+pleasant tone.
+
+"What are we waiting for?" asked Mr. George.
+
+"You will wait, sir, for the baggages, and then for the visit of the
+baggages."
+
+"How long?" said Mr. George.
+
+"Twenty minutes," said the man. He also gave Mr. George to understand
+that he and Rollo might go and have some breakfast, if they chose. But
+Mr. George thought it was not safe for them to go away from the spot. So
+they waited where they were.
+
+In a few minutes the hatches were opened on board the vessel, and the
+sailors began to hoist out the trunks. As fast as they were brought up
+to the decks men took them on shore, and carried them into the
+custom-house by the same door where the passengers had entered. When all
+the baggage was carried in, the ropes were taken down, and the
+passengers went to the custom-house door again, to attend to the
+examination of the baggage. A soldier stood at the door to prevent too
+many going in at a time. Mr. George and Rollo followed the rest, and at
+length it came their turn to have their trunks examined. This was done
+very quick--the officers appearing to think, from the appearance of the
+travellers, that they would not be likely to have any smuggled goods in
+their possession. The officer, accordingly, just looked into the trunks,
+and then shut down the lids, and marked them passed. A porter then took
+them out at the side door. There, on Mr. George's telling them in French
+that they were going to Paris by the railroad, the trunks were put upon
+a cart, while Mr. George and Rollo got into the omnibus, and then they
+were very soon driving along the quay, in the direction, as they
+supposed, of the Paris railway station.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+JOURNEY TO PARIS.
+
+
+The omnibus which Mr. George and Rollo had entered contained several
+other passengers, some of whom had carpet bags and valises with them, as
+if they, too, were going to Paris. Besides the driver, there was a
+conductor, whose place was upon the step of the omnibus, behind. The
+conductor opened and shut the doors for the passengers when they wished
+to get in or out, and took the fare.
+
+"How much is the fare?" said Rollo to Mr. George.
+
+"I don't know," said Mr. George, shaking his head. He spoke, however, in
+a very unconcerned tone, as if it were of very little consequence
+whether he knew or not.
+
+"What are you going to do about it, then?" said Rollo.
+
+"I shall say, 'How much?' to him, when we get out; and then, if I do not
+understand his answer, I shall give him a large piece of money, and let
+him give me back as much change as he likes."
+
+Rollo resolved that he would do so too.
+
+Next to Mr. George and Rollo in the omnibus there sat a gentleman and
+lady, who seemed to be, as they really were, a new-married pair. They
+were making their bridal tour. The lady was dressed plainly, but well,
+in travelling costume, and she had a handsome morocco carriage bag
+hanging upon her arm. The gentleman was quite loaded with shawls, and
+boxes, and umbrellas, and small bags, which he had upon his lap or at
+his feet. Besides this, the lady had a trunk, which, together with that
+of her husband, had been left behind, to come on the cart. She was very
+anxious about this trunk, for it contained all her fine dresses. Her
+husband was interested in the novel sights and scenes that presented
+themselves to view in passing along the street; but she thought only of
+the trunk.
+
+"What strange costumes, Estelle!" said he. "Look! See that woman! What a
+funny cap!"
+
+"Yes," said Estelle; "but, Charley, don't you think it would have been
+better for us to have brought our trunks with us on the omnibus?"
+
+"I don't know," said her husband. "It is too late to think of that now.
+I've no doubt that they are safe enough where they are. Look! There's a
+girl with wooden shoes on. Those are the wooden shoes we have read about
+so often in books. Look!"
+
+Estelle glanced her eyes, for an instant, toward the wooden shoes, and
+then began to look back along the street again, watching anxiously for
+the trunks.
+
+At length the omnibus approached the station. It entered through a
+magnificent portal, under an arch. There was a soldier walking back and
+forth, with his musket in his hand, bayonet fixed, to guard the
+entrance. None but actual travellers were allowed to enter. The omnibus,
+having entered the court, stopped before a splendid portico, where there
+was a door leading into the building. The passengers paid their fares,
+and got out. On entering the building, they found themselves in a
+spacious apartment, with a great variety of partitions, offices,
+enclosures, and railings, presenting themselves on every hand, the
+meaning of all which it was very difficult to understand. There were
+also signs marked first class, and second class, and third class, and
+placards of notices to travellers, and time tables, and various similar
+things. On the back side of the room were doors and windows, looking out
+to a platform, where the train of cars was seen, apparently all ready to
+set off. But the partitions and railings which were in the way
+prevented the company from going out there.
+
+There were a number of travellers in this room, several parties having
+arrived there before the omnibus came. Many of these persons were
+waiting quietly, talking in little groups, or resting themselves by
+sitting upon their carpet bags. Others were looking about eagerly and
+anxiously, wondering what they were to do, or trying to find somebody
+who could tell them about the baggage. Estelle was the most restless and
+uneasy of all. She went continually to the door to look down the road,
+to see if the cart was coming.
+
+"Charles," said she, "what a shame it is that they don't come with the
+trunks! The train is all ready, and will go off before they come."
+
+"O, no," said her husband; "I think not. Don't be anxious about them.
+I've no doubt they will be here in time. Come with me, and let us look
+about the station, and see how it differs from ours."
+
+But Estelle would not allow her thoughts to be diverted from her trunk.
+She remained on the steps, looking anxiously down the road. Some of the
+other passengers who were unused to travelling, seeing her look so
+anxious, and not understanding what she said, supposed that some
+accident had happened, or that some unusual delay had occurred, and they
+began to be anxious too. Just then a bell began to ring out upon the
+platform.
+
+"There!" exclaimed Estelle. "The train is going! What shall we do? Why
+_can't_ you ask somebody, Charles?"
+
+"Why, I can't speak French," said Charles; "and they would not
+understand me if I ask in English."
+
+"Yes they would," said Estelle; "I'm sure they would. There are so many
+English travellers going on these roads now, that it must be that they
+have men here that speak English. There's a man," said she, pointing to
+a person in livery who was standing within a sort of enclosure.
+
+Mr. Charles, thus urged, walked across the hall to the railing, though
+very reluctantly, and asked the man if he could tell him why the trunks
+did not come.
+
+"Sir?" said the man, in French, and looking as if he did not understand.
+
+"Do you speak English?" asked Mr. Charles.
+
+"There," said the man, pointing across the room. Mr. Charles looked, and
+saw another man, who, by the livery or uniform which he wore, seemed to
+be a porter belonging to the station, standing by a window. He
+accordingly went across to ask the question of him.
+
+"Do you speak English, sir?" said he.
+
+"Yes, sare," replied the man, speaking with great formality, and in a
+very foreign accent, making, at the same time, a very polite bow.
+
+"What is the reason that our baggage does not come?" asked Mr. Charles.
+
+"_Yes_, sare," replied the porter, speaking in the same manner.
+
+"Why does not it come?" asked Mr. Charles again. "We put it upon a cart
+at the custom-house, and why does not it come?"
+
+"Yes, sare," replied the porter, with another very polite bow.
+
+Mr. Charles, perceiving that the porter's knowledge of English
+consisted, apparently, in being able to say, "Yes, sir," and mortified
+at the absurd figure which he made in attempting to make useless
+inquiries in such a way, bowed in his turn, and went back to Estelle in
+a state of greater alienation of heart from her than he had ever
+experienced before. And as this book may, perhaps, be read sometimes by
+girls as well as boys, I will here, for their benefit, add the remark,
+that there is no possible way by which a lady can more effectually
+destroy any kind feeling which a gentleman may entertain for her than
+by forcing him to exhibit himself thus in an awkward and ridiculous
+light, by her unreasonable exactions on journeys, or rides, or walks, or
+excursions of any kind that they may be taking together.
+
+Rollo and his uncle George had witnessed this scene, and had both been
+much interested in watching the progress of it. Rollo did not know but
+that there was some real cause for solicitude about the baggage,
+especially as several of the lady passengers who were standing with
+Estelle at the door seemed to be anxiously looking down the road.
+
+"Do you feel any anxiety about our trunks coming?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Not the least," said Mr. George, quietly.
+
+"Why not?" asked Rollo. "Are you sure that they will come?"
+
+"No," said Mr. George; "but there are a good many excellent reasons why
+I should not feel any anxiety about them. In the first place, I have
+some little confidence in the railway arrangements made in this country.
+The French are famous all the world over for their skill in
+systematizing and regulating all operations of this kind, so that they
+shall work in the most sure and perfect manner. It does not seem at all
+probable to me, therefore, that they can manage so clumsily here, on one
+of the great lines between England and France, as to get all the trunks
+of a whole steamer load of passengers upon a cart, and then loiter with
+it on the way to the station, and let the train go off without it."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "that's a good reason; but you said there were
+several."
+
+"Another is, that, if they are capable of managing so clumsily as to
+have such a thing happen, we cannot help it, and have nothing to do but
+to bear it quietly. We put our trunks in the proper place to have them
+brought here. We could not have done otherwise, with propriety, for that
+was the regular mode provided for conveying the baggage; and if there is
+a failure to get it here, we are not to fret about it, but to take it as
+we would a storm, or a break down, or any other casualty--that is, take
+it quietly."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo; "that's a good reason. Are there any more?"
+
+"There is one more," said Mr. George; "and that is, I am not anxious
+about the trunks coming in season, for I don't care a fig whether they
+come or not."
+
+"O, uncle George!" exclaimed Rollo.
+
+"I do not," said Mr. George; "for if they do not come, the only
+consequence will be, that we shall have to wait two or three hours for
+the next train, which will give us just time to ramble about a little in
+this queer-looking town of Dieppe, and get some breakfast, and perhaps
+have some curious adventures in trying to talk French. In fact, I rather
+hope the baggage won't come."
+
+Mr. George was destined to be disappointed in this rising desire, for,
+while he and Rollo were talking, Estelle came running in to her husband
+with a countenance full of joy, saying that the cart had come, and
+urging him to come and get their trunks off as quick as possible. Her
+eagerness was increased by hearing the bell again, which now began to
+toll, leading her to think that the train was going off immediately. The
+porters, however, whose business it was to carry the trunks in, did not
+seem to be at all disturbed by the sound, but began to take off the
+trunks, one by one, and convey them up into the station. Here they were
+placed upon a sort of counter, from whence they were taken off on the
+other side, and weighed in a curiously contrived pair of scales placed
+there for the purpose. If any trunk weighed over a certain number of
+pounds,--the amount which, according to the regulations of the road,
+each passenger was allowed to carry,--then the surplus had to be paid
+for. There was a little office close to the weighing machine; and as
+fast as the trunks were weighed, the result was reported to the clerk,
+who made out a bill for the surplus, whatever it was, and the passenger
+paid it through an opening. If there was no surplus weight, then they
+gave the passenger a similar bill, which was to be his check for his
+trunk at the end of the journey. Every thing was, however, so admirably
+arranged, that all this was done very rapidly.
+
+Mr. Charles, when he found that the trunks were all to be weighed,
+proposed to go with Estelle to the cars, so as to get a good seat for
+her; but Estelle chose to remain and make sure that her trunk was
+attended to. It happened that Mr. George's trunk and Rollo's were
+weighed among the first; and as soon as they got their checks, Mr.
+George said,--
+
+"Now for our seats in the cars."
+
+"But which way are we to go?" said Rollo.
+
+"I don't know," said Mr. George. "Go and show that man your ticket, and
+ask him where we are to go."
+
+"In French?" said Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George.
+
+So Rollo went to the man who was standing by a sort of gateway which led
+through a partition railing, as if he were there to guard the passage;
+and holding up his little pasteboard ticket, he said, in French,--
+
+"Where to go?"
+
+The man looked at the ticket, and, seeing that first class was printed
+upon it, he pointed in a certain direction, and said something in
+French, speaking, however, in so rapid and voluble a manner, that Rollo
+could not understand a single word. He, however, understood the sign.
+
+"This way, uncle George," said Rollo. "He says we must go this way."
+
+Following the indication which the man had given, Mr. George and Rollo
+passed out upon the platform, where they found the train ready for them.
+There were various attendants upon the platform, dressed in a quaint
+sort of uniform, the livery, as it were, of the railroad company. One of
+them looked at Rollo's ticket, and then opened the door of a first-class
+car. The cars were made like those in England, in separate compartments,
+each compartment being like a large coach, with one front seat, and one
+back, facing each other. There were four places; that is, room for four
+passengers on each seat. Of course, only those at the ends were near
+the window. Rollo and Mr. George took the two seats nearest the window
+on the side where they got in, as one of the seats at the opposite side
+was already occupied by a gentleman. The gentleman seemed to be an
+Englishman, for he was reading the London Times.
+
+Rollo and Mr. George had been seated only two or three minutes before
+Estelle and her husband came along, Estelle leading the way. The
+attendant opened the door of the car, and Estelle, followed by her
+husband, got in. They passed between Mr. George and Rollo, and stood
+there for a moment, looking about for a good seat. A freight train was
+slowly trundling by at this time on an adjoining track, so that what
+they said was not very audible; but still, Mr. George and Rollo could
+hear it.
+
+"I want a seat by the window," said Estelle, "where I can look out and
+see the country. Ask that gentleman if he would not be willing to take a
+middle seat, and let us sit together by the window."
+
+"We had better go to some other car," said her husband, in an undertone.
+"_He_ wishes to see the country, probably, himself, and has come early,
+perhaps, so as to get a good seat."
+
+"O, no," said Estelle; "this is a very nice car; and he would just as
+soon change as not, I have no doubt. Ask him, Charley; do."
+
+So Estelle moved to one side for her husband to pass. Mr. Charles, thus
+urged, approached the gentleman, and said, in a very bland and
+respectful manner,--
+
+"Should you have any objection, sir, to move your seat, so as to let
+this lady sit by the window?"
+
+The gentleman raised his eyes from his paper, and looked at Mr. Charles
+an instant, and then answered quietly,--
+
+"I prefer this seat, sir."
+
+He then went on with his reading as before.
+
+Estelle pouted her lip, and said, though in a tone too low, perhaps, for
+the gentleman to hear, "What a rude man!"
+
+"We will give you _these_ seats, sir," said Mr. George, "if you would
+like them."
+
+"Yes, they'll do just as well," said Estelle, speaking to her husband.
+
+Mr. George rose, and saying, "Come, Rollo," he left the car.
+
+Mr. George had some trouble in looking for other seats; but at length he
+succeeded in finding two that were as good as those which they had left.
+
+"I think she might at least have thanked you for giving up your seat to
+accommodate her," said Rollo.
+
+"I did not do it to accommodate her," said Mr. George; "I did it to get
+out of the sight and hearing of her. I would not ride from here to Paris
+in the same car with such a fussmaker for all the prospects in France. I
+had rather be shut up in a freight car."
+
+"How much trouble she makes her husband!" said Rollo.
+
+"It is not the trouble," said Mr. George, "it is the mortification and
+annoyance. She is a perpetual torment. If that's the way that young
+wives treat their husbands on the bridal tour, I'm thankful that I am
+not a bridegroom."
+
+The train soon set out, and Mr. George and Rollo, forgetting Estelle,
+soon began to enjoy the ride. They were both extremely interested in the
+views which they obtained from their windows as they passed along, and
+with the antique and quaint appearance of the country--the ancient stone
+cottages, with thatched roofs; the peasants, in their picturesque
+dresses; the immense tracts of cultivated country, divided in green and
+brown patches, like the beds of a garden, but with no fences or
+enclosures of any kind to be seen; the great forests, with trees planted
+closely in rows, like the corn in an American cornfield; and the
+roadways which they occasionally passed--immense avenues, bordered on
+either hand with double rows of majestic trees, and extending across the
+country, as straight as the street of a city, till lost in the horizon.
+These and a thousand other things, which were all the time presenting
+themselves to view, kept the travellers continually full of wonder and
+delight.
+
+After going on thus for several hours, the train stopped in a very
+spacious depot, where there was a large refreshment room; and as one of
+the attendants called out that there would be ten minutes of rest, both
+Mr. George and Rollo got out, and went into the refreshment room. They
+found a great multitude of cakes and meats spread out upon an immense
+counter, and dishes of every kind, all totally unknown to them. They, of
+course, could not call for any thing; but, after taking a survey, they
+helped themselves to what they thought looked as if it might be good,
+and then paid in the same way, by letting the girls that attended the
+tables help themselves to money which the travellers held out to them in
+their hands. They then took their seats again in the car, and soon
+afterward the train moved on.
+
+The place where they had stopped was Rouen, which, as well as Dieppe and
+Paris, the reader will find, on examining any map of France. In the
+course of the ride from Rouen to Paris, Mr. George and Rollo fell into
+quite a conversation, in which Rollo received a great deal of very good
+advice from Mr. George in respect to the care of himself when he should
+get to Paris.
+
+"I suppose that I should be sure to get lost," said Rollo, "if I should
+attempt to go out in such a great city alone."
+
+"No," said Mr. George, "not at all. A person can walk about a great way,
+sometimes, in a strange city, without getting lost. All he has to do is
+to take care, at first, to go only in such directions as that he can
+keep the way home in his mind."
+
+"I don't know what you mean, exactly, by that," said Rollo.
+
+"Why, suppose you were in a great city, and you come out at the door of
+your hotel, and there you find a long, straight street. You walk along
+that street half a mile. Then don't you think you could find your way
+home?"
+
+"Yes," said Rollo.
+
+"Certainly," said Mr. George, "because you have it in your mind that the
+way home is directly back by that same street, till you come to the
+hotel. Now, suppose that, after going along in that street for half a
+mile, you should come to a great church, upon a corner, and should turn
+there to the right, and go for some distance in another street leading
+off from the first one; don't you think you could _then_ find your way
+home?"
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I should go back to the church, and then turn to the
+left, and so go home."
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George; "by proceeding cautiously in that way,
+carrying your way home in your mind with you all the time, you can
+ramble a great deal about a strange city without getting lost, and go
+farther and farther every day.
+
+"Then, besides, if you do get lost, it is of no consequence. You can
+always ask the way back; or, if worst comes to worst, you can take a
+cab, and tell the man to drive you home."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I suppose I could always do that."
+
+"Only you must be sure," said Mr. George, "not to forget the name of
+your hotel. Once I was walking about in Paris, and I saw a colored girl
+on the sidewalk, before me, who seemed to be inquiring something of the
+people that she met, without appearing to get any satisfactory answer. I
+thought she was an American girl; and so I went to her, and asked her in
+French what she wanted to know--for I observed that she was speaking
+French. She said she wished to know what was the name of the hotel where
+most of the Americans lodged. I could not speak French very well myself,
+and so I could not ask her for any explanations; but I supposed that she
+belonged to some American party, and had lost her way in going somewhere
+of an errand, and had forgotten the name of the hotel. So I told her the
+names of two or three hotels where Americans were accustomed to lodge,
+and she went away."
+
+"Did she find her own hotel?" asked Rollo.
+
+"I don't know," said Mr. George. "I never knew what became of her."
+
+"How did she learn French, do you suppose?" asked Rollo.
+
+"I presume she came from New Orleans," replied Mr. George, "where nearly
+all the people speak French."
+
+Thus our two travellers beguiled their journey, by talking sometimes
+about the novel and curious objects which presented themselves to view,
+in the landscape, as the train rolled rapidly along on its way, and
+sometimes about what they expected to see and to do on their arrival in
+Paris. At length, the indications that they were approaching the great
+capital began to multiply on every hand. The villages were more
+frequent. Villas, parks, and palaces came into view; and here and there
+an ancient castle reposed on the slope of a distant hill, or frowned
+from its summit. At length, Rollo, turning his head to the window
+opposite to the one where he had been looking out, exclaimed suddenly,--
+
+"Look there! Uncle George, what's that?"
+
+Mr. George said that that was Napoleon's famous Triumphal Arch, that
+forms the grand entrance to Paris, on the way to the royal palaces. It
+was a large, square building, splendidly adorned with sculptures and
+architectural ornaments, and towering high into the air out of the midst
+of a perfect sea of houses, streets, avenues, trees, gardens, and
+palaces, which covered the whole country around. It stood upon a
+commanding elevation, which made its magnitude and its height seem all
+the more impressive. Through the centre of it was a magnificent archway,
+wide enough for four carriages to pass abreast.
+
+"It is the Triumphal Arch," said Mr. George, "by which all grand
+processions enter Paris on great public days of rejoicing. We will go
+out and see it some day. It is called the Triumphal Arch of Neuilly,
+because it is on the road that leads to Neuilly."[C]
+
+[C] It is also called the Arc de l'Etoile. Etoile means _star_, and the
+French give that name to a place where several roads diverge from one
+point. Roads so diverging form a sort of star. The reader will find this
+arch on any map of Paris, with the roads diverging from it.
+
+By this time the Triumphal Arch had passed out of view, and presently
+the train of cars began to be shut in by buildings, and the usual
+indications appeared of the approach to a great station. Queer-looking
+signals, of mysterious meaning,--some red, some blue, some round, some
+square,--glided by, and men in strange and fantastic costumes stood on
+the right hand and on the left, with little flags in their hands, and
+one arm extended, as if to show the locomotive the way.
+
+At length the convoy (as the French call a railway train) came to a
+stand, and an attendant, in uniform, opened the door of the car. Mr.
+George and Rollo got out and looked about, quite bewildered with the
+magnificence of the scene around them. The station was very extensive,
+and was very splendid in its construction, and there were immense
+numbers of people going and coming in it in all directions. Still, every
+thing was so well regulated that there was no disorder or confusion.
+There was a line of carriages drawn up in a certain place near the
+platform; but the coachmen remained quietly by them, awaiting calls from
+the passengers, instead of vociferously and clamorously offering their
+services, as is customary at the stations in America. Nor was there any
+pushing or crowding for trunks and baggage. In fact, the trunks were all
+to be examined before they could go into the city; for there are
+separate duties for the city of Paris, in addition to those for France.
+The baggage was, therefore, all taken from the baggage car, and arranged
+in an immense apartment, on counters, which extended all around the
+sides, and up and down the middle; and then, when all was ready, the
+passengers were admitted, and each one claimed his own. Mr. George and
+Rollo easily found their trunks, and, on presenting their tickets, an
+officer required them to open the trunks, that he might see if there was
+any thing contraband inside. As soon, however, as he perceived that Mr.
+George and Rollo were foreigners, and that their trunks had come from
+beyond sea, he shut down the lids again, saying, "It is well." A porter
+then took the trunks and carried them out to a carriage.
+
+"Hotel of the Rhine, Place Vendome," said Mr. George, in French, to the
+coachman, by way of directing him where to go.
+
+[Illustration: THE ARRIVAL.]
+
+"Yes--yes--yes--yes," said the coachman.
+
+It is so natural and easy for the French to talk, that they generally
+use all the words they can to express their meaning, besides an infinity
+of gestures. Thus, when they wish to say yes, they often repeat the yes
+four or five times, in a very rapid manner, thus:--
+
+Yes--yes--yes--yes.
+
+Mr. George got into the coach, and Rollo followed him. As they drove
+along the streets, Rollo tried to look out the window and see; but the
+window was so small, and the streets were so narrow, and the coachman,
+moreover, drove so fast, that he had very little opportunity to make
+observations. At length he caught a momentary glimpse of a monstrous
+column standing in the middle of an open square; and immediately
+afterward the carriage drove in under an archway, and came to a stand,
+in a small, open court, surrounded with lofty buildings. This was the
+hotel. There was a small room, which served as a porter's lodge, in this
+court, near where the coach stopped. A girl came to the door of this
+lodge to receive the guests. She bowed to Mr. George and Rollo with
+great politeness, and seemed glad to see them. Mr. George spoke to her
+in French, to say what rooms he wished to engage. What he said,
+literally translated, was this:--
+
+"We want two chambers for ourselves, at the third, and an apartment of
+three pieces, at the second, for a gentleman, lady, and their young
+girl, whom we attend to-morrow."
+
+The girl, who was very neatly and prettily dressed, and was very
+agreeable in her manners, immediately said, "Very well," and rang a
+bell. A servant man came at the summons, and, taking the trunks, showed
+Mr. George and Rollo up to their rooms.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE GARDEN OF THE TUILERIES.
+
+
+The first Sunday that Rollo spent in Paris he met with quite a singular
+adventure.
+
+His father and mother had arrived the evening before, and had
+established themselves quite comfortably in the "apartment of three
+pieces," which Mr. George had engaged for them. An apartment, according
+to the French use of the term, is not a single room, but a group of
+rooms, suitable to be occupied by one family. The number of _pieces_ is
+the number of rooms.
+
+Mr. Holiday's three rooms were a small but beautifully furnished parlor,
+where they had breakfast, and two bed rooms. One bed room was for
+himself and Mrs. Holiday, and the other was for Jennie. There were a
+great many splendid mirrors in these rooms, and other elegant furniture.
+The floors were not carpeted, but were formed of dark and polished wood,
+curiously inlaid, with rugs here and there at the doors and before the
+sofas and chairs. There was a small, square rug before every chair, and
+a large one before the sofa. There were a great many other curious
+things to be observed in the arrangements of the room. The fireplace,
+for example, was closed by plates of sheet iron, which could be shoved
+up and down like the sashes of a window; while the windows themselves
+opened like doors, each having a great brass fastening, like a latch, in
+the middle, and hinges at the sides.
+
+Rollo had gone with his father and mother to church in the morning, and
+at about one o'clock they returned. Rollo and Jennie remained at home,
+after one, for an hour or two, waiting for their uncle George to come.
+He had gone away somewhere, and had not yet returned. While thus
+waiting, the children sat at the window of their parlor, which they
+opened by swinging the two sides of the sash entirely back, so that they
+could see out to great advantage. The window opened down quite low; but
+there was a strong iron bar passing across from side to side, to keep
+them from falling out. The children sat at this window, amusing
+themselves with what they could see in the square. The name of the
+square was the Place Vendome. There was a very large and lofty column in
+the centre of it. This column is very greatly celebrated for its
+magnitude and its beauty. It is twelve feet in diameter, and nearly a
+hundred and forty feet high. But what is most remarkable is, that the
+whole exterior of it, enormous as the mass is, is formed of brass. The
+brass was obtained by melting up the cannons which Napoleon took from
+his enemies. At the end of one of his campaigns he found that he had
+twelve hundred cannons which he had taken from the Russians and
+Austrians, with whom he had been at war; and after reflecting for some
+time on the question, what he should do with them, he concluded to send
+them to Paris, and there to have them made into this enormous column, to
+ornament the centre of the Place Vendome.
+
+The column, though made of brass, is not bright upon the outside, but
+dark, like bronze, and the surface is ornamented with figures in what
+are called bas relief, representing the battles and victories in which
+the cannon out of which the column was composed were taken from the
+enemy.
+
+Rollo and Jennie, in looking at this column from the window of their
+hotel, observed that around the foot of it there was a square space
+enclosed by an iron railing, forming a sort of yard. There was a gate in
+the front side of this railing. This gate was open; but there were two
+soldiers standing by it, with guns in their hands, as if to prevent any
+body from going in.
+
+The column itself, as is usual with such columns, did not stand directly
+upon the ground, but upon a square pedestal, which was built of massive
+blocks of granite, resting on a deep and strong foundation; and as the
+column itself was twelve feet in diameter, the pedestal, being
+necessarily somewhat larger, was quite a considerable structure. In the
+front of it, opposite the gate in the iron railing, was a door. The door
+was open, but nothing was to be seen but darkness within.
+
+"I wonder what they do in there?" said Rollo. "The gate is open, and the
+door is open; but I suppose the soldiers would not let any body go in to
+see. Do you suppose, Jennie, that it can be possible that there is any
+way to get up to the top of the column by going in at that door?"
+
+"Yes," replied Jennie; and so saying, she pointed eagerly to the top of
+the column, and added, "For there are some boys up there now."
+
+Rollo looked up to the top of the column. There was a statue of Napoleon
+upon the summit, which appeared to be of about the ordinary size of a
+man, though it is really about eight times as large as life, being twice
+as large in every dimension. It looks small, on account of its being so
+high in the air. Beneath this statue and around the top of the column
+the children saw that there was a small gallery, with a railing on the
+outside of it. Several persons were standing on this gallery, leaning on
+the railing. At first Rollo thought that they were sculptured figures
+placed there, like the statue of Napoleon on the top, for ornament; but
+presently he saw some of them move about, which convinced him that they
+were real men. Two of them were soldiers, as was evident from the red
+uniform which they wore. But they all looked exceedingly small.
+
+"There must be a staircase inside," said Rollo, "or else some ladders.
+If not, how could those men get up?"
+
+"Yes," said Jennie.
+
+"I should like to go up there very much," said Rollo, "if I could only
+get by the soldiers."
+
+"I should not dare to go up to such a high place," said Jennie, shaking
+her head solemnly.
+
+At the foot of the column and outside of the railing which formed the
+enclosure around the pedestal was a very broad and smooth place, as
+smooth as a floor, and raised like a sidewalk above the street. It was
+very broad, and people walked over it in passing through the square.
+There was only one way of passing through the square, and that was from
+north to south. From east to west there was no street, but the ranges of
+houses and palaces continued on those sides unbroken. These edifices
+presented a very fine architectural frontage toward the square, and gave
+to the whole space which they enclosed a very rich and grand appearance.
+Over the doors of two or three of the houses there were small tricolored
+flags flying; and wherever these flags were, there were soldiers on the
+sidewalk below guarding the doors. But neither Rollo nor Jennie was able
+to imagine what this could mean.
+
+About three o'clock, when Rollo and Jennie had began to be tired of
+looking at the column, their mother came into the room. She said that
+Mr. Holiday was fatigued and was going to lie down, and that neither he
+nor herself would go out again. Rollo then asked if he and Jennie might
+go out and take a walk. His mother seemed to hesitate about it, but
+presently said that she would go and ask Mr. Holiday if he thought it
+would be safe. She accordingly went into the bed room, and very soon
+returned, saying that Mr. Holiday thought it would be safe for them to
+go if he gave them some directions.
+
+"He says," added Mrs. Holiday, "that you may get ready, and then go into
+his room, and he will give you the directions. Only you must not talk
+much with him, for it hurts him to talk. Hear what he has to say, and
+then come out immediately."
+
+So the children made themselves ready, and then went into their father's
+room. They found him sitting in a great arm chair by a window where the
+sun was shining. He looked pale and tired. When the children came in,
+however, he turned to them with a smile, and said,--
+
+"Children, I am glad you are going out to take a walk. You can go very
+safely, if you follow my directions.
+
+"This is the Place Vendome. There are only two ways of going out of it.
+One leads to the north, and the other to the south.
+
+"If you take the road which goes to the north, that is, that way," said
+Mr. Holiday, pointing, "you will go out by the street which is called
+the Street of Peace.[D] The Street of Peace is straight, and pretty
+broad; and if you follow it to the end of it, you will come to the
+Boulevards."
+
+[D] Mr. Holiday called this street, of course, by its French name; but
+we give its name here in English, for the convenience of the reader, who
+may, perhaps, not be able to pronounce French.
+
+"What are the Boulevards?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Hush!" said Jennie, gently touching Rollo at the same time with her
+hand.
+
+"Boulevards," said Mr. Holiday, "means bulwarks. A great many years ago
+there was a line of bulwarks or fortifications all around Paris; but at
+length, when the city grew too large for them, they levelled them down
+and made a very broad and handsome street where they had been, and then
+afterward made a new line of fortifications farther out. This broad and
+handsome street, or rather, series of streets, is called the Boulevards.
+It extends almost entirely around the city. Of course, when you get into
+the Boulevards, you are in no danger of losing yourselves; for you can
+go on as far as you please, either way, and then come back to the Street
+of Peace again, and then come home."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I understand."
+
+Here Jennie gently touched Rollo again, to remind him that he was not to
+talk.
+
+"You will know the Boulevards at once when you come to them," continued
+Mr. Holiday, "they are so much broader and more beautiful than any of
+the other streets of Paris. Even the sidewalks are as wide as many
+ordinary streets; and there are rows of young trees along the edges of
+the sidewalks. Now, if you choose, you can go out from the Place Vendome
+on the northern side, by the Street of Peace, and so walk on till you
+come to the Boulevards. Then you can walk along the Boulevards as far as
+you please.
+
+"Or," continued Mr. Holiday, "you can take the opposite course. You can
+go out of the Place Vendome on the southern side. That will bring you
+directly in the garden of the Tuileries."
+
+"I should like to go into a garden," said Jennie, "and see the flowers."
+
+"You will see," continued Mr. Holiday, "as soon as you begin to go out
+of the Place Vendome, at a little distance before you, perhaps as far as
+two or three blocks in New York, a wall of green trees."
+
+"A wall of green trees!" exclaimed Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said his father. "It is a thick row of trees growing in the
+garden, and having the side toward the street trimmed smooth and
+straight like a wall. The entrance through this range of trees, opposite
+the gateway where you go into the garden, looks like an archway in a
+green wall. You will see it before you as soon as you turn the corner of
+this hotel into the street that leads that way. You can walk straight on
+till you come to the place. There you will find the entrance to the
+garden. There is a very high iron palisade along the side of the garden
+toward the street, with the rows of trees which I have spoken of inside
+of it. There is a gateway through this palisade where you can go in.
+There are two soldiers there to guard the gateway."
+
+"Then how can we get in?" asked Jennie.
+
+"O, go right in," replied Mr. Holiday. "Pay no attention to the
+soldiers. They will not say any thing to you. They are only sentinels.
+
+"After you pass through the gateway, you keep on in the same direction,
+without turning to the right hand or to the left, just as if you were
+going across the garden. You go on in this way till you get to the
+middle alley, which is a very wide alley, that runs up and down the
+middle of the garden. This alley is called the Grand Alley, and it is a
+very grand alley indeed. It is as broad as a very wide street, and it is
+nearly two miles long.[A] It begins at the palace of the Tuileries, in
+the middle of the city, and extends through the whole length of the
+gardens of the Tuileries; and then, passing out through great gates at
+the foot of the garden, it extends through the Elysian Fields, away out
+to the great Triumphal Arch of the Star, which you saw from the cars
+when you were coming into the city.
+
+"Now, when you get into the Grand Alley, which you will know by its
+being the broadest, and smoothest, and most splendid grand walk that you
+ever saw, you must stop for a minute, and look both ways. I'll tell you
+what you will see. First, if you turn to the left, that is, toward the
+east, you will see at the end of the alley, in that direction, a long
+range of splendid buildings, extending across from side to side. In the
+opposite direction, at the top of a long, gentle slope, a mile and a
+half away, you will see the grand Triumphal Arch. That is at the barrier
+of the city. The view is not entirely open, however, out to the arch.
+About midway, in the centre of the Grand Alley, is a tall obelisk,
+standing on a high pedestal, and farther along there are one or two
+fountains. Still you can see the Triumphal Arch very plainly, it is so
+large, and it stands so high.
+
+"Now, the Grand Alley is nearly two miles long, and, wherever you may be
+in it, you can always see the palace at one end, the arch at the other,
+and the Egyptian obelisk in the middle. So that, as long as you walk
+back and forth in this alley, keeping these things in sight, you cannot
+lose your way.
+
+"Only I ought to say," continued Mr. Holiday, "that the garden does not
+extend all the way to the barrier. The garden extends, perhaps, half a
+mile. Near the bottom of it is a great basin or pond of water, with a
+stone margin to it all around. You will have to go round this basin, for
+the centre of it is exactly in the middle of the Grand Alley. Then you
+come very soon to the end of the garden, and you will go out through
+great iron gates, but still you will keep on in the same direction. Here
+you will come to a very large, open square, with the obelisk in the
+centre of it, and fountains and statues in it all around. Still you will
+keep straight on across this square, only you will have to turn aside to
+go round the obelisk. After you pass through the square, the Grand Alley
+still continues on, though now it becomes a Grand Avenue, leading
+through pleasure grounds, with ranges of trees and of buildings on
+either side. It becomes very wide here, being as wide as two or three
+ordinary streets, and will be filled with carriages and horsemen. But
+there will be good broad sidewalks for you on either hand, under the
+shade of the trees; and you will know where you are all the time, for
+you can always see the palace at one end of the view, and the great
+Triumphal Arch at the other, with the obelisk in the middle between
+them.
+
+"The amount of it is," added Mr. Holiday, speaking in a tone as if he
+were about finishing his instructions, "you can go out of the Place
+Vendome to the north, and keep straight on till you come to the
+Boulevards, and walk there either way as far as you like. Or you can go
+south, and keep straight on till you come to the middle of the Grand
+Alley of the garden of the Tuileries, and then walk in the Grand Alley
+and the Grand Avenue which forms the continuation of it as long as you
+like. Which way will you go?"
+
+"I would rather go to the garden," said Rollo, looking toward Jennie.
+
+"Yes," said Jennie, "and so would I."
+
+Thus it was settled that they were to take the street which led toward
+the south from the Place Vendome; and so, bidding their father good by,
+they went away. Before leaving the house, however, Rollo went to a
+secretary which stood in the parlor, and took down a map, in order to
+show Jennie the places which his father had mentioned, and to make it
+sure that they understood the directions which they had received. Rollo
+found the Place Vendome very readily upon the map, and the street
+leading to the gardens. He also found the Grand Alley running through
+the garden; and following this alley between the rows of trees, he
+showed Jennie a small circle which he thought must be the basin of
+water, and the place where the obelisk stood; and finally he pointed out
+the place where the Grand Alley widened out into the Grand Avenue and
+led on toward the barrier.
+
+Jennie did not understand the map very well; but she seemed satisfied
+with Rollo's assurances that he himself could find all the places.
+
+"It is all right, you may depend," said Rollo. "I can find the way, you
+may be sure."
+
+So he put up the map, bade his mother good by, and then he and Jennie
+sallied forth.
+
+The hotel was situated on the corner of the Place Vendome and the street
+which led toward the garden; and as soon as the children had turned this
+corner, after coming out from under the archway of the hotel, they saw
+at some distance before them, at the end of the street, the iron
+palisade, and the green wall of trees above it, which formed the
+boundary of the garden.
+
+"There it is!" exclaimed Rollo. "There is the garden and the gateway!
+and it is not very far!"
+
+The children walked along upon the sidewalk hand in hand, looking
+sometimes at the elegant carriages which rolled by them from time to
+time in the street, and sometimes at the groups of ladies and children
+that passed them on the sidewalk. At the first corner that they came to,
+Rollo's attention was attracted by the sight of a man who had a box on
+the edge of the sidewalk, with a little projection on the top of it
+shaped like a man's foot. Rollo wondered what it was for. Just before he
+reached the place, however, he saw a gentleman, who then happened to
+come along, stop before the box and put his foot on the projection.
+Immediately the man took out some brushes and some blacking from the
+inside of the box, which was open on the side where the man was
+standing, and began to brush the gentleman's boot.
+
+"Now, how convenient that is!" said Rollo. "If you get your shoes or
+your boots muddy or dusty, you can stop and have them brushed."
+
+So saying, he looked down at his own boots, almost in hopes that he
+should find that they needed brushing, in order that he might try the
+experiment; but they looked very clean and bright, and there seemed to
+be no excuse for having them brushed again.
+
+Besides, Jennie was pulling him by the hand, to hasten him along. She
+said at the same time, in an undertone,--
+
+"Look, Rollo, look! See! there is a blind lady walking along before us!"
+
+"Blind?" repeated Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said Jennie; "don't you see the little dog leading her?"
+
+There was a little dog walking along at a little distance before the
+lady, with a beautiful collar round his neck, and a cord attached to it.
+The lady had the other end of the cord in her hand.
+
+"I don't believe she is blind," said Rollo.
+
+As the children passed by the lady she turned and looked at them, or
+seemed to look, and manifested no indications of being blind. Afterward
+Jennie saw a great many other ladies walking with little dogs, which
+they led, or which led them, by means of a cord which the owner of the
+dog held in her hand. There were so many of these cases that Jennie was
+compelled to give up the idea of their being blind; but she said that
+she never knew any body but blind people led about by dogs before.
+
+At length the children arrived at the entrance to the garden. It was on
+the farther side of a broad and beautiful street which ran along there,
+just outside of the enclosure. The palisades were of iron, though the
+tops were tipped with gilding, and they were very high. They were more
+than twice as high as a man's head. The lower ends of them were set
+firmly in a wall of very substantial masonry. The gateway was very wide,
+and it had sentry boxes on each side of it. A soldier, with his bayonet
+fixed, was standing in front of each sentry box. When Jennie saw these
+soldiers she shrank back, and seemed afraid to go in. In fact, Rollo
+himself appeared somewhat disposed to hesitate. In a moment, however, a
+number of persons who came along upon the sidewalk turned in at the
+gates, and went into the yard. The soldiers paid no attention to them.
+Rollo and Jane, seeing this, took courage, and went in, too.
+
+On passing through the gates, the children found themselves on a very
+broad terrace, which ran along on that side of the garden. The surface
+of the terrace was gravelled for a walk, and it was very smooth and
+beautiful. While standing on, or walking upon it, you could look on one
+side, through the palisade, and see the carriages in the street, and on
+the other side you could look over a low wall down into the garden,
+which was several feet below. The descent into the garden was by a
+flight of stone steps. The children, after staying a little time upon
+the terrace, went down the steps. They came out upon a very broad
+avenue, or alley, which formed the side of the garden. This alley was
+very broad indeed, so broad that it was divided into three by orange
+trees, which extended up and down in long rows parallel to the street,
+almost as far as you could see, and forming beautiful vistas in each
+direction. These orange trees, though very large, were not set in the
+ground, but were planted in monstrous boxes, painted green and set on
+rollers. The reason of this was, so that they could be moved away in the
+winter, and put in a building where they could be kept warm.
+
+This broad alley, the great side alley of the garden on the side toward
+the city, was called the Alley of the Oranges. There is another similar
+alley on the opposite side of the garden, which is toward the river, and
+that is called the Alley of the Riverside.
+
+Passing across the three portions of the Alley of the Oranges, the
+children went on toward the centre of the garden. Instead, however, of
+such a garden as they had expected to see, with fruits and flowers in
+borders and beds, and serpentine walks winding among them, as Jennie had
+imagined, the children found themselves in a sort of forest, the trees
+of which were planted regularly in rows, with straight walks here and
+there under them.
+
+"What a strange garden!" said Jennie.
+
+"Yes," said Rollo. "But we must not stop here. We must go straight on
+through the trees until we come to the Grand Alley."
+
+In fact, Rollo could see the Grand Alley, as he thought, at some
+distance before him, with people walking up and down in it. There were
+several people, too, in the same walk with Rollo and Jane, some going
+with them toward the Grand Alley, and others coming back from it. Among
+these were two children, just big enough to go alone, who were prattling
+in French together very fluently as they walked along before their
+father and mother. Jennie said she wondered how such little children
+could learn to speak French so well. Another child, somewhat older than
+these, was trundling a hoop, and at length unfortunately she fell down
+and hurt herself. So, leaving her hoop upon the ground, she came toward
+the maid who had care of her, crying, and sobbing, and uttering broken
+exclamations, all in French, which seemed to Rollo and Jane very
+surprising.
+
+At length the children came out into the Grand Alley. They knew it
+immediately when they reached it, by its being so broad and magnificent,
+and by the splendid views which were presented on every hand.
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "this is it, I am sure. There is the obelisk; and
+there, beyond it, on the top of that long hill, is the Triumphal Arch;
+and there, the other way, is the palace of the Tuileries. Here is a
+seat, Jennie. Let's go and sit down."
+
+So saying, Rollo led Jennie to a stone seat which was placed on one side
+of the alley, at the margin of the grove; and there they sat for some
+time, greatly admiring the splendid panorama which was spread out before
+them. What happened to them for the remainder of their walk will be
+described in the next chapter.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+THE ELYSIAN FIELDS.
+
+
+After sitting a little time upon the stone bench, Rollo and Jennie rose
+and resumed their walk. The alley was extremely broad, and it was almost
+filled with parties of ladies and gentlemen, and with groups of
+children, who were walking to and fro, some going out toward the
+Triumphal Arch, and some returning. Rollo and Jennie, as they walked
+along, said very little to each other, their attention being almost
+wholly absorbed by the gay and gorgeous scene which surrounded them. At
+length they perceived that, at a little distance before them, the people
+were separating to the right hand and to the left, and going round in a
+sort of circuit; and, on coming to the place, they found that the great
+basin, or pond of water, which Mr. Holiday had described to them, was
+there. This pond was very large, much larger than Rollo had expected
+from his father's account of it. It was octagonal in form, and was
+bordered all around with stone. There were a number of children
+standing in groups on the brink, at different places; some were watching
+the motions of the gold fish that were swimming in the water, and others
+were looking at a little ship which a boy was sailing on the pond. The
+boy had a long thread tied to the bow of his ship; and when the wind had
+blown it out upon the pond to the length of the string, he would pull it
+back to the shore again, and then proceed to send it forth on another
+voyage.
+
+Rollo thought it strange that they should be thus employed on the
+Sabbath; for he had been brought up to believe, that, although it was
+very right and proper to take a quiet walk in a garden or in the fields
+toward the close of the day, it was not right, but would, on the other
+hand, be displeasing to God, for any one, old or young, to spend any
+part of the day which God had consecrated to his own service and to the
+spiritual improvement of the soul in ordinary sports and amusements.
+Jennie, too, had the same feeling; and accordingly, after standing with
+Rollo for a moment near the margin of the water, looking at the fishes
+and the vessels, and at the group of children that were there, she began
+to pull Rollo by the hand, saying,--
+
+"Come, Rollo, I think we had better go along."
+
+Rollo at once acceded to this proposal, and they both walked on. They
+soon found themselves passing out of the garden, though the space on
+each side of the broad alley in which they were walking was bordered
+with so many walls, palisades, terraces, statues, and columns, and the
+gateway which led out from the garden into the square was so broad, and
+was so filled up, moreover, with the people who were going and coming,
+that it was difficult to tell where the garden ended and the great
+square began. At length, however, it began to be plain that they were
+out of the garden; for the view, instead of being shut in by trees,
+became very widely extended on either hand. It was terminated on one
+side by ranges of magnificent buildings, and on the other by bridges
+leading across the river, with various grand and imposing edifices
+beyond. In the centre of the square the tall form of the obelisk towered
+high into the air, gently tapering as it ascended, and terminating
+suddenly at its apex in a point.
+
+The square, though open, was not empty. Besides the obelisk, which stood
+in the centre of it, on its lofty pedestal, there were two great
+fountains and colossal statues of marble; and lofty columns of bronze
+and gilt, for the gaslights; and raised sidewalks, smooth as a floor,
+formed of a sort of artificial stone, which was continuous over the
+whole surface, which was covered by it, without fissure or seam. There
+were roadways, also, crossing the place in various directions, with
+carriages and horsemen upon them continually coming and going. The great
+fountains were very curiously contrived. The constructions were thirty
+or forty feet high. They consisted of three great basins, one above the
+other. The smallest was at the top, and was, of course, high in the air.
+A column of water was spouting out from the middle of it, and, after
+rising a little way into the air, the water fell back into the basin,
+and, filling it full, it ran over the edge of it into the basin below.
+
+This was the middle basin, and, besides the water which fell into it
+from the basin above, it received also a great supply from streams that
+came from the great basin below, like the jets from the hose of a fire
+engine when a house is on fire. There was a row of bronze figures,
+shaped like men, in the water of the lowest basin of all, each holding a
+fish in his arms; and the jets of water which were thrown up to the
+middle basin from the lower one came out of the mouths of these fishes.
+The fishes were very large, and they were shaped precisely like real
+fishes, although they were made of bronze.
+
+The children looked at the fountains as they walked along, and at length
+came to the foot of the obelisk. They stopped a minute or two there, and
+looked up to the top of it. It was as tall as a steeple. Rollo was
+wondering whether it would be possible in any way to get to the top of
+it; and he told Jennie that he did not think that there was any way, for
+he did not see any place where any body could stand if they should
+succeed in getting there. While they both stood thus gazing upward, they
+suddenly heard a well-known voice behind them, saying,--
+
+"Well, children, what do you think of the Obelisk of Luxor?"
+
+They turned round and beheld their uncle George. They were, of course,
+very much astonished to see him. He was walking with another young
+gentleman, a friend of his from America, whom he had accidentally met
+with in Paris. When the children had recovered from the surprise of thus
+unexpectedly meeting him, he repeated his question.
+
+"What do you think of the obelisk?"
+
+"I don't believe it is so high," replied Rollo, "as the column in the
+Place Vendome."
+
+"No," replied Mr. George, "it is not."
+
+"Nor so large," added Rollo.
+
+"No," said Mr. George.
+
+"And I don't believe that there is any way to get to the top of it,"
+added Rollo.
+
+"No," said Mr. George, "there is not. The column in the Place Vendome is
+hollow, and has a staircase inside; but this obelisk is solid from top
+to bottom, and is formed of one single stone. That is the great wonder
+of it."
+
+[Illustration: THE OBELISK.]
+
+"Look up," said Mr. George, "to the top of it. It is as high as a
+steeple. See how large it is, too, at the base. Think how enormously
+heavy such an immense stone must be. What a work it must have been to
+lift it up and stand it on its end! Besides, it does not rest upon the
+ground, but upon another monstrous stone, the pedestal of which is
+nearly thirty feet high; so that, in setting it up in its place, the
+engineers had not only to lift it up on end, but they had to raise the
+whole mass, bodily, twenty or thirty feet into the air. I suppose it was
+one of the greatest lifts that ever was made.
+
+"There is another thing that is very curious about the obelisk,"
+continued Mr. George, "and that is its history. It was not made
+originally for this place. It was made in Egypt, thousands and thousands
+of years ago, nobody knows how long. There are several others of the
+same kind still standing. Some years ago, this one and another were
+given to the French by the government of Egypt, and the French king sent
+a large company of men to take this one down and bring it to Paris. They
+built an immense vessel on purpose for transporting it. This vessel they
+sent to Egypt. It went up the Nile as near to the place where the
+obelisk stood as it could go. The place was called Luxor. The obelisk
+stood back at some distance from the river; and there were several Arab
+huts near it, which it was necessary to pull down. There were also
+several other houses in the way by the course which the obelisk must
+take in going to the river. The French engineers bought all these
+houses, and pulled them down. Then they made a road leading from the
+place where the obelisk stood to the river. Then they cased the whole
+stone in wood, to prevent its getting broken or injured on the way. Then
+they lowered it down by means of immense machines which they constructed
+for the purpose, and so proceeded to draw it to the river. But with all
+their machines, it was a prodigiously difficult work to get it along. It
+took eight hundred men to move it, and so slowly did it go that these
+eight hundred men worked three months in getting it to the landing.
+There they made a great platform, and so rolled it on board the float.
+There was a steamer at hand to take it in tow, and it was brought to
+France. It then took five or six months to bring it across the country
+from the sea shore to Paris.
+
+"When, at last, they got it here, it took them nearly a year to
+construct the machines for raising it. They built the pedestal for it to
+stand upon, which you see is as high as a two-story house, and then
+appointed a day for the raising. All the world, almost, came to see.
+This whole square was full. There were more than a hundred thousand
+persons here. The king came, and his family, and all his generals and
+great officers. It was the greatest raising that ever was seen."
+
+"Why, there must have been just as great a raising," said Rollo, "when
+they first put it up in Egypt."
+
+"No," said Mr. George; "because there it stood nearly upon the ground,
+but here it is on the top of a lofty pedestal. Look there! Those are
+pictures of the machines which they raised it by."
+
+So saying, Mr. George pointed to beautifully gilded diagrams which were
+sculptured upon one side of the pedestal. There were beams, and ropes,
+and pulleys without number, with the obelisk among them; but Rollo could
+not understand the operation of the machinery very well. The obelisk
+itself was covered on all sides with ancient Egyptian hieroglyphics,
+deeply cut into the stone; but the children could not understand the
+hieroglyphics any better than they could the machinery.
+
+After looking some time longer at the obelisk and the various objects of
+interest that were around it, the whole party walked on together. Mr.
+George said that he and his friend were going up the avenue of the
+Elysian Fields, and that, if Rollo and Jennie would walk along behind
+them, they would not get lost. Jennie was very glad of this; for the
+crowd of people that were coming and going was getting to be very great,
+and she was a little afraid. Rollo, on the other hand, was rather sorry.
+The Triumphal Arch at the farther end of the avenue was in full view,
+and thus he felt sure of his way; and he was ambitious of the honor of
+being the sole guide in the excursion which he and Jane were taking. He,
+however, could not well decline his uncle's invitation; so, when the two
+gentlemen moved on, Rollo and Jennie followed them.
+
+The Grand Avenue was a very broad and beautiful roadway, gently
+ascending toward the barrier, and now perfectly thronged with carriages
+and horsemen. There were also two side avenues, one on each side of the
+central one. These were for foot passengers. There were rows of trees
+between. Beyond the side avenues there extended on either hand a wood,
+formed of large and tall trees, planted in rows, and standing close
+enough together to shade the whole ground. They were, however, far
+enough apart to allow of open and unobstructed motion among them. Under
+these trees, and in open spaces which were left here and there among
+them, there were booths, and stalls, and tables, and tents, and all
+sorts of contrivances for entertainment and pleasure, with crowds of
+people gathered around them in groups, or moving slowly from one to the
+other. There were men, some dressed like gentlemen, and others wearing
+blue, cartmen's frocks; and women, some with bonnets and some with caps;
+and children of all ages and sizes; and soldiers without number, with
+blue coats, and dark-red trousers, and funny caps, without any brim,
+except the visor. In the midst of all these multitudes Mr. George and
+the gentleman who was with him slowly led the way up the side avenue,
+Rollo and Jennie following them, quite bewildered with the extraordinary
+spectacles which were continually presenting themselves to view on every
+hand. The attention of the children was drawn from one object or
+incident to another, with so much suddenness, and so rapidly, that they
+had no time to understand one thing before it passed away and something
+else came forward into view and diverted their thoughts; and before they
+had recovered from the surprise which this second thing awakened, they
+had come to a third, more strange and wonderful, perhaps, than either of
+the preceding.
+
+A boy, very young, and very fantastically dressed, came riding along
+through the crowd, mounted on the smallest and prettiest black pony
+that Rollo had ever seen, and distributing as he passed along some sort
+of small printed papers to all who came near enough to get them. Rollo
+tried to get one of the papers to see what it was, but he did not
+succeed.
+
+"How I wish I had such a pony as that!" said Rollo.
+
+"So do I," said Jennie. "But what are the people doing in that ring?"
+
+Rollo saw a close ring of people all crowding around something on the
+ground. There was a man inside the ring, calling out something very loud
+and very incessantly. Rollo put his head between two of the spectators
+to see. There was a man seated in the centre, on the ground, with a
+cloth spread out before him, on which was a monstrous heap of stockings,
+of all kinds and colors, which he was selling as fast as possible to the
+men and women that had gathered around him. He sold them very cheap, and
+the people bought them very fast. He put the money, as fast as he
+received it, in his cap, which lay on the ground before him, and served
+him for a cash box.
+
+"Come, Rollo," said Jane, pulling Rollo by the hand, "we must go along.
+Uncle George is almost out of sight."
+
+Rollo turned back into the avenue again, and began to walk along. In a
+moment more he saw a large boy standing behind a curious-looking stove
+in an open space near, and baking griddle cakes. There was a very nice
+table by his side, covered with a white cloth, and a plate, on which the
+boy turned out the griddle cakes as fast as they were baked. There were
+several children about him, buying the cakes and eating them.
+
+"Ah, Jennie," said Rollo, "look at these cakes! How I should like some
+of them! If it were not that it is Sunday, I would go and buy some."
+
+"O Rollo!" exclaimed Jennie, "look here! See what's coming!"
+
+Rollo looked, and saw that the ladies and gentlemen on the broad walk
+before them were moving to one side and the other, to make room for a
+most elegant little omnibus, drawn by six goats, that were harnessed
+before it like horses. The omnibus was made precisely like a large
+omnibus, such as are used in the streets of Paris for grown persons;
+only this one was small, just large enough for the goats to draw. It was
+very beautifully painted, and had elegant silken curtains. It was full
+of children, who were looking out the windows with very smiling faces,
+as if they were enjoying their ride very much. A very pretty little
+boy, about seven years of age, was holding the reins of the goats, and
+appearing to drive; but there was a large boy walking along by the side
+of the goats all the time, to take care that they did not go wrong. The
+omnibus belonged to his father, who kept it to let children ride in it
+on their paying him a small sum for each ride.
+
+Jennie was very much pleased with the omnibus; but what followed it
+pleased her still more. This was a carriage, made in all respects like a
+real carriage, and large enough to contain several children. It was
+open, like a barouche, so that the children who were riding in it could
+see all around them perfectly well. It had two seats inside, besides a
+high seat in front for the coachman, and one behind for the footman.
+There were children upon all these seats. There was one on the
+coachman's box to drive. The carriage, like the omnibus, was drawn by
+goats, only there were four instead of six. The coachman drove them by
+means of long, silken reins.
+
+As soon as the omnibus and the carriage had passed by, and the crowd had
+closed again behind them so as to conceal them from view, Rollo and
+Jennie looked about for Mr. George and the other gentleman; but they
+were nowhere to be seen. Jane was quite frightened; but Rollo said he
+did not care.
+
+"Look there!" said Rollo, pointing back.
+
+"What is it?" said Jennie.
+
+"The obelisk," said Rollo.
+
+Jane saw the tall, needle-like form of the obelisk towering into the air
+from the middle of the great square behind them, and a part of the long
+front of the Tuileries, at the end of a vista of trees, far beyond.
+
+"As long as we have the obelisk in sight," said Rollo, "we cannot get
+lost."
+
+Just then Rollo's attention was called to a broad sheet of paper
+fastened up upon a tree that he was passing by. He stopped to see what
+it was. A little girl, about as old as Jennie, came up at the same time,
+leading the maid who had the care of her by the hand. This child began
+to read what was printed on the card. She read aloud, enunciating the
+words very slowly, syllable by syllable, and in a voice so clear, and
+rich, and silvery, that it was delightful to hear her. She seemed
+pleased to observe that Rollo and Jane were listening to her; and when
+she got through she turned to them, as if to apologize for not reading
+better, and said, in French, and with a pleasant smile upon her
+countenance,--
+
+"I am learning to read; but I cannot read too much yet, you see."
+
+By too much she meant very well, that being the way that the French
+express themselves in such a case.
+
+Rollo understood what she said, but he did not think it prudent to
+attempt to reply in the same language; so he said simply, in English,--
+
+"And yet I think my father would give five hundred dollars if I could
+read French like that. He'd be _glad_ to do it."
+
+As Rollo spoke these words the child looked earnestly in his face, the
+smile gradually disappearing from her features and being replaced by a
+look of perplexity and wonder. She then turned and led the maid away.
+
+There were a great many booths and stands about, some in open spaces and
+some under the trees. At one they had all sorts of cakes for sale; at
+another toys of every kind, such as hoops, balls, kites, balloons,
+rocking horses, and all such things; and at a third pictures, some
+large, some small, some plain, and some beautifully colored. At one
+place, by the side of the avenue where most of the people were walking,
+there stood a man, with a tall and gayly-painted can on his back. It was
+covered with common drapery below; but the top was bright, and towered
+like a spire above the man's head. There was a round bar, like the leg
+of a chair, which went from the bottom of the can to the ground, to
+support it, and take the weight off the man's shoulders when he was
+standing still. The man was standing still now, and was all the time
+tinkling a little bell, to call the attention of the people to what he
+had to sell. It was something to drink. There were two kinds of drink in
+the can, separated from each other by a division in the interior. There
+were two small pipes, one for each kind of drink, leading from the
+bottom of the can round by the side of the man to the front, with
+stopcocks at the end, where he could draw out the drink conveniently.
+There was also a little rack to hold the glasses. There were three
+glasses; for the man sometimes had three customers at a time. While
+Rollo and Jane were looking at this man, a boy came up for a drink. The
+man took one of the glasses from the little rack, and filled it by
+turning one of the stopcocks. When the boy had taken his drink and paid
+the money, the man wiped the glass with a towel which he kept for the
+purpose; and then, putting it back in its place on the rack, he went on
+tinkling his little bell.
+
+In the mean time, the crowd of people seemed to increase, and it
+appeared to Rollo and Jennie, when they came to observe particularly,
+that they were nearly all walking one way, and that was up the avenue,
+as if there were some place in that direction where they were all going.
+Rollo supposed that, of course, it was a church. He had been told by his
+father, when they were travelling in England, that when he was in any
+strange place on Sunday, and wished to find the way to church, one good
+method was to observe in the streets whenever he saw any considerable
+number of people moving in the same direction, and to join and follow
+them. He would, in such cases, his father said, be very sure to be
+conducted to a church, and after going in he would generally find some
+one who would show him a seat. Rollo and Jennie had often practised on
+this plan. In fact, they took a particular interest and pleasure in
+going to church in this way, as there was something a little of the
+nature of adventure in it.
+
+When, accordingly, the children observed that the great mass of the
+people that filled the two side avenues, as well as the carriages that
+were in the central one, were all moving steadily onward together,
+paying little attention to the booths, and stalls, and other places and
+means of amusement which were to be seen under the trees on either hand,
+he concluded that, while some of the people of Paris were willing to
+amuse themselves with sports and exhibitions on Sunday, the more
+respectable portion would not stop to look at them, but went straight
+forward to church; and he and Jennie resolved to follow their example.
+
+"I should like to see all these things very much," said Rollo, "some
+other day; but now we will go on, Jennie, to the church, where the rest
+of the people are going."
+
+Jennie very cordially approved of this plan, and so they walked on
+together. It happened that, at the time when they came to this
+determination, there was walking just before them a party, consisting
+apparently of a father and mother and their two children. The father and
+mother walked together first, and the two children, hand in hand,
+followed. The oldest child was a girl, of about Jennie's age. The other
+was a very small boy, just beginning to learn to talk. Rollo and Jennie
+came immediately behind these children, and were very much interested in
+hearing them talk together, especially to hear the little one prattling
+in French. He called his sister Adrienne, and she called him Antoine.
+Thus Rollo and Jennie knew the names of the children, but they had no
+way of finding out what were the names of the father and mother.
+
+"Now, Jennie," said Rollo, in a low tone, "I think we had better follow
+this party, and keep close to them all the time, and then, when we get
+to the church, perhaps they will give us a seat."
+
+Jennie liked this proposal very much, and so she and Rollo walked along
+after Adrienne and Antoine, not too near them, but so near as to keep
+them always in sight. Sometimes the party turned aside from the avenue
+to walk under the trees, and sometimes they stopped a few minutes to
+look at some curious exhibition or spectacle which was to be seen. At
+one place a man had a square marked off, and enclosed with a line to
+keep the crowd back; and in the middle he had an electrical machine,
+with which he gave shocks to any of the bystanders who were willing to
+take them. A boy kept turning the machine all the time. At another place
+was a little theatre, mounted on a high box, so that all could see, with
+little images about as large as dolls dancing on the stage, or holding
+dialogues with each other. The words were really spoken by a man who was
+concealed in the box below; but as the little images moved about
+continually, and made all sorts of gesticulations, corresponding with
+what was said, it seemed to the bystanders precisely as if they were
+speaking themselves. Besides this, the images would walk about, scold
+each other, quarrel and fight each other, run out at little doors, and
+then come in again, and do a great many other things which it was very
+wonderful to see such little figures do.
+
+There were places, too, where there were great whirling machines, under
+splendid tents and canopies, with horses, and boats, and ships, and
+cradles at the circumference of them, all of which were made to sail
+round and round through the air, carrying the children that were mounted
+on the horses or sitting in the ships and boats. There were also several
+places for shooting at a mark with little spring guns, which were loaded
+with peas instead of bullets. There were figures of bears, lions,
+tigers, ducks, deer, and other animals at a little distance, which were
+kept moving along all the time by machinery, for the children to shoot
+at with the peas. If they hit any of them they drew a prize, consisting
+of cake or gingerbread, or of some sort of plaything or toy, of which
+great numbers were hanging up about the shooting place. All these, and a
+great many other similar contrivances for amusing people, Rollo and Jane
+saw, as they passed along; but they did not stop to look at them,
+excepting when the gentleman and lady stopped whom they were following.
+This was seldom, however; and so they went, on the whole, very steadily
+forward, up the long and gentle ascent, until, at length, they reached
+the great Triumphal Arch at the Neuilly Barrier.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+A GREAT MISTAKE.
+
+
+As they approached the arch, the children gazed upon it with
+astonishment, being greatly impressed with its magnitude and height.
+There were a great many men on the top of it. Their heads and shoulders
+were visible from below, as they stood leaning over the parapet. They,
+however, looked exceedingly small.
+
+Rollo and Jennie would have liked to stop and look longer at the arch;
+but they did not wish to separate from Adrienne and Antoine, who kept
+walking steadily on all the time with their father and mother. Rollo
+supposed, as has been said before, that this party were going to some
+church; but they were not. They were going to a place called the
+Hippodrome.
+
+The Hippodrome, far from being a church, is a place of amusement. It is
+used for equestrian performances, and feats of strength and agility, and
+balloon ascension, and all similar entertainments.
+
+The Hippodrome is a long, oval enclosure, with eight or ten ranges of
+seats extending all around it, and rising one above another, like the
+seats of the Coliseum at Rome. There is a roof extending all around over
+the seats; but the area within is so large that it could not well be
+covered with a roof. Besides, if there were a roof over it, how could
+the balloons go up?
+
+Then, moreover, the spectacles which are exhibited in the Hippodrome
+appear to much better advantage when seen in the open light of day than
+if they were under the cover of a roof, so long as the spectators
+themselves are protected from the sun and from any sudden showers.
+
+The area in the middle of the Hippodrome is about one hundred yards long
+and fifty yards wide. It is so large that there is room for a good wide
+road all around it, and also for another road up and down the middle,
+with little gardens of grass and flowers between. At the very centre is
+a round area, where there is a concealed canal of water to represent a
+stream. This water is ordinarily covered with planks, and the planks are
+covered with a very thick canvas carpet, and this with sand; so that the
+water is entirely concealed, and the horsemen ride over it just as they
+do over any other part of the area. When they wish to use it, to show
+how the horses could leap over streams, they take off the sand, roll up
+the carpet, and carry away the planks; and there they have a very good
+representation of a stream.
+
+The performances at the Hippodrome are very various. Sometimes whole
+troops of horse come in from between two great curtains at one end, all
+elegantly caparisoned and mounted, some by men and some by girls, but
+all, whether men or girls, dressed in splendid uniforms. These troops
+ride round and round the area, and up and down in the middle of it,
+performing a great variety of evolutions in the most rapid and
+surprising manner.
+
+Then there are races of various kinds. Some are run by beautiful girls,
+who come out mounted on elegant gray horses that are mottled like
+leopards, each of the riders having a scarf over her shoulders of a
+different color from the rest, so that they may be all readily
+distinguished from each other in the race. Then there are races of
+chariots, three running at a time, round and round the area; and of
+small ponies, with monkeys on them for riders. There are various
+contrivances, too, for athletic and gymnastic feats, such as masts and
+poles for climbers to ascend, and other similar apparatus. All these
+things give the interior of the Hippodrome quite a gay and lively
+appearance, and the area necessary for them is so large that the ranges
+of seats surrounding it are sufficient to accommodate ten thousand
+spectators.
+
+It was to this place that Adrienne and Antoine, with their father and
+mother, were going, while Rollo and Jennie supposed that they were going
+to a church. There was nothing to lead Rollo to suspect his mistake in
+the aspect of the building as he approached the entrance to it; for the
+sides of it were hidden by trees and other buildings, and the portal,
+though very large and very gayly decorated, seemed still, so far as
+Rollo could get a glimpse of it through the crowds of people, only to
+denote that it was the entrance to some very splendid public edifice,
+without at all indicating the nature of the purposes to which it was
+devoted.
+
+The immense concourse of people which were pouring into the Hippodrome
+divided themselves at the gates into two portions, and passed up an
+ascent to enter at side doors. Rollo and Jane, following their guides,
+went toward the right. They observed that the father of Adrienne and
+Antoine stopped at a little window near the entrance, to pay the price
+of admission for himself and wife and his two children and to get the
+tickets. He paid full price for his two children, and so took four full
+tickets. Rollo and Jane did not see him pay the money. They only
+observed that there was a crowd at the little window, and they saw
+Antoine's father take the tickets. They did not know what this meant,
+however; but they followed on. When they all came to the doorway which
+led up to the ranges of seats, the man whose duty it was to take the
+tickets supposed that the four children all belonged to the same family,
+and that they had been admitted at half price, and that, accordingly,
+two of the tickets were for the father and mother, and the other two for
+the four children. So he let them all pass on together, especially as
+there was, at that time, such a throng of people crowding in that there
+was no time to stop and make any inquiries.
+
+Rollo and Jane were carried along by the current up a flight of stairs,
+which came out among the ranges of seats; and after moving along for
+some distance till they came to a vacancy they sat down, and began to
+look around and survey the spacious and splendid interior into which
+they had entered. They were at once overwhelmed with the magnificence of
+the spectacle which was presented to view. Instead of a church, they
+found a vast open area extended before them, surrounded with long
+ranges of seats, and laid out in the interior in the most graceful and
+beautiful manner.
+
+"Jennie," said Rollo, after gazing about for some moments, almost
+bewildered, "if this is any kind of meeting at all, I think it must be a
+camp meeting."
+
+Jennie was completely bewildered, and had no opinion on the subject
+whatever; so she said nothing.
+
+"That's the place for the choir, I suppose," said Rollo, pointing to a
+sort of raised platform with a balustrade in front, which was built
+among the seats in the middle of one of the sides of the Hippodrome.
+"But then," he added, after a moment's pause, "I don't see any pulpit,
+unless that is it."
+
+As he said this, Rollo pointed to a balcony with a rich canopy over it,
+which was built up among the seats, directly opposite to the musician's
+gallery, on the other side of the arena. This balcony was for the use of
+the emperor, and his family and friends, when they chose to come and
+witness the spectacles in the Hippodrome.
+
+These speculations of Rollo's were suddenly interrupted by the striking
+up of martial music, by a full band of trumpets, drums, clarinets,
+hautboys, and horns, from the musician's gallery. Soon afterwards the
+curtains opened at the farther end of the arena, and a magnificent troop
+of horse, mounted by male and female riders, all dressed in the gayest
+and most splendid costumes, came prancing in. As soon as Rollo had
+recovered from his astonishment at this spectacle, he turned to Jennie,
+and said,--
+
+"Jennie, it is not any church or meeting at all; and I think we had
+better go home."
+
+"I think so too," said Jennie.
+
+"I should like to come here some other day," added Rollo; "and I mean to
+ask my father to let us come. Uncle George will come with us. But _now_
+we had better go home."
+
+So the children rose from their seats and began to move toward the door.
+It was some time before they could get out, so great was the number of
+people still coming in. They, however, finally succeeded, and were quite
+relieved when they found themselves once more in the open air.
+
+They turned their steps immediately toward home. Jane, however, soon
+began to feel very tired; and so Rollo said he would stop the first
+omnibus that came along. The avenue was full of carriages of every kind;
+and pretty soon an omnibus, headed down the obelisk, appeared among
+them. Rollo made a signal for the conductor to stop, and he and Jennie
+got in.
+
+They had a very pleasant ride back through the Elysian Fields, and
+around the great square where the obelisk stands. They then entered the
+street which runs along by the side of the gardens of the Tuileries, and
+advanced in it toward the heart of the city. Rollo made a sign for the
+conductor to stop when the omnibus reached that part of the street which
+was opposite to the entrance into the garden where he and Jennie had
+gone in. This was, of course, also opposite to the street leading into
+the Place Vendome. It was but a short walk from this place to the hotel.
+About six o'clock the children arrived at the hotel, and the table was
+already set for dinner. Mr. Holiday was reclining on a couch in the
+room, and Mrs. Holiday had been reading to him. Rollo's uncle George was
+also in the room. Mrs. Holiday laid down her book when the children came
+in. Rollo and Jennie sat down upon a sofa, not far from their father's
+couch. They were glad to rest.
+
+"Well, children," said Mrs. Holiday, "have you had a pleasant walk?"
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "a very pleasant walk indeed. We have seen a great
+many very curious things. But I believe we made a mistake."
+
+"What mistake?" asked Mrs. Holiday.
+
+"Why, we followed a great many people that we thought were going to
+church; but, instead of that, they led us into a great place that I
+think was some sort of circus."
+
+Here Mr. George looked up very eagerly and began to laugh.
+
+"I declare!" said he. "I shouldn't wonder if you got into the
+Hippodrome."
+
+"I don't know what it was," said Rollo. "When we first went in we saw
+that it was not a church; but we did not know but that it might be some
+sort of camp meeting. But pretty soon they began to bring horses in and
+ride them around, and so we came out."
+
+Here Mr. George fell into a long and uncontrollable paroxysm of
+laughter, during the intervals of which he said, in broken language, as
+he walked about the room endeavoring to get breath and recover his
+self-control, that it was the best thing he had heard since he landed at
+Liverpool. The idea of following the crowd of Parisians in the Champs
+Elysees on Sunday afternoon, with the expectation of being conducted to
+church, and then finally taking the Hippodrome for a camp meeting! Rollo
+himself, though somewhat piqued at having his adventure put in so
+ridiculous a light, could not help laughing too; and even his father and
+mother smiled.
+
+"Never mind, Rollo," said his mother, at length. "I don't think you were
+at all to blame; though I am glad that you came out when you found what
+sort of a place it was."
+
+"O, no," said Mr. George, as he gradually recovered his self-control,
+"you were not to blame in the least. The rule you followed is a very
+good one for England and America; but it does not apply to France. Going
+with the multitude Sunday afternoons, in Paris, will take you any where
+but to church."
+
+Notwithstanding the concurrence of opinion between Rollo's mother and
+his uncle that he had done nothing wrong, neither he nor Jennie could
+help feeling some degree of uneasiness and some little dissatisfaction
+with themselves in respect to the manner in which they had spent the
+afternoon. They had both been accustomed to consider the Sabbath as a
+day solemnly consecrated to the worship of God and to the work of
+preparation for heaven. It is true that the day sometimes seemed very
+long to them, as it does to all children; and though they had always
+been allowed to take quiet walks in the gardens and grounds around the
+house, still they usually got tired, before night came, of being so
+quiet and still. Notwithstanding this, however, they had no disposition
+to break over the rule which, as they supposed, the law of God enjoined
+upon them. They fully believed that God himself had ordained that there
+should be one day in seven from which all the usual occupations and
+amusements of life should be excluded, and which should be consecrated
+wholly to rest, to religious contemplation, and to prayer; and they were
+very willing to submit to the ordinance, though it brought with it upon
+them, as children, burdens and restrictions which it was sometimes quite
+onerous for them to bear.
+
+When night came, Rollo found that he always felt much happier if he had
+kept the Sabbath strictly, than when he attempted, either secretly or
+openly, to evade the duty. There was a sort of freshness and vigor, too,
+with which he engaged in the employments of the week on Monday morning,
+which, though he had never stopped to account for it philosophically, he
+enjoyed very highly, and which made Monday morning the brightest and
+most animated morning of the week. So Rollo was accustomed to acquiesce
+very willingly in the setting apart of the sacred day to religious
+observances and to rest, thinking that the restraints and restrictions
+which it imposed were amply compensated for by the peace and comfort
+which it brought to his mind when he observed it aright, and by the
+novelty and freshness of the charm with which it invested the ordinary
+pursuits and enjoyments of life when it was over.
+
+Accordingly, on this occasion, feeling a little dissatisfied with
+himself and uneasy in mind, in consequence of the manner in which he had
+spent the afternoon, Rollo determined to make all the atonement for his
+fault, if fault it was, that was now in his power. Accordingly, when the
+family rose from the table after dinner, which was about seven o'clock,
+and his father and mother went and sat upon the sofa together, which
+stood in the recess of a window looking out upon the Place Vendome,
+Rollo said to Jane, in an undertone,--
+
+"Jennie, come with me."
+
+He said this in the tone of an invitation, not of command; and Jennie
+understood at once, from her experience on former occasions, that Rollo
+had some plan for her entertainment or gratification. So she got down
+from her chair and went off with him very readily.
+
+They went out at a door which led into their mother's bed room.
+
+"Jennie," said Rollo, as he walked along with her across the room, "I am
+going to get the Bible and sit down here by the window and read in it.
+Would not you like to read with me?"
+
+"Yes," said Jennie, "if you will find a pretty story to read about.
+There are a great many toward the first part of the Bible."
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "I will."
+
+"And let us go into my room to read," said Jennie. "I like my room the
+best."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "I like your room best, too."
+
+So Rollo took the Bible off from the table of his father's room, and
+then he and Jennie went on together into Jennie's room. This room was a
+little boudoir, which opened from Mr. and Mrs. Holiday's room; it was a
+charming little place, and it was no wonder that Jennie liked it. It was
+hung with drapery all around, except where the window was, on one side,
+and a large looking glass and a picture on two other sides. There was
+even a curtain over the door, so that when you were in, and the door was
+shut, and the curtain over it was let down, you seemed to be entirely
+secluded from all the world. This drapery was green, and the room, being
+entirely enclosed in it, might have seemed sombre had it not been for
+the brilliancy and beauty of the furniture, and the variegated colors
+and high polish of the floor. There was an elegant bedstead and bed in
+the back part of the room, with a carved canopy over it. There was a
+bureau also, with drawers, where Jennie kept her clothes; and a little
+fireplace, with a pretty brass fender before it; and a marble mantel
+piece above, with a clock and two vases of flowers upon it. There were a
+great many other curious and beautiful articles of furniture in the
+room, which gave it a very attractive appearance, and made it, in fact,
+as pretty a place of seclusion as a lady could desire to have. Jennie
+enjoyed this room very much indeed; but still, after all,
+notwithstanding the expensiveness and beauty of the decorations which
+adorned it, I do not know that Jennie enjoyed it any more than she did a
+little seat that she had under some lilac bushes, near the brook at the
+bottom of her father's garden, at home.
+
+There was a small couch in the recess of the window in Jennie's boudoir;
+and here she and Rollo established themselves, with the Bible lying open
+before them upon a small table which they had placed before the couch to
+hold it. They raised their own seats by means of large, square cushions
+which were there, so as to bring themselves to the right height for
+reading from the book while it lay upon the table; and they put their
+feet upon a tabouret which belonged to the room. The tabouret was made
+for a seat, but it answered an admirable purpose for a foot-stool. As
+soon as the two children were thus comfortably established, they opened
+the Bible, and Rollo began to turn over the leaves in the books of
+Samuel and of Kings, in order to find something which he thought would
+interest Jennie.
+
+At length he found a chapter which seemed, so far as he could judge by
+running his eye along the verses, to consist principally of narration
+and dialogue; and so he determined to begin the reading at once.
+
+"Now," said he, "Jennie, I will read one verse, and then you shall read
+one, and I will tell you the meaning of all the words that you don't
+know."
+
+Jennie was much pleased with this arrangement, and she read the verses
+which came to her with great propriety. It is true that there were a
+great many words at which she was obliged to hesitate some little time
+before she could pronounce them; and there were others which she could
+not pronounce at all. Rollo had the tact to wait just long enough in
+these cases. By telling children too quick when they are endeavoring to
+spell out a word, we deprive them of the pleasure of surmounting the
+difficulty themselves; and, by waiting too long, we perplex and
+discourage them. There are very few children who, when they are hearing
+their younger brothers and sisters read, have the proper discretion on
+this point. In fact, a great many full-grown teachers fail in this
+respect most seriously, and make the business of reading on the part of
+their pupils a constant source of disappointment and vexation to them,
+when it might have been a pleasure.
+
+Rollo, too, besides the patient and kind encouragement which he afforded
+to Jane in her attempts to read her verses herself, read those which
+fell to his share in a very distinct and deliberate manner, keeping the
+place all the while with his finger, so that Jennie might easily follow
+him. He stopped also from time to time to explain the story to Jennie,
+and to talk about the several incidents that were described in it, in
+order to make it sure that Jennie understood them all. It would have
+been much easier for him to have taken the book himself, and to have
+read the whole chapter off at once, fluently. But this would have
+defeated his whole object; which was, not to do what he could do most
+easily, but to do good and help Jennie. If a boy were going up a high
+hill, with his sister in his company, it would be easier for him to go
+directly on and leave his sister behind. A selfish boy would be likely
+to do this; but a generous-minded boy would prefer to go slowly, and
+help his sister along over the rocks and up the steep places.
+
+Rollo and Jane both became so much interested in their reading that they
+continued it almost an hour. It then began to be dark, and so they put
+the book away. Their mother came in about that time, and was very much
+pleased when she found how Rollo and Jennie had been employed; and Rollo
+and Jennie themselves experienced a substantial and deeply-seated
+feeling of satisfaction and comfort that all the merry-making of the
+Elysian Fields could never give. If any of the readers of this book have
+any doubt of this, let them try the experiment themselves. At some time,
+after they have been spending a portion of the Sabbath in such a way as
+to give them an inward feeling of uneasiness and self-condemnation, let
+them engage for a time in the voluntary performance of some serious
+duty, as Rollo did, and in the spirit and temper which he manifested,
+and see how strongly it will tend to bring back their peace of mind and
+restore them to happiness. To try the experiment more effectually still,
+spend the whole Sabbath in this manner, and then see with what a feeling
+of quiet and peaceful satisfaction you will go to bed at night, and
+with what a joyous and buoyant spirit you will awake on Monday morning.
+
+Before Rollo left Paris, he went, one Tuesday afternoon, with his mother
+and Jennie and his uncle George, to see the performances at the
+Hippodrome, and he enjoyed the spectacle very much indeed. Besides the
+performances which have already been described, there were two others
+which astonished him exceedingly. In one of these a man came into the
+middle of the area, and there the assistants lifted up a large and heavy
+pole, which they poised in the air, and then set the lower end of it in
+a sort of socket which was made in an apron which the man wore, which
+socket was fastened securely to the man's hips and shoulders by strong
+straps, so that he could sustain the weight of the pole by means of
+them. The pole was about thirty feet high, and the top was branched like
+a pitchfork. It was shaped, in fact, exactly like a pitchfork, except
+that there was a bar across from the top of one branch to the top of the
+other, and a rope hanging down from the middle of the bar half way down
+to the place of bifurcation--that is, to the place where the straight
+part of the pole ended and the branches began. Things being thus
+arranged, a boy, who was about twelve years old, apparently, came out,
+and, leaping up upon the man's shoulders, began to climb up the pole.
+When he reached the top of it he took hold of the rope, and by means of
+the rope climbed up to the bar. Here he began to perform a great variety
+of the most astonishing evolutions, the man all the time poising the
+pole in the air. The boy would climb about the bar in every way, drawing
+himself up sometimes backwards and sometimes forward, and swinging to
+and fro, and turning over and over in every conceivable position. He
+would hang to the bar sometimes by his hands and sometimes by his
+legs--sometimes with his head downward, sometimes with his feet
+downward. He would whirl round and round over the bar a great many
+times, till Rollo and Jane were tired of seeing him, and then he would
+rest by hanging to the pole by the back_ of his head_, without touching
+the bar with any other part of his body. All this time the man who held
+the pole kept it carefully poised, moving to and fro about the area
+continually in following the oscillations.
+
+[Illustration: THE HIPPODROME.]
+
+The other performance was in some respects more extraordinary still.
+There was a mast set up in the ground, thirty or forty feet high. At the
+ground, ten feet from the foot of the mast, there commenced an inclined
+plane, formed of a plank about a foot or eighteen inches wide, which
+ascended in a spiral direction round and round the mast till it reached
+the top. A man ascended this plane by means of a large ball, about two
+feet in diameter, which he rolled up standing upon it, and rolling it by
+stepping continually on the ascending side. There was no ledge or guard
+whatever to keep the ball from rolling off the plane--nothing but a
+narrow plank ascending continually, and winding in a spiral manner
+around the mast. This experiment it was quite frightful to see. Several
+of the children who were sitting near Mr. George's party began to cry,
+saying, "O, he will fall--he will fall!" In fact, Jennie could not bear
+to look at him, and so she shut her eyes; and even Mrs. Holiday looked
+another way. But Rollo watched it through, and saw the man go on up to
+the very top of the mast, and stand there on his ball on the top, forty
+feet above the ground, with his hands extended in triumph. After
+remaining there a short time, he came down as he had gone up; and when
+he reached the ground, he rolled his ball along, keeping on it all the
+time, till he came to a chariot which was waiting to receive him. He
+stepped from the ball off to the chariot, and was then driven all around
+the ring, being received every where, as he passed, with the
+acclamations of the spectators.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+CARLOS.
+
+
+One morning, just after breakfast, when Rollo and Jennie were sitting at
+the window of their hotel, looking at a band of about forty drummers
+that were arranging themselves on the Asphaltum, in the Place Vendome,
+in front of the column, preparatory to an exercise of practice on their
+instrument, Mr. George came into the room. Mr. George took up a
+newspaper which was lying upon the table, and, seating himself in a
+large arm chair which was near, he read from it for a few minutes, and
+then, laying down the paper, said,--
+
+"Rollo, how do you pronounce L-o-u-v-o-i-s?"
+
+Mr. George did not speak the word, but spelled it letter by letter.
+
+"I don't know," said Rollo.
+
+"Because," said Mr. George, "that is the name of the hotel where I have
+gone."
+
+"What made you go away from this hotel, uncle George?" asked Jennie.
+"Didn't you like it?"
+
+"Yes," replied Mr. George, "I liked it very much. But I wanted to change
+the scene. I had become very familiar with every thing in this part of
+the city, and with the modes of life in this hotel. So I thought I would
+change, and go to some other quarter of the city, where I could see
+Paris, and Paris life, in new aspects."
+
+"I wish I had gone with you," said Rollo. "I wonder if my father would
+not let me go now. Is there a room for me at your hotel?" he added,
+looking up eagerly.
+
+"I don't know," said Mr. George. "You can ask when you go there. But to
+day I am going to see the Garden of Plants; and you may go with me, if
+you like."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "I should like to go very much."
+
+"And may I go, too?" said Jennie.
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George, "if your mother is willing."
+
+"Well," said Jennie, joyfully, "I'll go and ask her. Only I wish it was
+a garden of flowers instead of a garden of plants."
+
+So Jennie went to ask her mother if she might go with her uncle George.
+She soon returned with her shawl and bonnet on, and then, Mr. George
+leading the way, they all went together down stairs, and got into a
+carriage which was waiting for them at the door. The carriage was an
+open one, with the top turned back, so that they all had a fine
+opportunity to see the streets and the persons passing as they rode
+along.
+
+Mr. George directed the coachman to drive first to his hotel; and the
+carriage, leaving the Place Vendome on the northern side, entered into a
+perfect maze of narrow streets, through which it advanced toward the
+heart of the city.
+
+After a time, they came to a long, straight street, which led across the
+city, through the centre of it, from the river to the Boulevards; and
+when they were about in the middle of this street, the attention of the
+children was attracted by a very long and gloomy-looking building, which
+formed one side of the street for a considerable distance before them.
+It had no windows toward the street, but only a range of square recesses
+in the walls, of the form of windows, but without any glass. Jennie
+asked Mr. George if it was the prison.
+
+"Not exactly," said Mr. George; "and yet there is one room in it where
+there are more than a hundred men, and they are not permitted to speak a
+loud word."
+
+"Let's go and see them," said Rollo.
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George; "we will."
+
+So saying, he called upon the coachman to stop opposite to a great
+archway which opened through the building near the middle of it. Mr.
+George and the children descended from the carriage and went in under
+the archway. Looking through, they saw a large court yard, with grass,
+and trees, and a fountain. They did not, however, go on into this court
+yard, but turned to the right to a very broad flight of steps which
+seemed to lead into the building. There was a man in uniform, with a
+cocked hat upon his head, who stood in the passage way to guard the
+entrance. He made no objection, however, to the party's going in; and so
+they all went on up the stairway.
+
+After passing through a series of magnificent passages and vestibules,
+with very broad staircases, and massive stone balustrades, and other
+marks of a very ancient and venerable style of architecture, Mr. George
+led the way through an open door, where the children saw extended before
+them, as far as the eye could reach, a long range of rooms, opening into
+one another, and all filled with bookshelves and books. The rooms had
+windows only on one side; that is, on the side next the courtyard; and
+the doors which led from one room to the other were all near that side
+of the room. Thus three sides of each room were almost wholly unbroken,
+and they were all filled with bookshelves and books. The doors which led
+from one room to another were all in a range; so that standing at one
+end, opposite to one of these doors, the spectator could look through
+the whole range of rooms to the other end. The distance was, moreover,
+so great, that, though there was a group of several persons standing at
+the farther end of the range of rooms at the time that Rollo entered,
+they looked so small and so indistinct that Rollo could not count them
+to tell how many there were.
+
+"It is a library," said Rollo.
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George, "it is the National Library of Paris, one of the
+largest libraries in the world. The books have been accumulating here
+for ages."
+
+"I don't see what can be the use of such a large library," said Rollo;
+"nobody can possibly read all the books."
+
+"No," said Mr. George, "they cannot read them all; but they may wish to
+consult them. There are often particular reasons for seeing some
+particular book, which was published so long ago that it is not now to
+be found in common bookstores; in such cases, people come here, and they
+are pretty sure to find the book in this collection."
+
+There were several parties of ladies and gentlemen to be seen, at
+different distances, walking along the range of rooms, all of whom
+seemed to be visitors. Mr. George, himself, walked on, and the children
+followed him. They passed from one apartment to another, amazed at the
+number of books. They were all neatly arranged on bookshelves, which
+extended from the floor to the ceiling, and were protected by a wire
+netting in front; so that, although the visitors could see the books,
+they could not take them down.
+
+Mr. George and the children walked on, until, at length, they came to
+the end of the range of rooms, and there they found another range,
+running at right angles to the first, back from the street. They turned
+and walked along through these rooms, too. The floors of all the rooms
+were very smooth and glossy, being formed of narrow boards, of
+dark-colored wood, curiously inlaid, and highly polished. Rollo told
+Jennie that he believed he could slide on such floors as well as he
+could on ice, if he thought they would let him try. He knew very well,
+however, that it would not be proper to try. Besides, he observed that
+there were standing at different distances along the range of rooms
+certain men, in uniform, who seemed to be officers stationed in the
+library to guard against any thing like irregularity or disorder on the
+part of the visitors.
+
+Besides the books, there were a great many other things to interest
+visitors in the rooms of the library, such as models of buildings,
+statues, collections of coins, medals, and precious gems, and other
+similar curiosities. These things were arranged on tables and in cases
+made expressly for them, and placed in the various rooms. The tables and
+cases occupy, generally, the central parts of the rooms that they were
+placed in, so as not to interfere with the use of the sides of the rooms
+for books. In one place was a collection of some of the oldest books
+that ever were printed, showing the style of typography that prevailed
+when the art of printing was first discovered. Mr. George took great
+interest in looking at these. Rollo and Jennie, however, did not think
+much of them; and so, while their uncle was examining these ancient
+specimens, they went to the windows and looked out into the court yard.
+This court formed a green and beautiful garden, shaded with trees and
+adorned with fountains and walks. The visitors could see that the
+buildings of the library extended in long ranges all around it.
+
+At length, at the end of the second range of rooms, the party came to a
+third range, which was parallel to the first, and which extended along
+the back side of the court yard. The children could not go into these
+apartments, for the entrance to them was closed by a glass partition.
+They could, however, look through the partition and see what there was
+within. They beheld a very long hall, which was several hundred feet in
+length, apparently, and quite wide, and it was lined on both sides with
+bookshelves and books. Long tables were extended up and down this hall,
+with a great number of gentlemen sitting at them, all engaged in silent
+study. Some were reading; some were writing; some were looking at books
+of maps or engravings. There were desks at various places up and down
+the room, with officers belonging to the library sitting at them, and
+several messengers, dressed in uniform, going to and fro bringing books.
+Mr. George explained to the children that there was another entrance to
+this room, leading from the court yard by a separate staircase, and that
+any person who wished to read or study might go in there and sit at
+those tables, only he must be still, and not disturb the studies of the
+rest. If he wished for any book, he could not go and get it from the
+shelves, but must write the title of it in full on a slip of paper, and
+carry it to one of the desks. The officer would take the slip and give
+it to one of the messengers, who would then go and get the book.
+
+After looking through the glass partition at this great company of
+readers and students until their curiosity was satisfied, the children
+turned away, and Mr. George conducted them back through the long ranges
+of rooms by the same way that they came. When, at length, they got back
+to the staircase where they had come up, Mr. George, instead of going
+out where he had come in, descended by another way, through new
+corridors and passages, until he came to a room where a considerable
+number of people were sitting at tables, looking at books of engravings.
+The sides of this room, and of several others opening into it, were
+filled with bound volumes of prints and engravings, some plain and some
+colored, but very beautiful. Many of the volumes were very large; but
+however large they might be, it was very easy to turn over the leaves
+and see the pictures, for the tables, or rather, desks, in the middle of
+the room, were so contrived that a book, placed upon them, was held at
+precisely the right slope to be seen to advantage by persons sitting
+before it. Mr. George told the children, in a whisper, that any one
+might ask for any book there was there, and the attendants would place
+it on one of the tables for him, where he might sit and look at the
+prints in it as long as he pleased.
+
+"Some day," continued Mr. George, "we will come here and look over some
+of these books; but to-day we must go to the Garden of Plants."
+
+Mr. George then led the children back to the carriage, and ordered the
+coachman to drive to his hotel.
+
+The hotel was situated on the site of an open square, which, though by
+no means so grand and magnificent as the Place Vendome, was still a very
+pleasant place.
+
+There was a fountain in the centre, with a large basin of water around
+it. Outside of this basin the square was paved with asphaltum, and was
+as hard and smooth as a floor. The pavement was shaded with trees, which
+were planted at equal distances all over it; and under the trees there
+were seats, where various persons were sitting. There were many
+children, too, playing about under the trees, some trundling hoop, some
+jumping rope, and some playing horses.
+
+The carriage stopped at the door of the hotel, and Mr. George took the
+children up to his room. It was a front room, and it looked out upon the
+square. The children went to the window, and, while Mr. George was
+getting ready to go, they amused themselves by looking at the children
+that were playing on the square.
+
+Among the other children, there was a boy, apparently about eight years
+of age, who was sitting apart from the rest of the children, on a bench
+by himself. His complexion was dark, and his hair very black and glossy.
+He was very neatly and prettily dressed, though in a very peculiar
+style, his costume being quite different from any thing that Rollo had
+ever before seen. He had a ball in his hand, which now and then he
+tossed into the air.
+
+"He has not any body to play with," said Rollo to Jennie. "I have a
+great mind to go down and play with him while uncle George is getting
+ready."
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George; "you can go. I shall not be ready for
+nearly half an hour. We do not wish to get to the Garden of Plants
+before twelve o'clock."
+
+Rollo hesitated a little about going down, and while he was hesitating
+the boy rose from his seat and came toward the hotel. He entered under
+the archway, and presently Rollo heard him coming up the staircase. He
+then determined to hesitate no longer; so he went out into the passage
+way to see him.
+
+The boy had reached the top of the staircase when Rollo went out, and
+was just then coming along the hall. He looked at Rollo with a smile as
+he came toward him, and this encouraged Rollo to speak to him.
+
+"Can't you find any one to play with you?" said Rollo.
+
+The boy shook his head, but did not speak.
+
+He meant by this that he did not understand what Rollo said; but Rollo
+thought he meant that he could not find any one to play with him.
+
+"I will play with you," said Rollo; and as he spoke he held out his
+hands, with the wrists together and the palms open between them, in a
+manner customary with boys for catching a ball.
+
+The boy understood the sign, though he did not understand the words. He
+tossed the ball to Rollo, and Rollo caught it. Rollo then tossed it back
+again. Presently Rollo made signs to the boy to sit down upon the floor
+at one end of the hall, while he sat down at the other, explaining his
+wishes also at the same time in words. The boy talked too, in reply to
+Rollo, accompanying what he said with signs and gestures. They got along
+thus together in their play very well, each one imagining that he helped
+to convey his meaning to the other by what he said, while, in fact,
+neither understood a word that was spoken by the other, and so took
+notice of nothing but the signs.
+
+Rollo listened attentively once or twice to short replies that his new
+friend made to him, in order to see if he could not distinguish some
+words in it that he could understand; but he could not; and he finally
+concluded that it must be some other language than French that the boy
+was speaking. He was sorry for this; for he could understand short
+sentences in French pretty well, and could speak short sentences himself
+in reply. When, however, he tried to speak to the boy in French, he
+observed that he did not appear to understand him any better than when
+he spoke in English. This confirmed him in the opinion that the boy must
+belong to some other nation.
+
+After playing together for some time with the ball, the two boys began
+to feel quite acquainted with each other. Rollo wished very much to find
+out his new companion's name; so he asked him, in English,--
+
+"What is your name?"
+
+The boy smiled, and throwing the ball across again to Rollo as he spoke,
+said something in reply; but it was a great deal too much to be his
+name. What he said was, when interpreted into English, "My father
+bought this ball for me, and gave two francs for it."
+
+Then Rollo thought he would try French; so he translated his question,
+and asked it in French.
+
+"And I am going to carry it with me to Switzerland and Italy," said the
+boy, speaking still in the unknown tongue.
+
+"That can't be your name, either," said Rollo, "I am very sure."
+
+Then, after a moment's pause, he added, in an eager voice and manner, as
+if a new idea had suddenly struck him,--
+
+"We are going to the Garden of Plants--uncle George, and Jennie, and I;
+wouldn't you like to go, too?"
+
+The boy smiled, and held out his hands for Rollo to roll the ball to
+him, saying something at the same time which to Rollo seemed totally
+unmeaning.
+
+"He does not understand me, I suppose; but I know how I can explain it
+to him."
+
+So he rose from the floor, and, by means of a great deal of earnest
+gesticulation and beckoning, he induced the boy to get up too, and
+follow him. Rollo led the way into his uncle's chamber. The boy seemed
+pleased, though a little timid, in going in.
+
+"Uncle George," said Rollo, "here is a boy that cannot talk. Are you
+willing that I should invite him to go with us to the Garden of Plants?"
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George; "though I don't see how you are going to do it."
+
+Rollo led the boy to the window, and pointed to the carriage, which
+stood down before the door below. Then he opened a map of Paris which
+lay upon the table, and found the Garden of Plants laid down upon it,
+and showed it to the boy. Then he pointed to his uncle George, to
+Jennie, and to himself, and then to the carriage. Then he made a motion
+with his hand to denote going. By these gesticulations he conveyed the
+idea quite distinctly to his new acquaintance that they were all going
+to the Garden of Plants. He then finally pointed to the boy himself, and
+also to the carriage, and looked at him with an inquiring look, which he
+meant as an invitation to the boy to accompany them. The boy paid close
+attention to all these signs; and when Rollo had finished, instead of
+either nodding or shaking his head, in token of his accepting or
+declining the invitation, as Rollo expected he would have done, he took
+up the map, and, making certain mysterious gestures, which Rollo could
+not comprehend, he walked off rapidly out of the room.
+
+Rollo looked at his uncle George with an expression of great
+astonishment on his countenance.
+
+"What does that mean?" said he.
+
+"Perhaps he has gone to ask his father or his mother," suggested Mr.
+George.
+
+"He has," exclaimed Rollo, "he has; that's it, I'm sure."
+
+So Rollo went out immediately into the hall to wait till the boy came
+back.
+
+In a few minutes a door opened, which led into a suite of apartments in
+the rear of the hotel, and the boy, with the map in his hand, came into
+the hall, nodding his head, and looking very much pleased; talking all
+the time, moreover, in a very voluble but perfectly unintelligible
+manner. A moment after he came the door opened again, and a very
+respectably dressed man, of middle age, came into the hall. The boy
+pointed to Rollo, and said something to this man.
+
+"Are you going to the Garden of Plants?" said the man to Rollo, speaking
+in English, though with a very decidedly foreign accent.
+
+"Yes, sir," said Rollo.
+
+"And did you invite Carlos to go with you?"
+
+"Yes, sir," said Rollo; "only I did not know that his name was Carlos.
+He told me something very different from that. What language is it that
+he talks? Is it French?"
+
+"No," replied the man, "it is Spanish. He is a Spanish boy. He cannot
+understand a word of French or English. But he may go with you to the
+Garden of Plants."
+
+"Are you his father, sir?" asked Rollo.
+
+"No," replied the man, "I am his father's courier."[E]
+
+[E] A courier is a traveling servant. A good courier understands all the
+principal languages of Europe, and is acquainted with all the routes and
+modes of travelling. He takes all the care of the party that employs
+him; makes bargains for them; finds out good hotels for them to go to;
+pays the bills; obtains all necessary information; and does every thing
+for them, in fact, which is required in making the tour of Europe.
+
+So saying, the man passed on, leaving Rollo and Carlos together.
+
+"Come, Carlos," said Rollo, "let us go into uncle George's room, and see
+if he is not ready to go."
+
+Rollo beckoned as he spoke, and Carlos, understanding his action, though
+not his words, immediately followed him. In fact, during all his
+subsequent intercourse with Carlos, Rollo continued to talk to him just
+as if he could understand, and Carlos talked also in reply.
+
+It is true, that, if Rollo had been asked whether he supposed that
+Carlos understood what he said, he would have answered no; and yet he
+continually forgot to act upon this belief, but talked on, under the
+influence of a sort of instinctive feeling that good plain English, such
+as he took care to speak, could not fail to convey ideas to any boy that
+heard it. Under the influence of a similar feeling, Carlos talked
+Spanish to Rollo, each imagining that the other understood him, at least
+in some degree, while, in fact, neither understood any thing but the
+signs and gestures which accompanied the language.
+
+Just as they were about to set out, one of Mr. George's friends called
+to see him; and when he found that the party were going to the Garden of
+Plants, he wished to go too. There was scarcely room for so many in the
+carriage, and so Rollo proposed that he and Carlos should go in an
+omnibus.
+
+"There is an omnibus," said he, "that goes there through the Boulevards,
+close by here; and Carlos and I will go in that, and then we can find
+you in the garden."
+
+"Very well," said Mr. George.
+
+"Come, Carlos, come with me," said Rollo; "we are going to find an
+omnibus."
+
+Carlos perceived that Rollo was proposing that they should go somewhere
+together, but he did not know where, or for what; nor did he care. He
+was ready to assent to any thing. So he and Rollo, leaving the rest of
+the party in the act of getting into the carriage, walked along up the
+street which led to the Boulevards.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+THE GARDEN OF PLANTS.
+
+
+Rollo and Carlos had not gone far before they came to a place where two
+children had set up what they called a _chapel_, under the archway which
+led to the interior of the house where they lived. A real chapel, in
+Catholic countries, is any consecrated place, large or small, containing
+an altar, and a crucifix, and other sacred emblems, where masses are
+said and other religious services are performed. Real chapels are made
+in the alcoves of churches, in monuments over tombs, and in other
+similar places, and children have toy chapels to play with. There are
+little crucifixes, and candlesticks, and communion cups, and other
+similar things for sale at the toy shops. Sometimes the children buy
+these things and arrange them on a small table, in a corner of the room,
+for play, just as in Protestant countries they arrange a pulpit and
+chairs for a congregation, and so make believe have a meeting. Sometimes
+the children bring out their chapel and set it near the sidewalk, by
+the street, and then hold out a little plate to ask the passers by for
+contributions. There are almost always some people more good matured
+than wise, who will give them a sou or two; and thus they often made up
+quite a little purse of money.
+
+In this case, as Rollo and Carlos were passing along, the little girl,
+who was very nicely dressed in holiday costume, held out a small plate,
+saying,--
+
+"One sou, gentlemen, if you please, for the little chapel."
+
+Rollo and Carlos stopped to look at the chapel.
+
+"What pretty little candles!" said Rollo, talking half to himself and
+half to Carlos, "and how tall! I wish I had some of them for Jennie."
+
+"I have got a chapel at home," said Carlos.
+
+"She wants us to give her a sou," continued Rollo. "Would you?"
+
+"And I will show it to you if you ever come to Barcelona," said Carlos.
+
+"I don't know whether to give her a sou or not," said Rollo. "Would you,
+Carlos?"
+
+"My candlesticks are of real silver," said Carlos, "but these are not."
+
+Rollo finally concluded to give the girl a sou, thinking that he was in
+some measure bound to do it, after having stopped so long to look at her
+chapel; and then he and Carlos walked on as before. As they went on they
+continued to talk together, from time to time, Rollo in English and
+Carlos in Spanish, neither of them, however, paying any attention to
+what the other said. This was a very good plan, for there was a sense of
+companionship in this sort of conversation, though it communicated no
+ideas. They took the same kind of pleasure in it, probably, that birds
+do in the singing of their mates. In fact, it often happens, when a
+group of children are talking together in a language which they all
+understand, that each one talks for the pleasure of talking, and none of
+them pay any attention to what the others say.
+
+Presently the two boys reached the Boulevard. It was a very broad and
+magnificent street, and the sidewalks were very wide. The sidewalks,
+wide as they were, were thronged with foot passengers, and the street
+itself was full of carriages. Very soon an omnibus came along; but it
+was full. There are a great many curious contrivances about a French
+omnibus; one of which is, that there is a sign, with the word
+_complete_, in French, painted upon it in large letters. The sign is
+placed directly over the door of the omnibus behind, and is attached to
+the top of the coach by a hinge at the lower edge. When the omnibus is
+full, the conductor who rides on the step behind pulls up this sign, by
+means of a cord attached to it, and then all the people on the sidewalks
+can see that there is no room for them. When any passengers get out so
+as to make room for others, then the conductor lets this sign down, and
+it lies flat upon the top of the coach, out of sight, until the omnibus
+gets full again, when it is drawn up as before.
+
+"Complete," said Rollo, pointing to the sign, which was up and in full
+view. "That omnibus is full."
+
+"Yes," said Carlos, "I see him. His cap is so high that he can't wear it
+in the omnibus, and so he has to take it off."
+
+"But there will be another one pretty soon," said Rollo.
+
+"If I were a soldier," said Carlos, "I would never get into an omnibus
+at all. I would have an elegant black horse with a long tail, and I
+would go galloping through the streets on my horse."
+
+At length an omnibus came along which was not full, and Rollo and Carlos
+got into it. After meeting with various adventures on the way, and
+changing from one omnibus to another, according to the system which
+prevails in Paris, they finally reached the gates of the garden. There
+was a sentry box on each side of the gates, and soldiers, with bayonets
+fixed, guarding the entrance. There were, however, a great many people
+going in. The soldiers did not prevent them. They had orders to allow
+all persons who were quiet and orderly, and had no dogs with them, to
+enter freely. So Rollo and Carlos passed directly in.
+
+Rollo's first feeling was that of astonishment at the extent and variety
+of the scenes and prospects which opened before him. Instead of a small
+garden, laid out in gravel walks, and beds of flowers, as he had
+imagined, he found himself entering a perfect maze of winding walks,
+which were bordered on all sides by an endless variety of enclosures,
+groups of shrubbery, groves, huts, cabins, yards, ponds of water, and
+every other element of rural scenery. The whole, as it first burst upon
+Rollo's eye, formed a most enchanting landscape, and extended farther
+than he could see. The walks meandered about in the most winding and
+devious ways. The spaces between them were enclosed by neat little
+fences of lattice work, and were divided into little parks, or fields,
+in each of which some strange and unknown animals were feeding. There
+were ponds, with a quantity of birds of the gayest plumage sailing upon
+them; and green slopes, with goats, or deer, or sheep, of the most
+extraordinary forms and colors, grazing in them. At one place Rollo
+stopped to look at a small basin of water, with a broad stone margin all
+around it, which was completely covered with turtles and tortoises of
+all colors and sizes. The animals were lying there asleep, basking in
+the sun. A little farther on was a beautiful little yard, almost
+surrounded with trees and shrubbery, where three or four ostriches, with
+long necks, and heads higher than Rollo's, were walking about with a
+very majestic air. And farther still there was a little field, the
+occupants of which excited the astonishment of the boys to a still
+higher degree. They were three giraffes. One of them, with his head
+twenty feet in the air, was cropping the leaves from the top of a tall
+tree. The second was standing still, quietly looking at the groups of
+visitors that were gazing upon him from without the paling; while the
+third was amusing himself by galloping about the yard, with a sort of
+rolling motion that it was most astonishing to see.
+
+Rollo and Carlos advanced among these scenes, drawn from one to the
+other by the new objects which every where presented themselves to
+view, and uttering to each other continual exclamations of astonishment.
+In fact, they talked incessantly to one another as they walked on,
+pointing out, each to the other, whatever attracted their attention, and
+making all sorts of comments upon what they saw.
+
+Presently a low, bellowing sound was heard among the trees at a little
+distance.
+
+"Hark!" said Rollo, in English, putting his hand upon Carlos's shoulder.
+"What's that? I hear a roaring."
+
+"Hark!" said Carlos, in Spanish. "What's that? I hear a roaring."
+
+Neither of the boys understood the words which the other spoke; but they
+knew very well that they were both listening to and talking about the
+roaring.
+
+"Let's go and see what it is," said Rollo.
+
+"We'll go and see," said Carlos.
+
+So off they started together in the direction of the sound. They walked
+along a short distance, passing several beautiful little enclosures,
+where quiet and gentle-looking animals, of various forms, were grazing
+in their mimic pastures, or lying at rest before the doors of the
+thatched-roofed cabins that had been built for them instead of barns,
+until at length they came to a place where a long range of buildings
+opened to view before them, the fronts of which, instead of showing
+doors and windows, were formed of gratings of iron. The interior of this
+range was divided into compartments, each one of which formed an immense
+cage. These cages were all filled with lions, tigers, panthers,
+leopards, hyenas, and other ferocious beasts of prey. Some were walking
+to and fro restlessly in their narrow prisons; others were lying down;
+and others still were crouched in a corner of their cage, where they
+remained motionless, gazing with a sullen air upon the visitors who
+stood looking at them from without the grating.
+
+Rollo and Carlos walked back and forth in front of these cages several
+times, looking at the animals. They admired the beauty and grace of the
+tigers and leopards, and the majestic dignity of the lions. There were a
+lion and a lioness together in one cage. The lioness was walking
+restlessly to and fro; while the lion sat crouched in the back part of
+the cage, with an expression upon his countenance in which the lofty
+pride and majesty of his character, and the patience and submissiveness
+which pertained to his situation, were combined.
+
+"Poor fellow!" said Rollo; "if I had you and your cage in Africa, where
+you belong, I would open the door and let you go."
+
+Just at this moment the attention of both Rollo and Carlos was suddenly
+arrested by a most unearthly sound at a little distance from them, which
+seemed to be intermediate between a scream and a roar. It was so loud,
+too, as to be truly terrific.
+
+"What's that?" said Rollo, suddenly, in English.
+
+"Ah, what a dreadful bray that is!" said Carlos, in Spanish.
+
+"Would you go out there and see what it is?" said Rollo.
+
+"Hark! Let's go there and see what it is," said Carlos.
+
+So the boys started together to go in the direction of the sound.
+
+It is impossible, however, for a stranger in the Garden of Plants to be
+sure of going any considerable distance in any one direction, for the
+walks are meandering and circuitous beyond description. They wind about
+perpetually in endless mazes; and the little fields, and parks, and
+gardens that are enclosed between them are so enveloped in shrubbery,
+and the view, moreover, is so intercepted with the huts and cabins
+built for the animals, and with the palings and networks made to confine
+them, that it is impossible to see far in any direction. Besides, there
+is so much to attract the attention, and to excite curiosity and wonder,
+at every step, that one is continually drawn away from one alley to
+another, till he gets hopelessly bewildered.
+
+The huts and cabins which were made for the animals were very curious,
+and many of them were so pretty, with their rustic walls and thatched
+roof, that Rollo was extremely pleased with them. He stopped before one
+of them, which was the residence of a pair of beautiful lamas, and told
+Carlos that he meant to ask his uncle George to take particular notice
+how it was made, and so make one for him for a play-house when he got
+home.
+
+"And I wonder," said he, "where my uncle George and Jennie are. I don't
+see how we are ever to find them. I did not know that this garden was so
+large and so full of trees and bushes."
+
+"Look there!" said Carlos, pointing through an opening in the shrubbery
+along the winding walk. "What are they doing there?"
+
+Rollo, understanding the gesture, though not the words, turned in the
+direction that Carlos indicated, and saw that there was quite a crowd
+of men, women, and children at the place, all engaged, evidently, in
+looking at something or other very intently.
+
+"Let's go and see," said Rollo.
+
+So the boys went along that way together. They soon came in view of a
+very high and strong palisade, which, though it was half concealed by
+trees and shrubbery, evidently enclosed quite a considerable area, in
+the centre of which was a large stone building, like a castle, with
+projecting wings and towers, and immense gateways opening into it on
+various sides. This building was the residence of all the
+_monsters_--the elephants, the giraffes, the rhinoceros, and the
+hippopotamus. Each of these species had its own separate apartment in
+the castle; and the ground surrounding it, within the great palisade,
+was divided into as many yards as there were doors; so that each kind of
+animal had its own proper enclosure. In one of these enclosures the
+rhinoceros was walking about, clothed in his plated and invulnerable
+hide; and in the next there were two elephants. The crowd of people were
+chiefly occupied in looking at the elephants. The palisade was very
+heavy and strong, being formed of timbers pointed at the top, and nearly
+as high as the elephants could reach. These palisades were, however,
+not close together. They were far enough apart to allow of the elephants
+putting their trunks through to the people outside, and also to give the
+people a good opportunity to look. Though these timbers were thus set at
+some distance apart from each other, they wore still connected together,
+and all held firmly in their places, by two iron rails which passed
+through them all, one near the top, and the other near the bottom, of
+the palisade, all along the range. They thus formed a fencing so heavy
+and strong that even the elephants could not break it down.
+
+The visitors could not come quite up to the elephants; for outside of
+this great palisade, at a distance of about three feet from it, there
+was a high paling, made expressly to keep the spectators back. At the
+time when Rollo and Carlos came to the place the elephants were putting
+their trunks through to the people, in order to be fed with nuts, cake,
+gingerbread, and other such things which the people had ready to give
+them. Sometimes they would order the elephants to hold up their trunks
+and open their mouths, and then the men would try to toss pieces of
+gingerbread in. The elephants were always ready to do this when ordered,
+though their mouths, when they opened them, were so small that the
+people very seldom succeeded in aiming the missile so that it would go
+in.
+
+Rollo and Carlos looked about among the crowd that were assembled at
+this place to see if Mr. George was among them; but he was not; and so,
+after amusing themselves for some time with the elephants, they walked
+along to see what else there was in the garden.
+
+There were a great many people in the garden besides those who seemed to
+have come to see the animals. There were groups of children, that seemed
+to belong in the vicinity, playing in the _walks, some jumping ropes,
+and others_ building little houses of gravel stones. There were women
+seated on benches in various little shady nooks and corners, some
+sewing, others taking care of babies; while others, at little stands and
+stalls, sold gingerbread and cakes. At one place Rollo stopped to look
+at two little children that were playing in the gravel and throwing the
+little pebble stones about. Their grandmother, who was sitting near,
+said something to them in French.
+
+"What does she say?" asked Carlos.
+
+"She says," replied Rollo, "you must not throw gravel in your little
+sister's face."
+
+The question in this case and the answer fitted each other very well;
+but it was a mere matter of accident, for neither of the boys
+understood what the other had said.
+
+Pretty soon the boys came to a place where a great number of people were
+standing on a sort of parapet, and leaning upon an iron railing, where
+they seemed to be looking down into some cavity. They hurried to the
+place, and, stepping up upon the parapet, they looked down too, and
+found there a range of dens below the surface of the ground, all full of
+bears. These dens were sunken yards, six or eight feet deep, and
+enclosed with perpendicular walls all around, so that the bears could
+not possibly get out. There were iron railings around the top, and a
+great many people were standing there looking down to the bears. There
+were four or five of these yards, all in a row; and as there were many
+great trees overshadowing them, the place was cool and pleasant. Some of
+the bears were walking about on the stone pavement which formed the
+bottom of the dens; others were sitting on their hind legs, and holding
+up their fore paws to catch the pieces of gingerbread which were thrown
+down to them by the people above. There were a number of little birds
+hopping about there, picking up the crums that were left, though they
+took care to keep out of the way of the bears. Rollo and Carlos bought
+some cakes of gingerbread of a woman who kept a stall near by, and,
+breaking them into pieces, they threw them down to the bears. They threw
+the most to a great white bear that was in one of the dens, and who
+particularly attracted their attention. Rollo told Carlos that he
+supposed this bear must have come from the north pole. The boys were
+both by this time rather hungry; but they were so much interested in
+seeing the bears try to catch the pieces of gingerbread that they did
+not think to eat any of it themselves, but threw it all down to them,
+all except one piece which Rollo gave to a little girl who stood beside
+him, to let her throw it, because she had none of her own. For this
+kindness the girl thanked Rollo, in French, in a very polite and proper
+manner.
+
+After being satisfied with seeing the bears, the boys wandered on
+wherever they saw the most to attract them, until at length they came to
+what is called the palace of the monkeys, which pleased them more than
+any thing they had seen. This palace is an enormous round cage, as high
+as a house, and nearly a hundred feet in diameter, with a range of stone
+buildings all around it on the back side. These buildings have little
+rooms in them, where the monkeys live in the winter, and where they
+always sleep at night. They go out into the cage to play. The cage is
+formed of slender iron posts and railing, so that the people standing
+outside can see the monkeys at their sports and gambols. They play with
+each other in every possible way, and frolic just as if they were in
+their native woods. They climb up the smooth iron posts, pursuing one
+another; and then, leaping across through the air, they catch upon a
+rope, from which they swing themselves across to the branch of a tree.
+Some of these branches have bells attached to them; and the monkey, when
+he gets upon such a one, will spring it up and down till he sets the
+bell to ringing, and then, assisted by the return of the branch, he
+bounds away through the air to some rope, or pole, or railing that he
+sees within his reach. The agility which these animals display in these
+feats is truly astonishing.
+
+Rollo and Carlos watched their evolutions with great interest. There was
+an excellent place to see, for the land opposite the cage ascended in
+such a manner that those more remote could look over the heads of those
+that were nearer. Besides this, there were quite a number of chairs
+under the trees, at the upper part of this ascent; and Rollo, perceiving
+that several of them were vacant, sat down in one, and made a sign to
+Carlos to sit down in another. They could now look at the monkeys, and
+rest at the same time. Presently a woman came along and said to Rollo,
+in French,--
+
+"Please pay the chairs, sir."
+
+Rollo recollected immediately that at all such places in Paris chairs
+were kept to be let, those who used them paying two sous apiece for the
+privilege. So he took out four sous and gave the woman.
+
+"I did not think of there being any thing to pay for these chairs," said
+he to Carlos. "But then, I don't care. It is worth four sous to get a
+good rest, as tired as I am. I'm pretty hungry, too. I wish I had not
+given all my gingerbread to the bears."
+
+Carlos made no reply to this suggestion; though there is no doubt that
+he would have readily assented to what Rollo said, if he had understood
+it. The boys remained some time looking at the monkeys, and then
+strolled away into other parts of the garden. Very soon they came to a
+place where Rollo spied at some distance before him, under some immense
+old trees in a sort of a valley, what he thought was a restaurant.
+
+"See these monstrous big trees!" said Carlos; "and there are tables
+under them."
+
+The boys made all haste to the spot, and found to their great joy that
+it was a restaurant. There was a plain but very picturesque-looking
+house, antique and venerable; and before it, on a green, under the
+spreading branches of some enormous old trees, a number of small tables,
+with seats around them.
+
+"Now, Carlos," said Rollo, "we will have some bread and butter and a
+good cup of coffee."
+
+[Illustration: THE RESTAURANT.]
+
+So they sat down at one of the pleasantest tables, and very soon a
+waiter came to see what they would have. Rollo called for coffee and
+bread and butter for two. In a short time the waiter came, bringing two
+great cups, which he filled half with coffee and half with boiled milk.
+He brought also a supply of very nice butter, and a loaf of bread shaped
+like a stick of wood. It was about as large round as Rollo's arm, and
+twice as long. The waiter laid this bread across the table for Rollo and
+Carlos to cut off as much from it as they might want. This is what they
+call having "bread at discretion."
+
+The boys enjoyed this banquet very much indeed. Besides the coffee, they
+had water, which they sweetened in the tumblers with large lumps of
+white sugar. They talked all the time while they were eating, each in
+his own language, and laughed very merrily. "After all," said Rollo,
+"this is the very best place in the whole garden. Feeding the bears is
+very good fun; but this is infinitely better."
+
+After remaining for half an hour at the table, and eating till their
+appetites were completely satisfied, they concluded to go back and see
+the monkeys again.
+
+In the mean time, Mr. George and his friend, with Jennie, had been
+engaged in an entirely different part of the garden; for the whole
+enclosure is so large that it takes many days to see the whole. On one
+side, bordering on a street, there is a long row of houses and gardens,
+occupied by professors, who give courses of lectures on the plants and
+animals which the garden contains. On another is a magnificent range of
+buildings, occupied as a museum, containing endless collections of dried
+plants, of minerals and shells, of skeletons, and the stuffed skins of
+birds and beasts. Then there is a very large tract of level land,
+between two splendid avenues, all laid out in beds of plants and
+flowers, forming a series of parterres, extending as far as the eye can
+reach, and presenting the gayest and most beautiful combination of
+colors that can be conceived. Jennie was very much delighted with all
+these things, as she walked about in these parts of the garden with her
+uncle, though she was somewhat uneasy all the time because she could not
+see any thing of Rollo.
+
+"I don't believe," said she at last to her uncle, as they were standing
+on the margin of a beautiful little artificial pond, full of lilies and
+other aquatic plants, "I don't believe that we can find him at all in
+such a large garden."
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George; "there'll be no difficulty. There is one
+universal rule for finding boys in the Garden of Plants."
+
+"What is that?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Go to the places where they keep the monkeys and the elephants," said
+Mr. George; "and if you don't find them there at once, wait a few
+minutes, and they'll be pretty sure to come."
+
+It was as Mr. George had predicted; for, on going to the palace of the
+monkeys, there they found Rollo and Carlos laughing very heartily to see
+a big monkey holding a little one in its arms as a human mother would a
+baby.
+
+The party, when thus united, went together once more over the principal
+places where the two divisions of it had gone separately before, so that
+all might have a general idea of the whole domain; and then, going out
+at a different gate from the one by which they had entered, they went
+home, all resolving to come again, if possible, at some future day.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+AN EXCURSION.
+
+
+ONE day, about one o'clock, after Rollo had been in Paris about a
+fortnight, he came into the hotel from a walk which he had been taking,
+and there found his mother and Jennie putting on their bonnets. He asked
+them where they were going. They said they were going to take a ride
+with Mr. George.
+
+"May I go, too?" asked Rollo.
+
+"Why--yes," said his mother, hesitatingly. "I suppose there will be
+room. Or you may stay at home here with your father. He is asleep in his
+room."
+
+It is generally the case with children, both boys and girls, when they
+are young, that if they can get any sort of consent, however reluctant,
+from their parents, to any of their requests, they are satisfied, and
+take the boon thus hesitatingly accorded to them as readily as if it had
+been granted to them in the freest and most cordial manner. With
+gentlemen and ladies, however, it is different. They generally have
+more delicacy, and are seldom willing to accept of any favor unless
+circumstances are such that it can be granted in a very free and cordial
+manner. They will scarcely ever, in any case, ask to be permitted to
+join any party that others have formed; and when they do ask, if they
+perceive the slightest doubt or hesitation on the part of their friends
+in acceding to their proposal, they infer that it would be, for some
+reason or other, inconvenient for them to go; and they accordingly, at
+once, give up all intention of going.
+
+Rollo, though still a boy, was beginning to have some of the honorable
+sentiments and feelings of a man; and when he perceived that his mother
+hesitated a little about granting his request, he decided immediately
+not to go and ride. Besides, he liked the idea of staying with his
+father.
+
+"Well," said he, "I will stay here. My father may wish for something
+when he wakes up."
+
+"I don't suppose, however, after all," added his mother, "that it is
+really necessary for you to stay on his account. His bell is within
+reach; and Alfred will come immediately when he rings."
+
+"But I should _like_ to stay," said Rollo; "and besides, I can get ahead
+one more day in my French."
+
+Rollo was writing a course of French exercises, and his task was one
+lesson for every day. The rule was, that he was to write this exercise
+immediately after breakfast, unless he had written it before; that is,
+either on the same day before breakfast, or on a previous day. Now,
+Rollo desired to be free after breakfast, for that was a very pleasant
+time to go out. Besides, there were often plans and excursions formed
+for that time, which he was invited to join; and he could not join them
+unless his lesson for the day had been written. So he took pains to
+write his exercises, as much as possible, in advance. Whenever there
+came a rainy day he would write two or three lessons, and sometimes he
+would write early in the morning. He was now nearly a week in advance.
+Instead of being satisfied with this, however, he began to be quite
+interested in seeing how far ahead he could get. This feeling was what
+led him to think that he would take this opportunity to write a French
+lesson.
+
+Accordingly, when his mother and Jennie had gone, he seated himself at
+his table and began his work. The writing of the exercise took about an
+hour. When the work was finished, and while Rollo was preparing to put
+his books away, he heard a movement in his father's room. He got up
+from his seat and opened the door, gently, saying,--
+
+"Father, are you awake?"
+
+"Yes," said his father. "Are you there, Rollo?"
+
+Rollo found his father sitting up in a great arm chair, by the side of
+his bed. He had a dressing gown on.
+
+"How do you feel, father?" said Rollo.
+
+"I think I feel better," said Mr. Holiday. As he said this he put on his
+slippers, and then stood up upon the rug that lay in front of his bed.
+
+"Yes," said he, "I certainly feel better--a great deal better."
+
+"I am very glad," said Rollo.
+
+"Where is your mother?" asked Mr. Holiday, as he walked across the room
+to the glass.
+
+"She has gone out to take a ride," said Rollo, "with uncle George and
+Jennie."
+
+"That's right," said Mr. Holiday. "I am very glad that she has gone. And
+have you been staying here to take care of me?" he asked.
+
+"Yes, sir," said Rollo. "I have been writing another French lesson. I
+have got them all written now to next Friday."
+
+"Ah," said Mr. Holiday, "that's excellent. That's what the farmers call
+being forehanded."
+
+"Now, Rollo," said Mr. Holiday, after a little pause, "I feel so much
+better that I should like to go somewhere and take a ride myself. I
+don't care much where. If there is any where that you wish to go, I will
+go with you. Come, I will put myself entirely at your disposal. Let us
+see what you can do to give me a ride and entertain me."
+
+Rollo was very much pleased indeed with this proposal. He decided
+instantly what he would do. He had seen that morning an _affix_, as the
+French call it, that is, a placard posted on a wall among a hundred
+others, setting forth that there was to be a balloon ascension that
+afternoon at the Hippodrome, at three o'clock, to be followed by various
+equestrian performances. Rollo immediately mentioned this to his father,
+and asked him if he should be willing to go there. His father said that
+he should; adding, that he would like to see the balloon go up very
+much.
+
+"Then when we come home," said Rollo, "you must ride slowly along
+through the Elysian Fields, and let me see the booths, and the games
+that they are playing there."
+
+"Very well," said his father; "I will take some newspapers with me, and
+I will sit still in the carriage while you go and see the booths and the
+games."
+
+This plan being thus resolved upon, and all arranged, Alfred was
+summoned and ordered to get the carriage ready, and to put the top down.
+When Alfred reported that the carriage was at the door, Mr. Holiday and
+Rollo went down and got in, and were soon in the midst of the stream of
+equipages that were going up the grand avenue of the Elysian Fields.
+They arrived at the Hippodrome in time to get an excellent seat, and
+they remained there two hours. They saw the balloon, with a man and
+young girl in the car below it, rise majestically into the air, and soar
+away until it was out of sight. The fearless aeronauts seemed entirely
+at their ease while they were ascending to the dizzy height. They sat in
+the car waving banners and throwing down bouquets of flowers as long as
+they could be seen.
+
+After this there was a series of performances with horses, which
+delighted Rollo very much. Troops of men came out upon the arena,
+mounted on beautiful chargers, and armed with lances and coats of mail,
+as in ancient times. After riding their elegantly caparisoned horses
+round and round the ring several times, they formed into squadrons and
+attacked each other with their lances in sham battles. After this,
+fences of hurdles were put up across the course, in various places, and
+girls, mounted on beautiful white horses and elegantly dressed, rode
+around, leaping over the fences in a surprising manner. These and
+similar performances continued until near five o'clock, and then the
+immense assembly broke up, and the people, some in carriages and some on
+foot, moved away over the various roads and avenues which diverge from
+the Star.
+
+Rollo and his father got into their carriage, which had been waiting for
+them all this time, and passing the Triumphal Arch, they entered the
+Grand Avenue of the Elysian Fields, on their return to the city.
+
+They descended the slope which led down to the Round Point at a rapid
+rate. Here, after passing the Round Point, the road became level, and
+the region of groves and booths, and of games and frolicking, began.
+
+"Now," said Rollo, "I should like to drive slowly, so that, if I come to
+any thing that I wish to get out and see, I can see it."
+
+"Very well," said his father; "give Alfred your orders."
+
+"Alfred," said Rollo, "draw up as near as you can to the sidewalk on the
+right hand, and walk the horses, so that I can see what there is."
+
+"And in the mean time," said Mr. Holiday, "I will read my papers."
+
+So Mr. Holiday took his newspapers out of his pocket and began to read
+them, while Rollo, standing up in the carriage, began to survey the
+crowd that filled the walks and groves that bordered the avenue, in
+order to select some object of attraction to be examined more closely.
+
+"Only I wish, father," said Rollo, "that I had somebody here with me to
+go and see the things--Jennie or Carlos. I wish Carlos was here."
+
+"It is very easy to go and get him," said his father, with his eyes
+still on his newspaper.
+
+"May I?" said Rollo.
+
+"Any thing you please," said Mr. Holiday. "You are in command this
+afternoon. You may give Alfred any orders you please."
+
+"Then, Alfred," said Rollo, "drive to the Hotel Louvois as fast as you
+can."
+
+As he said this, Mr. Holiday folded up his paper and Rollo took his
+seat, while Alfred, turning the horses away from the sidewalk, set them
+to trotting briskly along the avenue.
+
+"Only, father," said Rollo, "I shall prevent your reading your papers."
+
+"No matter for that," said Mr. Holiday. "I shall like a good brisk ride
+along the Boulevards quite as well."
+
+The horses, kept always by Alfred in the very best condition, trotted
+forward at a rapid rate, leaving scores of omnibuses, cabs, and
+citadines behind, and keeping pace with the splendid chariots of the
+French and English aristocracy that thronged the avenue. Presently Rollo
+observed a peculiar movement among the carriages before them, as if they
+were making way for something that was coming; and at the same time he
+saw hundreds of people running forward from the groves and booths,
+across the side avenues, to the margin of the carriage way.
+
+"The emperor!" said Alfred, drawing in his horses at the same time.
+
+An instant afterward, Rollo, who, on hearing Alfred's words, started
+from his seat and stood up in the carriage to look, saw two elegantly
+dressed officers, in splendid uniforms, galloping along toward them in
+the middle of the avenue. They were followed at a little distance by two
+others; and then came a very beautiful barouche, drawn by four glossy
+black horses, magnificently caparisoned. Two gentlemen were seated in
+this carriage, one of whom bowed repeatedly to the crowd that were
+gazing at the spectacle from the sides of the avenue as he rode rapidly
+along. Behind this carriage came another, with a gentleman and a lady in
+it, and afterward two more troopers. The whole cavalcade moved on so
+rapidly, that, before Rollo had had scarcely time to look at it, it had
+passed entirely by.
+
+"The emperor!" said Alfred to Rollo. "He is going out to take a ride."
+
+"Is that the emperor?" exclaimed Rollo. "He looks like any common man.
+But if I had four such beautiful black horses as he has got, I should be
+glad. I would drive them myself, instead of having a coachman."
+
+The movement and the sensation produced by the passing of the emperor
+and his train along the avenue immediately subsided, and the other
+carriages resumed their ordinary course. Alfred's horses trotted on
+faster than ever. A thousand picturesque and striking objects glided
+rapidly by--the trees and the booths of the Elysian Fields; the tall,
+gilded lampposts, and the spouting fountains of the Place de la
+Concorde; omnibuses, cabs, wagons, chariots, and foot passengers without
+number; and, finally, the tall column of the Place Vendome. Winding
+round in a graceful curve through this magnificent square, the carriage
+rolled on in the direction of the Boulevards, and, after going rapidly
+on for nearly half a mile in that spacious avenue, it turned into the
+street which led to the hotel. It stopped, at length, before the door,
+and Rollo got out, while Mr. Holiday remained in the carriage. Rollo
+went up stairs, and after about five minutes he came down again,
+bringing not only Carlos with him, but also his uncle George. Mr.
+Holiday invited Mr. George to go with them for the remainder of the
+ride. This invitation Mr. George accepted; and so the two gentlemen
+taking the back seat, and Rollo and Carlos the front, Alfred took them
+all back to the Elysian Fields together.
+
+They remained nearly an hour in the Elysian Fields. During this time
+Rollo's father and his uncle George staid in the carriage by the
+roadside, talking together, while Rollo and Carlos went in among the
+walks and groves to see the various spectacles which were exhibited
+there. They would come back from time to time to the carriage, in order
+that Rollo might describe to his father what they found, or ask
+permission to take part in some amusement. For instance, at one time he
+came and said, very eagerly,--
+
+"Father, here is a great whirling machine, with ships and horses going
+round and round. Carlos and I want to ride on it. The horses are in
+pairs, two together. Carlos can get on one of them, in one of the pairs,
+and I on the other. We can go round twenty times for two sous."
+
+"Very well," said his father.
+
+So Rollo and Carlos went back to the whirling machine. It was very
+large, and was very gayly painted, and ornamented with flags and
+banners. The vessels and the horses were attached to the ends of long
+arms, which were supported by iron rods that came down from the top of
+the central post, so that they were very strong. The horses were as
+large as small ponies, and the vessels were as big as little boats--each
+one having seats for four children. When Rollo and Carlos went back, the
+machine had just taken up its complement of passengers for one turn, and
+was then commencing its rotation. There were a great many persons
+standing by it, pleased to see how happy the children were in going
+round so merrily. There was an iron paling all around the machine, to
+keep the spectators at a safe distance, otherwise they might come too
+near, and so be struck, and perhaps seriously hurt, by the horses or the
+boats, when they were put in motion.
+
+As soon as the twenty turns had been taken the machine stopped, and the
+children who had had their ride were taken off the horses and out of the
+boats, all except a few who were going to pay again and have a second
+ride. Rollo and Carlos then went inside the enclosure, and, going up
+some steps placed there for the purpose, they mounted their horses.
+Very soon the machine began to revolve, and they were whirled round and
+round twenty times with the greatest rapidity. The arms of the machine,
+too, were long, so that the circle which the horses and the vessels
+described was quite large, and the whole twenty revolutions made quite a
+considerable ride.
+
+After finishing their circuit and dismounting from their horses, the
+boys next came to a whirling machine, which revolved vertically instead
+of horizontally; that is, instead of whirling the rider round and round
+near the level of the ground, it carried them up, over, and down. There
+was a great wheel, which revolved on an axis, like a vertical mill
+wheel. This wheel was double, and between the two circumferences the
+seats of the passengers were hung in such a manner that in revolving
+they swung freely, so as to keep the heads of the people always
+uppermost. These seats had high backs and sides, and a sort of bar in
+front for the people to take hold of, otherwise there would have been
+great danger of their falling out. As it was, they were carried so
+swiftly, and so high, and the seats swung to and fro so violently when
+the machine was in rapid motion, that the men and girls who were in the
+seats filled the ear with their screams and shouts of laughter.
+
+Rollo and Carlos, after seeing this machine revolve, went to the
+carriage to ask if they might go in it the next time.
+
+"No," said Mr. Holiday. "I am not sure that it is safe."
+
+So the boys went away from the carriage back under the trees again, and
+walked along to see what the next exhibition might be. The carriage
+moved on in the avenue a little way to keep up with them.
+
+The boys strolled along through the crowd a little while longer, looking
+for a moment, as they passed, now at the stalls for selling gingerbread
+and cakes, now at a display of pictures on a long line,--the sheets
+being fastened to the line by pins, like clothes upon a clothes
+line,--now at a company of singers, singing upon a stage under a canopy,
+and now again at a little boy, about seven or eight years old, who was
+tumbling head over heels on a little carpet which he had spread on the
+ground, and then carrying round his cap to the bystanders, in hopes that
+some of them would give him a sou. At length their attention was
+attracted by some large boys, who were engaged at a stand at a little
+distance in shooting at a mark with what seemed to be small guns. These
+guns, however, discharged themselves by means of a spring coiled up
+within the barrel, instead of gunpowder; and the bullets which they
+shot were peas. Rollo had seen these shooting-places before, when he
+went through the Fields on the first Sunday after he came; so he did not
+stop long here, but called Carlos's attention to something that he had
+never seen before, which was going on at a place a little under a tree,
+a little farther along. A large boy seemed to be pitching quoits. There
+were a number of persons around him looking on. There was a sort of box
+placed near the tree, the bottom of which was about two feet square. It
+had a back next the tree, and two sides, but it had no front or top. In
+fact, it was almost precisely like a wheelbarrow without any wheel,
+legs, or handles.
+
+[Illustration: SINGING IN THE OPEN AIR.]
+
+The bottom or floor of this box had a great many round and flat plates
+of brass upon it, about four inches in diameter, and about four inches
+apart from each other. The player had ten other plates in his hand, of
+the same size with those which were upon the bottom of the plate. He
+took these, one by one, and standing back at a certain distance, perhaps
+about as far as one good long pace, pitched them, as boys do quoits, in
+upon the floor of the box. What he tried to do was, to cover up one of
+the disks in the box so that no part of it could be seen. If he did so
+he was to have a prize; and he paid two sous for the privilege of
+playing. The prizes consisted of little articles of porcelain, bronzes,
+cheap jewelry, images, and other similar things, which were all placed
+conspicuously on shelves against the tree, above the box, in view of the
+player.
+
+It seemed to the bystanders as if it would be not at all difficult to
+toss the disks so as with ten to cover one; but those who tried seemed
+to find it very difficult to accomplish the object. Even if the disks
+which they tossed fell in the right place, they would rebound or slide
+away, and sometimes knock away those which were already well placed.
+Still, after trying once, the players wore usually unwilling to give up
+without trying a second, and even a third and fourth time, so that they
+generally lost six or eight sous before they were willing to stop;
+especially as the man himself would now and then play the disks, and he,
+having made himself skilful by great practice, found no difficulty in
+piling up his ten disks wherever he wished them to go.
+
+"I could do it, I verily believe," said Rollo. "I should like to try. I
+mean to go and ask my father if I may."
+
+So Rollo went to the carriage to state the case to his father, and ask
+his permission to see if he could not pitch the disks so as to cover one
+of the plates on the board. His father hesitated.
+
+"So far as trying the experiment is concerned," said Mr. Holiday, "as a
+matter of dexterity and skill, there is no harm; but so far as the hope
+of getting a prize by it is concerned, it is of the nature of gaming."
+
+"I should think it was more of the nature of a reward for merit and
+excellence," said Mr. George.
+
+"No," said Mr. Holiday; "for in one or two trials made by chance
+passengers coming along to such a place, the result must depend much
+more on chance than on adroitness or skill.
+
+"I will tell you what you may do, Rollo," continued Mr. Holiday. "You
+may pay the man the two sous and try the experiment, provided you
+determine beforehand not to take any prize if you succeed. Then you will
+pay your money simply for the use of his apparatus, to amuse yourself
+with a gymnastic performance, and not stake it in hope of a prize."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "that is all I want." And off he ran.
+
+"It seems to me that that is a very nice distinction that you made,"
+said Mr. George, as soon as Rollo had gone, "and that those two things
+are very near the line."
+
+"Yes," replied Mr. Holiday, "it is a nice distinction, but it is a very
+true one. The two things are very near the line; but then, one of them
+is clearly on one side, and the other on the other. For a boy to pay for
+the use of such an apparatus for the purpose of trying his eye and his
+hand is clearly right; but to stake his money in hopes of winning a
+prize is wrong, for it is gaming. It is gaming, it is true, in this
+case, on an exceedingly small scale. Still it is gaming, and so is the
+beginning of a road which has a very dreadful end. Is not it so?"
+
+"Yes," said Mr. George, "I think it is."
+
+As might have been expected, Rollo did not succeed in covering one of
+the disks. The disks that he threw spread all over the board. The money
+that he paid was, however, well spent, for he had much more than two
+sous' worth of satisfaction in making the experiment.
+
+Rollo found a great many other things to interest him in the various
+stalls and stands that he visited; but at length he got tired of them
+all, and, coming back to the carriage, told his father that he was ready
+to go home.
+
+"Very well," said his father. "I don't know but that your uncle George
+and I are ready, too, though we have not quite got through with our
+papers. But we can finish them at home."
+
+So Rollo and Carlos got into the carriage, and all the party went home
+to dinner.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+ROLLO'S NARRATIVE.
+
+
+One evening, when Rollo had been making a long excursion during the day
+with his uncle George, and had dined with him, at the close of it, at a
+restaurant's in the Boulevards, he went home about eight o'clock to the
+hotel to see his father and mother and Jennie, and tell them where he
+had been. He found his mother in her room putting on her bonnet. She
+said she was going to take a ride along the Boulevards with a gentleman
+and lady who were going to call for her.
+
+"And where is father?" said Rollo.
+
+"He has gone to bed, and is asleep by this time. You must be careful not
+to disturb him."
+
+"And Jennie?" asked Rollo.
+
+"She has gone to bed, too," said his mother; "but she is not asleep, and
+I presume she will be very glad to see you. You can go in her room."
+
+"Well, I will," said Rollo. "But, mother, I should like to go and ride
+with you. Will there be room for me?"
+
+"Yes," said his mother. "There will be room, I suppose, in the carriage;
+but it would not be proper for me to take you, for I am going on an
+invitation from others. The invitation was to me alone, and I have no
+right to extend it to any body else.
+
+"But this you can do, if you please," continued his mother. "You can
+take our carriage, and let Alfred drive you, and so follow along after
+our party. Only in that case you would not have any company. You would
+be in a carriage alone."
+
+"Never mind that," said Rollo. "I should like that. I would put the top
+back, and then I could see all around. I should have a grand ride. I'll
+go. I wish Jennie had not gone to bed; she could have gone with me."
+
+"No," replied his mother; "Jennie is not well to-night. She has got
+cold, and she went to bed early on that account. But she will be very
+glad to have you go and see her."
+
+So Rollo went into Jennie's room. As soon as he opened the door, Jennie
+pushed aside the curtains, and said,--
+
+"Ah, Rollo, is that you? I am very glad that you have come."
+
+"I can't stay but a little while," said Rollo. "I am going to take a
+ride with mother."
+
+"Are you going with mother?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Not in the carriage with her," replied Rollo; "but I am going in the
+same party. I am going to have a carriage all to myself."
+
+"O, no, Rollo," said Jennie, in a beseeching tone. "Don't go away. Stay
+here with me, please. I am all alone, and have not any body to amuse
+me."
+
+"But you will go to sleep pretty soon," said Rollo.
+
+"No," replied Jennie; "I am not sleepy the least in the world. See."
+
+Here Jennie opened her eyes very wide, and looked Rollo full in the
+face, by way of demonstrating that she was not sleepy.
+
+Rollo felt very much perplexed. When he pictured to himself, in
+imagination, the idea of being whirled rapidly through the Boulevards,
+on such a pleasant summer evening, in a carriage which he should have
+all to himself, with the top down so that he could see every thing all
+around him, and of the brilliant windows of the shops, the multitudes of
+ladies and gentlemen taking their coffee at the little round tables on
+the sidewalk in front of the coffee saloons, the crowds of people coming
+and going, and the horsemen and carriages thronging the streets, the
+view was so enchanting that it was very hard for him to give up the
+promised pleasure. He, however, determined to do it; so he said,--
+
+"Well, Jennie, I'll stay. I will go out and tell mother that I am not
+going to ride, and then I will come back."
+
+For the first half hour after Mrs. Holiday went away, Rollo was occupied
+with Jennie in looking over some very pretty French picture books which
+Mrs. Holiday had bought for her that day, to amuse her because she was
+sick. Jennie had looked them all over before; but now that Rollo had
+come, it gave her pleasure to look them over again, and talk about them
+with him. Jennie sat up in the bed, leaning back against the pillows and
+bolsters, and Rollo sat in a large and very comfortable arm chair, which
+he had brought up for this purpose to the bedside. The books lay on a
+monstrous square pillow of down, half as large as the bed itself, which,
+according to the French fashion, is always placed on the top of the bed.
+Rollo and Jennie would take the books, one at a time, and look them
+over, talking about the pictures, and showing the prettiest ones to each
+other. Thus the time passed very pleasantly. At length, however, Jennie,
+having looked over all the books, drew herself down into the bed, and
+began to ask Rollo where he had been that day.
+
+"I have been with uncle George," said Rollo. "He said that he was going
+about to see a great many different places, and that I might go with him
+if I chose, though he supposed that most of them were places that I
+should not care to see. But I did. I liked to see them all."
+
+"What places did you go to?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Why, first we went to see the workshops. I did not know before that
+there were so many. Uncle George says that Paris is one of the greatest
+manufacturing places in the world; only they make things by hand, in
+private shops, and not in great manufactories, by machinery. Uncle
+George says there must be as much as eight or ten square miles of these
+shops in Paris. They are piled up to six or eight stories high. Some of
+the streets look like ranges of chalky cliffs facing each other, such as
+we see at some places on the sea shore."
+
+"What do they make in the shops?" asked Jennie.
+
+"O, all sorts of curious and beautiful things. They have specimens of
+the things that they make up, put up, like pictures in a frame, in
+little glass cases, on the wall next the street. We walked along through
+several streets and looked at these specimens. There were purses, and
+fringes, and watches, and gold and silver chains, and beautiful
+portemonnaies, and clocks, and jewelry of all kinds, and ribbons, and
+opera glasses, and dressing cases, and every thing you can think of."
+
+"Yes," said Jennie, "I have seen all such things in the shop windows in
+the Palais Royal and in the Boulevards."
+
+"Ah, those are the shops where they sell the things," said Rollo; "but
+these shops that uncle George and I went to see are where they make
+them. We went to one place where they were making artificial flowers,
+and such beautiful things you never saw. The rooms were full of girls,
+all making artificial flowers."
+
+"Why did not you bring me home some of them?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Why--I don't know," replied Rollo. "I did not think to ask if I could
+buy any of them.
+
+"Then, after we had gone about in the workshops till we had seen enough,
+we went to the Louvre to see the paintings; though on the way we stopped
+to see a _creche_."
+
+Rollo pronounced the word very much as if it had been spelled crash.
+
+"A crash!" exclaimed Jennie. "Did a building tumble down?"
+
+"O, no," said Rollo, "it was not that. It was a place where they keep a
+great many babies. The poor women who have to go out to work all day
+carry their babies to this place in the morning, and leave them there to
+be taken care of, and then come and get them at night. There are some
+nuns there, dressed all in white, to take care of the babies. They put
+them in high cradles that stand all around the room."
+
+"Were they all crying?" asked Jennie.
+
+"O, no," said Rollo, "they were all still. When we went in they were all
+just waking up. The nuns put them to sleep all at the same time. Every
+cradle had a baby in it. Some were stretching their arms, and some were
+opening their eyes, and some were trying to get up. As fast as they got
+wide awake, the nuns would take them up and put them on the floor, at a
+place where there was a carpet for them to creep upon and play."
+
+"I wish I could go and see them," said Jennie.
+
+"You can," replied Rollo. "Any body can go and see them. The nuns like
+to have people come. They keep every thing very white and nice. The
+cradles were very pretty."
+
+"Did they rock?" asked Jennie.
+
+"No," replied Rollo; "they were made to swing, and not to rock. They
+were up so high from the floor that they could not be made to rock very
+well. We stayed some time in this place, and then we went away."
+
+"And where did you go next?" asked Jennie.
+
+"We went to the Louvre to see the famous gallery of paintings. It is a
+quarter of a mile long, and the walls are covered with paintings on both
+sides, the whole distance."
+
+"Except where the windows are, I suppose," said Jennie.
+
+"No," replied Rollo, "there are no interruptions for windows. The
+windows are up high in the ceiling, for the room is very lofty. There is
+room for two or three rows of paintings below the windows. It is a
+splendid long room."
+
+"Were the pictures very pretty?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Not very," said Rollo. "At least, I did not think so; but uncle George
+told me it was a very famous gallery. There were a great many other
+rooms besides, all carved and gilded most magnificently, and an immense
+staircase of marble, wide enough for an army to go up and down. There
+were several large rooms, too, full of ancient marble statues; but I did
+not like them very much. They looked very dark and dingy. The paintings
+were prettier than they.
+
+"There were a great many persons in the painting gallery at work copying
+the paintings," continued Rollo. "Some were girls, and some were young
+men. There was one boy there not much bigger than I."
+
+"I don't see how so small a boy could learn to paint so well," said
+Jennie.
+
+"Why, he was not so very small," said Rollo. "He was bigger than I am,
+and I am growing to be pretty large. Besides, they have excellent
+schools here where they learn to draw and to paint. We went to see one
+of them."
+
+"Did it look like one of our schools?" asked Jennie.
+
+"O, no," replied Rollo; "it seemed to me more like a splendid palace
+than a school. We went through an iron gate into a court, and across the
+court to a great door, where a man came to show us the rooms. There were
+a great many elegant staircases, and passage ways, and halls, with
+pictures, and statues, and models of cities, and temples, and ruins, and
+every thing else necessary for the students."
+
+"Were the students there?" asked Jennie.
+
+"No," replied Rollo; "but we saw the room where they worked, and we saw
+the last lesson that they had."
+
+"What was it?" asked Jennie.
+
+"It was a subject which the professor gave them for a picture; and all
+of them were to paint a picture on that subject, each one according to
+his own ideas. We saw the paintings that they had made. There were
+twenty or thirty of them. The subject was written on a sheet of paper,
+and put up in the room where they could all see it."
+
+"What was the subject?" asked Jennie.
+
+"It was something like this," replied Rollo: "An old chestnut tree in a
+secluded situation, the roots partly denuded by an inundation from a
+stream. Cattle in the foreground, on the right. Time, sunset."
+
+"And did all the pictures have an old chestnut tree in them?" asked
+Jennie.
+
+"Yes," said Rollo; "and the roots were all out of the ground on one
+side, and there were cows in the foreground of them all. But the forms
+of the trees, and the position of the cattle, and the landscape in the
+back ground were different in every one."
+
+"I should like to see them," said Jennie.
+
+"Then," said Rollo, "when we came away from this place we walked along
+on the quay by the side of the river, looking over the parapet down to
+the bank below."
+
+"Was it a pretty place?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "a very pretty place indeed. There were great
+floating houses in the water, for the baths, with wheels turning in the
+current to pump up water, and little flower gardens along the brink of
+the stream. At least, in some places there were flower gardens; and in
+others there was a wall along the water, with boys sitting on the edge
+of it, fishing. Presently we came to a place where there was an opening
+in the parapet and stairs to go down to the water. You go down two or
+three steps first, and then the stairs turn each way. At the turning
+there was a man who had fishing poles, and nets, and fishing lines to
+sell or let. He had some to let for three sous an hour. I proposed to
+uncle George that we should hire two of them and go down and fish a
+little while."
+
+"And what did he say?" asked Jennie.
+
+"He laughed, and said that for him to spend his time while he was in
+Paris in fishing in the Seine would be perfectly preposterous. He said
+that his time in Europe cost him not less than a dollar for every hour."
+
+"A dollar for every hour?" exclaimed Jennie.
+
+"Yes," replied Rollo. "He says that his two passages across the Atlantic
+will have cost three hundred dollars, and the other expenses of his tour
+as much as five hundred more, which makes eight hundred dollars, and
+that he will not have more than one hundred days, probably, from the
+time of his landing in England to the time of his sailing again. That
+makes it about eight dollars a day. Now, there are not more than eight
+hours in a day suitable for going about and seeing what is to be seen;
+so that his time in the middle of the day costs him a dollar an hour;
+and he could not afford, he said, to spend it in fishing.
+
+"However," continued Rollo, "he said that I might look at the man's
+fishing apparatus; and if I found that it was different from that which
+the boys used in America, I might buy some of it to carry home."
+
+"And did you?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Yes," replied Rollo. And so saying, he put his hand in his pocket and
+took out a small parcel put up in a piece of French newspaper. He
+unrolled this parcel and showed Jennie what it contained. Jennie sat up
+in bed very eagerly in order to see it. First there came out a small
+net.
+
+"This net, you see," said Rollo, "is to be put upon a hoop or a ring of
+wire when I get to America. I did not buy a hoop, because it would fill
+up my trunk too much. But I can make one when I get home.
+
+"Then here are the fishing lines," continued Rollo. "I bought two of
+them. They were very cheap."
+
+The fishing lines were very pretty. Each had a small round cork upon the
+end of a quill. The corks were red, touched with blue. There was a
+sinker for each, made of large shot.
+
+"The man put in several spare sinkers for me," resumed Rollo, "in case
+these should come off." So saying, he opened a small paper and showed
+Jennie several large-sized shot, each of which had a cleft in the side
+of it for putting in the line. The intention was that the lead should be
+closed over the line, after the line had been inserted in it, by means
+of a light blow with a hammer, and thus the sinker would be secured to
+its place.
+
+"I like a net best to catch fishes with," said Jennie, "because that
+does not hurt them."
+
+"True," said Rollo, "a net is a great deal better on that account. You
+see I put a hoop around to keep the mouth of the net open, and then
+fasten it to the end of a long handle. Then you stand on the bank of the
+brook and put the net down into the water, and when a fish comes along
+you dip him up."
+
+"Yes," said Jennie, "that is an excellent way."
+
+"Then you could put him in a small pail of water," said Rollo, "and
+carry him home, and then you could put him in a bowl and see him swim
+about."
+
+"Yes," said Jennie, "I wish you would give me this net."
+
+"Well," said Rollo, "I will. I shall go down by the river again some
+day, and then I can buy another for myself."
+
+"So you can," said Jennie: "or, if you don't get another, I can lend you
+mine when you wish to fish with it."
+
+So Rollo put up his fishing tackle again, and then Jennie asked him
+where else he went.
+
+"Why, we walked along the quay," said Rollo, "a long way, past several
+bridges, until at last we came to a bridge leading over to an island in
+the river, where there was a great cathedral church, which uncle George
+said he wished to see. It was the Church of Notre Dame. It was an
+immense great church, with two towers very high; but it was very old.
+The outside of it seemed to be all crumbling to pieces."
+
+"Did you go in?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Yes," replied Rollo. "It is open all the time, and people are all the
+time going and coming. We went in. There was an old woman sitting just
+inside the door, with a string of beads in her hands, counting them.
+There were two or three other old women there, knitting. I could not see
+much of the inside of the church when we first went in, there were so
+many columns; but I could hear the birds flying about and singing away
+up high among the vaults and arches."
+
+"The birds inside the church!" said Jennie. "I should think they would
+drive them out."
+
+"I don't know how they could drive them out," said Rollo, "it was so
+high up to where they were flying. The arch of the ceiling seemed like a
+stone sky. There were so many pillars to keep up this roof, that, when
+we first went in, we could not see any end to the church at all.
+However, we walked along, and after a while we came to the end.
+
+"There were a great many curious things to see in the church," continued
+Rollo. "There were a great many little chapels along the sides of it,
+and curious images sculptured in stone, and people doing curious things
+all about in different places. We walked about there for half an hour.
+At last we found a congregation."
+
+"A congregation!"
+
+"Yes," said Rollo, "we came to a place, at last, which was divided off
+by a kind of railing; and there was a congregation there, sitting in
+chairs. Some were kneeling in chairs, and some were kneeling on the
+stone floor. They were reading in little prayer books and looking
+about."
+
+"Was any body preaching to them?" asked Jennie.
+
+"No," said Rollo, "but there were some priests at the altar doing
+something there; but I could not understand what they were doing. We
+stopped there a little while, and then we came away. We walked along to
+another part of the church, and at length we came to another enclosure,
+where a great many people were collected. Mr. George went up to see what
+it was, and he said he believed it was a baptism; but I could not get
+near enough to see."
+
+"And what did you do next?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Why, we came out of the church, and crossed over by a bridge to this
+side of the river, and then walked down along the quay till we came to a
+place where there was a tall bronze column, somewhat like this column in
+the Place Vendome. Uncle George said that he wished to see it, because
+it stood on the place where a famous old castle and prison used to stand
+in former times, called the Bastile. He said that the people made an
+insurrection and battered the old prison down, because the government
+was so cruel in shutting up innocent prisoners in it. They built fires
+against the doors, and battered against them with heavy timbers until
+they broke them in, and then they let the prisoners out and set the
+prison on fire. Uncle George said that I should take great interest in
+reading about it one of these days; but I think I should like to read
+about it now."
+
+"I should, too," said Jennie.
+
+"They afterward took away all the stones of the Bastile," continued
+Rollo, "and made this tall bronze column in its place. There is a figure
+of a man on it, standing on tiptoe."
+
+"I should think he would blow down in a high wind," said Jennie.
+
+"I don't know why he does not, I am sure," rejoined Rollo. "I wanted to
+go up to the top of the column and see how he was fastened there; but
+uncle George said he was too tired. So we came away. In fact, I was very
+willing to come away, for I saw a great crowd at a certain broad place
+on the sidewalk, not far from there, and I wished to go and see what it
+was."
+
+"And did you go?" asked Jennie.
+
+"Yes," replied Rollo, "and I found it was a man who had made a great
+ring of people all about him, and was trying to get them to give fifteen
+sous to see him shut himself up in a small box. The box was on the
+pavement, all ready. It was quite small. It did not seem possible that a
+man could be shut up in it."
+
+"How big was it?" asked Jennie.
+
+"O, I don't know, exactly," said Rollo. "It was quite small."
+
+"Was it no bigger than that," said Jennie, holding her two hands a few
+inches apart, so as to indicate what she would consider quite a small
+box.
+
+"O, yes," said Rollo, "it was a great deal bigger than that. It was only
+a little smaller than you would think a man could get into. The box was
+square, and was made of tin, but painted black.
+
+[Illustration: PERFORMANCE ON THE BOULEVARDS.]
+
+"There was an organ at one end of the ring, with a man playing upon it,
+to draw the crowd together. In front of the organ was a woman, with a
+baby in her arms, and another little child playing about her. The man
+said that this was his family, and that he had to support them by his
+experiments. In front of the woman was the box. In front of the box was
+the man, who stood there, generally, telling what he was going to do,
+and calling upon the people to throw in their sous. In front of the man
+was a carpet, on the pavement, and in the middle of the carpet a tin
+plate. From time to time the people would throw sous over into the
+circle. The man would then pick them up and put them into the plate, and
+tell the people how many there lacked. There must be fifteen, he said,
+or he could not perform the experiment. He kept talking all the time to
+the people, and saying funny things to make them laugh.
+
+"At last all the fifteen sous were in, and then the man went to the box.
+He brought out a soldier who was standing among the people, and placed
+him near the box, so that he might shut the cover down when the man was
+in. The man then stepped into the box. The upper edge of it was not
+higher than his knees. He then began to kneel down in the box, crossing
+his legs under him; and then he crouched his body down into it, and
+curled in his head, and then----
+
+"Jennie!" said Rollo, interrupting himself. He observed that Jennie was
+very still, and he was not sure that she was listening.
+
+Jennie did not answer. She was fast asleep.
+
+"She's gone to sleep," said Rollo, "without hearing the end of the
+story. However, the soldier put the lid down, and shut the man entirely
+in."
+
+Rollo thought that, as he was so near the end, he might as well finish
+the story, even if his auditor was asleep.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+CONCLUSION.
+
+
+Rollo's adventures in Paris were brought, at length, for the time being,
+to a somewhat abrupt termination, by an invitation which he received
+suddenly at breakfast one morning, from his uncle George, to set off
+with him the next day for Switzerland. Rollo was very eager to accept
+this invitation from the moment that it was offered him. It is true that
+he was not at all tired of Paris; and there were a great many places,
+both in the city and in the environs, that he was still desirous to see.
+
+Rollo had only one day's notice of the proposed journey to Switzerland,
+and that day was spent almost entirely in getting the passports ready.
+This business devolved on Rollo himself, as his uncle was engaged in
+some other way that day; and he proposed, therefore, that Rollo should
+undertake the work of getting the passports stamped. Rollo accordingly
+did so. He took a carriage and went round to the various offices, and
+attended to the business very well, though he encountered some
+difficulties in doing it. His uncle George was very much pleased when he
+came home that night and found that Rollo had got the passports all
+ready. Carlos went with Rollo to the passport offices, for company,
+though he could not, of course, render him any assistance.[F]
+
+[F] A full account of Rollo's adventures in getting the passports
+stamped will be given in the first chapter of Rollo in Switzerland.
+
+Rollo dined that evening with his uncle George and Carlos at a
+restaurant. There are hundreds of these restaurants scattered all over
+the city of Paris, and many of them are furnished and decorated in a
+style of splendor that is magnificent beyond description. Mr. George
+took Rollo and Carlos to one of the finest of them. It was in the
+Boulevards.
+
+The aspect of the room, when Rollo entered it, was very imposing. It was
+lined on all sides with mirrors, with carved and gilded pilasters
+between them, and a richly ornamented cornice above. The ceiling,
+overhead, was panelled, and was painted in fresco with the most graceful
+and elegant devices. The floor was laid in a beautiful mosaic of wood,
+brilliantly polished. The room was filled with tables, all set out for
+dinner in the nicest manner, with silver plate, elegant porcelain, and
+glasses that reflected the light in the most resplendent manner. A great
+many gay groups of ladies and gentlemen were seated at these tables,
+taking dinner; while the waiters, with snow-white napkins on their arms,
+were walking about in a rapid, but in a very gentle and noiseless
+manner, to wait upon them. At the back side of the room there sat two
+beautiful young women, behind a sort of counter, which was raised a
+little above the rest of the floor, so that they could survey the whole
+scene. It was the duty of these young women to keep the accounts of what
+was ordered at the several tables, and to receive the money which was
+paid by the guests, the waiters carrying it to them from the different
+parties at the tables when they paid. These ladies were the presiding
+officers, as it were, in the saloon; and the guests all bowed to them
+very respectfully, both when they came in and when they went away.
+
+Mr. George selected a table for himself and the two boys, and they had
+an excellent dinner there. There was a printed book, large though thin,
+on every table, giving a list of the different articles--more than five
+hundred in all. From these Mr. George and the boys selected what they
+liked, and the waiters brought it to them.
+
+The party remained at this restaurant, eating their dinner and taking
+their coffee after it, for more than an hour; and then they went away.
+
+That evening Rollo went into his father's room to bid his father good
+by, for he expected to set off for Switzerland the next morning very
+early. He found his father sitting in an arm chair by a window, reading
+a book. Mr. Holiday laid his book down and talked for some time with
+Rollo about his proposed tour in Switzerland, and gave him a great deal
+of preparatory information about the mountains, the glaciers, the
+torrents, the avalanches, and other wonderful things that Rollo expected
+to see. Rollo was very much interested in these accounts.
+
+"I am very glad that uncle George invited me to go with him," said he.
+
+"So am I," said his father.
+
+"Because," added Rollo, "I expect to have a very pleasant time."
+
+"True," replied his father; "but that is not the reason precisely why
+_I_ am glad that he invited you."
+
+"What is your reason, then?" asked Rollo.
+
+"I am glad," replied Mr. Holiday, "because his asking you to go with him
+into Switzerland is a sign that you have been a good boy while under
+his care here in France. Boys that are selfish, troublesome, and
+disobedient, in one ride or journey, find usually that their company is
+not desired a second time. It is now two or three weeks since your uncle
+George invited you to come with him from London to Paris, and during all
+this time you have been mainly under his care; and now he invites you to
+go with him on a still more extended tour. I think you must have
+conducted yourself in a very considerate or gentlemanly manner, and
+proved yourself a pleasant travelling companion, or you would not have
+received this new invitation."
+
+Rollo was very much gratified at hearing his father speak in this
+manner. So he shook hands with him, and bade him good by.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Rollo in Paris, by Jacob Abbott
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ROLLO IN PARIS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 22956.txt or 22956.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/2/9/5/22956/
+
+Produced by D. Alexander, Janet Blenkinship and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/22956.zip b/22956.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dc64b1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22956.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..80ea613
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #22956 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/22956)